<div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#title-box">About each screen</div><div class="search_word">about each screen</div><div class="display_word">About each screen</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#dashboard">1. Dashboard</div><div class="search_word">1. dashboard it shows the various system information of this device in visual form. you can check and monitor the following status. interface information system information resource information ( cpu utilization / memoryutilization ) syslog traffic information ( transmit / reception ) resource information ( graph )</div><div class="display_word">1. Dashboard It shows the various system information of this device in visual form. You can check and monitor the following status. Interface information System information Resource information ( CPU Utilization / MemoryUtilization ) SYSLOG Traffic information ( Transmit / Reception ) Resource information ( Graph )</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#proav">2. ProAV settings</div><div class="search_word">2. proav settings in this page you can make proav settings for this unit. the following items are provided. proav profile multicast</div><div class="display_word">2. ProAV settings In this page you can make ProAV settings for this unit. The following items are provided. ProAV profile Multicast</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#detail">3. Detailed settings</div><div class="search_word">3. detailed settings in this page you can make detailed network-related settings for this unit. the following items are provided. basic settings interface settings physical interface port mirroring link aggregation poe control vlan create vlan tag vlan multiple vlan layer 2 functions mac address table loop detected pass through layer 3 functions dns client multicast multicast basic settings igmp snooping mld snooping traffic control access list create access list apply access list qos flow control storm control</div><div class="display_word">3. Detailed settings In this page you can make detailed network-related settings for this unit. The following items are provided. Basic settings Interface settings Physical interface Port mirroring Link aggregation PoE control VLAN Create VLAN Tag VLAN Multiple VLAN Layer 2 functions MAC address table Loop detected Pass through Layer 3 functions DNS client Multicast Multicast basic settings IGMP snooping MLD snooping Traffic control Access list Create Access list Apply Access list QoS Flow control Storm control</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#management">4. Management</div><div class="search_word">4. management in this page you can make settings for this unit, and perform maintenance. the following items are provided. unit settings access management user settings various server settings schedule execution snmp mib community snmpv3 user snmp trap lldp l2ms maintenance command execution update firmware config management syslog management restart and initialization cable diagnostics</div><div class="display_word">4. Management In this page you can make settings for this unit, and perform maintenance. The following items are provided. Unit settings Access management User settings Various server settings Schedule execution SNMP MIB Community SNMPv3 User SNMP trap LLDP L2MS Maintenance Command execution Update firmware CONFIG management SYSLOG management Restart and initialization Cable diagnostics</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#config">5. CONFIG</div><div class="search_word">5. config the results of running the "show running-config" command (a setting of this unit) can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. viewing config in the "config" menu, press the "show in browser" button. the execution result of the "show running-config" command is shown in a sub-window. to close, press the web browser’s close button. obtaining config as a text file in the "config" menu, press the "obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. the name of the acquired file is "running-config_yyyymmddhhmmss.txt". yyyy …​ a.d. ( 4 digit ) mm …​ month ( 2 digit ) dd …​ day ( 2 digit ) hh …​ hours ( 2 digit ) mm …​ minutes ( 2 digit ) ss …​ seconds ( 2 digit )</div><div class="display_word">5. CONFIG The results of running the "show running-config" command (a setting of this unit) can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. Viewing CONFIG In the "CONFIG" menu, press the "Show in browser" button. The execution result of the "show running-config" command is shown in a sub-window. To close, press the web browser’s close button. Obtaining CONFIG as a text file In the "CONFIG" menu, press the "Obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. The name of the acquired file is "running-config_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt". YYYY …​ A.D. ( 4 Digit ) MM …​ Month ( 2 Digit ) DD …​ Day ( 2 Digit ) hh …​ Hours ( 2 Digit ) mm …​ Minutes ( 2 Digit ) ss …​ Seconds ( 2 Digit )</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#syslog">6. SYSLOG</div><div class="search_word">6. syslog this feature outputs the log of this unit’s operation status in the order of the oldest occurrence time. in the "syslog" menu, the result of running the show logging command can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. viewing syslog in the "syslog" menu, press the "show in browser" button. the execution result of the "show logging" command is shown in a sub-window. to close, press the web browser’s close button. obtaining syslog as a text file in the "syslog" menu, press the "obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. the name of the acquired file is "running-config_yyyymmddhhmmss.txt". yyyy …​ a.d. ( 4 digit ) mm …​ month ( 2 digit ) dd …​ day ( 2 digit ) hh …​ hours ( 2 digit ) mm …​ minutes ( 2 digit ) ss …​ seconds ( 2 digit )</div><div class="display_word">6. SYSLOG This feature outputs the log of this unit’s operation status in the order of the oldest occurrence time. In the "SYSLOG" menu, the result of running the show logging command can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. Viewing SYSLOG In the "SYSLOG" menu, press the "Show in browser" button. The execution result of the "show logging" command is shown in a sub-window. To close, press the web browser’s close button. Obtaining SYSLOG as a text file In the "SYSLOG" menu, press the "Obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. The name of the acquired file is "running-config_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt". YYYY …​ A.D. ( 4 Digit ) MM …​ Month ( 2 Digit ) DD …​ Day ( 2 Digit ) hh …​ Hours ( 2 Digit ) mm …​ Minutes ( 2 Digit ) ss …​ Seconds ( 2 Digit )</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_about_page"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_about_page" doctitle="About" link="#techinfo">7. TECHINFO</div><div class="search_word">7. techinfo the "show tech-support" command lets you view status information for all of this unit’s functions. in the "techinfo" menu, the results of running the "show tech-support" command can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. viewing technifo in the "techinfo" menu, press the "show in browser" button. the execution result of the "show tech-support" command is shown. to close, press the web browser’s close button. obtaining technifo as a text file in the "techinfo" menu, press the "obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. the name of the acquired file is "technifo_yyyymmddhhmmss.txt". yyyy …​ a.d. ( 4 digit ) mm …​ month ( 2 digit ) dd …​ day ( 2 digit ) hh …​ hours ( 2 digit ) mm …​ minutes ( 2 digit ) ss …​ seconds ( 2 digit ) notes it may take some time to obtain technifo. this unit may undergo loading while the information is being acquired.</div><div class="display_word">7. TECHINFO The "show tech-support" command lets you view status information for all of this unit’s functions. In the "TECHINFO" menu, the results of running the "show tech-support" command can be viewed in a web browser or acquired as a text file. Viewing TECHNIFO In the "TECHINFO" menu, press the "Show in browser" button. The execution result of the "show tech-support" command is shown. To close, press the web browser’s close button. Obtaining TECHNIFO as a text file In the "TECHINFO" menu, press the "Obtain as text file" button to start the download automatically. The name of the acquired file is "technifo_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt". YYYY …​ A.D. ( 4 Digit ) MM …​ Month ( 2 Digit ) DD …​ Day ( 2 Digit ) hh …​ Hours ( 2 Digit ) mm …​ Minutes ( 2 Digit ) ss …​ Seconds ( 2 Digit ) Notes It may take some time to obtain TECHNIFO. This unit may undergo loading while the information is being acquired.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#title-box">Introduction</div><div class="search_word">introduction</div><div class="display_word">Introduction</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#about_gui">1. What you can do using the Web GUI</div><div class="search_word">1. what you can do using the web gui the web gui lets you perform basic settings and management of the yamaha switch (this unit). the web gui contains the following screens for you to make settings and perform management. dashboard proav settings detailed settings management config syslog techinfo</div><div class="display_word">1. What you can do using the Web GUI The web GUI lets you perform basic settings and management of the Yamaha switch (this unit). The web GUI contains the following screens for you to make settings and perform management. Dashboard ProAV settings Detailed settings Management CONFIG SYSLOG TECHINFO</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#environment">2. Operating environment</div><div class="search_word">2. operating environment here we explain the environment that is required in order to use the web gui.</div><div class="display_word">2. Operating environment Here we explain the environment that is required in order to use the web GUI.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#recommended_web_browser">2.1. Recommended web browser</div><div class="search_word">2.1. recommended web browser we recommend the following web browser for use with the web gui. windows microsoft edge google chrome mozilla firefox mac apple safari ipados apple safari the latest version of each browser is recommended. <note> do not use the "back" or "forward" buttons of the web browser. in some cases, the display layout of a page may become disordered. if this occurs, please access that page once again. <memo> the web gui uses utf-8 character encoding.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Recommended web browser We recommend the following web browser for use with the web GUI. Windows Microsoft Edge Google Chrome Mozilla Firefox Mac Apple Safari iPadOS Apple Safari The latest version of each browser is recommended. <NOTE> Do not use the "Back" or "Forward" buttons of the web browser. In some cases, the display layout of a page may become disordered. If this occurs, please access that page once again. <Memo> The web GUI uses UTF-8 character encoding.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#javascript_settings">2.2. JavaScript settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. javascript settings the web gui uses javascript. if your web browser is set to disable javascript, you might not be able to use the web gui itself. if javascript is disabled, please enable javascript in your web browser before use.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. JavaScript settings The web GUI uses JavaScript. If your web browser is set to disable JavaScript, you might not be able to use the web GUI itself. If JavaScript is disabled, please enable JavaScript in your web browser before use.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#cookie_settings">2.3. Cookie settings</div><div class="search_word">2.3. cookie settings the web gui uses cookies. if your web browser is set to disable cookies, you might not be able to use the web gui itself. please allow cookies in your web browser before use.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Cookie settings The web GUI uses cookies. If your web browser is set to disable cookies, you might not be able to use the web GUI itself. Please allow cookies in your web browser before use.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#access_auth">3. User access rights</div><div class="search_word">3. user access rights users who log in to the web gui are divided into two types: general users and administrative users. these are referred to as "access levels." the differences between the access levels are described below. for general users can view the settings of the unit and obtain syslog. cannot change the settings. for administrative users can view and change the settings of the unit. can obtain config and techinfo in addition to obtaining syslog.</div><div class="display_word">3. User access rights Users who log in to the web GUI are divided into two types: general users and administrative users. These are referred to as "access levels." The differences between the access levels are described below. For general users Can view the settings of the unit and obtain SYSLOG. Cannot change the settings. For administrative users Can view and change the settings of the unit. Can obtain CONFIG and TECHINFO in addition to obtaining SYSLOG.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#note">4. Note when using together with command input</div><div class="search_word">4. note when using together with command input settings for this unit can be made not only via the web gui but also from the command console screen by directly entering commands. command input allows a broader range of settings than when using the web gui, and also lets you make settings for functions that are not supported in the web gui. if you use both command input and the web gui to make settings, be aware that the commands that you input may be overwritten, or the settings may be cleared. <memo> the command console screen contains the following items. management → "maintenance" → "command execution" for details on commands, refer to "command reference."</div><div class="display_word">4. Note when using together with command input Settings for this unit can be made not only via the web GUI but also from the command console screen by directly entering commands. Command input allows a broader range of settings than when using the web GUI, and also lets you make settings for functions that are not supported in the web GUI. If you use both command input and the web GUI to make settings, be aware that the commands that you input may be overwritten, or the settings may be cleared. <Memo> The command console screen contains the following items. Management → "Maintenance" → "Command execution" For details on commands, refer to "Command reference."</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_introduction"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_introduction" doctitle="Introduction" link="#language">5. Language</div><div class="search_word">5. language the web gui allows you to switch the display language.to switch the display language, press the "language switch" button on the top menu, and select a language you want. the supported languages are as follows. japanese english</div><div class="display_word">5. Language The Web GUI allows you to switch the display language.To switch the display language, press the "Language Switch" button on the top menu, and select a language you want. The supported languages are as follows. Japanese English</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_login_logout"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_login_logout" doctitle="Login/Logout" link="#title-box">Login/Logout</div><div class="search_word">login/logout</div><div class="display_word">Login/Logout</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_login_logout"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_login_logout" doctitle="Login/Logout" link="#login_page">1. Login page</div><div class="search_word">1. login page start your web browser, and access “http://(the ip address you assigned to this unit)/” to display the login page. the following items are shown on the login page. model name ( ex. : swx2210p-10g ) hostname ( name configured using the hostname command ) input box for user name input box for password login button if login fails, the following error messages are displayed. incorrect user name or password login failed. the user name or password is incorrect. maximum number of sessions have been reached login failed. the maximum number of sessions has been reached. note: refer to “ about sessions ” for details on sessions.</div><div class="display_word">1. Login page Start your web browser, and access “http://(the IP address you assigned to this unit)/” to display the login page. The following items are shown on the login page. Model name ( Ex. : SWX2210P-10G ) hostname ( Name configured using the hostname command ) Input box for user name Input box for password Login button If login fails, the following error messages are displayed. Incorrect user name or password Login failed. The user name or password is incorrect. Maximum number of sessions have been reached Login failed. The maximum number of sessions has been reached. Note: Refer to “ About sessions ” for details on sessions.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_login_logout"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_login_logout" doctitle="Login/Logout" link="#login">2. Login method</div><div class="search_word">2. login method here we explain how to log in to the web gui of this unit. start your web browser, and access the login page. enter the user name and password set by the username command, then press the "login" button. <about users> to access this unit in the factory-set state, log in with the user name "admin" and the password "admin". when logging in as a user without administrative privileges, you will be logged in as a general user. when logging in as a user with administrative privileges, you will be logged in as an administrative user. <about general users and administrative users> general user if you log in as a general user, you will be able to view this unit’s settings and operating status. you will not be able to make settings for this unit. administrative user if you log in as an administrative user, you will be able to perform all web gui operations. you can view the unit’s settings and operating status, and configure the settings for this unit. <about passwords> you must enter the password as single-byte characters. double-byte characters may not be used. uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished. take care not to forget the password that you assigned. if you have forgotten the password, ask the administrator who set up this unit for the correct password. <note> you will not be able to properly login if the browser is configured to block cookies. in this case, configure the cookie settings introduction   2. operating environment .</div><div class="display_word">2. Login method Here we explain how to log in to the web GUI of this unit. Start your web browser, and access the login page. Enter the user name and password set by the username command, then press the "Login" button. <About users> To access this unit in the factory-set state, log in with the user name "admin" and the password "admin". When logging in as a user without administrative privileges, you will be logged in as a general user. When logging in as a user with administrative privileges, you will be logged in as an administrative user. <About general users and administrative users> General User If you log in as a general user, you will be able to view this unit’s settings and operating status. You will not be able to make settings for this unit. Administrative User If you log in as an administrative user, you will be able to perform all web GUI operations. You can view the unit’s settings and operating status, and configure the settings for this unit. <About passwords> You must enter the password as single-byte characters. Double-byte characters may not be used. Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished. Take care not to forget the password that you assigned. If you have forgotten the password, ask the administrator who set up this unit for the correct password. <NOTE> You will not be able to properly login if the browser is configured to block cookies. In this case, configure the cookie settings Introduction   2. Operating environment .</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_login_logout"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_login_logout" doctitle="Login/Logout" link="#logout">3. Logout method</div><div class="search_word">3. logout method in the upper right of the screen, press the "log out" button to display the “log out” dialog box. press the “login screen” button in the dialog box to go to the login page.</div><div class="display_word">3. Logout method In the upper right of the screen, press the "Log out" button to display the “Log out” dialog box. Press the “Login screen” button in the dialog box to go to the login page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_common_login_logout"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_common_login_logout" doctitle="Login/Logout" link="#session">4. About sessions</div><div class="search_word">4. about sessions if you can successfully login to the web gui, a session will be established between the browser in use and this unit. each time you login from a different browser or device, a new session is established. the session will be maintained until you log out or the session times out. sessions that have been established will time out after a certain period of time have elapsed from the last data communication. session timeout interval can be set either in the web gui’s "management" → "access management" → "various server settings" → "web gui access" page, or by using the http-server login-timeout command. up to four sessions can be established at one time. information for a session can be checked using the “show users” command.</div><div class="display_word">4. About sessions If you can successfully login to the Web GUI, a session will be established between the browser in use and this unit. Each time you login from a different browser or device, a new session is established. The session will be maintained until you log out or the session times out. Sessions that have been established will time out after a certain period of time have elapsed from the last data communication. Session timeout interval can be set either in the Web GUI’s "Management" → "Access management" → "Various server settings" → "Web GUI access" page, or by using the http-server login-timeout command. Up to four sessions can be established at one time. Information for a session can be checked using the “show users” command.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard" doctitle="About" link="#about_the_dashboard">About the dashboard</div><div class="search_word">about the dashboard</div><div class="display_word">About the dashboard</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard" doctitle="About" link="#help_how_to_use_db">1. Using the dashboard</div><div class="search_word">1. using the dashboard what is the dashboard? the page that provides visualization and monitoring of various system information and status information is called the "dashboard." when a parameter being monitored exceeds the threshold value, it is shown in a warning field, helping you to determine the cause of a problem or to perform troubleshooting. what is a gadget? each window shown in the dashboard is called a "gadget." a gadget that you want to monitor can be placed anywhere you like. information for each gadget is automatically updated at regular intervals. the dashboard shows the following buttons. about the "gadget" button from the "gadget" buttons ( ) in the upper right, select the gadgets that you want to be displayed. about the "warning" button a maximum of 32 warnings are shown, from newest to oldest. each of the displayed gadgets monitors the situation, and when an abnormal situation or a high load is detected, the "warning" button ( ) flashes and a list of warnings appears under the "warning" button. the list of warnings shows the contents of the currently detected warnings in order of recentness. date and time that the abnormality was detected gadget that detected the abnormality detected content the bar of the gadget that is the object of the warning is also shown with a flashing "warning" button. when the following conditions are satisfied, the warning will stop being displayed (the conditions differ depending on the detected content). recovered from an abnormal state (for example, the usage ratio or the throughput fell below the threshold) the state was cleared (for example, the settings were changed or the port linked down) the "clear" button ( ) of the warning list was pressed ( * ) (*) note that even if you press the "clear" button so that the warning is not shown in the warning list, it is not the case that the abnormal state has been resolved. if all warning indications disappear, the "warning" button stops flashing, and the warning list disappears. you can press the "warning" button to open or close the warning list. you cannot open the warning list and the warning history list at the same time. about the "history" button the warning history is shown in order of newness, for a maximum of 64 items . the warning history is shown in bold , but warnings that were cleared by the "clear" button in the warning list are shown in thin characters. if there are unconfirmed warning history items that have not been cleared, the lower right of the "history" button ( ) shows the number of those items (in other words the number of warning history items shown in bold) ( ). if this number is displayed, check the contents of the warnings that have occurred in the warning history list. when you press the "ok" button ( ) of each item in the warning history list, it changes to thin characters as a confirmed history item, and the "ok" button disappears. in the warning history list, pressing the "confirm all" button ( ) changes all history entries to a confirmed state. in the warning history list, pressing the "delete all" button ( ) deletes all history. you can press the "history" button to open or close the warning history list. you cannot open the warning list and the warning history list at the same time.</div><div class="display_word">1. Using the dashboard What is the dashboard? The page that provides visualization and monitoring of various system information and status information is called the "dashboard." When a parameter being monitored exceeds the threshold value, it is shown in a warning field, helping you to determine the cause of a problem or to perform troubleshooting. What is a gadget? Each window shown in the dashboard is called a "gadget." A gadget that you want to monitor can be placed anywhere you like. Information for each gadget is automatically updated at regular intervals. The dashboard shows the following buttons. About the "Gadget" button From the "gadget" buttons ( ) in the upper right, select the gadgets that you want to be displayed. About the "Warning" button A maximum of 32 warnings are shown, from newest to oldest. Each of the displayed gadgets monitors the situation, and when an abnormal situation or a high load is detected, the "Warning" button ( ) flashes and a list of warnings appears under the "Warning" button. The list of warnings shows the contents of the currently detected warnings in order of recentness. Date and time that the abnormality was detected Gadget that detected the abnormality Detected content The bar of the gadget that is the object of the warning is also shown with a flashing "Warning" button. When the following conditions are satisfied, the warning will stop being displayed (the conditions differ depending on the detected content). Recovered from an abnormal state (for example, the usage ratio or the throughput fell below the threshold) The state was cleared (for example, the settings were changed or the port linked down) The "Clear" button ( ) of the warning list was pressed ( * ) (*) Note that even if you press the "Clear" button so that the warning is not shown in the warning list, it is not the case that the abnormal state has been resolved. If all warning indications disappear, the "Warning" button stops flashing, and the warning list disappears. You can press the "Warning" button to open or close the warning list. You cannot open the warning list and the warning history list at the same time. About the "History" button The warning history is shown in order of newness, for a maximum of 64 items . The warning history is shown in bold , but warnings that were cleared by the "Clear" button in the warning list are shown in thin characters. If there are unconfirmed warning history items that have not been cleared, the lower right of the "History" button ( ) shows the number of those items (in other words the number of warning history items shown in bold) ( ). If this number is displayed, check the contents of the warnings that have occurred in the warning history list. When you press the "OK" button ( ) of each item in the warning history list, it changes to thin characters as a confirmed history item, and the "OK" button disappears. In the warning history list, pressing the "Confirm all" button ( ) changes all history entries to a confirmed state. In the warning history list, pressing the "Delete all" button ( ) deletes all history. You can press the "History" button to open or close the warning history list. You cannot open the warning list and the warning history list at the same time.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_dashboard" doctitle="About" link="#help_how_to_use_gdt">2. Using the gadgets</div><div class="search_word">2. using the gadgets the following gadgets can be used. system information resource information interface information syslog traffic information ( transmit / reception ) resource information ( graph ) power consumption information poe power supply each gadget has the following functions. add gadget: press the "gadget" button ( ) in the upper right, select the gadget that you want to use from the gadget list, and then press the "apply" button. gadgets are always added to the far upper left of the dashboard. delete gadget: press the "gadget" button ( ) in the upper right, clear a selection from the gadget list, and then press the "apply" button. you can also delete a gadget by pressing the "close" button ( ) in the upper right of each gadget. move gadget: when you place the mouse over each gadget, the mouse pointer changes to a move symbol, allowing you to drag the gadget to a desired position. candidates for the gadget’s movement destination are shown in gray. the interface information gadget cannot be moved. separate the gadget screen: a "separate" button ( ) is shown in the upper right of each gadget. if you press the "separate" button, that gadget alone is shown in a different window. at this time, the corresponding gadget in the dashboard is indicated as "in separate window." if a gadget is separated, the following occurs. the "separate" button is no longer shown for the separated gadget. when you update the dashboard display, all separated gadgets return to the dashboard and are shown. when you close the dashboard, all separated gadgets are also closed. separated gadgets can also be displayed by specifying a url directly in the browser. example) system information gadget: http://192.168.100.240/dashboard/system.html minimize gadget: when you press the minimize icon ( ) in the upper left of each gadget, the icon turns sideways ( ) and the gadget display is minimized. when you press it again, the icon returns to its original downward orientation ( ) and the gadget returns to its original size. save gadget position information: when you add, delete, or move a gadget, or when you minimize and restore it, the position data of the gadget is saved. this information is also saved when the power is turned off and on again. this data is initialized if you return the device to its factory-set state. if a general user logs in, the gadget position information is not saved. auto-update gadget: all gadgets are automatically updated at regular intervals. the update interval differs depending on the gadget. warning display: when an abnormal condition or a high load is detected by a gadget, a flashing "warning" button ( ) is displayed beside the minimize icon of that gadget. the following states will initiate this warning. gadget trigger system information when reboot because of startup is detected thr temperature increases. the fan stops. resource information when cpu usage exceeds 80 % when memory usage exceeds 80 % interface information an loop occurs. the poe power supply stops abnormally. an error occurs in the poe power supply control. traffic information the throughput exceeds the link speed of 60 % .</div><div class="display_word">2. Using the gadgets The following gadgets can be used. System information Resource information Interface information SYSLOG Traffic information ( Transmit / Reception ) Resource information ( Graph ) Power consumption information PoE power supply Each gadget has the following functions. Add gadget: Press the "Gadget" button ( ) in the upper right, select the gadget that you want to use from the gadget list, and then press the "Apply" button. Gadgets are always added to the far upper left of the dashboard. Delete gadget: Press the "Gadget" button ( ) in the upper right, clear a selection from the gadget list, and then press the "Apply" button. You can also delete a gadget by pressing the "Close" button ( ) in the upper right of each gadget. Move gadget: When you place the mouse over each gadget, the mouse pointer changes to a move symbol, allowing you to drag the gadget to a desired position. Candidates for the gadget’s movement destination are shown in gray. The interface information gadget cannot be moved. Separate the gadget screen: A "Separate" button ( ) is shown in the upper right of each gadget. If you press the "Separate" button, that gadget alone is shown in a different window. At this time, the corresponding gadget in the dashboard is indicated as "In separate window." If a gadget is separated, the following occurs. The "Separate" button is no longer shown for the separated gadget. When you update the dashboard display, all separated gadgets return to the dashboard and are shown. When you close the dashboard, all separated gadgets are also closed. Separated gadgets can also be displayed by specifying a URL directly in the browser. Example) System information gadget: http://192.168.100.240/dashboard/system.html Minimize gadget: When you press the minimize icon ( ) in the upper left of each gadget, the icon turns sideways ( ) and the gadget display is minimized. When you press it again, the icon returns to its original downward orientation ( ) and the gadget returns to its original size. Save gadget position information: When you add, delete, or move a gadget, or when you minimize and restore it, the position data of the gadget is saved. This information is also saved when the power is turned off and on again. This data is initialized if you return the device to its factory-set state. If a general user logs in, the gadget position information is not saved. Auto-update gadget: All gadgets are automatically updated at regular intervals. The update interval differs depending on the gadget. Warning display: When an abnormal condition or a high load is detected by a gadget, a flashing "Warning" button ( ) is displayed beside the minimize icon of that gadget. The following states will initiate this warning. Gadget Trigger System information When reboot because of startup is detected Thr temperature increases. The fan stops. Resource information When CPU usage exceeds 80 % When memory usage exceeds 80 % Interface information An loop occurs. The PoE power supply stops abnormally. An error occurs in the PoE power supply control. Traffic information The throughput exceeds the link speed of 60 % .</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#about_the_gadgets">About the gadgets</div><div class="search_word">about the gadgets</div><div class="display_word">About the gadgets</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_interface">1. Interface information</div><div class="search_word">1. interface information displays the link status of the ports and the poe power supply status. the "port" icon display lets you check the link status of the ports, the poe power supply status, and the bandwidth usage rate. when you move the mouse cursor over the "port" icon, detailed port information is shown. press the "link/act" button to display the link status. press the "power supply status" button to display the poe power supply status. press the "bandwidth usage" button to display the bandwidth usage rate. the "port" icon will display as follows, according to the link status, the poe power supply status, and the bandwidth usage rate. link status icon explanation link up (port speed 1000base-t) link up (port speed 100base-tx) link up (port speed 10base-t) link down error occurrence( loop detection ) poe supply icon explanation does not supply power supply poe is being supplied (supply class0—​3) poe is being supplied (supply class4) power supply stopped error occurrence (poe power supply stops abnormally) bandwidth usage:for a lan port icon explanation link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 95% ≤ x ≤ 100% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 85% ≤ x < 95% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 75% ≤ x < 85% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 65% ≤ x < 75% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 55% ≤ x < 65% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 45% ≤ x < 55% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 35% ≤ x < 45% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 25% ≤ x < 35% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 15% ≤ x < 25% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 7.5% ≤ x < 15% ) link up ( bandwidth usage rate x : 0% ≤ x < 7.5% ) link down</div><div class="display_word">1. Interface information Displays the link status of the ports and the PoE power supply status. The "Port" icon display lets you check the link status of the ports, the PoE power supply status, and the bandwidth usage rate. When you move the mouse cursor over the "Port" icon, detailed port information is shown. Press the "LINK/ACT" button to display the link status. Press the "Power supply status" button to display the PoE power supply status. Press the "Bandwidth usage" button to display the bandwidth usage rate. The "Port" icon will display as follows, according to the link status, the PoE power supply status, and the bandwidth usage rate. Link status Icon Explanation Link up (port speed 1000BASE-T) Link up (port speed 100BASE-TX) Link up (port speed 10BASE-T) Link down Error occurrence( Loop detection ) PoE supply Icon Explanation Does not supply power supply PoE is being supplied (supply Class0—​3) PoE is being supplied (supply Class4) Power supply stopped Error occurrence (PoE power supply stops abnormally) Bandwidth usage:For a LAN port Icon Explanation Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 95% ≤ x ≤ 100% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 85% ≤ x < 95% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 75% ≤ x < 85% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 65% ≤ x < 75% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 55% ≤ x < 65% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 45% ≤ x < 55% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 35% ≤ x < 45% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 25% ≤ x < 35% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 15% ≤ x < 25% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 7.5% ≤ x < 15% ) Link up ( Bandwidth usage rate x : 0% ≤ x < 7.5% ) Link down</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_system">2. System information</div><div class="search_word">2. system information the following information is displayed. device name: display the device name of the switch. firmware revision: firmware revision serial number: serial number of the device this is also shown by a label on the rear of the chassis. mac address: mac address of the device this is also shown by a label on the rear of the chassis. currently-running firmware: the currently started firmware is shown.. currently-running settings file: the currently used config file is shown. system time: current device date and time if the date and time are incorrect, set the date and time either in the web gui’s "management" → "device settings" page, or by using the clock set command or the ntpdate command. startup time: system startup date and time startup reason: reason for startup start from power-off state, reload command, revision up, etc. if reboot is detected as the startup reason, the background turns red, and a warning indication ( ) occurs. check with the network administrator. in the warning list, press the "clear" button ( ) to clear the warning indication. fan speed : displays the speed of each fan. internal chassis temperature : displays the temperature inside the chassis. poe supply : the display will show whether the poe power supply is enabled. poe supply power : the current supply voltage and the maximum supplied voltage will be displayed.</div><div class="display_word">2. System information The following information is displayed. Device name: Display the device name of the switch. Firmware revision: Firmware revision Serial number: Serial number of the device This is also shown by a label on the rear of the chassis. MAC address: MAC address of the device This is also shown by a label on the rear of the chassis. Currently-running firmware: The currently started firmware is shown.. Currently-running settings file: The currently used CONFIG file is shown. System time: Current device date and time If the date and time are incorrect, set the date and time either in the Web GUI’s "Management" → "Device settings" page, or by using the clock set command or the ntpdate command. Startup time: System startup date and time Startup reason: Reason for startup Start from power-off state, reload command, revision up, etc. If reboot is detected as the startup reason, the background turns red, and a warning indication ( ) occurs. Check with the network administrator. In the warning list, press the "Clear" button ( ) to clear the warning indication. Fan speed : Displays the speed of each fan. Internal chassis temperature : Displays the temperature inside the chassis. PoE supply : The display will show whether the PoE power supply is enabled. PoE supply power : The current supply voltage and the maximum supplied voltage will be displayed.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_resource">3. Resource information</div><div class="search_word">3. resource information this page shows the cpu usage and memory usage. the current values and peak values of cpu usage and memory usage are shown. the number at the right of the meter is the current usage, and the number at the left is the peak value. when you press "clear peak values," the previous peak values will be cleared. peak values are also cleared when you restart the device. when you move the mouse cursor to each meter, the peak value and the date and time at which the peak value was recorded are shown. if the cpu usage exceeds 80 % , a warning display ( ) is shown. note the date and time at which the peak value was recorded, and from other gadgets, note the traffic and the log that were occurring during that time. if the memory usage exceeds 80 % , a warning display ( ) is shown. note the date and time at which the peak value was recorded, and from other gadgets, note the traffic and the log that were occurring during that time.</div><div class="display_word">3. Resource information This page shows the CPU usage and memory usage. The current values and peak values of CPU usage and memory usage are shown. The number at the right of the meter is the current usage, and the number at the left is the peak value. When you press "Clear peak values," the previous peak values will be cleared. Peak values are also cleared when you restart the device. When you move the mouse cursor to each meter, the peak value and the date and time at which the peak value was recorded are shown. If the CPU usage exceeds 80 % , a warning display ( ) is shown. Note the date and time at which the peak value was recorded, and from other gadgets, note the traffic and the log that were occurring during that time. If the memory usage exceeds 80 % , a warning display ( ) is shown. Note the date and time at which the peak value was recorded, and from other gadgets, note the traffic and the log that were occurring during that time.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_syslog">4. SYSLOG</div><div class="search_word">4. syslog this shows the most recent syslog. the most recent log is at the top. in the select menu you can change the number of lines that are displayed (default: 10 lines).</div><div class="display_word">4. SYSLOG This shows the most recent SYSLOG. The most recent log is at the top. In the select menu you can change the number of lines that are displayed (default: 10 lines).</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_traffic">5. Traffic information</div><div class="search_word">5. traffic information the physical interface traffic is displayed on a graph. there are different gadgets for the transmission traffic and for the reception traffic. press the "interface selection" button ( ) to display the “interface selection” dialog box. select the interface to display on the graph, from the “interface selection” dialog box. the average traffic per hour for the interface is rendered on the graph. up to 8 lines can be displayed on the graph using the colors blue, salmon pink, yellow, green, gray, sky blue, pink and purple for a total of 8 colors. these colors are allocated in the order that they are rendered on the graph, from the newest interface numbers onwards. the y-axis upper limit grows with the traffic, from a minimum of 10 [mbps] to a maximum of 1000 [mbps]. time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. point the mouse cursor above a line on the graph to show the interface information, date and traffic amount. a legend for the currently displayed graph is shown at the lowermost part of the gadget. using the legend only the lines on the graph that are enabled using the check boxes in the legend will be displayed. deselecting the check boxes will hide the corresponding lines from the graph. this is useful when multiple lines are overlapping or when you wish to temporarily monitor a specific interface only. if the interface you are currently monitoring does not exist, the message “the currently monitored interface is not selected” will display. refresh the screen to restore the selections on the legend to their defaults, as shown below. legend check boxes : all applied if the traffic exceeds 60% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. if the traffic falls below 50% , the warning will be cancelled. when displaying a gadget in a separate window using the “separate” button ( ) the settings prior to being separated will be reflected in the settings for the interface currently being monitored. the selections on the legend return to their defaults. the settings for the interface selected in a separated window will be reflected in the dashboard gadget when the separated screen is closed. when directly inputting the url for a separated window and displaying a gadget the selections on the legend return to their defaults.</div><div class="display_word">5. Traffic information The physical interface traffic is displayed on a graph. There are different gadgets for the transmission traffic and for the reception traffic. Press the "Interface selection" button ( ) to display the “Interface selection” dialog box. Select the interface to display on the graph, from the “Interface selection” dialog box. The average traffic per hour for the interface is rendered on the graph. Up to 8 lines can be displayed on the graph using the colors blue, salmon pink, yellow, green, gray, sky blue, pink and purple for a total of 8 colors. These colors are allocated in the order that they are rendered on the graph, from the newest interface numbers onwards. The Y-axis upper limit grows with the traffic, from a minimum of 10 [Mbps] to a maximum of 1000 [Mbps]. Time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. Point the mouse cursor above a line on the graph to show the interface information, date and traffic amount. A legend for the currently displayed graph is shown at the lowermost part of the gadget. Using the legend Only the lines on the graph that are enabled using the check boxes in the legend will be displayed. Deselecting the check boxes will hide the corresponding lines from the graph. This is useful when multiple lines are overlapping or when you wish to temporarily monitor a specific interface only. If the interface you are currently monitoring does not exist, the message “The currently monitored interface is not selected” will display. Refresh the screen to restore the selections on the legend to their defaults, as shown below. Legend check boxes : All applied If the traffic exceeds 60% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. If the traffic falls below 50% , the warning will be cancelled. When displaying a gadget in a separate window using the “Separate” button ( ) The settings prior to being separated will be reflected in the settings for the interface currently being monitored. The selections on the legend return to their defaults. The settings for the interface selected in a separated window will be reflected in the dashboard gadget when the separated screen is closed. When directly inputting the URL for a separated window and displaying a gadget The selections on the legend return to their defaults.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_resource_graph">6. Resource information(Graph)</div><div class="search_word">6. resource information(graph) this shows the cpu usage and memory usage in graph format. the average usage ratio is rendered per hour for the monitored period. the cpu usage is shown on the graph using blue lines, and the memory usage is shown using salmon pink lines. the upper limit for the graph’s y axis is 100 [%]. time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. point the mouse cursor above a line on the graph to show the monitored period, date and time and usage ratio. a legend for the currently displayed graph is shown at the lowermost part of the gadget. using the legend only the lines on the graph that are enabled using the check boxes in the legend will be displayed. deselecting the check boxes will hide the corresponding lines from the graph. refresh the screen to restore the selections on the legend to their defaults, as shown below. legend check boxes : all applied if the cpu usage exceeds 80% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. if the cpu usage falls below 80% , the warning will be cancelled. if the memory usage exceeds 80% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. if the memory usage falls below 80% , the warning will be cancelled. when displaying a gadget in a separate window using the “separate” button ( ) the selections on the legend return to their defaults. when directly inputting the url for a separated window and displaying a gadget the selections on the legend return to their defaults.</div><div class="display_word">6. Resource information(Graph) This shows the CPU usage and memory usage in graph format. The average usage ratio is rendered per hour for the monitored period. The CPU usage is shown on the graph using blue lines, and the memory usage is shown using salmon pink lines. The upper limit for the graph’s Y axis is 100 [%]. Time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. Point the mouse cursor above a line on the graph to show the monitored period, date and time and usage ratio. A legend for the currently displayed graph is shown at the lowermost part of the gadget. Using the legend Only the lines on the graph that are enabled using the check boxes in the legend will be displayed. Deselecting the check boxes will hide the corresponding lines from the graph. Refresh the screen to restore the selections on the legend to their defaults, as shown below. Legend check boxes : All applied If the CPU usage exceeds 80% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. If the CPU usage falls below 80% , the warning will be cancelled. If the memory usage exceeds 80% , a warning ( ) will be displayed. If the memory usage falls below 80% , the warning will be cancelled. When displaying a gadget in a separate window using the “Separate” button ( ) The selections on the legend return to their defaults. When directly inputting the URL for a separated window and displaying a gadget The selections on the legend return to their defaults.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_power_consumption">7. Power consumption information</div><div class="search_word">7. power consumption information a graph of the power consumption by the unit is displayed. shows power consumption every second for the last 2 minutes. the graph will be automatically refreshed each second. time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. moving the cursor over the graph shows the power consumption value for the given date and time. the following methods are recommended to suppress power consumption. slow down the link speed of ports with low bandwidth usage. use the scheduling functionality to shutdown unused ports or shut off poe power supply to them at night or on closed days.</div><div class="display_word">7. Power consumption information A graph of the power consumption by the unit is displayed. Shows power consumption every second for the last 2 minutes. The graph will be automatically refreshed each second. Time, from the current time to 120 seconds ago (in the form hh:mm:ss), is shown on the horizontal axis. Moving the cursor over the graph shows the power consumption value for the given date and time. The following methods are recommended to suppress power consumption. Slow down the link speed of ports with low bandwidth usage. Use the scheduling functionality to shutdown unused ports or shut off PoE power supply to them at night or on closed days.</div></div><div id="gui_en_dashboard_gadget"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_dashboard_gadget" doctitle="About" link="#help_id_poe_power_supply">8. PoE power supply</div><div class="search_word">8. poe power supply display the poe power supply. the current/maximum power supply, the remaining available power supply, and the guard band setting values are displayed at the top of the meter. the current utilization rate is shown on the right side of the meter, with peak utilization at the top. the arrow at the bottom of the meter indicates the guard band threshold value. if the current power supply exceeds the guard band threshold value, no additional power can be supplied. when you move the mouse cursor to the meter, the peak value and the date and time at which the peak value was recorded are shown. you can clear the previous peak value from "clear peak values". peak values are also cleared when you restart the device.</div><div class="display_word">8. PoE power supply Display the PoE power supply. The current/maximum power supply, the remaining available power supply, and the guard band setting values are displayed at the top of the meter. The current utilization rate is shown on the right side of the meter, with peak utilization at the top. The arrow at the bottom of the meter indicates the guard band threshold value. If the current power supply exceeds the guard band threshold value, no additional power can be supplied. When you move the mouse cursor to the meter, the peak value and the date and time at which the peak value was recorded are shown. You can clear the previous peak value from "Clear peak values". Peak values are also cleared when you restart the device.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#title-box">Apply Access list</div><div class="search_word">apply access list</div><div class="display_word">Apply Access list</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary apply the access list for the interface on this page.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary Apply the access list for the interface on this page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for applying the access list.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for applying the access list.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#interface_list">2.1. Interface list</div><div class="search_word">2.1. interface list the access list information applied to the interface is displayed. the table items are explained below. i/f displays the interface name. access list (in) the information listed below for the access list applied to the input side of the interface is shown here. id the access list id will be displayed. type the access list type will be displayed. comment the comment set in this access list will be displayed. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Interface list The access list information applied to the interface is displayed. The table items are explained below. I/F Displays the interface name. Access list (IN) The information listed below for the access list applied to the input side of the interface is shown here. ID The access list ID will be displayed. Type The access list type will be displayed. Comment The comment set in this access list will be displayed. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#select_acl">3. Selection page for access lists to apply</div><div class="search_word">3. selection page for access lists to apply this page is for selecting the access list to apply to the interface. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Selection page for access lists to apply This page is for selecting the access list to apply to the interface. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_apply"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_apply" doctitle="Apply" link="#select_access_list_to_apply">3.1. Select access list to apply</div><div class="search_word">3.1. select access list to apply applicable interface the interface on which the access list will be applied is displayed. access list to apply (in) select the access list to apply to the input side of the interface. press the "select" button to display the file "select access list" dialog box. on the "select access list" dialog, you can select the check box for an access list and press the "ok" button to select the access list to apply. press the "detail" button in the "select access list" dialog box to display the targeted access list.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Select access list to apply Applicable interface The interface on which the access list will be applied is displayed. Access list to apply (IN) Select the access list to apply to the input side of the interface. Press the "Select" button to display the file "Select access list" dialog box. On the "Select access list" dialog, you can select the check box for an access list and press the "OK" button to select the access list to apply. Press the "Detail" button in the "Select access list" dialog box to display the targeted access list.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#title-box">Create Access list</div><div class="search_word">create access list</div><div class="display_word">Create Access list</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can create or delete access lists, and change their settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can create or delete access lists, and change their settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for creating an access list.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for creating an access list.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#access_lists">2.1. Access lists</div><div class="search_word">2.1. access lists the information for the access list you created will be displayed. the table items are explained below. id the access list id will be displayed. type the access list type will be displayed. comment the comment set in this access list will be displayed. a maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. you can press the sort switch to sort by each item. press the "new" button to display the page where you can create a new access list. press the "setting" button to show the page where you can change the settings of the selected access list. if you press the "delete" button, all access lists whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. on this page, you can reference and configure up to 28 access list for each access list type of ipv4/ipv6/mac.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Access lists The information for the access list you created will be displayed. The table items are explained below. ID The access list ID will be displayed. Type The access list type will be displayed. Comment The comment set in this access list will be displayed. A maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. Press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. You can press the sort switch to sort by each item. Press the "New" button to display the page where you can create a new access list. Press the "Setting" button to show the page where you can change the settings of the selected access list. If you press the "Delete" button, all access lists whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. On this page, you can reference and configure up to 28 access list for each access list type of IPv4/IPv6/MAC.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#setting_acl">3. Access list settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. access list settings page this page is for creating new access lists, or for changing the settings of existing access lists. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Access list settings page This page is for creating new access lists, or for changing the settings of existing access lists. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_acl_create"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_acl_create" doctitle="Create" link="#access_list_settings">3.1. Access list settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. access list settings access list select the access list type from the following items. ipv4 access list ipv6 access list mac access list when changing the settings, the access list type cannot be changed. access list id set the configurable access list id from the following ranges, according to the access list type. ipv4 access lists 1 - 2000 ipv6 access lists 3001 - 4000 mac access lists 2001 - 3000 when changing the settings, the access list id cannot be changed. comment specify the comment using up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. the "?" character cannot be used in the comment text. control conditions specify the control conditions for the access list. up to 128 control conditions can be configured per access list. press the "add" button to display the "control condition settings" dialog. in the "control condition settings" dialog, you can specify conditions for which traffic is permitted and denied as per the following items. operation select the actions to be taken when the traffic matches the control conditions, shown in the items below. permit deny source address select the source address to be targeted from the following items. all addresses specify host address specifying a network address this cannot be specified for a mac access list. specify host address with wildcard bit specify the address and wildcard mask. this cannot be specified for a ipv6 access list. if the wildcard mask bit is "1," the bit in the same address position will not be checked. when specifying the conditions for subnet 192.168.1.0/24, do so as shown below. address : 192.168.1.0, wildcard mask : 0.0.0.255 when specifying the conditions for vendor code 00-a0-de- - -*, do so as shown below. address : 00a0.de00.0000, wildcard mask : 0000.00ff.ffff press the "delete" button to delete the corresponding control conditions. press the or icons to change the order in which the control conditions are applied. when evaluating the control conditions, control conditions with earlier numbers will be evaluated first; and if the conditions match, the conditions that follow will not be checked.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Access list settings Access list Select the access list type from the following items. IPv4 access list IPv6 access list MAC access list When changing the settings, the access list type cannot be changed. Access list ID Set the configurable access list ID from the following ranges, according to the access list type. IPv4 access lists 1 - 2000 IPv6 access lists 3001 - 4000 MAC access lists 2001 - 3000 When changing the settings, the access list ID cannot be changed. Comment Specify the comment using up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. The "?" character cannot be used in the comment text. Control conditions Specify the control conditions for the access list. Up to 128 control conditions can be configured per access list. Press the "Add" button to display the "Control condition settings" dialog. In the "Control condition settings" dialog, you can specify conditions for which traffic is permitted and denied as per the following items. Operation Select the actions to be taken when the traffic matches the control conditions, shown in the items below. Permit Deny Source address Select the source address to be targeted from the following items. All addresses Specify host address Specifying a network address This cannot be specified for a MAC access list. Specify host address with wildcard bit Specify the address and wildcard mask. This cannot be specified for a IPv6 access list. If the wildcard mask bit is "1," the bit in the same address position will not be checked. When specifying the conditions for subnet 192.168.1.0/24, do so as shown below. Address : 192.168.1.0, Wildcard mask : 0.0.0.255 When specifying the conditions for vendor code 00-A0-DE- - -*, do so as shown below. Address : 00A0.DE00.0000, Wildcard mask : 0000.00FF.FFFF Press the "Delete" button to delete the corresponding control conditions. Press the or icons to change the order in which the control conditions are applied. When evaluating the control conditions, control conditions with earlier numbers will be evaluated first; and if the conditions match, the conditions that follow will not be checked.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#title-box">Basic settings</div><div class="search_word">basic settings</div><div class="display_word">Basic settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring the basic settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring the basic settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the basic settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the basic settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4_settings">2.1. IPv4 settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. ipv4 settings shows the ipv4 settings. the table items are explained below. ipv4 address displays the ipv4 address setting. ipv4 default gateway displays the ipv4 default gateway setting. press the “setting” button to show the page for ipv4 settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. IPv4 settings Shows the IPv4 settings. The table items are explained below. IPv4 address Displays the IPv4 address setting. IPv4 default gateway Displays the IPv4 default gateway setting. Press the “Setting” button to show the page for IPv4 settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6_settings">2.2. IPv6 settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. ipv6 settings shows the ipv6 settings. the table items are explained below. ipv6 address displays the ipv6 address setting. ipv6 default gateway displays the ipv6 default gateway settings. press the “setting” button to show the page for ipv6 settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. IPv6 settings Shows the IPv6 settings. The table items are explained below. IPv6 address Displays the IPv6 address setting. IPv6 default gateway Displays the IPv6 default gateway settings. Press the “Setting” button to show the page for IPv6 settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4">3. IPv4 settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. ipv4 settings page this page is for configuring ipv4 settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. IPv4 settings page This page is for configuring IPv4 settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4_settings_2">3.1. IPv4 settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. ipv4 settings vlan id from the list, select the vlan to assign ipv4 address. however, the vlan for which frame forwarding is invalid cannot be selected. ipv4 address select the ip address from the following items. only a vlan for which frame forwarding is valid can be specified for this item. only one vlan interfaces can be configured for an ipv4 address. obtain automatically using dhcp when auto-acquire does not work, the link local address is automatically configured by the auto ip function. specify a fixed ip address enter the ip address and subnet mask. ipv4 default gateway specify an ip address for the ipv4 default gateway. if omitted when dhcp is used, the default gateway obtained by dhcp is used.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. IPv4 settings VLAN ID From the list, select the VLAN to assign IPv4 address. However, the VLAN for which frame forwarding is invalid cannot be selected. IPv4 address Select the IP address from the following items. Only a VLAN for which frame forwarding is valid can be specified for this item. Only one VLAN interfaces can be configured for an IPv4 address. Obtain automatically using DHCP When auto-acquire does not work, the link local address is automatically configured by the Auto IP function. Specify a fixed IP address Enter the IP address and subnet mask. IPv4 default gateway Specify an IP address for the IPv4 default gateway. If omitted when DHCP is used, the default gateway obtained by DHCP is used.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6">4. IPv6 settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. ipv6 settings page this page is for configuring ipv6 settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. IPv6 settings page This page is for configuring IPv6 settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6_settings_2">4.1. IPv6 settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. ipv6 settings vlan id from the list, select the vlan to assign ipv6 address. however, the vlan for which frame forwarding is invalid cannot be selected. ipv6 address only one vlan interfaces can be configured for an ipv6 address. select whether the ipv6 address will be enabled or disabled from the following items. disable ipv6 enable ipv6 for global addresses, select from the following items. not set obtain automatically using ra specify a fixed ip address enter the ip address and subnet mask. set the link local address. ipv6 default gateway specify an ipv6 address for the ipv6 default gateway. if omitted when ra is used, the default gateway obtained by ra is used.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. IPv6 settings VLAN ID From the list, select the VLAN to assign IPv6 address. However, the VLAN for which frame forwarding is invalid cannot be selected. IPv6 address Only one VLAN interfaces can be configured for an IPv6 address. Select whether the IPv6 address will be enabled or disabled from the following items. Disable IPv6 Enable IPv6 For global addresses, select from the following items. Not set Obtain automatically using RA Specify a fixed IP address Enter the IP address and subnet mask. Set the link local address. IPv6 default gateway Specify an IPv6 address for the IPv6 default gateway. If omitted when RA is used, the default gateway obtained by RA is used.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#title-box">DNS client</div><div class="search_word">dns client</div><div class="display_word">DNS client</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring the dns client settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring the DNS client settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the dns client.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the DNS client.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#dns_client_settings">2.1. DNS client settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. dns client settings displays the dns client settings. the table items are explained below. dns client functions displays the settings for whether to enable or disable the dns client function. dns server address displays the dns server address settings used during inquiry for name resolution. default domain displays the default domain settings. search domain displays the search domain settings. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can configure the dns client settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. DNS client settings Displays the DNS client settings. The table items are explained below. DNS client functions Displays the settings for whether to enable or disable the DNS client function. DNS server address Displays the DNS server address settings used during inquiry for name resolution. Default domain Displays the default domain settings. Search domain Displays the search domain settings. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can configure the DNS client settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#client">3. DNS client settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. dns client settings page this page is for configuring the dns client settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. DNS client settings page This page is for configuring the DNS client settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_dns"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_dns" doctitle="DNS" link="#dns_client_settings_2">3.1. DNS client settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. dns client settings dns client functions select the operation for the dns client function from the following options. enable disable dns server address specify the dns server address. for the server address, either an ipv4 address or an ipv6 address can be specified. up to three server addresses can be specified. default domain specify the default domain. up to 255 characters can be inputted. search domain specify the search domain. up to 255 characters can be inputted. up to six search domains can be specified.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. DNS client settings DNS client functions Select the operation for the DNS client function from the following options. Enable Disable DNS server address Specify the DNS server address. For the server address, either an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address can be specified. Up to three server addresses can be specified. Default domain Specify the default domain. Up to 255 characters can be inputted. Search domain Specify the search domain. Up to 255 characters can be inputted. Up to six search domains can be specified.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#title-box">MAC address table</div><div class="search_word">mac address table</div><div class="display_word">MAC address table</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the mac address table function.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the MAC address table function.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the mac address table.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the MAC address table.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#basic_settings_for_mac_address_learning">2.1. Basic settings for MAC address learning</div><div class="search_word">2.1. basic settings for mac address learning the current settings for the mac address learning are shown. when you press the "setting" button, a page where you can change the mac address learning settings will appear.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Basic settings for MAC address learning The current settings for the MAC address learning are shown. When you press the "Setting" button, a page where you can change the MAC address learning settings will appear.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#static_mac_address_table_settings">2.2. Static MAC address table settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. static mac address table settings the static mac address table is shown as a list. a maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. you can press the sort switch to sort by each item. if you press the "new" button, a page appears in which you can create a new static mac address entry. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected static mac address entry. if you press the "delete" button, all static mac address entries whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. up to 256 static mac address entries can be created from the web gui.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Static MAC address table settings The static MAC address table is shown as a list. A maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. Press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. You can press the sort switch to sort by each item. If you press the "New" button, a page appears in which you can create a new static MAC address entry. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected static MAC address entry. If you press the "Delete" button, all static MAC address entries whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. Up to 256 static MAC address entries can be created from the Web GUI.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#fdb_basic">3. MAC address learning basic settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. mac address learning basic settings page in this page you can make settings for the mac address learning. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. MAC address learning basic settings page In this page you can make settings for the MAC address learning. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#basic_settings_for_mac_address_learning_2">3.1. Basic settings for MAC address learning</div><div class="search_word">3.1. basic settings for mac address learning mac address learning select the mac address learning from the following items. use mac address learning don’t use mac address learning aging time for dynamic entries specify a setting in the range of 10 seconds to 634 seconds. the default value is 300 seconds.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Basic settings for MAC address learning MAC address learning Select the MAC address learning from the following items. Use MAC address learning Don’t use MAC address learning Aging time for dynamic entries Specify a setting in the range of 10 seconds to 634 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#fdb_static">4. Static MAC address table settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. static mac address table settings page in this page you can make static mac address settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Static MAC address table settings page In this page you can make static MAC address settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_fdb" doctitle="MAC" link="#static_mac_address_settings">4.1. Static MAC address settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. static mac address settings kind choose from the following items as the type of mac address to be registered in the static mac address table. register a unicast mac address register a multicast mac address destination mac address enter the mac address in the format hhhh.hhhh.hhhh. frame transmission from the following items, select the transmission for frames sent to the destination mac address. transmit frames that are being sent to the destination mac address discard frames that are being sent to the destination mac address if a multi-cast mac address is registered, "transmit" is the only frame processing that can be specified. destination vlan id select the forwarding-destination vlan id from those that are registered in the vlan database. forwarding destination interface if you press the "select" button, the interfaces assigned to the forwarding-destination vlan id are shown as a list. place a check mark in the check box of the interface that you want to use as the forwarding-destination interface, and press the "ok" button. if registering a unicast mac address, you can specify one interface. if registering a multicast mac address, you can specify multiple interfaces.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Static MAC address settings Kind Choose from the following items as the type of MAC address to be registered in the static MAC address table. Register a unicast MAC address Register a multicast MAC address Destination MAC address Enter the MAC address in the format hhhh.hhhh.hhhh. Frame transmission From the following items, select the transmission for frames sent to the destination MAC address. Transmit frames that are being sent to the destination MAC address Discard frames that are being sent to the destination MAC address If a multi-cast MAC address is registered, "Transmit" is the only frame processing that can be specified. Destination VLAN ID Select the forwarding-destination VLAN ID from those that are registered in the VLAN database. Forwarding destination interface If you press the "Select" button, the interfaces assigned to the forwarding-destination VLAN ID are shown as a list. Place a check mark in the check box of the interface that you want to use as the forwarding-destination interface, and press the "OK" button. If registering a unicast MAC address, you can specify one interface. If registering a multicast MAC address, you can specify multiple interfaces.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#title-box">Flow control</div><div class="search_word">flow control</div><div class="display_word">Flow control</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the flow control. you can enable/disable the flow control. if the flow control is enabled, frame discarding can be controlled when a network is congested.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the flow control. You can enable/disable the flow control. If the flow control is enabled, frame discarding can be controlled when a network is congested.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for flow control.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for flow control.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_basic_settings">2.1. Flow control basic settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. flow control basic settings the current setting is shown as to whether the flow control is used. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Flow control basic settings The current setting is shown as to whether the flow control is used. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_settings">2.2. Flow control settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. flow control settings the flow control setting is shown for each lan port. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected lan port. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark. the default flow control setting for all ports is "disabled". if the settings do not use the flow control for the entire system, flow control settings for each lan port cannot be made.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Flow control settings The flow control setting is shown for each LAN port. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected LAN port. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark. The default flow control setting for all ports is "Disabled". If the settings do not use the flow control for the entire system, flow control settings for each LAN port cannot be made.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_system">3. Flow control basic settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. flow control basic settings page in this page you can specify whether the flow control is used for the entire system. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Flow control basic settings page In this page you can specify whether the flow control is used for the entire system. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_basic_settings_2">3.1. Flow control basic settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. flow control basic settings flow control don’t use flow control the flow control will be disabled for the entire system. use flow control the flow control will be enabled for the entire system.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Flow control basic settings Flow control Don’t use flow control The flow control will be disabled for the entire system. Use flow control The flow control will be enabled for the entire system.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_if">4. Flow control settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. flow control settings page in this page you can specify whether the flow control is used for the selected interface. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Flow control settings page In this page you can specify whether the flow control is used for the selected interface. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#flow_control_settings_2">4.1. Flow control settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. flow control settings port the lan port for which settings are made is shown. flow control disabled the flow control will be disabled for the selected interface. enabled the flow control will be enabled for the selected interface.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Flow control settings Port The LAN port for which settings are made is shown. Flow control Disabled The flow control will be disabled for the selected interface. Enabled The flow control will be enabled for the selected interface.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#title-box">IGMP snooping</div><div class="search_word">igmp snooping</div><div class="display_word">IGMP snooping</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the igmp snooping function.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the IGMP snooping function.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for igmp snooping.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for IGMP snooping.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp_snooping_function_settings">2.1. IGMP snooping function settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. igmp snooping function settings igmp snooping function settings are shown for each vlan id that is defined a maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. when you press the "setting" button, a page where you can change the igmp snooping function settings for the selected vlan id will appear if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all vlan ids whose check box contains a check mark if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all vlan ids whose check box contains a check mark default settings for the igmp snooping function are as follows igmp snooping function: enabled igmp version: igmpv3 igmp query: no transmission igmp query transmission interval: 125 seconds ttl check: enabled ra check : disabled tos check : disabled multicast router port : none data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports : disabled report suppression function : enabled report forwarding function : disabled fast leave function : disabled</div><div class="display_word">2.1. IGMP snooping function settings IGMP snooping function settings are shown for each VLAN ID that is defined A maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. Press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. When you press the "Setting" button, a page where you can change the IGMP snooping function settings for the selected VLAN ID will appear If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all VLAN IDs whose check box contains a check mark If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all VLAN IDs whose check box contains a check mark Default settings for the IGMP snooping function are as follows IGMP snooping function: Enabled IGMP version: IGMPv3 IGMP query: No transmission IGMP query transmission interval: 125 seconds TTL check: Enabled RA check : Disabled ToS check : Disabled Multicast router port : None Data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports : Disabled Report suppression function : Enabled Report forwarding function : Disabled Fast leave function : Disabled</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp_config">3. IGMP snooping function settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. igmp snooping function settings page in this page you can make various settings for the igmp snooping function. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. IGMP snooping function settings page In this page you can make various settings for the IGMP snooping function. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp_snooping_function_settings_2">3.1. IGMP snooping function settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. igmp snooping function settings vlan id the vlan id for which settings are being made is shown igmp snooping settings enabled ( control transmission of ip multicast packets ) enable igmp snooping. multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. this function monitors (snoops) igmp messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. it can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. disabled ( flood ip multicast packets ) disable igmp snooping multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same vlan. version select the igmp version from the following items. igmpv3 igmpv2 igmp query no transmission igmp query transmission function is disabled transmit periodically igmp query transmission function is enabled. the transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds ttl check select the ttl check from the following items. enabled ( igmp packets other than ttl=1 are discarded ) disabled ( igmp packets other than ttl=1 are corrected to ttl=1 and transmitted ) ra check select the ra check from the following items. disabled ( ra option is added to igmp packets and transmitted ) enabled ( igmp packets without a ra option are discarded ) tos check select the tos check from the following items. disabled ( tos is corrected to 0xc0 in igmp packets and transmitted ) enabled ( igmp packets with invalid tos are discarded ) multicast router port the multicast router port is the interface to which the multicast router is connected. this device automatically learns the interface that receives the igmp query as the multicast router port. also, you can statically configure the multicast router port. to statically configure multicast router ports, press the "select" button. the interfaces that belong to the specified vlan id are listed. then, check the check box of the interface to use as the multicast router port, and press the "confirm" button. data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports this function suppresses network traffic load by stopping unnecessary multicast frames transfer to the multicast router port. select from the following items. disable disabling this function causes multicast frames to be transferred to the multicast router port as well if any port is receiving igmp report messages. enable enabling this function causes multicast frames to be transferred to the multicast router port as well only when the multicast router port receives igmp report messages. report suppression function this function suppresses the network traffic load between the multicast router and the host. select from the following items. enable enabling this function transfers received igmp report and leave messages to the igmp querier at once. disable disabling this function transfers received igmp report and leave messages to the igmp querier as is without combining them. report forwarding function this function transfers igmp report and leave messages to the port where a switch is connected in the same vlan. the system capabilities information included in the lldp basic management tlv is used to judge whether a switch is connected to the port or not. select from the following items. enable enabling this function transfers received igmp report and leave messages to the multicast router ports and the ports where a switch is connected. disable disabling this function transfers received igmp report and leave messages to the multicast router ports only. fast leave function fast leave function is a function not to check the receiver’s existence in the igmp leave process. this function is effective when only one receiver is connected to the lan/sfp port. select from the following items. disable disable the fast leave function. the igmp leave process sends a group-specific query to check the receivers' existence. enable enable the fast leave function. the igmp leave process does not check the receiver’s existence. when the "disable on ports where a switch is connected" is checked, the fast leave function is not used on the port where a switch is connected.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. IGMP snooping function settings VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which settings are being made is shown IGMP snooping settings Enabled ( Control transmission of IP multicast packets ) Enable IGMP snooping. Multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. This function monitors (snoops) IGMP messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. It can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. Disabled ( Flood IP multicast packets ) Disable IGMP snooping Multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same VLAN. Version Select the IGMP version from the following items. IGMPv3 IGMPv2 IGMP query No transmission IGMP query transmission function is disabled Transmit periodically IGMP query transmission function is enabled. The transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds TTL check Select the TTL check from the following items. Enabled ( IGMP packets other than TTL=1 are discarded ) Disabled ( IGMP packets other than TTL=1 are corrected to TTL=1 and transmitted ) RA check Select the RA check from the following items. Disabled ( RA option is added to IGMP packets and transmitted ) Enabled ( IGMP packets without a RA option are discarded ) ToS check Select the ToS check from the following items. Disabled ( ToS is corrected to 0xc0 in IGMP packets and transmitted ) Enabled ( IGMP packets with invalid ToS are discarded ) Multicast router port The multicast router port is the interface to which the multicast router is connected. This device automatically learns the interface that receives the IGMP query as the multicast router port. Also, you can statically configure the multicast router port. To statically configure multicast router ports, press the "Select" button. The interfaces that belong to the specified VLAN ID are listed. Then, check the check box of the interface to use as the multicast router port, and press the "Confirm" button. Data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports This function suppresses network traffic load by stopping unnecessary multicast frames transfer to the multicast router port. Select from the following items. Disable Disabling this function causes multicast frames to be transferred to the multicast router port as well if any port is receiving IGMP report messages. Enable Enabling this function causes multicast frames to be transferred to the multicast router port as well only when the multicast router port receives IGMP report messages. Report suppression function This function suppresses the network traffic load between the multicast router and the host. Select from the following items. Enable Enabling this function transfers received IGMP report and leave messages to the IGMP querier at once. Disable Disabling this function transfers received IGMP report and leave messages to the IGMP querier as is without combining them. Report forwarding function This function transfers IGMP report and leave messages to the port where a switch is connected in the same VLAN. The System Capabilities information included in the LLDP Basic Management TLV is used to judge whether a switch is connected to the port or not. Select from the following items. Enable Enabling this function transfers received IGMP report and leave messages to the multicast router ports and the ports where a switch is connected. Disable Disabling this function transfers received IGMP report and leave messages to the multicast router ports only. Fast leave function Fast leave function is a function not to check the receiver’s existence in the IGMP leave process. This function is effective when only one receiver is connected to the LAN/SFP port. Select from the following items. Disable Disable the fast leave function. The IGMP leave process sends a group-specific query to check the receivers' existence. Enable Enable the fast leave function. The IGMP leave process does not check the receiver’s existence. When the "Disable on ports where a switch is connected" is checked, the fast leave function is not used on the port where a switch is connected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#title-box">Physical interface</div><div class="search_word">physical interface</div><div class="display_word">Physical interface</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for changing the physical interface settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for changing the physical interface settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the physical interface settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the physical interface settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#mru_setting">2.1. MRU setting</div><div class="search_word">2.1. mru setting the mru settings is shown. the table items are explained below. mru displays the maximum amount of data that can be received at one time. press the “setting” button to show the mru settings page.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. MRU setting The MRU settings is shown. The table items are explained below. MRU Displays the maximum amount of data that can be received at one time. Press the “Setting” button to show the MRU settings page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#interface_list">2.2. Interface list</div><div class="search_word">2.2. interface list the current operating status and settings for the physical interface are shown for each interface. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. port displays the interface name. link displays the link status for the interface. speed/communication mode displays the operating speed and communication mode. for automatic settings, “ (automatic) ” is displayed at the end of the status indication. eee function displays the operating status of the eee function. automatic cross/straight detection displays the operating status of the automatic cross/straight detection. explanation displays the description text that is set for the interface. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. the default settings will be applied to the settings on the physical interface settings page. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. each of the default settings are shown below. operation : enable interface explanation : unset speed/communication mode : automatic eee function : disabled (don’t use power-conservation ethernet function) automatic cross/straight detection : enabled</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Interface list The current operating status and settings for the physical interface are shown for each interface. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. Port Displays the interface name. Link Displays the link status for the interface. Speed/communication mode Displays the operating speed and communication mode. For automatic settings, “ (Automatic) ” is displayed at the end of the status indication. EEE function Displays the operating status of the EEE function. Automatic cross/straight detection Displays the operating status of the automatic cross/straight detection. Explanation Displays the description text that is set for the interface. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. The default settings will be applied to the settings on the physical interface settings page. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. Each of the default settings are shown below. Operation : Enable interface Explanation : Unset Speed/communication mode : Automatic EEE function : Disabled (Don’t use power-conservation Ethernet function) Automatic cross/straight detection : Enabled</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#system">3. MRU settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. mru settings page this page is for configuring the mru settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. MRU settings page This page is for configuring the MRU settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#mru_setting_2">3.1. MRU setting</div><div class="search_word">3.1. mru setting mru specify the maximum amount of data that can be received at one time. the input range is 1522 - 10240 bytes.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. MRU setting MRU Specify the maximum amount of data that can be received at one time. The input range is 1522 - 10240 bytes.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#if_config">4. Physical interface settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. physical interface settings page this page is for changing physical interface-related settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Physical interface settings page This page is for changing physical interface-related settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_interface"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_interface" doctitle="Physical" link="#physical_interface_settings">4.1. Physical interface settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. physical interface settings port displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. operation select from the following interface operations. enable interface disable interface explanation sets the interface description text. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 80 characters can be inputted. speed/communication mode select the interface speed and communication method from the following options. for a lan port automatic 1gbps / full duplex 100mbps / full duplex 100mbps / half duplex 10mbps / full duplex 10mbps / half duplex eee function select the operation for the eee function from the following options. disabled (don’t use power-conservation ethernet function) enabled (use power-conservation ethernet function) automatic cross/straight detection select the operation for the automatic cross/straight detection from the following options. enabled disabled if the automatic cross/straight detection is disabled, mdi is used for the cable connection type.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Physical interface settings Port Displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. Operation Select from the following interface operations. Enable interface Disable interface Explanation Sets the interface description text. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 80 characters can be inputted. Speed/communication mode Select the interface speed and communication method from the following options. For a LAN port Automatic 1Gbps / Full duplex 100Mbps / Full duplex 100Mbps / Half duplex 10Mbps / Full duplex 10Mbps / Half duplex EEE function Select the operation for the EEE function from the following options. Disabled (Don’t use power-conservation Ethernet function) Enabled (Use power-conservation Ethernet function) Automatic cross/straight detection Select the operation for the automatic cross/straight detection from the following options. Enabled Disabled If the automatic cross/straight detection is disabled, MDI is used for the cable connection type.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#title-box">Link aggregation</div><div class="search_word">link aggregation</div><div class="display_word">Link aggregation</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring the link aggregation settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring the link aggregation settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the link aggregation.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the link aggregation.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#load_balance_rule_settings">2.1. Load balance rule settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. load balance rule settings shows the load balance rule settings. the table items are explained below. load balance rule displays the load balance rule settings. press the “setting” button to show the page for the load balance rule settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Load balance rule settings Shows the load balance rule settings. The table items are explained below. Load balance rule Displays the load balance rule settings. Press the “Setting” button to show the page for the load balance rule settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#interface_list">2.2. Interface list</div><div class="search_word">2.2. interface list the operating status and settings are shown for the logical interface and the physical interface. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box to delete the logical interface. port displays the interface name. link displays the link status for the interface. explanation displays the description text that is set for the interface. press the "new" button to display a page where you can create new settings for a logical interface. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected logical interface. if you press the "delete" button, all logical interfaces whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. when deleting a logical interface, you can specify the physical interface operations after deletion as follows. enable disable up to 8 logical interfaces can be configured.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Interface list The operating status and settings are shown for the logical interface and the physical interface. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box to delete the logical interface. Port Displays the interface name. Link Displays the link status for the interface. Explanation Displays the description text that is set for the interface. Press the "New" button to display a page where you can create new settings for a logical interface. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected logical interface. If you press the "Delete" button, all logical interfaces whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. When deleting a logical interface, you can specify the physical interface operations after deletion as follows. Enable Disable Up to 8 logical interfaces can be configured.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#system">3. Load balance rule settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. load balance rule settings page this page is for configuring the load balance rule settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Load balance rule settings page This page is for configuring the load balance rule settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#load_balance_rule_settings_2">3.1. Load balance rule settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. load balance rule settings load balance rule the following load balance rules can be selected. destination mac address source mac address destination/source mac address destination ip address source ip address destination/source ip address destination port number source port number destination/source port numbers</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Load balance rule settings Load balance rule The following load balance rules can be selected. Destination MAC address Source MAC address Destination/source MAC address Destination IP address Source IP address Destination/source IP address Destination port number Source port number Destination/source port numbers</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#logical">4. Logical interface settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. logical interface settings page this page is for changing the logical interface settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Logical interface settings page This page is for changing the logical interface settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#logical_interface_settings">4.1. Logical interface settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. logical interface settings logical interface type when configuring new settings displays the type of logical interface. when changing settings displays the selected logical interface name. interface number specifies the interface number. a value from 1 to 8 can be inputted. this item will be displayed only when configuring new settings. associated port select the port that will be associated with the logical interface. press the "select" button to display the “physical interface list” dialog box. select the port check box in the “physical interface list” dialog box and press the “ok” button to select the associated port. up to 8 ports can be selected. operation select from the following logical interface operations. enable interface disable interface explanation sets the interface description text. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 80 characters can be inputted.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Logical interface settings Logical interface type When configuring new settings Displays the type of logical interface. When changing settings Displays the selected logical interface name. Interface number Specifies the interface number. A value from 1 to 8 can be inputted. This item will be displayed only when configuring new settings. Associated port Select the port that will be associated with the logical interface. Press the "Select" button to display the “Physical interface list” dialog box. Select the port check box in the “Physical interface list” dialog box and press the “OK” button to select the associated port. Up to 8 ports can be selected. Operation Select from the following logical interface operations. Enable interface Disable interface Explanation Sets the interface description text. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 80 characters can be inputted.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#title-box">Loop detection</div><div class="search_word">loop detection</div><div class="display_word">Loop detection</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the loop detection. this function monitors whether a loop is occurring by sending its loop detection frame from the port and whether the frame returns to itself or not.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the loop detection. This function monitors whether a loop is occurring by sending its loop detection frame from the port and whether the frame returns to itself or not.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for loop detection.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for loop detection.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detection_basic_settings">2.1. Loop detection basic settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. loop detection basic settings displays the system settings of loop detection. resetting the loop detection status you can immediately resolve the loop detection states (e.g., blocking) by reset feature. the table items are explained below. displays the loop detection settings for the entire system. displays the blocking interval after a loop is detected. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Loop detection basic settings Displays the system settings of loop detection. Resetting the loop detection status You can immediately resolve the loop detection states (e.g., Blocking) by reset feature. The table items are explained below. Displays the loop detection settings for the entire system. Displays the blocking interval after a loop is detected. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detection_settings">2.2. Loop detection settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. loop detection settings the loop detection setting and current loop detection status is shown for each lan port. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected lan port. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark. pressing the "update" button will reacquire the current loop detection status for all lan ports. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark. the default loop detection setting for all ports is "enabled". if the settings do not use the loop detection for the entire system, loop detection settings for each lan port cannot be made.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Loop detection settings The loop detection setting and current loop detection status is shown for each LAN port. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected LAN port. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark. Pressing the "Update" button will reacquire the current loop detection status for all LAN ports. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark. The default loop detection setting for all ports is "Enabled". If the settings do not use the loop detection for the entire system, loop detection settings for each LAN port cannot be made.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detect_system">3. Loop detection basic settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. loop detection basic settings page in this page you can specify whether the loop detection is used for the entire system and the blocking interval. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Loop detection basic settings page In this page you can specify whether the loop detection is used for the entire system and the blocking interval. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detection_basic_settings_2">3.1. Loop detection basic settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. loop detection basic settings loop detection for the entire system enable the loop detection will be enabled for the entire system. disable the loop detection will be disabled for the entire system. blocking interval auto when a loop is resolved, the loop detection state automatically returns to "normal". specify interval even if the loop has already been resolved, the loop detection status keeps "blocking" for the specified period from the time when the loop was detected.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Loop detection basic settings Loop detection for the entire system Enable The loop detection will be enabled for the entire system. Disable The loop detection will be disabled for the entire system. Blocking interval Auto When a loop is resolved, the loop detection state automatically returns to "Normal". Specify interval Even if the loop has already been resolved, the loop detection status keeps "Blocking" for the specified period from the time when the loop was detected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detect_if">4. Loop detection settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. loop detection settings page in this page you can specify whether the loop detection is used for the selected interface. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Loop detection settings page In this page you can specify whether the loop detection is used for the selected interface. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_loop_detect" doctitle="Loop" link="#loop_detection_settings_2">4.1. Loop detection settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. loop detection settings port the lan port for which settings are made is shown loop detection enabled the loop detection will be enabled for the selected interface. disabled the loop detection will be disabled for the selected interface.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Loop detection settings Port The LAN port for which settings are made is shown Loop detection Enabled The loop detection will be enabled for the selected interface. Disabled The loop detection will be disabled for the selected interface.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#title-box">Port mirroring</div><div class="search_word">port mirroring</div><div class="display_word">Port mirroring</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for changing the port mirroring settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for changing the port mirroring settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the port mirroring settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the port mirroring settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#port_mirroring_settings">2.1. Port mirroring settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. port mirroring settings the current settings for the port mirroring are shown. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box to delete the sniffer port setting. sniffer port displays the interface name of a sniffer port. monitored port displays the interface name of monitored ports. monitoring direction displays the monitoring direction for a monitored port. press the "new" button to display a page where you can create new settings for a sniffer port. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of a sniffer port. if you press the "delete" button, all sniffer ports whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. up to 4 sniffer ports can be configured. monitored ports that are already monitored cannot be monitored from another sniffer port. sniffer ports cannot be monitored from another sniffer port.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Port mirroring settings The current settings for the port mirroring are shown. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box to delete the sniffer port setting. Sniffer port Displays the interface name of a sniffer port. Monitored port Displays the interface name of monitored ports. Monitoring direction Displays the monitoring direction for a monitored port. Press the "New" button to display a page where you can create new settings for a sniffer port. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of a sniffer port. If you press the "Delete" button, all sniffer ports whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. Up to 4 sniffer ports can be configured. Monitored ports that are already monitored cannot be monitored from another sniffer port. Sniffer ports cannot be monitored from another sniffer port.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#mirroring_set">3. Port mirroring settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. port mirroring settings page this page is for changing the port mirroring settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Port mirroring settings page This page is for changing the port mirroring settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mirroring"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mirroring" doctitle="Port" link="#port_mirroring_settings_2">3.1. Port mirroring settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. port mirroring settings sniffer port when configuring new settings from the list, select the interface for a sniffer port. other interfaces that are already monitored and sniffer ports are not displayed in the list. when changing settings displays the interface name of the selected sniffer port. monitored port select the ports that will be monitored from a selected sniffer port. press the "select" button to display the “monitored port selection” dialog. monitored ports can be selected in the “monitored port selection” dialog by placing a checkmark in the corresponding checkbox, selecting the monitoring direction, and pressing the “ok” button.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Port mirroring settings Sniffer port When configuring new settings From the list, select the interface for a sniffer port. Other interfaces that are already monitored and sniffer ports are not displayed in the list. When changing settings Displays the interface name of the selected sniffer port. Monitored port Select the ports that will be monitored from a selected sniffer port. Press the "Select" button to display the “Monitored port selection” dialog. Monitored ports can be selected in the “Monitored port selection” dialog by placing a checkmark in the corresponding checkbox, selecting the monitoring direction, and pressing the “OK” button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#title-box">MLD snooping</div><div class="search_word">mld snooping</div><div class="display_word">MLD snooping</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the mld snooping.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the MLD snooping.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for mld snooping.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for MLD snooping.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld_snooping_settings">2.1. MLD snooping settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. mld snooping settings mld snooping settings are shown for each vlan id that is defined. a maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. when you press the "setting" button, a page where you can change the mld snooping settings for the selected vlan id will appear. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all vlan ids whose check box contains a check mark. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all vlan ids whose check box contains a check mark. default settings for the mld snooping are as follows. mld snooping : disabled version : mldv2 mld query : no transmission mld query transmission interval : 125 seconds multicast router port : none report suppression function : enabled fast leave function : disabled</div><div class="display_word">2.1. MLD snooping settings MLD snooping settings are shown for each VLAN ID that is defined. A maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. Press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. When you press the "Setting" button, a page where you can change the MLD snooping settings for the selected VLAN ID will appear. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all VLAN IDs whose check box contains a check mark. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all VLAN IDs whose check box contains a check mark. Default settings for the MLD snooping are as follows. MLD snooping : Disabled Version : MLDv2 MLD query : No transmission MLD query transmission interval : 125 Seconds Multicast router port : None Report suppression function : Enabled Fast leave function : Disabled</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld_config">3. MLD snooping settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. mld snooping settings page in this page you can make various settings for the mld snooping. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. MLD snooping settings page In this page you can make various settings for the MLD snooping. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld_snooping_settings_2">3.1. MLD snooping settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. mld snooping settings vlan id the vlan id for which settings are being made is shown. mld snooping enabled ( control transmission of ipv6 multicast packets ) enable mld snooping multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. this function monitors (snoops) mld messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. it can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. disabled ( flood ipv6 multicast packets ) disables the mld snooping multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same vlan. version select the mld version from the following items. mldv1 mldv2 mld query no transmission mld query transmission function is disabled. transmit periodically mld query transmission function is enabled. the transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds. multicast router port the multicast router port is the interface used to connect multicast routers. this device automatically learns the interface that receives the mld query as the multicast router port. also, you can statically configure the multicast router port. to statically configure multicast router ports, press the "select" button. the interfaces that belong to the specified vlan id are listed. then, check the check box of the interface to use as the multicast router port, and press the "confirm" button. report suppression function this function suppresses the network traffic load between the multicast router and the host. select from the following items. enable enabling this function transfers received mld report and leave messages to the mld querier at once. disable disabling this function transfers received mld report and leave messages to the mld querier as is without combining them. fast leave function fast leave function is a function not to check the receiver’s existence in the mld leave process. this function is effective when only one receiver is connected to the lan/sfp port. select from the following items. disable disable the fast leave function. the mld leave process sends a group-specific query to check the receivers' existence. enable enable the fast leave function. the mld leave process does not check the receiver’s existence.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. MLD snooping settings VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which settings are being made is shown. MLD snooping Enabled ( Control transmission of IPv6 multicast packets ) Enable MLD snooping Multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. This function monitors (snoops) MLD messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. It can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. Disabled ( Flood IPv6 multicast packets ) Disables the MLD snooping Multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same VLAN. Version Select the MLD version from the following items. MLDv1 MLDv2 MLD query No transmission MLD query transmission function is disabled. Transmit periodically MLD query transmission function is enabled. The transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds. Multicast router port The multicast router port is the interface used to connect multicast routers. This device automatically learns the interface that receives the MLD query as the multicast router port. Also, you can statically configure the multicast router port. To statically configure multicast router ports, press the "Select" button. The interfaces that belong to the specified VLAN ID are listed. Then, check the check box of the interface to use as the multicast router port, and press the "Confirm" button. Report suppression function This function suppresses the network traffic load between the multicast router and the host. Select from the following items. Enable Enabling this function transfers received MLD report and leave messages to the MLD querier at once. Disable Disabling this function transfers received MLD report and leave messages to the MLD querier as is without combining them. Fast leave function Fast leave function is a function not to check the receiver’s existence in the MLD leave process. This function is effective when only one receiver is connected to the LAN/SFP port. Select from the following items. Disable Disable the fast leave function. The MLD leave process sends a group-specific query to check the receivers' existence. Enable Enable the fast leave function. The MLD leave process does not check the receiver’s existence.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#title-box">Multicast basic settings</div><div class="search_word">multicast basic settings</div><div class="display_word">Multicast basic settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for basic settings related to multicast. specify processing method for unknown multicast frames. unknown multicast frames are frames destined to addresses not registered in igmp snooping. this product forwards unknown multicast frames to all ports as the default setting, which does not matter in low bandwidth environments. however, discarding instead of forwarding in high bandwidth environments may be recommended. if you want to discard unknown multicast frames and only forward some multicast frames that use link local addresses such as mdns, you can exclude them from discarding.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for basic settings related to multicast. Specify processing method for unknown multicast frames. Unknown multicast frames are frames destined to addresses not registered in IGMP snooping. This product forwards unknown multicast frames to all ports as the default setting, which does not matter in low bandwidth environments. However, discarding instead of forwarding in high bandwidth environments may be recommended. If you want to discard unknown multicast frames and only forward some multicast frames that use link local addresses such as mDNS, you can exclude them from discarding.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for multicast basic settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for multicast basic settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#system_settings">2.1. System settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. system settings displays the configuration for unknown multicast frames for the entire system. the table items are explained below. processing method for unknown multicast frames displays the processing method of unknown multicast frames. excluded frames from discarding (for all vlans) displays excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. System settings Displays the configuration for unknown multicast frames for the entire system. The table items are explained below. Processing method for unknown multicast frames Displays the processing method of unknown multicast frames. Excluded frames from discarding (for all VLANs) Displays excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#vlan_interface_settings">2.2. VLAN interface settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. vlan interface settings displays the configuration for unknown multicast frames for each vlan. the table items are explained below. vlan id vlan id is displayed. unknown multicast frame displays the processing method for unknown multicast frames for the target vlan. excluded frames from discarding displays the frames to be excluded from discarding when unknown multicast frames are configured to be discarded in the target vlan. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected vlan. press the "specify all" button to configure the settings for all vlan interfaces with the check box selected. press the "return to defaults" button to initialize the settings for all vlan interfaces with the check box selected.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. VLAN interface settings Displays the configuration for unknown multicast frames for each VLAN. The table items are explained below. VLAN ID VLAN ID is displayed. Unknown multicast frame Displays the processing method for unknown multicast frames for the target VLAN. Excluded frames from discarding Displays the frames to be excluded from discarding when unknown multicast frames are configured to be discarded in the target VLAN. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected VLAN. Press the "Specify all" button to configure the settings for all VLAN interfaces with the check box selected. Press the "Return to defaults" button to initialize the settings for all VLAN interfaces with the check box selected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#system">3. System settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. system settings page this page is for configuring unknown multicast frames for the entire system. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. System settings page This page is for configuring unknown multicast frames for the entire system. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#system_settings_2">3.1. System settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. system settings processing method for unknown multicast frames specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. flood discard excluded frames from discarding (for all vlans) specify the excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. specify the following conditions for excluded frames from discarding. link local address set all addresses in 224.0.0.0/24 and ff02::/112 as the target. this setting is for all vlans. this setting is not included in the number of configurable settings for the entire system.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. System settings Processing method for unknown multicast frames Specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. Flood Discard Excluded frames from discarding (for all VLANs) Specify the excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. Specify the following conditions for excluded frames from discarding. Link local address Set all addresses in 224.0.0.0/24 and ff02::/112 as the target. This setting is for all VLANs. This setting is not included in the number of configurable settings for the entire system.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#vlan">4. VLAN Interface settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. vlan interface settings page this page is for configuring unknown multicast frames for a vlan interface. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. VLAN Interface settings page This page is for configuring unknown multicast frames for a VLAN interface. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#vlan_interface_settings_2">4.1. VLAN interface settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. vlan interface settings vlan id displays the vlan id for which the setting is to be changed. processing method for unknown multicast frames specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. follow the system setting prefer the interface setting flood discard excluded frames from discarding specify the excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. specify the following conditions for excluded frames from discarding. destination address specify the address type from the following. specify the address enter the ipv4 multicast address into the text box. mdns set 224.0.0.251 as the target. dante set 224.0.0.230 - 233 as the target. ptp set 224.0.1.129 - 132 and 239.254.3.3 as the target. press the icon to add a new row. press the "delete" button to delete the row. you can specify up to 100 addresses to be excluded from the discarding for the entire system. if specifying dante as the address type, one item is counted as four items. if specifying ptp as the address type, one item is counted as five items.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. VLAN interface settings VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID for which the setting is to be changed. Processing method for unknown multicast frames Specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. Follow the system setting Prefer the interface setting Flood Discard Excluded frames from discarding Specify the excluded frames from discarding when configured to discard unknown multicast frames. Specify the following conditions for excluded frames from discarding. Destination address Specify the address type from the following. Specify the address Enter the IPv4 multicast address into the text box. mDNS Set 224.0.0.251 as the target. Dante Set 224.0.0.230 - 233 as the target. PTP Set 224.0.1.129 - 132 and 239.254.3.3 as the target. Press the icon to add a new row. Press the "Delete" button to delete the row. You can specify up to 100 addresses to be excluded from the discarding for the entire system. If specifying Dante as the address type, one item is counted as four items. If specifying PTP as the address type, one item is counted as five items.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#title-box">Multiple VLAN</div><div class="search_word">multiple vlan</div><div class="display_word">Multiple VLAN</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can make multiple vlan settings. the multiple vlan function is used to divide ports for one switch into different groups and prohibit communication between the groups. a single port can belong to multiple groups, so that the same network address can be assigned even to different groups. if both the multiple vlan and port-based vlan / tagged vlan are used, communication is not possible between ports that belong to different vlans, even if the ports belong to same multiple-vlan group.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can make multiple VLAN settings. The Multiple VLAN function is used to divide ports for one switch into different groups and prohibit communication between the groups. A single port can belong to multiple groups, so that the same network address can be assigned even to different groups. If both the multiple VLAN and port-based VLAN / tagged VLAN are used, communication is not possible between ports that belong to different VLANs, even if the ports belong to same multiple-VLAN group.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for multiple vlans.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for multiple VLANs.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#multiple_vlan_settings">2.1. Multiple VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. multiple vlan settings the multiple vlan group settings are shown for each lan port and logical interface. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings for the multiple vlan of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all lan ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all lan ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. in default settings, no interfaces belong to a group.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Multiple VLAN settings The multiple VLAN group settings are shown for each LAN port and logical interface. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings for the multiple VLAN of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all LAN ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all LAN ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. In default settings, no interfaces belong to a group.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#mvlan_config">3. Multiple VLAN settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. multiple vlan settings page in this page you can make the multiple vlan settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Multiple VLAN settings page In this page you can make the multiple VLAN settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#multiple_vlan_settings_2">3.1. Multiple VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. multiple vlan settings port the lan port or logical interface for which settings are made is shown group select the vlan groups to join. press the "select" button to display the "multiple vlan group selection" dialog box. groups to join a vlan can be selected by selecting the corresponding checkboxes in the “multiple vlan group selection” dialog and pressing the “ok” button.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Multiple VLAN settings Port The LAN port or logical interface for which settings are made is shown Group Select the VLAN groups to join. Press the "Select" button to display the "Multiple VLAN group selection" dialog box. Groups to join a VLAN can be selected by selecting the corresponding checkboxes in the “Multiple VLAN group selection” dialog and pressing the “OK” button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#title-box">Pass through</div><div class="search_word">pass through</div><div class="display_word">Pass through</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the pass through function. you can enable/disable the pass through function.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the pass through function. You can enable/disable the pass through function.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for pass through.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for pass through.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#eap_pass_through_setting">2.1. EAP pass through setting</div><div class="search_word">2.1. eap pass through setting the current setting is shown as to whether the eap pass through is enabled. eap frames are used for ieee 802.1x authentication. if eap pass through is enabled, the unit can be installed between an ieee 802.1x authentication switch and a computer. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. EAP pass through setting The current setting is shown as to whether the EAP pass through is enabled. EAP frames are used for IEEE 802.1X authentication. If EAP pass through is enabled, the unit can be installed between an IEEE 802.1X authentication switch and a computer. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#bpdu_pass_through_setting">2.2. BPDU pass through setting</div><div class="search_word">2.2. bpdu pass through setting the current setting is shown as to whether the bpdu pass through is enabled. bpdu frames are used in the spanning tree protocol (stp). if bpdu pass through is enabled, the unit can be installed between switches using stp. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. BPDU pass through setting The current setting is shown as to whether the BPDU pass through is enabled. BPDU frames are used in the spanning tree protocol (STP). If BPDU pass through is enabled, the unit can be installed between switches using STP. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#eap">3. EAP pass through settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. eap pass through settings page in this page you can specify whether the eap pass through is enabled. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. EAP pass through settings page In this page you can specify whether the EAP pass through is enabled. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#eap_pass_through_setting_2">3.1. EAP pass through setting</div><div class="search_word">3.1. eap pass through setting eap pass through enabled forwards received eap frames. disabled discards received eap frames.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. EAP pass through setting EAP pass through Enabled Forwards received EAP frames. Disabled Discards received EAP frames.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#bpdu">4. BPDU pass through settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. bpdu pass through settings page in this page you can specify whether the bpdu pass through is enabled. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. BPDU pass through settings page In this page you can specify whether the BPDU pass through is enabled. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_passthrough"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_passthrough" doctitle="Pass" link="#bpdu_pass_through_setting_2">4.1. BPDU pass through setting</div><div class="search_word">4.1. bpdu pass through setting bpdu pass through enabled forwards received bpdu frames. disabled discards received bpdu frames.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. BPDU pass through setting BPDU pass through Enabled Forwards received BPDU frames. Disabled Discards received BPDU frames.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#title-box">PoE</div><div class="search_word">poe</div><div class="display_word">PoE</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for changing the poe control settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for changing the PoE control settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the poe control settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the PoE control settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_basic_settings">2.1. PoE control basic settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. poe control basic settings the current settings of the poe control for the entire system are show. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. PoE control basic settings The current settings of the PoE control for the entire system are show. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_settings">2.2. PoE control settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. poe control settings poe control settings are shown for each interface that supports poe power supply. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. the default poe power supply setting is "enabled" and the default power priority setting is "low" for all interfaces that support poe power supply. if the poe control settings is disabled for the entire system, the poe control settings for each interface cannot be made.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. PoE control settings PoE control settings are shown for each interface that supports PoE power supply. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. The default PoE power supply setting is "Enabled" and the default power priority setting is "Low" for all interfaces that support PoE power supply. If the PoE control settings is disabled for the entire system, the PoE control settings for each interface cannot be made.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_system">3. PoE control basic settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. poe control basic settings page in this page you can enable/disable poe power supply for the entire system and set the guard band. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. PoE control basic settings page In this page you can enable/disable PoE power supply for the entire system and set the guard band. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_basic_settings_2">3.1. PoE control basic settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. poe control basic settings poe power supply for entire system enabled the poe power supply will be enabled for the entire system. disabled the poe power supply will be disabled for the entire system. guard band the guard band specifies the tolerance for the maximum power supply specified to avoid unintended power supply interruptions. the default guard band setting is "7" w, and the input range is 0 - 30.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. PoE control basic settings PoE power supply for entire system Enabled The PoE power supply will be enabled for the entire system. Disabled The PoE power supply will be disabled for the entire system. Guard band The guard band specifies the tolerance for the maximum power supply specified to avoid unintended power supply interruptions. The default guard band setting is "7" W, and the input range is 0 - 30.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_if">4. PoE control settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. poe control settings page in this page you can enable/disable poe power supply and set power priority for the selected interface. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. PoE control settings page In this page you can enable/disable PoE power supply and set power priority for the selected interface. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_poe_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_poe_control" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe_control_settings_2">4.1. PoE control settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. poe control settings port the interface for which settings are made is shown. poe power supply enabled the poe power supply will be enabled for the selected interface. disabled the poe power supply will be disabled for the selected interface. power priority select power priority from the following items. low high critical in descending order, the priority levels are critical , high , or low . if interfaces have the same priority setting, the interface with the lower interface number is prioritized. explanation sets the description text for the interface which supports poe power supply. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 64 characters can be inputted.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. PoE control settings Port The interface for which settings are made is shown. PoE power supply Enabled The PoE power supply will be enabled for the selected interface. Disabled The PoE power supply will be disabled for the selected interface. Power priority Select power priority from the following items. Low High Critical In descending order, the priority levels are Critical , High , or Low . If interfaces have the same priority setting, the interface with the lower interface number is prioritized. Explanation Sets the description text for the interface which supports PoE power supply. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 64 characters can be inputted.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#title-box">QoS</div><div class="search_word">qos</div><div class="display_word">QoS</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can edit the settings of the qos (quality of service) function.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can edit the settings of the QoS (Quality of Service) function.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for qos.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for QoS.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#setting_optimization_for_web_conferencing_software">2.1. Setting optimization for web conferencing software</div><div class="search_word">2.1. setting optimization for web conferencing software clicking the "next" button starts the process of optimizing qos settings for the selected web conferencing software.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Setting optimization for web conferencing software Clicking the "Next" button starts the process of optimizing QoS settings for the selected web conferencing software.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#system_settings">2.2. System settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. system settings displays the qos function settings for the entire system. the table items are explained below. qos function displays whether the qos function is enabled or disabled. scheduling method displays the scheduling method settings. cos - tx queue id conversion table displays the tx queue id setting corresponding to the cos value. dscp - tx queue id conversion table displays the tx queue id setting corresponding to the dscp value. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings to enable the qos function, you must disable flow control.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. System settings Displays the QoS function settings for the entire system. The table items are explained below. QoS function Displays whether the QoS function is enabled or disabled. Scheduling method Displays the scheduling method settings. CoS - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table Displays the Tx queue ID setting corresponding to the CoS value. DSCP - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table Displays the Tx queue ID setting corresponding to the DSCP value. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings To enable the QoS function, you must disable flow control.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#interface_settings">2.3. Interface settings</div><div class="search_word">2.3. interface settings the trust mode setting used by the qos function is shown for each lan port press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected lan port if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all lan ports whose check box contains a check mark the default trust mode setting for all ports is "cos" the default cos value for all ports is "0" by default. if the settings do not use the qos function, qos function settings cannot be made</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Interface settings The trust mode setting used by the QoS function is shown for each LAN port Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected LAN port If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all LAN ports whose check box contains a check mark The default trust mode setting for all ports is "CoS" The default CoS value for all ports is "0" by default. If the settings do not use the QoS function, QoS function settings cannot be made</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos_opti">3. Settings optimization page for web conferencing software</div><div class="search_word">3. settings optimization page for web conferencing software this page is for optimizing qos settings for web conferencing software. when you have inputted the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button. setting optimization for web conferencing software with change the following settings. - qos is enabled. - the trust mode is set to dscp for all ports. - the following dscp values used by zoom meetings are assigned to a high-priority tx queue. - the following dscp values used by microsoft teams are assigned to a high-priority tx queue. - all other dscp values are assigned to the lowest-priority tx queue.</div><div class="display_word">3. Settings optimization page for web conferencing software This page is for optimizing QoS settings for web conferencing software. When you have inputted the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button. Setting optimization for web conferencing software with change the following settings. - QoS is enabled. - The trust mode is set to DSCP for all ports. - The following DSCP values used by Zoom Meetings are assigned to a high-priority Tx queue. - The following DSCP values used by Microsoft Teams are assigned to a high-priority Tx queue. - All other DSCP values are assigned to the lowest-priority Tx queue.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#setting_optimization_for_web_conferencing_software_2">3.1. Setting optimization for web conferencing software</div><div class="search_word">3.1. setting optimization for web conferencing software applicable software scheduling is set to strict priority for all tx queues.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Setting optimization for web conferencing software Applicable software Scheduling is set to Strict Priority for all Tx queues.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos_basic">4. System settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. system settings page in this page you can specify whether the qos function is used. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button. be aware that if the settings do not use the qos function, all qos-related settings will be cleared.</div><div class="display_word">4. System settings page In this page you can specify whether the QoS function is used. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button. Be aware that if the settings do not use the QoS function, all QoS-related settings will be cleared.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#system_settings_2">4.1. System settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. system settings qos function disable the qos function will be disabled. at this time, all qos settings will be cleared. enable the qos function will be enabled. qos-related settings and commands can be executed. scheduling method weighted round robin frames are transmitted based on the weight ratio for each queue. frames can also be transmitted from a lower-priority queue, within a specified percentage. strict priority the data with the highest priority in the transmission queue will be transmitted first. when a frame is stored in a high-priority queue, it can never be transmitted from a lower-priority queue. cos - tx queue id conversion table sets the tx queue id corresponding to each cos value. the tx queue id setting range is 0 - 7, where the larger the id setting value, the higher the priority for sending frames. the "easy input" button allows the following settings to be entered at the same time in the cos - tx queue id conversion table. default settings these are the factory default settings. dscp - tx queue id conversion table sets the tx queue id corresponding to each dscp value. the tx queue id setting range is 0 - 7, where the larger the id setting value, the higher the priority for sending frames. when "display only rfc compliant values" is checked, only rfc-compliant dscp values will be displayed. however, all dscp values will be displayed on the input confirmation screen. the "easy input" button allows the following settings to be entered at the same time in the dscp - tx queue id conversion table. default settings these are the factory default settings. setting optimization for web conferencing software this assigns the dscp values used by the web conferencing software to the highest priority queue and the unused dscp values to the lowest priority queue. select at least one web conferencing software.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. System settings QoS function Disable The QoS function will be disabled. At this time, all QoS settings will be cleared. Enable The QoS function will be enabled. QoS-related settings and commands can be executed. Scheduling method Weighted Round Robin Frames are transmitted based on the weight ratio for each queue. Frames can also be transmitted from a lower-priority queue, within a specified percentage. Strict Priority The data with the highest priority in the transmission queue will be transmitted first. When a frame is stored in a high-priority queue, it can never be transmitted from a lower-priority queue. CoS - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table Sets the Tx queue ID corresponding to each CoS value. The Tx queue ID setting range is 0 - 7, where the larger the ID setting value, the higher the priority for sending frames. The "Easy Input" button allows the following settings to be entered at the same time in the CoS - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table. Default Settings These are the factory default settings. DSCP - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table Sets the Tx queue ID corresponding to each DSCP value. The Tx queue ID setting range is 0 - 7, where the larger the ID setting value, the higher the priority for sending frames. When "Display only RFC compliant values" is checked, only RFC-compliant DSCP values will be displayed. However, all DSCP values will be displayed on the input confirmation screen. The "Easy Input" button allows the following settings to be entered at the same time in the DSCP - Tx Queue ID Conversion Table. Default Settings These are the factory default settings. Setting optimization for web conferencing software This assigns the DSCP values used by the web conferencing software to the highest priority queue and the unused DSCP values to the lowest priority queue. Select at least one web conferencing software.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos_detail">5. Interface settings page</div><div class="search_word">5. interface settings page set the "trust mode" setting which means whether the transmission queue is determined based on the packet’s cos value or the dscp value or the port priority. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">5. Interface settings page Set the "Trust mode" setting which means whether the transmission queue is determined based on the packet’s CoS value or the DSCP value or the Port priority. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#interface_settings_2">5.1. Interface settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. interface settings port the lan port for which settings are made is shown. trust mode use cos value to determine transmission queue the packet’s cos value and the "cos - transmission queue id conversion table" are used to determine the transmission queue. if the received packet is an untagged packet, the default cos value is applied. a default cos value within the 0 - 7 range can be specified. if remarking is enabled, the cos value is remarked by the specified value, and the transmission queue is reassigned. for details on checking and changing the "cos - transmission queue id conversion table," refer to the command reference. use dscp value to determine transmission queue the packet’s dscp value and the "dscp - transmission queue id conversion table" are used to determine the transmission queue. if remarking is enabled, the dscp value is remarked by the specified value, and the transmission queue is reassigned. for details on checking and changing the "dscp - transmission queue id conversion table," refer to the command reference. use the priority specified for the port to determine the transmission queue the transmission queue is determined according to the "port priority order". select the transmission queue to be assigned as the port priority order in the range of 0 - 7. higher numbers indicate a higher priority order; with the default settings, 2 is selected. the setting can be changed only if the trust mode is set to "port priority".</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Interface settings Port The LAN port for which settings are made is shown. Trust mode Use CoS value to determine transmission queue The packet’s CoS value and the "CoS - Transmission queue ID conversion table" are used to determine the transmission queue. If the received packet is an untagged packet, the default CoS value is applied. A default CoS value within the 0 - 7 range can be specified. If remarking is enabled, the CoS value is remarked by the specified value, and the transmission queue is reassigned. For details on checking and changing the "CoS - Transmission queue ID conversion table," refer to the command reference. Use DSCP value to determine transmission queue The packet’s DSCP value and the "DSCP - Transmission queue ID conversion table" are used to determine the transmission queue. If remarking is enabled, the DSCP value is remarked by the specified value, and the transmission queue is reassigned. For details on checking and changing the "DSCP - Transmission queue ID conversion table," refer to the command reference. Use the priority specified for the port to determine the transmission queue The transmission queue is determined according to the "Port priority order". Select the transmission queue to be assigned as the port priority order in the range of 0 - 7. Higher numbers indicate a higher priority order; with the default settings, 2 is selected. The setting can be changed only if the trust mode is set to "Port priority".</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#trademark">6. Trademark Attributions</div><div class="search_word">6. trademark attributions zoom is a registered trademark or trademark of zoom video communications, inc. in the u.s.a. and other countries. microsoft teams is a registered trademark or trademark of microsoft corporation in the u.s.a. and other countries.</div><div class="display_word">6. Trademark Attributions Zoom is a registered trademark or trademark of Zoom Video Communications, Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Microsoft Teams is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#title-box">Storm control</div><div class="search_word">storm control</div><div class="display_word">Storm control</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for changing the storm control settings. if the storm control is enabled, the load on the unit can be reduced by discarding specific frames received that exceed bandwidth threshold values.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for changing the storm control settings. If the storm control is enabled, the load on the unit can be reduced by discarding specific frames received that exceed bandwidth threshold values.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the storm control settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the storm control settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#storm_control_settings">2.1. Storm control settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. storm control settings the current settings for the storm control are shown for each interface. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. port displays the interface name. target frame displays the target frames for storm control. upper limit for bandwidth percent displays the upper limit for the bandwidth percentage. frames received that exceed the upper limit value are discarded. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. the default settings will be applied to the settings on the storm control settings page. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. the storm control is disabled for all ports by default.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Storm control settings The current settings for the storm control are shown for each interface. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. Port Displays the interface name. Target frame Displays the target frames for storm control. Upper limit for bandwidth percent Displays the upper limit for the bandwidth percentage. Frames received that exceed the upper limit value are discarded. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. The default settings will be applied to the settings on the storm control settings page. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. The storm control is disabled for all ports by default.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#storm_control_setting">3. Storm control settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. storm control settings page this page is for storm control settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Storm control settings page This page is for storm control settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_storm_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_storm_control" doctitle="Storm" link="#storm_control_settings_2">3.1. Storm control settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. storm control settings port displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. storm control select the operation for the storm control from the following options. disabled enabled target frame broadcast frame enables broadcast storm control. multicast frame enables multicast storm control. unicast frame enables control for unicast frames sent from an unknown address. upper limit for bandwidth percent specifies the upper limit value for the bandwidth percentage. upper limit values can be specified to two decimal places. frames received that exceed the upper limit value are discarded. the same upper limit value is applied to all applicable frames.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Storm control settings Port Displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. Storm control Select the operation for the storm control from the following options. Disabled Enabled Target frame Broadcast frame Enables broadcast storm control. Multicast frame Enables multicast storm control. Unicast frame Enables control for unicast frames sent from an unknown address. Upper limit for bandwidth percent Specifies the upper limit value for the bandwidth percentage. Upper limit values can be specified to two decimal places. Frames received that exceed the upper limit value are discarded. The same upper limit value is applied to all applicable frames.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#title-box">Tag VLAN</div><div class="search_word">tag vlan</div><div class="display_word">Tag VLAN</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can make settings for tagged vlans.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can make settings for tagged VLANs.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for tagged vlans.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for tagged VLANs.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#tag_vlan_settings">2.1. Tag VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. tag vlan settings the various settings for tagged vlans are shown for each lan port and logical interface. "frame types that can be received" is displayed according to the operating mode and the vlan settings. (this item cannot be set in the settings page.) press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings for the tagged vlan of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all lan ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all lan ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. default settings for a tagged vlan are as follows. operating mode: access assigned vlan: default vlan (vlan id == 1) if the operation mode is "trunk," both the native vlan and the trunk vlan are shown as assigned vlans.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Tag VLAN settings The various settings for tagged VLANs are shown for each LAN port and logical interface. "Frame types that can be received" is displayed according to the operating mode and the VLAN settings. (This item cannot be set in the settings page.) Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings for the tagged VLAN of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all LAN ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized for all LAN ports and logical interfaces whose check box contains a check mark. Default settings for a tagged VLAN are as follows. Operating mode: Access Assigned VLAN: Default VLAN (VLAN ID == 1) If the operation mode is "Trunk," both the native VLAN and the trunk VLAN are shown as assigned VLANs.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#tagvlan_config">3. Tagged VLAN settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. tagged vlan settings page in this page you can make various settings related to tagged vlans. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Tagged VLAN settings page In this page you can make various settings related to tagged VLANs. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_tagvlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_tagvlan" doctitle="Tag" link="#tag_vlan_settings_2">3.1. Tag VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. tag vlan settings port the lan port or logical interface for which settings are made is shown operation mode access the corresponding port is specified as the access (untagged) port trunk the corresponding port is specified as the trunk (tagged) port associated vlan the content of the settings differs depending on the operating mode. 【 for an access port 】 accessvlan from the list, select the access port’s assigned vlan however, the following cannot be selected as access vlan. vlan for which frame forwarding is invalid 【 for a trunk port 】 nativevlan from the list, select the assignment-destination vlan (native vlan) for untagged frames received from the trunk port. however, the following cannot be selected as native vlan. vlan selected as trunk vlan vlan for which frame forwarding is invalid trunkvlan specify the assignment-destination vlan (trunk vlan) for tagged frames received at the trunk port. when you press the "select" button, a list of the selectable vlan ids appears in a "select vlan" dialog box. however, the following cannot be selected as trunk vlan. vlan selected as native vlan vlan for which frame forwarding is invalid place a check mark in the check box of the vlan id that you want to specify, and press the "ok" button. ingress filter select the ingress filter from the following items. this item is shown only if the operating mode is "trunk." enabled ( receive only if the vlan id of the incoming frame is the same as the associated vlan ) disabled ( receive all frames )</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Tag VLAN settings Port The LAN port or logical interface for which settings are made is shown Operation Mode Access The corresponding port is specified as the access (untagged) port Trunk The corresponding port is specified as the trunk (tagged) port Associated VLAN The content of the settings differs depending on the operating mode. 【 For an access port 】 AccessVLAN From the list, select the access port’s assigned VLAN However, the following cannot be selected as access VLAN. VLAN for which frame forwarding is invalid 【 For a trunk port 】 NativeVLAN From the list, select the assignment-destination VLAN (native VLAN) for untagged frames received from the trunk port. However, the following cannot be selected as native VLAN. VLAN selected as trunk VLAN VLAN for which frame forwarding is invalid TrunkVLAN Specify the assignment-destination VLAN (trunk VLAN) for tagged frames received at the trunk port. When you press the "Select" button, a list of the selectable VLAN IDs appears in a "Select VLAN" dialog box. However, the following cannot be selected as trunk VLAN. VLAN selected as native VLAN VLAN for which frame forwarding is invalid Place a check mark in the check box of the VLAN ID that you want to specify, and press the "OK" button. Ingress Filter Select the ingress filter from the following items. This item is shown only if the operating mode is "Trunk." Enabled ( Receive only if the VLAN ID of the incoming frame is the same as the associated VLAN ) Disabled ( Receive all frames )</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#title-box">Create VLAN</div><div class="search_word">create vlan</div><div class="display_word">Create VLAN</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can create or delete vlans.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can create or delete VLANs.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for creating a vlan.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for creating a VLAN.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#vlan_list">2.1. VLAN list</div><div class="search_word">2.1. vlan list information for the defined vlans is displayed. a maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. you can press the sort switch to sort by each item. press the "new" button to access a page where you can create a new vlan. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected vlan. if you press the "delete" button, all vlans whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. the following vlan cannot be deleted. default vlan ( vlan id = 1 ) up to 256 vlans can be created including the default vlan (vlan id == 1).</div><div class="display_word">2.1. VLAN list Information for the defined VLANs is displayed. A maximum of 20 items can be displayed for one page. Press or or enter a numeric value to switch between pages. You can press the sort switch to sort by each item. Press the "New" button to access a page where you can create a new VLAN. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected VLAN. If you press the "Delete" button, all VLANs whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. The following VLAN cannot be deleted. Default VLAN ( VLAN ID = 1 ) Up to 256 VLANs can be created including the default VLAN (VLAN ID == 1).</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#vlan_config">3. VLAN settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. vlan settings page in this page you can create a new vlan or edit the settings of an already-defined vlan. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. VLAN settings page In this page you can create a new VLAN or edit the settings of an already-defined VLAN. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_detail_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_detail_vlan" doctitle="Create" link="#vlan_settings">3.1. VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. vlan settings vlan id to create a new vlan, enter the desired vlan id within the valid range (2—​4094) the smallest id of the unregistered vlan ids is entered as the default value if an already-registered vlan id is entered, it is handled as a change in settings when changing the settings, it is not possible to change the vlan id name specify the name of the vlan using up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. the default vlan (vlan id == 1) cannot be renamed a space and "?" cannot be used in the name of the vlan. frame transmission select frame forwarding from the following items. enable frame transmission disable frame transmission frame forwarding cannot be disabled for the default vlan (vlan id == 1) explanation sets the interface description text. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ?. up to 80 characters can be inputted.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. VLAN settings VLAN ID To create a new VLAN, enter the desired VLAN ID within the valid range (2—​4094) The smallest ID of the unregistered VLAN IDs is entered as the default value If an already-registered VLAN ID is entered, it is handled as a change in settings When changing the settings, it is not possible to change the VLAN ID Name Specify the name of the VLAN using up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. The default VLAN (VLAN ID == 1) cannot be renamed A space and "?" cannot be used in the name of the VLAN. Frame transmission Select frame forwarding from the following items. Enable frame transmission Disable frame transmission Frame forwarding cannot be disabled for the default VLAN (VLAN ID == 1) Explanation Sets the interface description text. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ?. Up to 80 characters can be inputted.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#title-box">Cable diagnostics</div><div class="search_word">cable diagnostics</div><div class="display_word">Cable diagnostics</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary the cable diagnostic function can be used to easily check whether or not the lan cable connected to the lan port has a faulty connection/circuit. it can be used to troubleshoot network problems or as an easy way to check cables when setting up networks.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary The cable diagnostic function can be used to easily check whether or not the LAN cable connected to the LAN port has a faulty connection/circuit. It can be used to troubleshoot network problems or as an easy way to check cables when setting up networks.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#section2">2. Cable diagnostics page</div><div class="search_word">2. cable diagnostics page in this page you can diagnose cables. to diagnose a cable, select the port and press the "execute" button. press the "clear" button to clear the diagnostic results shown.</div><div class="display_word">2. Cable diagnostics page In this page you can diagnose cables. To diagnose a cable, select the port and press the "Execute" button. Press the "Clear" button to clear the diagnostic results shown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#cable_diagnostics">2.1. Cable diagnostics</div><div class="search_word">2.1. cable diagnostics port port diagnosed is displayed. result the status of the cable connected to the lan port is displayed. ok : the cable is electrically connected. open : either a device is not connected on the opposite end or the cable is faulty. short : a short-circuit occurred. distance to cable fault if "open" or "short" is indicated in results, then the distance from the lan port to the cable fault is displayed in meters. estimated cable length if "ok" is indicated in results, then the estimated cable length is displayed in meters. estimated cable length is undetermined when the opposite port is linking up at a link speed of less than 1g or shutdown.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Cable diagnostics Port Port diagnosed is displayed. Result The status of the cable connected to the LAN port is displayed. OK : The cable is electrically connected. Open : Either a device is not connected on the opposite end or the cable is faulty. Short : A short-circuit occurred. Distance to cable fault If "Open" or "Short" is indicated in results, then the distance from the LAN port to the cable fault is displayed in meters. Estimated cable length If "OK" is indicated in results, then the estimated cable length is displayed in meters. Estimated cable length is undetermined when the opposite port is linking up at a link speed of less than 1G or shutdown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_command"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_command" doctitle="Command" link="#title-box">Command execution</div><div class="search_word">command execution</div><div class="display_word">Command execution</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_command"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_command" doctitle="Command" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can perform operations related to command execution.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can perform operations related to command execution.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_command"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_command" doctitle="Command" link="#section2">2. Command execution page</div><div class="search_word">2. command execution page in this page you can execute commands and acquire the results of command execution. after entering the command in the command entry field,. press the "execute" button to execute the command if you press the "clear" button, the contents of the command entry field are cleared.</div><div class="display_word">2. Command execution page In this page you can execute commands and acquire the results of command execution. After entering the command in the command entry field,. press the "Execute" button to execute the command If you press the "Clear" button, the contents of the command entry field are cleared.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_command"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_command" doctitle="Command" link="#command_execution">2.1. Command execution</div><div class="search_word">2.1. command execution command input in the command entry field, enter the setting in console command format. you can enter multiple commands together by separating them with line-returns. you can enter up to 300 lines. execution always starts with the specially-privileged exec mode (enable). enter the mode change command each time. for details on commands to enter, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the network device product information page and network device technical information page . the following commands cannot be entered. ping ping6 do reload cold start firmware-update execute erase startup-config show startup-config show tech-support quit disable logout exit ( when in special privilege exec mode ) command execution result displays the command execution result. success …​ shown if the command executed successfully. error …​ shown if the command you entered could not be executed. prohibited …​ shown if a prohibited command was entered. command execution log the console log is output as the command execution record. the command execution log will not necessarily always show the identical result as when the console setting operation was executed. by pressing the "obtain as text file" button, you can acquire the contents of the command execution log as a text file. the name of the acquired file is "command_yyyymmddhhmmss.txt". yyyy …​ a.d. ( 4 digit ) mm …​ month ( 2 digit ) dd …​ day ( 2 digit ) hh …​ hours ( 2 digit ) mm …​ minutes ( 2 digit ) ss …​ seconds ( 2 digit )</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Command execution Command input In the command entry field, enter the setting in console command format. You can enter multiple commands together by separating them with line-returns. You can enter up to 300 lines. Execution always starts with the specially-privileged EXEC mode (enable). Enter the mode change command each time. For details on commands to enter, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the Network device product information page and Network device technical information page . The following commands cannot be entered. ping ping6 do reload cold start firmware-update execute erase startup-config show startup-config show tech-support quit disable logout exit ( When in special privilege EXEC mode ) Command execution result Displays the command execution result. Success …​ Shown if the command executed successfully. Error …​ Shown if the command you entered could not be executed. Prohibited …​ Shown if a prohibited command was entered. Command execution log The console log is output as the command execution record. The command execution log will not necessarily always show the identical result as when the console setting operation was executed. By pressing the "Obtain as text file" button, you can acquire the contents of the command execution log as a text file. The name of the acquired file is "command_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.txt". YYYY …​ A.D. ( 4 Digit ) MM …​ Month ( 2 Digit ) DD …​ Day ( 2 Digit ) hh …​ Hours ( 2 Digit ) mm …​ Minutes ( 2 Digit ) ss …​ Seconds ( 2 Digit )</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#title-box">Community</div><div class="search_word">community</div><div class="display_word">Community</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring snmp community settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring SNMP community settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for community.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for Community.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#list_of_communities">2.1. List of communities</div><div class="search_word">2.1. list of communities information for the currently registered community are shown. the table items are explained below. community name registered communities name are shown. access mode access mode set to community are shown. if you press the "new" button, a page appears in which you can create a new community. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected community. if you press the "delete" button, all communities whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. up to 16 communities can be registered.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. List of communities Information for the currently registered community are shown. The table items are explained below. Community name Registered communities name are shown. Access mode Access mode set to community are shown. If you press the "New" button, a page appears in which you can create a new community. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected community. If you press the "Delete" button, all communities whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. Up to 16 communities can be registered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#community_setting">3. Community setting page</div><div class="search_word">3. community setting page this page is for configuring snmp community settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Community setting page This page is for configuring SNMP community settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_community"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_community" doctitle="Community" link="#community_settings">3.1. Community settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. community settings community name sets the community name. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , " , and ¥ . up to 32 characters can be inputted. if there are settings related to the community (traps, access condition to snmp server), also change those settings. check the check box and press the "ok" button to change the before change community name used in the following settings to the after change community name. trap destination settings access condition to snmp server this item will be displayed only when changing settings. if you check the check box, the "show details" button will be displayed on the confirmation page. when the "show details" button is pressed, a new window is opened and the following items are displayed. settings to be changed a list of settings to which the change of community name will be applied is displayed. settings to be deleted a list of settings which will be overwritten and deleted due to change community name is displayed. access mode select the access mode of the community from the list below. readonly only read to mib is allowed. readwrite both read and write to mib are allowed.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Community settings Community name Sets the community name. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , " , and ¥ . Up to 32 characters can be inputted. If there are settings related to the community (traps, access condition to SNMP server), also change those settings. Check the check box and press the "OK" button to change the before change community name used in the following settings to the after change community name. Trap destination settings Access condition to SNMP server This item will be displayed only when changing settings. If you check the check box, the "Show details" button will be displayed on the confirmation page. When the "Show details" button is pressed, a new window is opened and the following items are displayed. Settings to be changed A list of settings to which the change of community name will be applied is displayed. Settings to be deleted A list of settings which will be overwritten and deleted due to change community name is displayed. Access mode Select the access mode of the community from the list below. ReadOnly Only read to MIB is allowed. ReadWrite Both read and write to MIB are allowed.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#title-box">CONFIG management</div><div class="search_word">config management</div><div class="display_word">CONFIG management</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can import and export config files. this unit operates in accordance with its config file (settings data). a config file consists of a combination of multiple commands.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can import and export CONFIG files. This unit operates in accordance with its CONFIG file (settings data). A CONFIG file consists of a combination of multiple commands.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for config file management. here you can start the process of importing a config file from the pc, or the process of exporting a config file to the pc.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for CONFIG file management. Here you can start the process of importing a CONFIG file from the PC, or the process of exporting a CONFIG file to the PC.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#import_config_file">2.1. Import CONFIG file</div><div class="search_word">2.1. import config file press the "next" button to begin the process of importing a config file from the pc.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Import CONFIG file Press the "Next" button to begin the process of importing a CONFIG file from the PC.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#export_config_file">2.2. Export CONFIG file</div><div class="search_word">2.2. export config file press the "next" button to begin the process of exporting a config file to the pc.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Export CONFIG file Press the "Next" button to begin the process of exporting a CONFIG file to the PC.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#section3">3. Import CONFIG file page</div><div class="search_word">3. import config file page in this page, a config file from the pc can be copied to internal non-volatile memory, updating the config file. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button. if the currently used config file is the same as the import-destination config file, the unit restarts automatically after the import has ended successfully.</div><div class="display_word">3. Import CONFIG file page In this page, a CONFIG file from the PC can be copied to internal non-volatile memory, updating the CONFIG file. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button. If the currently used CONFIG file is the same as the import-destination CONFIG file, the unit restarts automatically after the import has ended successfully.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#import_config_file_2">3.1. Import CONFIG file</div><div class="search_word">3.1. import config file currently-used config file the currently used config file is shown. file to import press the "select a file" button to display the file selection dialog box. import-destination file select the import-destination config file in internal non-volatile memory.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Import CONFIG file Currently-used CONFIG file The currently used CONFIG file is shown. File to import Press the "Select a file" button to display the file selection dialog box. Import-destination file Select the import-destination CONFIG file in internal non-volatile memory.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#section4">4. Export CONFIG file page</div><div class="search_word">4. export config file page in this page you can copy a config file from internal non-volatile memory to the pc. when you have finished entry, check the entered content and press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Export CONFIG file page In this page you can copy a CONFIG file from internal non-volatile memory to the PC. When you have finished entry, check the entered content and press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_config" doctitle="CONFIG" link="#export_config_file_2">4.1. Export CONFIG file</div><div class="search_word">4.1. export config file currently-used config file the currently used config file is shown. file to export select the config file in internal non-volatile memory that you want to export.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Export CONFIG file Currently-used CONFIG file The currently used CONFIG file is shown. File to export Select the CONFIG file in internal non-volatile memory that you want to export.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#title-box">Update firmware</div><div class="search_word">update firmware</div><div class="display_word">Update firmware</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can perform operations related to firmware update.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can perform operations related to firmware update.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for firmware update. you can start the procedure for updating the firmware via the network. various settings for updating the firmware via the network are displayed.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for firmware update. You can start the procedure for updating the firmware via the network. Various settings for updating the firmware via the network are displayed.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#current_firmware_revision">2.1. Current firmware revision</div><div class="search_word">2.1. current firmware revision the currently-used firmware revision is shown.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Current firmware revision The currently-used firmware revision is shown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#update_firmware_from_pc">2.2. Update firmware from PC</div><div class="search_word">2.2. update firmware from pc when you press the "next" button, the procedure for updating the firmware from the pc will be started.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Update firmware from PC When you press the "Next" button, the procedure for updating the firmware from the PC will be started.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#update_firmware_via_network">2.3. Update firmware via network</div><div class="search_word">2.3. update firmware via network when you press the "next" button, the procedure for updating the firmware via the network will be started. various settings for updating the firmware via the network are displayed. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Update firmware via network When you press the "Next" button, the procedure for updating the firmware via the network will be started. Various settings for updating the firmware via the network are displayed. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#section3">3. Update firmware from PC page</div><div class="search_word">3. update firmware from pc page in this page you can specify the firmware file placed on the pc from which you are accessing the web gui, and perform the firmware update. in "select file," select the firmware file that you want to use for the update, and press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button. note that the unit will automatically restart when the firmware has been updated successfully.</div><div class="display_word">3. Update firmware from PC page In this page you can specify the firmware file placed on the PC from which you are accessing the web GUI, and perform the firmware update. In "Select file," select the firmware file that you want to use for the update, and press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button. Note that the unit will automatically restart when the firmware has been updated successfully.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#update_firmware_from_pc_2">3.1. Update firmware from PC</div><div class="search_word">3.1. update firmware from pc specify update file selects the firmware file used for the update</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Update firmware from PC Specify update file Selects the firmware file used for the update</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#section4">4. Update firmware via network page</div><div class="search_word">4. update firmware via network page in this page you can download a firmware file from a web server, and perform the firmware update. this function lets you easily perform the entire process of checking for the latest firmware, downloading it, and updating the firmware. when you open the page, the revision of the firmware file on the web server is automatically checked. if the download url is the yamaha website and an updateable firmware revision is found. the "ok" button displays a guide to the software license agreement website. please read the contents on the website and press the "ok" button if you agree to the terms. press the "ok" button to start downloading the firmware file from the webserver. note that the unit will automatically restart when the firmware has been updated successfully.</div><div class="display_word">4. Update firmware via network page In this page you can download a firmware file from a web server, and perform the firmware update. This function lets you easily perform the entire process of checking for the latest firmware, downloading it, and updating the firmware. When you open the page, the revision of the firmware file on the web server is automatically checked. If the download URL is the Yamaha website and an updateable firmware revision is found. The "OK" button displays a guide to the software license agreement website. Please read the contents on the website and press the "OK" button if you agree to the terms. Press the "OK" button to start downloading the firmware file from the webserver. Note that the unit will automatically restart when the firmware has been updated successfully.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#update_firmware_via_network_2">4.1. Update firmware via network</div><div class="search_word">4.1. update firmware via network current firmware revision the revision of the currently-used firmware file is shown. firmware revision available for update updatable revisions of the firmware files on the web server are shown.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Update firmware via network Current firmware revision The revision of the currently-used firmware file is shown. Firmware revision available for update Updatable revisions of the firmware files on the web server are shown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#section5">5. Firmware update basic settings page</div><div class="search_word">5. firmware update basic settings page in this page you can make various settings for updating the firmware via the network. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">5. Firmware update basic settings page In this page you can make various settings for updating the firmware via the network. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_firm"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_firm" doctitle="Update" link="#firmware_update_basic_settings">5.1. Firmware update basic settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. firmware update basic settings download source url this is the setting of the url at which the firmware is located. http proxy server fqdn or ip address specify a proxy server fqdn or ip address that is no more than 255 single-byte alphanumeric or symbol characters long. port number specifies the port number of the proxy server. input a port number from 1 to 65535. https proxy server fqdn or ip address specify a proxy server fqdn or ip address that is no more than 255 single-byte alphanumeric or symbol characters long. port number specifies the port number of the proxy server. input a port number from 1 to 65535. revision downgrade this setting permits or forbids rewriting to an older version of firmware. timeout this setting specifies the timeout time during the process of updating the firmware via the network.</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Firmware update basic settings Download source URL This is the setting of the URL at which the firmware is located. HTTP proxy server FQDN or IP address Specify a proxy server FQDN or IP address that is no more than 255 single-byte alphanumeric or symbol characters long. Port number Specifies the port number of the proxy server. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. HTTPS proxy server FQDN or IP address Specify a proxy server FQDN or IP address that is no more than 255 single-byte alphanumeric or symbol characters long. Port number Specifies the port number of the proxy server. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. Revision downgrade This setting permits or forbids rewriting to an older version of firmware. Timeout This setting specifies the timeout time during the process of updating the firmware via the network.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#title-box">L2MS settings</div><div class="search_word">l2ms settings</div><div class="display_word">L2MS settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for changing the l2ms settings. l2ms ( layer2 management service ) is a function for managing yamaha network devices at the layer 2 level. these settings can be used to enable/disable l2ms units or specify frame input permission settings using l2ms filters.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for changing the L2MS settings. L2MS ( Layer2 Management Service ) is a function for managing Yamaha network devices at the layer 2 level. These settings can be used to enable/disable L2MS units or specify frame input permission settings using L2MS filters.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the l2ms settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the L2MS settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_settings">2.1. L2MS settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. l2ms settings the current settings of the l2ms are show. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. L2MS settings The current settings of the L2MS are show. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_filter_settings">2.2. L2MS filter settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. l2ms filter settings the current settings for the l2ms filter are shown for each interface. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. port displays the interface name. rejection of l2ms frame displays the filter setting for blocking l2ms frames. rejection of non-l2ms frame displays the filter settings for blocking non-l2ms frames. press the "setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. if you press the "specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. the default settings will be applied to the settings on the l2ms filter settings page. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. each of the default settings are shown below. rejection of l2ms frame : disabled rejection of non-l2ms frame : disabled</div><div class="display_word">2.2. L2MS filter settings The current settings for the L2MS filter are shown for each interface. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box for bulk settings or to initialize the settings. Port Displays the interface name. Rejection of L2MS frame Displays the filter setting for blocking L2MS frames. Rejection of Non-L2MS frame Displays the filter settings for blocking non-L2MS frames. Press the "Setting" button to display the page where you can change the settings of the selected interface. If you press the "Specify all" button, the settings can be changed for all interfaces whose check box is selected. The default settings will be applied to the settings on the L2MS filter settings page. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all interfaces whose check boxes are selected. Each of the default settings are shown below. Rejection of L2MS frame : Disabled Rejection of Non-L2MS frame : Disabled</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_setting">3. L2MS settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. l2ms settings page in this page you can enable/disable l2ms. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. L2MS settings page In this page you can enable/disable L2MS. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_settings_2">3.1. L2MS settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. l2ms settings l2ms enabled l2ms will be enabled. this device functions as an l2ms agent and can be controlled by the l2ms manager. disabled l2ms will be disabled. l2ms frames can be transmitted in the same manner as non-l2ms frames, but cannot be controlled by the l2ms manager.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. L2MS settings L2MS Enabled L2MS will be enabled. This device functions as an L2MS agent and can be controlled by the L2MS manager. Disabled L2MS will be disabled. L2MS frames can be transmitted in the same manner as non-L2MS frames, but cannot be controlled by the L2MS manager.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_filter_setting">4. L2MS filter settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. l2ms filter settings page this page is for l2ms filter settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. L2MS filter settings page This page is for L2MS filter settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms_filter_settings_2">4.1. L2MS filter settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. l2ms filter settings port displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. rejection of l2ms frame select the operation for the filter for blocking l2ms frames from the following options. disabled enabled rejection of non-l2ms frame select the operation for the filter for blocking non-l2ms frames from the following options. disabled enabled if both filters are enabled, all frames are rejected at the interface. be aware that it will no longer be possible to access the gui form a port where the non-l2ms filter is enabled.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. L2MS filter settings Port Displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. Rejection of L2MS frame Select the operation for the filter for blocking L2MS frames from the following options. Disabled Enabled Rejection of Non-L2MS frame Select the operation for the filter for blocking non-L2MS frames from the following options. Disabled Enabled If both filters are enabled, all frames are rejected at the interface. Be aware that it will no longer be possible to access the GUI form a port where the non-L2MS filter is enabled.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#title-box">LLDP</div><div class="search_word">lldp</div><div class="display_word">LLDP</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#this_page_is_for_changing_lldp_settings_and_viewing_neighbor_information_obtained_by_lldp">1.1. This page is for changing LLDP settings and viewing neighbor information obtained by LLDP.</div><div class="search_word">1.1. this page is for changing lldp settings and viewing neighbor information obtained by lldp. * lldp (link layer discovery protocol) is a protocol to collect neighbor information. in this unit, following operations are supported. unit information is periodically transmitted to neighboring devices. reception of information from neighboring devices. display of received neighbor information</div><div class="display_word">1.1. This page is for changing LLDP settings and viewing neighbor information obtained by LLDP. * LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a protocol to collect neighbor information. In this unit, following operations are supported. Unit information is periodically transmitted to neighboring devices. Reception of information from neighboring devices. Display of received neighbor information</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the lldp.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the LLDP.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#neighbor_information_list">2.1. Neighbor information list</div><div class="search_word">2.1. neighbor information list pressing the "next " button displays a page where acquired neighbor information can be viewed. the "next" button is disabled if the lldp function is disabled.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Neighbor information list Pressing the "Next " button displays a page where acquired neighbor information can be viewed. The "Next" button is disabled if the LLDP function is disabled.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#system_settings">2.2. System settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. system settings displays the lldp settings for the system. the table items are explained below. lldp displays whether lldp is enabled or disabled for the entire system. auto-configure via lldp function the current settings for the auto-configure via lldp function are displayed. press the "setting" button to display the page for configuring the system.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. System settings Displays the LLDP settings for the system. The table items are explained below. LLDP Displays whether LLDP is enabled or disabled for the entire system. Auto-configure via LLDP function The current settings for the auto-configure via LLDP function are displayed. Press the "Setting" button to display the page for configuring the system.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#interface_settings">2.3. Interface settings</div><div class="search_word">2.3. interface settings displays the lldp settings for the interface. the table items are explained below. port displays the interface name. lldp frame transmission and reception displays the lldp frame transmission and reception mode for the target interface. press the "setting" button to display the page for configuring the selected interface. press the "specify all" button to configure the settings for all interfaces with the check box selected. press the "return to defaults" button to initialize the settings for all interfaces with the check box selected.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Interface settings Displays the LLDP settings for the interface. The table items are explained below. Port Displays the interface name. LLDP frame transmission and reception Displays the LLDP frame transmission and reception mode for the target interface. Press the "Setting" button to display the page for configuring the selected interface. Press the "Specify all" button to configure the settings for all interfaces with the check box selected. Press the "Return to defaults" button to initialize the settings for all interfaces with the check box selected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#neighbor_list">3. Neighbor information list page</div><div class="search_word">3. neighbor information list page this page displays a summary of neighbor information obtained by lldp. displays ports where neighbor information was received and part of that information.</div><div class="display_word">3. Neighbor information list page This page displays a summary of neighbor information obtained by LLDP. Displays ports where neighbor information was received and part of that information.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#neighbor_information_list_2">3.1. Neighbor information list</div><div class="search_word">3.1. neighbor information list displays a list of neighbor information obtained by lldp. pressing the “detail” button displays a page for viewing details about the selected neighbor information. you can search neighbor information from the “search” box. press to execute the search. press to clear the search. you can use regular expressions shown below in search keywords. syntax explanation a the character “a” abc the characters “abc” [abc] one character, either “a”, “b” or “c” [a-c] one character between “a” and “c” [^abc] an arbitrary character that is neither “a”, “b” or “c” . an arbitrary character a+ at least one “a” character a* at least zero “a” characters a? zero or one “a” character ^a a string that begins with “a” a$ a string that ends with “a” abc|def|ghi “abc”, “def” or “ghi” a{2} two “a” characters (aa) a\{2,} two or more “a” characters (aa, aaa, aaaa…​) a\{2,3} two to three “a” characters (aa, aaa) ¥b word breaks, such as spaces ¥b any character besides ¥b ¥d an arbitrary number (same as [0-9]) ¥d any character besides numbers (same as [^0-9]) ¥s single breaking character ¥s any single character besides ¥s ¥w alphanumeric characters including underlines (same as [a-za-z0-9_]) ¥w any character besides ¥w press to update information to the latest information. the number of search results to display at one time can be selected by pressing "display number" on the "select" menu. if the number of neighbor information results exceeds the "display number" setting, the range of neighbor information results can be changed by pressing . press the corresponding button to sort the list. with default settings, results are sorted in ascending order of the receiving port. pressing again switches between ascending and descending order. “receiving ports” are sorted in order of port number. other items are sorted alphabetically based on the character string.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Neighbor information list Displays a list of neighbor information obtained by LLDP. Pressing the “Detail” button displays a page for viewing details about the selected neighbor information. You can search neighbor information from the “Search” box. Press to execute the search. Press to clear the search. You can use regular expressions shown below in search keywords. Syntax Explanation A The character “A” ABC The characters “ABC” [ABC] One character, either “A”, “B” or “C” [A-C] One character between “A” and “C” [^ABC] An arbitrary character that is neither “A”, “B” or “C” . An arbitrary character A+ At least one “A” character A* At least zero “A” characters A? Zero or one “A” character ^A A string that begins with “A” A$ A string that ends with “A” ABC|DEF|GHI “ABC”, “DEF” or “GHI” A{2} Two “A” characters (AA) A\{2,} Two or more “A” characters (AA, AAA, AAAA…​) A\{2,3} Two to three “A” characters (AA, AAA) ¥b Word breaks, such as spaces ¥B Any character besides ¥b ¥d An arbitrary number (same as [0-9]) ¥D Any character besides numbers (same as [^0-9]) ¥s Single breaking character ¥S Any single character besides ¥s ¥w Alphanumeric characters including underlines (same as [A-Za-z0-9_]) ¥W Any character besides ¥w Press to update information to the latest information. The number of search results to display at one time can be selected by pressing "Display number" on the "Select" menu. If the number of neighbor information results exceeds the "display number" setting, the range of neighbor information results can be changed by pressing . Press the corresponding button to sort the list. With default settings, results are sorted in ascending order of the receiving port. Pressing again switches between ascending and descending order. “Receiving ports” are sorted in order of port number. Other items are sorted alphabetically based on the character string.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#neighbor_detail">4. Neighbor information detail page</div><div class="search_word">4. neighbor information detail page this page displays details for neighbor information selected on the neighbor information page.</div><div class="display_word">4. Neighbor information detail page This page displays details for neighbor information selected on the neighbor information page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#details_of_neighbor_information">4.1. Details of neighbor information</div><div class="search_word">4.1. details of neighbor information each information item in the obtained neighbor information is displayed. if obtained neighbor information contains no information for an item, “-” is displayed. for details on the information displayed, refer to network device technical information page .</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Details of neighbor information Each information item in the obtained neighbor information is displayed. If obtained neighbor information contains no information for an item, “-” is displayed. For details on the information displayed, refer to Network device technical information page .</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#system_setting">5. System settings page</div><div class="search_word">5. system settings page this page is for configuring the lldp settings for the system. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">5. System settings page This page is for configuring the LLDP settings for the system. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content of the confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#system_settings_2">5.1. System settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. system settings lldp specify whether to enable or disable lldp for the entire system. auto-configure via lldp function specify whether to enable or disable lldp auto-configuration function. to use lldp auto-configuration, the connected device must support lldp auto configuration. to confirm supported models, check the "lldp auto-configuration" page in the unit’s technical documentation. the lldp auto-configuration function includes the following features. dante optimization setting when certain dante-enabled yamaha device is connected to the unit, optimal settings for using dante is automatically applied. notification before power is shut off if the poe power supply is scheduled to be shut off at a port connected to a yamaha wireless ap device, notification of the shut-off timing is sent in advance and the yamaha wireless ap device is prepared to have the power shut off.</div><div class="display_word">5.1. System settings LLDP Specify whether to enable or disable LLDP for the entire system. Auto-configure via LLDP function Specify whether to enable or disable LLDP auto-configuration function. To use LLDP auto-configuration, the connected device must support LLDP auto configuration. To confirm supported models, check the "LLDP Auto-Configuration" page in the unit’s technical documentation. The LLDP auto-configuration function includes the following features. Dante optimization setting When certain Dante-enabled Yamaha device is connected to the unit, optimal settings for using Dante is automatically applied. Notification before power is shut off If the PoE power supply is scheduled to be shut off at a port connected to a Yamaha wireless AP device, notification of the shut-off timing is sent in advance and the Yamaha wireless AP device is prepared to have the power shut off.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp_set">6. Interface settings page</div><div class="search_word">6. interface settings page in this page you can make settings for the lldp. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">6. Interface settings page In this page you can make settings for the LLDP. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#interface_settings_2">6.1. Interface settings</div><div class="search_word">6.1. interface settings port displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. lldp frame transmission and reception select the operation for lldp frame transmission and reception from the following options. enabled enables lldp frame transmission and reception select direction to enable from the following items. transmit & receive transmit receive disabled disables lldp frame transmission and reception lldp frame transmission interval specifies the transmission interval of lldp frames in terms of seconds. input a transmission interval of lldp frames from 5 to 3600. hold time (ttl) of device information sent by lldp specify a hold multiplier to decide a hold time ( ttl ). input a hold multiplier from 1 to 100. type of management address sent by lldp select management address type from the following items. ip address mac address maximum number of managed devices specifies the maximum number of managed devices. input a maximum number of managed devices from 1 to 100.</div><div class="display_word">6.1. Interface settings Port Displays the name of the interface for which settings will be made. LLDP frame transmission and reception Select the operation for LLDP frame transmission and reception from the following options. Enabled Enables LLDP frame transmission and reception Select direction to enable from the following items. Transmit & Receive Transmit Receive Disabled Disables LLDP frame transmission and reception LLDP frame transmission interval Specifies the transmission interval of LLDP frames in terms of seconds. Input a transmission interval of LLDP frames from 5 to 3600. Hold time (TTL) of device information sent by LLDP Specify a hold multiplier to decide a hold time ( TTL ). Input a hold multiplier from 1 to 100. Type of Management address sent by LLDP Select management address type from the following items. IP address MAC address Maximum number of managed devices Specifies the maximum number of managed devices. Input a maximum number of managed devices from 1 to 100.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#title-box">Unit settings</div><div class="search_word">unit settings</div><div class="display_word">Unit settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary various settings can be specified for the unit.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary Various settings can be specified for the unit.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for unit settings. a description of each setting is shown.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for unit settings. A description of each setting is shown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#unit_name_setting">2.1. Unit name setting</div><div class="search_word">2.1. unit name setting displays the unit name that is set. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Unit name setting Displays the unit name that is set. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#led_mode_setting">2.2. LED mode setting</div><div class="search_word">2.2. led mode setting displays the led mode that is set. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. LED mode setting Displays the LED mode that is set. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#time_zone_setting">2.3. Time zone setting</div><div class="search_word">2.3. time zone setting the time zone setting is shown. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Time zone setting The time zone setting is shown. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#current_date_and_time_setting">2.4. Current date and time setting</div><div class="search_word">2.4. current date and time setting the current date and time specified for this unit are shown. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.4. Current date and time setting The current date and time specified for this unit are shown. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#date_and_time_synchronization_setting">2.5. Date and time synchronization setting</div><div class="search_word">2.5. date and time synchronization setting the ntp server that is queried at the specified time and date synchronization interval is shown. press the "next" button to access a page where you can synchronize the time. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.5. Date and time synchronization setting The NTP server that is queried at the specified time and date synchronization interval is shown. Press the "Next" button to access a page where you can synchronize the time. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section3">3. Unit name setting page</div><div class="search_word">3. unit name setting page in this page you can set the unit name. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Unit name setting page In this page you can set the unit name. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#unit_name_setting_2">3.1. Unit name setting</div><div class="search_word">3.1. unit name setting unit name enter an arbitrary character string for use as the hostname. enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters or single-byte symbols.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Unit name setting Unit name Enter an arbitrary character string for use as the hostname. Enter up to 63 single-byte alphanumeric characters or single-byte symbols.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section4">4. LED mode setting page</div><div class="search_word">4. led mode setting page in this page you can set the led mode. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. LED mode setting page In this page you can set the LED mode. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#led_mode_setting_2">4.1. LED mode setting</div><div class="search_word">4.1. led mode setting led mode select the led mode from the following. link/act mode led indicator lights will illuminate, flash, or switch off depending on the lan port status. off mode led always stays off.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. LED mode setting LED mode Select the LED mode from the following. LINK/ACT mode LED indicator lights will illuminate, flash, or switch OFF depending on the LAN port status. OFF mode LED always stays off.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section5">5. Time zone setting page</div><div class="search_word">5. time zone setting page in this page you can set the time zone. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">5. Time zone setting page In this page you can set the time zone. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#time_zone_setting_2">5.1. Time zone setting</div><div class="search_word">5.1. time zone setting time zone select the time zone from the following. utc jst difference from gmt ( -12:00 to +13:00 )</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Time zone setting Time zone Select the time zone from the following. UTC JST Difference from GMT ( -12:00 to +13:00 )</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section6">6. Current date and time setting page</div><div class="search_word">6. current date and time setting page in this page you can set the current date and time. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">6. Current date and time setting page In this page you can set the current date and time. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#current_date_and_time_setting_2">6.1. Current date and time setting</div><div class="search_word">6.1. current date and time setting current time in the "year/month/date" box, enter the date in yyyy/mm/dd format. when you move the focus to the box, a calender is displayed. you can select a date to enter that date in the box. you can also enter this manually. in the "hours:minutes:seconds" box, enter the time in hh:mm:ss format. when you move the focus to the box, a calender is displayed. you can select a date to enter that date in the box. you can also enter this manually.</div><div class="display_word">6.1. Current date and time setting Current time In the "year/month/date" box, enter the date in YYYY/MM/DD format. When you move the focus to the box, a calender is displayed. You can select a date to enter that date in the box. You can also enter this manually. In the "hours:minutes:seconds" box, enter the time in hh:mm:ss format. When you move the focus to the box, a calender is displayed. You can select a date to enter that date in the box. You can also enter this manually.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section7">7. Date and time synchronization page</div><div class="search_word">7. date and time synchronization page in this page you can synchronize the time with an ntp server. when you press the "ok" button, the time is synchronized with the ntp server that is specified as the query destination.</div><div class="display_word">7. Date and time synchronization page In this page you can synchronize the time with an NTP server. When you press the "OK" button, the time is synchronized with the NTP server that is specified as the query destination.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#section8">8. Date and time synchronization setting page</div><div class="search_word">8. date and time synchronization setting page in this page you can make settings for synchronization with an ntp server. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">8. Date and time synchronization setting page In this page you can make settings for synchronization with an NTP server. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_main"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_main" doctitle="Unit" link="#date_and_time_synchronization_setting_2">8.1. Date and time synchronization setting</div><div class="search_word">8.1. date and time synchronization setting date and time synchronization interval specifies the interval at which time is synchronized with the ntp server. you can choose from the following as the synchronization interval. unused 1 hour — 24 hours periodic time synchronization is disabled by default. ntp server to query enter the host name or ip address of the ntp server that will perform synchronization. up to two ntp servers can be configured.</div><div class="display_word">8.1. Date and time synchronization setting Date and time synchronization interval Specifies the interval at which time is synchronized with the NTP server. You can choose from the following as the synchronization interval. Unused 1 hour — 24 hours Periodic time synchronization is disabled by default. NTP server to query Enter the host name or IP address of the NTP server that will perform synchronization. Up to two NTP servers can be configured.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#title-box">MIB</div><div class="search_word">mib</div><div class="display_word">MIB</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring mib settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring MIB settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for mib.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for MIB.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#management_information_settings">2.1. Management information settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. management information settings the contents of the management information settings are shown. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Management information settings The contents of the Management information settings are shown. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#mgmtinfo_settings">3. Management information setting page</div><div class="search_word">3. management information setting page this page is for configuring management information settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Management information setting page This page is for configuring Management information settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_mib" doctitle="MIB" link="#management_information_settings_2">3.1. Management information settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. management information settings administrator information (syscontact) sets the string of administrator information (syscontact). the character string entered here is stored in the mib variable syscontact. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 255 characters can be inputted. installation site information (syslocation) sets the string of physical location information (syslocation). the character string entered here is stored in the mib variable syslocation. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 255 characters can be inputted.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Management information settings Administrator information (sysContact) Sets the string of Administrator information (sysContact). The character string entered here is stored in the MIB variable sysContact. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 255 characters can be inputted. Installation site information (sysLocation) Sets the string of Physical location information (sysLocation). The character string entered here is stored in the MIB variable sysLocation. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 255 characters can be inputted.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#title-box">Restart and initialization</div><div class="search_word">restart and initialization</div><div class="display_word">Restart and initialization</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can restart this unit and return it to the factory-set state.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can restart this unit and return it to the factory-set state.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for restart and initialization. here you can start the process of restarting this unit or returning it to the factory-set state.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for restart and initialization. Here you can start the process of restarting this unit or returning it to the factory-set state.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#restart">2.1. Restart</div><div class="search_word">2.1. restart when you press the "next" button, the process of restarting this unit will begin.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Restart When you press the "Next" button, the process of restarting this unit will begin.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#initialization">2.2. Initialization</div><div class="search_word">2.2. initialization when you press the "next" button, the process of returning this unit to the factory-set state will begin.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Initialization When you press the "Next" button, the process of returning this unit to the factory-set state will begin.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#section3">3. Restart page</div><div class="search_word">3. restart page in this page you can restart this unit. when you press the "ok" button, the unit will restart. note that when you execute restart, the settings that were being changed will not be saved. in addition, the gui cannot be accessed until restart has completed.</div><div class="display_word">3. Restart page In this page you can restart this unit. When you press the "OK" button, the unit will restart. Note that when you execute restart, the settings that were being changed will not be saved. In addition, the GUI cannot be accessed until restart has completed.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#section4">4. Initialization page</div><div class="search_word">4. initialization page in this page you can return this unit to its factory-set state. after you have entered the privileged password, press the "confirm" button. confirm the content to be executed, and if you want to return this unit to its factory-set state, press the "ok" button. note that when the unit is returned to its factory-set state, all settings will return to their default values, including the address for accessing the gui.</div><div class="display_word">4. Initialization page In this page you can return this unit to its factory-set state. After you have entered the privileged password, press the "Confirm" button. Confirm the content to be executed, and if you want to return this unit to its factory-set state, press the "OK" button. Note that when the unit is returned to its factory-set state, all settings will return to their default values, including the address for accessing the GUI.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_reboot"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_reboot" doctitle="Restart" link="#initialization_2">4.1. Initialization</div><div class="search_word">4.1. initialization privileged password to return the unit to its factory-set state, enter the privileged password.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Initialization Privileged password To return the unit to its factory-set state, enter the privileged password.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#title-box">Schedule execution</div><div class="search_word">schedule execution</div><div class="display_word">Schedule execution</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can make settings for schedule execution. the schedule execution function of this product has two setting items, schedule template and schedule. schedule template settings allow you to create a template of detailed settings for processes involved in executing scheduled functions and operations, such as the specific functions to be executed, the applicable item involved, and the execution sequence. in schedule settings, you can select when to execute schedules and which templates to execute.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can make settings for schedule execution. The schedule execution function of this product has two setting items, schedule template and schedule. Schedule template settings allow you to create a template of detailed settings for processes involved in executing scheduled functions and operations, such as the specific functions to be executed, the applicable item involved, and the execution sequence. In schedule settings, you can select when to execute schedules and which templates to execute.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for making settings for schedule execution.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for making settings for schedule execution.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#list_of_schedule_template">2.1. List of schedule template</div><div class="search_word">2.1. list of schedule template information for the currently registered schedule template are shown. the table items are explained below. template id registered schedule template id are shown. status the status of the schedule template are shown. template description description of the schedule template are shown. if you press the "new" button, a page appears in which you can create a new schedule template. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected schedule template. if you press the "delete" button, all schedule templates whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. up to 10 schedule templates can be registered.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. List of schedule template Information for the currently registered schedule template are shown. The table items are explained below. Template ID Registered schedule template ID are shown. Status The status of the schedule template are shown. Template description Description of the schedule template are shown. If you press the "New" button, a page appears in which you can create a new schedule template. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected schedule template. If you press the "Delete" button, all schedule templates whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. Up to 10 schedule templates can be registered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#list_of_schedule">2.2. List of schedule</div><div class="search_word">2.2. list of schedule information for the currently registered schedule are shown. the table items are explained below. schedule id registered schedule id are shown. execution timing the execution timing of the schedule are shown. template to be executed the information about the template to be executed when the schedule executed are shown. if you press the "new" button, a page appears in which you can create a new schedule. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected schedule. if you press the "delete" button, all schedules whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. up to 10 schedules can be registered.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. List of schedule Information for the currently registered schedule are shown. The table items are explained below. Schedule ID Registered schedule ID are shown. Execution timing The execution timing of the schedule are shown. Template to be executed The information about the template to be executed when the schedule executed are shown. If you press the "New" button, a page appears in which you can create a new schedule. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected schedule. If you press the "Delete" button, all schedules whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. Up to 10 schedules can be registered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#section3">3. Schedule template settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. schedule template settings page in this page you can create a new schedule template or edit the settings of an already-registered schedule template. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Schedule template settings page In this page you can create a new schedule template or edit the settings of an already-registered schedule template. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#schedule_template_settings">3.1. Schedule template settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. schedule template settings template id the id of the schedule template being set is displayed. newly created templates are automatically assigned the lowest unregistered serial number as the template id. template description sets the schedule template description text. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . up to 64 characters can be inputted. template status select template status from the following items. enabled enables the template disabled disables the template contents of schedule execution specify the following items as the schedule execution contents. function to be executed select the function to be executed by schedule execution from the following items. shutdown cancel shutdown disable poe power supply enable poe power supply save settings applicable item select the applicable item of the function to be executed. the choices available for the applicable item setting vary depending on the settings selected in the "function to be executed" field. "execution cost" is the cost required for storing scheduled processes for execution inside the product and corresponds to the number of cli-command lines. this product allows using an execution cost up to 100 for each template. specify settings so that the total "execution cost" is 100 or less. click the icon to add a configuration form. click the “delete” button to delete a configuration form. execution content specified or edited outside the schedule template settings screen is displayed in command format. if editing a template displayed in command format, enter the setting in console command format (abbreviated input is not accepted). you can enter multiple commands together by separating them with line-returns. specify settings that result in 100 or fewer command lines. schedule execution always starts with the specially-privileged exec mode (enable). the commands that can be set are as follows. configure terminal interface shutdown no shutdown power-inline disable power-inline enable write end exit (cannot be executed in "special privilege exec mode") for details on commands to enter, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the network device product information page and network device technical information page .</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Schedule template settings Template ID The ID of the schedule template being set is displayed. Newly created templates are automatically assigned the lowest unregistered serial number as the template ID. Template description Sets the schedule template description text. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? . Up to 64 characters can be inputted. Template status Select template status from the following items. Enabled Enables the template Disabled Disables the template Contents of schedule execution Specify the following items as the schedule execution contents. Function to be executed Select the function to be executed by schedule execution from the following items. Shutdown Cancel shutdown Disable PoE power supply Enable PoE power supply Save settings Applicable item Select the applicable item of the function to be executed. The choices available for the applicable item setting vary depending on the settings selected in the "Function to be executed" field. "Execution cost" is the cost required for storing scheduled processes for execution inside the product and corresponds to the number of cli-command lines. This product allows using an execution cost up to 100 for each template. Specify settings so that the total "execution cost" is 100 or less. Click the icon to add a configuration form. Click the “Delete” button to delete a configuration form. Execution content specified or edited outside the schedule template settings screen is displayed in command format. If editing a template displayed in command format, enter the setting in console command format (abbreviated input is not accepted). You can enter multiple commands together by separating them with line-returns. Specify settings that result in 100 or fewer command lines. Schedule execution always starts with the specially-privileged EXEC mode (enable). The commands that can be set are as follows. configure terminal interface shutdown no shutdown power-inline disable power-inline enable write end exit (Cannot be executed in "special privilege EXEC mode") For details on commands to enter, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the Network device product information page and Network device technical information page .</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#section4">4. Schedule settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. schedule settings page in this page you can create a new schedule or edit the settings of an already-registered schedule. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Schedule settings page In this page you can create a new schedule or edit the settings of an already-registered schedule. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#schedule_settings">4.1. Schedule settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. schedule settings schedule id the id of the schedule being set is displayed. newly created templates are automatically assigned the lowest unregistered serial number as the schedule id. execution timing select the timing to execute the schedule execution. easy input select a typical frequency pattern for the schedule execution timing. period select the periodic pattern of schedule execution from the following items. every day every week every month every year if "every week" is selected, mark the checkbox for the day of the week when the schedule is to be executed. if "every month" is selected, enter the day when the schedule is to be executed in the "day" box. if "every year" is selected, enter the month and the day when the schedule is to be executed in the "month" box and the "day" box. enter numeric values in the "month" and "day" boxes. multiple months/days can be specified as comma-delimited values. (example: enter "10,20" to specify 10 and 20.) a hyphen can be used to indicate a range of values. (example: enter "1-3" to specify 1, 2, and 3.) when you focus on the "month" and "day" boxes, the input form that can be operated with a mouse click is displayed. time in the "hours:minutes:seconds" box, enter the time in hh:mm:ss format. when you focus on the "hour:minute:second" box, an input form that can be operated with a mouse click is displayed. input in command format enter the "date" and "time" in the command format. this allows specifying settings in more detail than the easy input mode. enter the date in month/date format. enter the time in the hh:mm:ss format. for details on command format, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the network device product information page and network device technical information page . template to be executed select the template to be executed in the schedule execution.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Schedule settings Schedule ID The ID of the schedule being set is displayed. Newly created templates are automatically assigned the lowest unregistered serial number as the schedule ID. Execution timing Select the timing to execute the schedule execution. Easy input Select a typical frequency pattern for the schedule execution timing. Period Select the periodic pattern of schedule execution from the following items. Every day Every week Every month Every year If "Every week" is selected, mark the checkbox for the day of the week when the schedule is to be executed. If "Every month" is selected, enter the day when the schedule is to be executed in the "Day" box. If "Every year" is selected, enter the month and the day when the schedule is to be executed in the "Month" box and the "Day" box. Enter numeric values in the "Month" and "Day" boxes. Multiple months/days can be specified as comma-delimited values. (Example: Enter "10,20" to specify 10 and 20.) A hyphen can be used to indicate a range of values. (Example: Enter "1-3" to specify 1, 2, and 3.) When you focus on the "Month" and "Day" boxes, the input form that can be operated with a mouse click is displayed. Time In the "hours:minutes:seconds" box, enter the time in hh:mm:ss format. When you focus on the "Hour:Minute:Second" box, an input form that can be operated with a mouse click is displayed. Input in command format Enter the "Date" and "Time" in the command format. This allows specifying settings in more detail than the Easy input mode. Enter the date in MONTH/DATE format. Enter the time in the hh:mm:ss format. For details on command format, refer to the command reference and to the information provided on the Network device product information page and Network device technical information page . Template to be executed Select the template to be executed in the schedule execution.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#title-box">Various server settings</div><div class="search_word">various server settings</div><div class="display_word">Various server settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can make settings for each type of server.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can make settings for each type of server.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for making settings for each type of server. the current settings are shown for the servers listed below. http server telnet server tftp server snmp server</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for making settings for each type of server. The current settings are shown for the servers listed below. HTTP server Telnet server TFTP server SNMP server</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#web_gui_access">2.1. Web GUI access</div><div class="search_word">2.1. web gui access displays the settings for the http server. the table items are explained below. port number of http server displays the port number of http server. use secure http server displays whether a secure http server is to be used or not. if a secure http server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. clients that can access the http server displays the clients that can access the http server. time until auto logout displays the time until auto logout.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Web GUI access Displays the settings for the HTTP server. The table items are explained below. Port number of HTTP server Displays the port number of HTTP server. Use secure HTTP server Displays whether a secure HTTP server is to be used or not. If a secure HTTP server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. Clients that can access the HTTP server Displays the clients that can access the HTTP server. Time until auto logout Displays the time until auto logout.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_telnet">2.2. Access via Telnet</div><div class="search_word">2.2. access via telnet displays the settings for the telnet server. the table items are explained below. use telnet server displays whether a telnet server is to be used or not. if a telnet server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. clients that can access the telnet server displays the clients that can access the telnet server.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Access via Telnet Displays the settings for the Telnet server. The table items are explained below. Use Telnet server Displays whether a Telnet server is to be used or not. If a Telnet server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. Clients that can access the Telnet server Displays the clients that can access the Telnet server.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_tftp">2.3. Access via TFTP</div><div class="search_word">2.3. access via tftp displays the settings for the tftp server. the table items are explained below. use tftp server displays whether a tftp server is to be used or not. if a tftp server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. clients that can access the tftp server displays the clients that can access the tftp server.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Access via TFTP Displays the settings for the TFTP server. The table items are explained below. Use TFTP server Displays whether a TFTP server is to be used or not. If a TFTP server is to be used, the port number will be displayed. Clients that can access the TFTP server Displays the clients that can access the TFTP server.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_snmp">2.4. Access via SNMP</div><div class="search_word">2.4. access via snmp displays the settings for the snmp server the table items are explained below. clients that can access the snmp server displays the clients that can access the snmp server.</div><div class="display_word">2.4. Access via SNMP Displays the settings for the SNMP server The table items are explained below. Clients that can access the SNMP server Displays the clients that can access the SNMP server.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#http">3. Web GUI access settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. web gui access settings page in this page you can configure the settings for an http server. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Web GUI access settings page In this page you can configure the settings for an HTTP server. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#web_gui_access_2">3.1. Web GUI access</div><div class="search_word">3.1. web gui access port number of http server specifies the port number of http server. input a port number from 1 to 65535. use secure http server select below whether an secure http server will be used or not. use don’t use when use is selected, specify the port number. input a port number from 1 to 65535. clients that can access the http server select the client access restriction methods from the following options. permit all specify conditions when specify conditions is selected, up to 8 conditions can be specified. the conditions are specified as shown below. operation to restrict client access, select from the following operations. permit deny conditional select from the following targets for client access restriction. all addresses specified ip address ip address when specified ip address is selected, specify the ip address. the following ip addresses shown below can be specified. ipv4 address example: 192.168.100.1 ipv4 network address example: 192.168.100.0/24 ipv6 address example: fe80::1234:5678 ipv6 network address example: 2001:1234:5678:90ab::0/64 conditions are evaluated in ascending order of numbers. if even one condition is specified, all access from clients that do not meet any condition will be denied. press the icon to add a configuration form. press the "delete" button to delete a configuration form. time until auto logout in the list box, select the time until auto logout. if the desired time setting is not shown in the list box, select "specify" and enter the desired time setting in the text box below the list box. any time setting within the range of 1 - 120 minutes may be entered.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Web GUI access Port number of HTTP server Specifies the port number of HTTP server. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. Use secure HTTP server Select below whether an secure HTTP server will be used or not. Use Don’t use When Use is selected, specify the port number. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. Clients that can access the HTTP server Select the client access restriction methods from the following options. Permit all Specify conditions When Specify conditions is selected, up to 8 conditions can be specified. The conditions are specified as shown below. Operation To restrict client access, select from the following operations. Permit Deny Conditional Select from the following targets for client access restriction. All addresses Specified IP address IP address When Specified IP address is selected, specify the IP address. The following IP addresses shown below can be specified. IPv4 address Example: 192.168.100.1 IPv4 network address Example: 192.168.100.0/24 IPv6 address Example: fe80::1234:5678 IPv6 network address Example: 2001:1234:5678:90ab::0/64 Conditions are evaluated in ascending order of numbers. If even one condition is specified, all access from clients that do not meet any condition will be denied. Press the icon to add a configuration form. Press the "Delete" button to delete a configuration form. Time until auto logout In the list box, select the time until auto logout. If the desired time setting is not shown in the list box, select "Specify" and enter the desired time setting in the text box below the list box. Any time setting within the range of 1 - 120 minutes may be entered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#telnet">4. Access via Telnet settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. access via telnet settings page in this page you can configure the settings for a telnet server. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Access via Telnet settings page In this page you can configure the settings for a Telnet server. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_telnet_2">4.1. Access via Telnet</div><div class="search_word">4.1. access via telnet use telnet server select below whether a telnet server will be used or not. use don’t use when use is selected, specify the port number. input a port number from 1 to 65535. clients that can access the telnet server the setting method for this item is the same as for the "clients that can access the http server" item on the web gui access page.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Access via Telnet Use Telnet server Select below whether a Telnet server will be used or not. Use Don’t use When Use is selected, specify the port number. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. Clients that can access the Telnet server The setting method for this item is the same as for the "Clients that can access the HTTP server" item on the Web GUI access page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#tftp">5. Access via TFTP settings page</div><div class="search_word">5. access via tftp settings page in this page you can configure the settings for a tftp server. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">5. Access via TFTP settings page In this page you can configure the settings for a TFTP server. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_tftp_2">5.1. Access via TFTP</div><div class="search_word">5.1. access via tftp use tftp server select below whether a tftp server will be used or not. use don’t use when use is selected, specify the port number. input a port number from 1 to 65535. clients that can access the tftp server the setting method for this item is the same as for the "clients that can access the http server" item on the web gui access page.</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Access via TFTP Use TFTP server Select below whether a TFTP server will be used or not. Use Don’t use When Use is selected, specify the port number. Input a port number from 1 to 65535. Clients that can access the TFTP server The setting method for this item is the same as for the "Clients that can access the HTTP server" item on the Web GUI access page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#snmp">6. Access via SNMP settings page</div><div class="search_word">6. access via snmp settings page displays the settings for the snmp server. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">6. Access via SNMP settings page Displays the settings for the SNMP server. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_server"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_server" doctitle="Various" link="#access_via_snmp_2">6.1. Access via SNMP</div><div class="search_word">6.1. access via snmp clients that can access the snmp server select the client access restriction methods from the following options. permit all specify access conditions when specify conditions is selected, up to 32 conditions can be specified. access condition specify condition for to restrict access from client. press the or icons to change the order in which the access conditions are applied. following points about snmp server access condition differ from other type servers. access restriction behavior is always "permit". community or user that apply condition can be selected. the setting method for other item is the same as for the "clients that can access the http server" item on the web gui access page.</div><div class="display_word">6.1. Access via SNMP Clients that can access the SNMP server Select the client access restriction methods from the following options. Permit all Specify access conditions When Specify conditions is selected, up to 32 conditions can be specified. Access condition Specify condition for to restrict access from client. Press the or icons to change the order in which the access conditions are applied. Following points about SNMP server access condition differ from other type servers. Access restriction behavior is always "Permit". Community or user that apply condition can be selected. The setting method for other item is the same as for the "Clients that can access the HTTP server" item on the Web GUI access page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#title-box">SNMPv3 User</div><div class="search_word">snmpv3 user</div><div class="display_word">SNMPv3 User</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring snmpv3 user settings. communication content is constantly authenticated and encrypted using hmac-sha-96 for the authentication algorithm and aes128-cfb for the encryption algorithm. these settings cannot be changed. the authentication/encryption algorithms and password must match the settings specified for the corresponding snmp manager.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring SNMPv3 User settings. Communication content is constantly authenticated and encrypted using HMAC-SHA-96 for the authentication algorithm and AES128-CFB for the encryption algorithm. These settings cannot be changed. The authentication/encryption algorithms and password must match the settings specified for the corresponding SNMP manager.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for snmpv3 user.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for SNMPv3 User.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#user_settings">2.1. User settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. user settings information for the currently registered users are shown. the table items are explained below. user name registered user name are shown. access mode access mode set to user are shown. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected user. if you press the "return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all users whose check boxes are selected. one readwrite user and one readonly user can be registered.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. User settings Information for the currently registered users are shown. The table items are explained below. User name Registered user name are shown. Access mode Access mode set to user are shown. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected user. If you press the "Return to defaults" button, the settings will be initialized on all users whose check boxes are selected. One ReadWrite user and one ReadOnly user can be registered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#user_setting">3. User setting page</div><div class="search_word">3. user setting page in this page you can register new users or change settings for users that are already registered. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. User setting page In this page you can register new users or change settings for users that are already registered. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_snmp_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_snmp_user" doctitle="SNMPv3" link="#user_settings_2">3.1. User settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. user settings access mode displays the access mode of the user for which settings will be made. readonly only permitted to read in mib views. readwrite permitted to either read or write in mib views. both readonly users and readwrite users can access all mib views. user name sets the user name. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . up to 32 characters can be inputted. authentication password sets the authentication password. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . within 8 to 32 characters can be inputted. encryption password sets the encryption password. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . within 8 to 32 characters can be inputted.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. User settings Access mode Displays the access mode of the user for which settings will be made. ReadOnly Only permitted to read in MIB views. ReadWrite Permitted to either read or write in MIB views. Both ReadOnly users and ReadWrite users can access all MIB views. User name Sets the user name. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . Up to 32 characters can be inputted. Authentication password Sets the authentication password. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . Within 8 to 32 characters can be inputted. Encryption password Sets the encryption password. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols, excluding ? , ¥ , " . Within 8 to 32 characters can be inputted.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#title-box">SYSLOG management</div><div class="search_word">syslog management</div><div class="display_word">SYSLOG management</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary in this page you can view and edit the settings of the syslog function. the operation history of this device is output as the syslog (log data) according to the settings of the syslog function. in addition to recording the syslog inside this device, you can also specify a destination address for output to an external host.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary In this page you can view and edit the settings of the SYSLOG function. The operation history of this device is output as the SYSLOG (log data) according to the settings of the SYSLOG function. In addition to recording the SYSLOG inside this device, you can also specify a destination address for output to an external host.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for syslog management. the current settings for the syslog function are shown.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for SYSLOG management. The current settings for the SYSLOG function are shown.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#syslog_settings">2.1. SYSLOG settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. syslog settings the type of syslog that is output, and the header information and destination address for the syslog transmission are shown. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. SYSLOG settings The type of SYSLOG that is output, and the header information and destination address for the SYSLOG transmission are shown. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#section3">3. SYSLOG settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. syslog settings page in this page you can make settings for the syslog function. when you have entered the settings, press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "ok" button. for details on the various syslog types, refer to the command reference.</div><div class="display_word">3. SYSLOG settings page In this page you can make settings for the SYSLOG function. When you have entered the settings, press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the input content confirmation screen, press the "OK" button. For details on the various SYSLOG types, refer to the command reference.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#syslog_settings_2">3.1. SYSLOG settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. syslog settings syslog type debug this setting specifies whether debug type syslog is output. info this setting specifies whether info type syslog is output. error this setting specifies whether error type syslog is output. syslog transmission header this is the header setting when outputting the syslog to an external host. you can specify whether or not to include the time stamp and device name in the header of the syslog message. destination address this is the transmission destination address setting when outputting the syslog to an external host. you can specify up to two ipv4/ipv6 destination addresses. for ipv6 link local addresses, you must also specify the interface to send from. (format: fe80::x%vlann) if no destination address is specified, the syslog is recorded only inside the switch.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. SYSLOG settings SYSLOG type DEBUG This setting specifies whether DEBUG type SYSLOG is output. INFO This setting specifies whether INFO type SYSLOG is output. ERROR This setting specifies whether ERROR type SYSLOG is output. SYSLOG transmission Header This is the header setting when outputting the SYSLOG to an external host. You can specify whether or not to include the time stamp and device name in the header of the SYSLOG message. Destination address This is the transmission destination address setting when outputting the SYSLOG to an external host. You can specify up to two IPv4/IPv6 destination addresses. For IPv6 link local addresses, you must also specify the interface to send from. (Format: fe80::X%vlanN) If no destination address is specified, the SYSLOG is recorded only inside the switch.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#title-box">SNMP trap</div><div class="search_word">snmp trap</div><div class="display_word">SNMP trap</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring snmp trap settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring SNMP trap settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for snmp trap.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for SNMP trap.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#trap_type_settings">2.1. Trap type settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. trap type settings the contents of the settings of trap type are shown. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Trap type settings The contents of the settings of trap type are shown. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#list_of_traps_destinations">2.2. List of traps destinations</div><div class="search_word">2.2. list of traps destinations information for the currently registered traps destinations are shown. the table items are explained below. destination address registered traps destination address are shown. version snmp version that used in trap are shown. community / user snmp community name or user name that used in trap are shown. message type snmp message type that used in trap are shown. if you press the "new" button, a page appears in which you can create a new traps destination. if you press the "setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected traps destination. if you press the "delete" button, all traps destinations whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. up to 8 traps destinations can be registered.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. List of traps destinations Information for the currently registered traps destinations are shown. The table items are explained below. Destination address Registered traps destination address are shown. Version SNMP version that used in trap are shown. Community / User SNMP community name or user name that used in trap are shown. Message type SNMP message type that used in trap are shown. If you press the "New" button, a page appears in which you can create a new traps destination. If you press the "Setting" button, a page appears in which you can edit the settings of the selected traps destination. If you press the "Delete" button, all traps destinations whose check box has a check mark will be deleted. Up to 8 traps destinations can be registered.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#trap_type_setting">3. Trap type setting page</div><div class="search_word">3. trap type setting page this page is for configuring trap type settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Trap type setting page This page is for configuring Trap type settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#trap_type_settings_2">3.1. Trap type settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. trap type settings trap type select the trap type to send by snmp agent from the list below. boot from power off state send traps when the power is turned on/off or when firmware is updated. restart without power off send traps when restart by reload command. link down of port send traps when link down of port. link up of port send traps when link up of port. fail authentication send traps when snmp message to non-registered community or user is received. change fan status send traps when fan state is changed for example when fan abnormally detected. change temperature status send traps when temperature state is changed for example when temperature abnormally detected. change poe status send traps when poe state is changed. detect/resolve loop send traps when poe state is changed.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Trap type settings Trap type Select the trap type to send by SNMP agent from the list below. Boot from power OFF state Send traps when the power is turned on/off or when firmware is updated. Restart without power OFF Send traps when restart by reload command. Link down of port Send traps when link down of port. Link up of port Send traps when link up of port. Fail authentication Send traps when SNMP message to non-registered community or user is received. Change FAN status Send traps when FAN state is changed for example when FAN abnormally detected. Change Temperature status Send traps when Temperature state is changed for example when temperature abnormally detected. Change PoE status Send traps when PoE state is changed. Detect/Resolve loop Send traps when PoE state is changed.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#trap_dest_setting">4. Trap destination setting page</div><div class="search_word">4. trap destination setting page in this page you can create a new trap destination or edit the settings of an already-registered trap destination. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. Trap destination setting page In this page you can create a new trap destination or edit the settings of an already-registered trap destination. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_trap"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_trap" doctitle="SNMP" link="#trap_destination_settings">4.1. Trap destination settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. trap destination settings destination address sets the destination address of traps. for the destination address, either an ipv4 address or an ipv6 address can be specified. for ipv6 link local addresses, you must also specify the interface to send from. (format: fe80::x%vlann) version select the snmp version used by traps. snmpv1 send traps using snmp version 1. snmpv2c send traps using snmp version 2c. snmpv3 send traps using snmp version 3. community/user select the community or users used by traps. click the "select" button to display the "community selection" dialog or "user selection" dialog. list of already-defined community or user is displayed at "community selection" dialog or "user selection" dialog. in the "community selection" dialog or "user selection" dialog, pressing the "select" button enables selection of communities or users used by traps at the destination where the traps are sent. message type select the snmp message type used by trap. use trap message type that does not require response confirmation to the destination. use inform request message type that require response confirmation to the destination. if snmpv1 is selected as the version, then thte message type cannot be selected. the trap message type is always used for version snmpv1.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. Trap destination settings Destination address Sets the destination address of traps. For the destination address, either an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address can be specified. For IPv6 link local addresses, you must also specify the interface to send from. (Format: fe80::X%vlanN) Version Select the SNMP version used by traps. SNMPv1 Send traps using SNMP version 1. SNMPv2c Send traps using SNMP version 2c. SNMPv3 Send traps using SNMP version 3. Community/User Select the community or users used by traps. Click the "Select" button to display the "Community selection" dialog or "User selection" dialog. List of already-defined community or user is displayed at "Community selection" dialog or "User selection" dialog. In the "Community selection" dialog or "User selection" dialog, pressing the "Select" button enables selection of communities or users used by traps at the destination where the traps are sent. Message type Select the SNMP message type used by trap. Use Trap Message type that does not require response confirmation to the destination. Use Inform Request Message type that require response confirmation to the destination. If SNMPv1 is selected as the version, then thte message type cannot be selected. The Trap message type is always used for version SNMPv1.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#title-box">User settings</div><div class="search_word">user settings</div><div class="display_word">User settings</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#section1">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary this page is for configuring the user settings.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary This page is for configuring the user settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#section2">2. Top page</div><div class="search_word">2. top page this is the top page for the user settings.</div><div class="display_word">2. Top page This is the top page for the user settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#password_settings">2.1. Password settings</div><div class="search_word">2.1. password settings password-related settings are displayed. the table items are explained below. privileged password displays whether the privileged password has been set. encryption the display will show whether password encryption is enabled. press the "setting" button to access the page where you can change the password-related settings.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Password settings Password-related settings are displayed. The table items are explained below. Privileged password Displays whether the privileged password has been set. Encryption The display will show whether password encryption is enabled. Press the "Setting" button to access the page where you can change the password-related settings.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#user_account_settings">2.2. User account settings</div><div class="search_word">2.2. user account settings displays a list of user settings. the table items are explained below. check box select the check box to delete user settings. user name displays the user name. administrative privileges displays whether the user has been given administrative privileges. press the "new" button to display the page where you can set up a new user. press the "setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected user. if you press the "delete" button, all users whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. settings can be made for up to 32 users.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. User account settings Displays a list of user settings. The table items are explained below. Check box Select the check box to delete user settings. User name Displays the user name. Administrative privileges Displays whether the user has been given administrative privileges. Press the "New" button to display the page where you can set up a new user. Press the "Setting" button to access a page where you can change the settings of the selected user. If you press the "Delete" button, all users whose check boxes are selected will be deleted. Settings can be made for up to 32 users.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#password">3. Password settings page</div><div class="search_word">3. password settings page this page is for making password-related settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">3. Password settings page This page is for making password-related settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#password_settings_2">3.1. Password settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. password settings privileged password enter the administrative password that you want to set. if the password is not changed, select the privileged password not changed check box. if a password has already been set, the privileged password not changed check box will be selected by default. refer to the password strength when deciding on your password, which is displayed as you type. the strength of the password is indicated in four levels from "weakest" to "strongest" based on the following conditions. number of characters types of characters uppercase alphanumeric characters included lowercase alphanumeric characters included numerals included symbols included privileged password ( confirm ) to confirm the password that you entered in the "privileged password" field, enter the password once again. encrypt password select the password encryption settings from the settings shown below. encrypt don’t encrypt you cannot restore a password that has been encrypted. the settings for this field will affect the following passwords. privileged password user account passwords</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Password settings Privileged password Enter the administrative password that you want to set. If the password is not changed, select the Privileged password not changed check box. If a password has already been set, the Privileged password not changed check box will be selected by default. Refer to the password strength when deciding on your password, which is displayed as you type. The strength of the password is indicated in four levels from "weakest" to "strongest" based on the following conditions. Number of characters Types of characters Uppercase alphanumeric characters included Lowercase alphanumeric characters included Numerals included Symbols included Privileged password ( Confirm ) To confirm the password that you entered in the "Privileged password" field, enter the password once again. Encrypt password Select the password encryption settings from the settings shown below. Encrypt Don’t encrypt You cannot restore a password that has been encrypted. The settings for this field will affect the following passwords. Privileged password User account passwords</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#user">4. User account settings page</div><div class="search_word">4. user account settings page this page is for configuring the user account settings. enter the settings, and then press the "confirm" button. if there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "ok" button.</div><div class="display_word">4. User account settings page This page is for configuring the user account settings. Enter the settings, and then press the "Confirm" button. If there are no mistakes in the setting confirmation screen, press the "OK" button.</div></div><div id="gui_en_management_user"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_management_user" doctitle="User" link="#user_account_settings_2">4.1. User account settings</div><div class="search_word">4.1. user account settings user name when configuring new settings specifies the user name to set. characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters. up to 32 characters can be inputted. when changing settings shows the selected user name. new password enter the new password that you want to set. the operation for password strength is the same as the “privileged password” item in the password settings page. new password ( confirm ) to confirm the password that you entered in the "new password" item, enter the password once again. administrative privileges select from one of the following administrative privileges. do not set set users that have been given administrative privileges can log in as an administrative user when logging into the web gui.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. User account settings User name When configuring new settings Specifies the user name to set. Characters that can be inputted include single-byte alphanumeric characters. Up to 32 characters can be inputted. When changing settings Shows the selected user name. New password Enter the new password that you want to set. The operation for password strength is the same as the “Privileged password” item in the Password settings page. New password ( Confirm ) To confirm the password that you entered in the "New password" item, enter the password once again. Administrative privileges Select from one of the following administrative privileges. Do not set Set Users that have been given administrative privileges can log in as an administrative user when logging into the Web GUI.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#title-box">Multicast</div><div class="search_word">multicast</div><div class="display_word">Multicast</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#summary_multicast">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary the multicast page can be used to configure igmp snooping and check the igmp snooping operating status separately for each proav profile. if multicasting via an avoip network, it is generally recommended that igmp snooping be enabled, but that can lead to trouble if operated with improper settings. by learning the basic principles of igmp snooping, this page can be used for simple troubleshooting of igmp snooping issues.</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary The Multicast page can be used to configure IGMP snooping and check the IGMP snooping operating status separately for each ProAV profile. If multicasting via an AVoIP network, it is generally recommended that IGMP snooping be enabled, but that can lead to trouble if operated with improper settings. By learning the basic principles of IGMP snooping, this page can be used for simple troubleshooting of IGMP snooping issues.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#about_igmp_snooping">2. What’s IGMP snooping</div><div class="search_word">2. what’s igmp snooping igmp snooping is a feature that prevents unnecessary multicast traffic from being forwarded. normally, multicast traffic is flooded to all affiliated ports in the same network, which wastes bandwidth by forwarding multicast traffic to ports where no multicast receiving terminal exists. in contrast, if igmp snooping is enabled, it saves bandwidth by only forwarding the necessary multicast traffic to ports with a receiving terminal connected. the following example shows the difference between flooding and igmp snooping, assuming receiving terminal a (rx a) only wants to receive group a multicast traffic and receiving terminal b (rx b) only wants to receive group b multicast traffic. flooding forwards both group a and group b traffic to the port where rx a is connected, but igmp snooping only forwards group a traffic to the port where rx a is connected. in the case of flooding in the case of igmp snooping switches with igmp snooping enabled use "igmp query" and "igmp report" to learn which multicast group traffic should be sent to which ports. the following example shows the process flow of processing igmp queries and igmp reports. one representative switch in the network periodically sends igmp queries. the switch that sends the igmp queries is called the "querier" . when the multicast receiving terminal receives an igmp query, it sends an igmp report in response. the igmp report contains information about the multicast group traffic that the receiving terminal wants to receive. the switch learns which multicast group traffic to send to which port by snooping on the content in igmp reports. since learned multicast group information is automatically deleted after a certain period of time, in order to maintain the correct learning state one querier must always be present in the same network. if multiple queriers exist in the same network, only one querier is retained and the other switches automatically stop sending queries. note that even if there is no querier, the receiving terminal may spontaneously send an igmp report, such as when the multicast receiving application is started in the receiving terminal. note that if multicast group information is learned without a querier present, the corresponding multicast group traffic might not be forwarded to ports where other receiving terminals are connected.</div><div class="display_word">2. What’s IGMP snooping IGMP snooping is a feature that prevents unnecessary multicast traffic from being forwarded. Normally, multicast traffic is flooded to all affiliated ports in the same network, which wastes bandwidth by forwarding multicast traffic to ports where no multicast receiving terminal exists. In contrast, if IGMP snooping is enabled, it saves bandwidth by only forwarding the necessary multicast traffic to ports with a receiving terminal connected. The following example shows the difference between flooding and IGMP snooping, assuming receiving terminal A (RX A) only wants to receive Group A multicast traffic and receiving terminal B (RX B) only wants to receive Group B multicast traffic. Flooding forwards both Group A and Group B traffic to the port where RX A is connected, but IGMP snooping only forwards Group A traffic to the port where RX A is connected. In the case of flooding In the case of IGMP snooping Switches with IGMP snooping enabled use "IGMP Query" and "IGMP Report" to learn which multicast group traffic should be sent to which ports. The following example shows the process flow of processing IGMP queries and IGMP reports. One representative switch in the network periodically sends IGMP queries. The switch that sends the IGMP queries is called the "Querier" . When the multicast receiving terminal receives an IGMP query, it sends an IGMP report in response. The IGMP report contains information about the multicast group traffic that the receiving terminal wants to receive. The switch learns which multicast group traffic to send to which port by snooping on the content in IGMP reports. Since learned multicast group information is automatically deleted after a certain period of time, in order to maintain the correct learning state one querier must always be present in the same network. If multiple queriers exist in the same network, only one querier is retained and the other switches automatically stop sending queries. Note that even if there is no querier, the receiving terminal may spontaneously send an IGMP report, such as when the multicast receiving application is started in the receiving terminal. Note that if multicast group information is learned without a querier present, the corresponding multicast group traffic might not be forwarded to ports where other receiving terminals are connected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#how_to_use_multicast">3. How to use this page</div><div class="search_word">3. how to use this page</div><div class="display_word">3. How to use this page</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#introduction_multicast">3.1. Introduction</div><div class="search_word">3.1. introduction this page can be used as a troubleshooting tool if a problem related to igmp snooping occurs. igmp snooping is enabled when profiles are specified on the proav profile page. in this page, igmp snooping settings can be changed and the igmp snooping operating status checked separately for each proav profile. first, select a profile from the profile select box in the upper left corner of the page. if a proav profile has not been specified, specify the profile on the proav profiles page.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Introduction This page can be used as a troubleshooting tool if a problem related to IGMP snooping occurs. IGMP snooping is enabled when profiles are specified on the ProAV profile page. In this page, IGMP snooping settings can be changed and the IGMP snooping operating status checked separately for each ProAV profile. First, select a profile from the profile select box in the upper left corner of the page. If a ProAV profile has not been specified, specify the profile on the ProAV Profiles page.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#warning_message">3.2. Warning message</div><div class="search_word">3.2. warning message when igmp snooping is enabled, a warning message appears if the switch detects improper settings. if a warning message appears, review the settings and change them if necessary. warning message display message how to handle warnings the igmp version (v2) specified in the profile does not match the version (v3) of the igmp query received. set the igmp version in the profile to the same version as the igmp query. change the igmp version. query transmission is stopped due to the presence of another querier enable igmp query transmission.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Warning message When IGMP snooping is enabled, a warning message appears if the switch detects improper settings. If a warning message appears, review the settings and change them if necessary. Warning message Display message How to handle warnings The IGMP version (V2) specified in the profile does not match the version (V3) of the IGMP query received. Set the IGMP version in the profile to the same version as the IGMP query. Change the IGMP version. Query transmission is stopped due to the presence of another querier Enable IGMP query transmission.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#igmp_snooping_set">3.3. Change IGMP snooping settings</div><div class="search_word">3.3. change igmp snooping settings the following settings related to igmp snooping can be changed for each proav profile igmp snooping settings disabled ( flood ip multicast packets ) disable igmp snooping multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same vlan. enabled ( control transmission of ip multicast packets ) enable igmp snooping. multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. this function monitors (snoops) igmp messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. it can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. version select the igmp version from the following items. igmpv3 igmpv2 igmp query no transmission igmp query transmission function is disabled transmit periodically igmp query transmission function is enabled. the transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds processing method for unknown multicast frames specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. flood discard if igmp snooping is disabled, "flood" is automatically selected.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Change IGMP snooping settings The following settings related to IGMP snooping can be changed for each ProAV profile IGMP snooping settings Disabled ( Flood IP multicast packets ) Disable IGMP snooping Multicast packets are always forwarded to all ports in the same VLAN. Enabled ( Control transmission of IP multicast packets ) Enable IGMP snooping. Multicast packets are forwarded only to the port to which the terminal you want to receive them is connected. This function monitors (snoops) IGMP messages exchanged between receiving terminals and a multicast router. It can suppress the flooding of multicast packets and reduce network bandwidth usage. Version Select the IGMP version from the following items. IGMPv3 IGMPv2 IGMP query No transmission IGMP query transmission function is disabled Transmit periodically IGMP query transmission function is enabled. The transmission interval can be specified in the range of 20 seconds to 18000 seconds Processing method for unknown multicast frames Specify the processing method for unknown multicast frames from below. Flood Discard If IGMP snooping is disabled, "Flood" is automatically selected.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_multicast"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_multicast" doctitle="Multicast" link="#igmp_snooping_status">3.4. Check IGMP snooping operating status</div><div class="search_word">3.4. check igmp snooping operating status igmp snooping learning status can be checked for each proav profile. if a group is selected in the "multicast group" select box, the corresponding igmp report/query learning status is displayed. mouse-over the port with the learning status displayed to show a tooltip with detailed igmp report/query information. note that if both an igmp report and igmp query is received at the same port, information about both are displayed in the tooltip. igmp report/query learning status display item port display tooltip information igmp report receiving port receiving port information last received report information （ ip address, version ） igmp query receiving port receiving port information received query information ( ip address, version ) since the learning status for multicast groups changes over time, click the "update" button to update the display. when a multicast group has been learned by an igmp report, the ip address of the multicast group is displayed in the "multicast group" select box. traffic being sent to learned multicast groups is only forwarded to igmp report receiving ports. unknown multicast groups are not displayed in the "multicast group" select box. if a proav profile is specified, unknown multicast group traffic is discarded. please change the setting, if you want to flood an unknown multicast group. if a problem that prevents receiving multicast traffic occurs, check whether the port indicator where the receiving terminal is connected is illuminated orange (which indicates it is an igmp report receiving port). if the connection port indicator is not orange, the receiving terminal might be connected to a port with a different profile. check the profile setting for the port where it is connected. if that does not solve the problem, try disabling igmp snooping, but determine whether the bandwidth is sufficient before disabling igmp snooping.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Check IGMP snooping operating status IGMP snooping learning status can be checked for each ProAV profile. If a group is selected in the "Multicast Group" select box, the corresponding IGMP report/query learning status is displayed. Mouse-over the port with the learning status displayed to show a tooltip with detailed IGMP report/query information. Note that if both an IGMP report and IGMP query is received at the same port, information about both are displayed in the tooltip. IGMP report/query learning status Display item Port display Tooltip information IGMP report receiving port Receiving port information Last received report information （ IP address, Version ） IGMP query receiving port Receiving port information Received query information ( IP address, Version ) Since the learning status for multicast groups changes over time, click the "Update" button to update the display. When a multicast group has been learned by an IGMP report, the IP address of the multicast group is displayed in the "Multicast Group" select box. Traffic being sent to learned multicast groups is only forwarded to IGMP report receiving ports. Unknown multicast groups are not displayed in the "Multicast Group" select box. If a ProAV profile is specified, unknown multicast group traffic is discarded. Please change the setting, if you want to flood an unknown multicast group. If a problem that prevents receiving multicast traffic occurs, check whether the port indicator where the receiving terminal is connected is illuminated orange (which indicates it is an IGMP report receiving port). If the connection port indicator is not orange, the receiving terminal might be connected to a port with a different profile. Check the profile setting for the port where it is connected. If that does not solve the problem, try disabling IGMP snooping, but determine whether the bandwidth is sufficient before disabling IGMP snooping.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#title-box">ProAV profile</div><div class="search_word">proav profile</div><div class="display_word">ProAV profile</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#summary_profile">1. Summary</div><div class="search_word">1. summary the proav profile page can be used to configure all settings for optimizing the avoip network that carries audio and video traffic. in this unit, following proav profiles can be configured. dante dante is an audio networking solution developed by audinate for professional audio applications. a single lan cable is used to bi-directionally communicate information necessary for digital audio systems, such as for transmitting multiple channels of audio signals, clock synchronization signals, and control signals. ndi ndi is a new protocol developed by newtek that supports live video production workflows within ip applications. it enables real-time interactive transmission of video, audio, meta data, and other information within typical gigabit ethernet environments. for details on the commands configured by a proav profile, refer to network device technical information page .</div><div class="display_word">1. Summary The ProAV Profile page can be used to configure all settings for optimizing the AVoIP network that carries audio and video traffic. In this unit, following ProAV profiles can be configured. Dante Dante is an audio networking solution developed by Audinate for professional audio applications. A single LAN cable is used to bi-directionally communicate information necessary for digital audio systems, such as for transmitting multiple channels of audio signals, clock synchronization signals, and control signals. NDI NDI is a new protocol developed by Newtek that supports live video production workflows within IP applications. It enables real-time interactive transmission of video, audio, meta data, and other information within typical Gigabit Ethernet environments. For details on the commands configured by a ProAV profile, refer to Network device technical information page .</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#how_to_use_profile">2. How to use this page</div><div class="search_word">2. how to use this page</div><div class="display_word">2. How to use this page</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#introduction_profile">2.1. Introduction</div><div class="search_word">2.1. introduction this page can be used as a kitting tool for configuring optimal avoip network settings. qos, multicast control, and other settings can all be set to optimal values at the same time by simply selecting a proav profile. the proav profile configured on this page assumes the unit will be used as a dedicated switch for an avoip network. if building a complex network, such as by combining an avoip network with an existing internal network, specify appropriate settings on the gui details settings page or by using commands. this page assumes that an ip address is assigned to vlan1. if vlan1 is not assigned an ip address, assign an ip address to vlan1 and access the web gui from a port associated to vlan1. the vlan1 ip address is already specified in factory default settings, so the setting does not need to be changed before use.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Introduction This page can be used as a kitting tool for configuring optimal AVoIP network settings. QoS, multicast control, and other settings can all be set to optimal values at the same time by simply selecting a ProAV profile. The ProAV profile configured on this page assumes the unit will be used as a dedicated switch for an AVoIP network. If building a complex network, such as by combining an AVoIP network with an existing internal network, specify appropriate settings on the GUI Details settings page or by using commands. This page assumes that an IP address is assigned to VLAN1. If VLAN1 is not assigned an IP address, assign an IP address to VLAN1 and access the web GUI from a port associated to VLAN1. The VLAN1 IP address is already specified in factory default settings, so the setting does not need to be changed before use.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#dante_profile">2.2. Set Dante profile</div><div class="search_word">2.2. set dante profile the dante optimization settings is applied. in a dante network, settings vary depending on the network structure.</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Set Dante profile The Dante optimization settings is applied. In a Dante network, settings vary depending on the network structure.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#dante_primary">2.2.1. Use as Dante primaly dedecated line</div><div class="search_word">2.2.1. use as dante primaly dedecated line dante primary (vlan 1) select this network structure when the switch is used as a dante dedicated primary line and there is no need to partition the network with vlans. assign all ports to the same network as vlan1 and apply the dante primary profile. note that the only differences from selecting "use as dante secondary dedicated line "are the profile name and color settings. all other settings are the same.</div><div class="display_word">2.2.1. Use as Dante primaly dedecated line Dante primary (VLAN 1) Select this network structure when the switch is used as a Dante dedicated primary line and there is no need to partition the network with VLANs. Assign all ports to the same network as VLAN1 and apply the Dante primary profile. Note that the only differences from selecting "Use as Dante Secondary Dedicated Line "are the profile name and color settings. All other settings are the same.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#dante_secondary">2.2.2. Use as Dante secondary dedecated line</div><div class="search_word">2.2.2. use as dante secondary dedecated line dante secondary (vlan 1) select this network structure when the switch is used as a dante dedicated secondary line and there is no need to partition the network with vlans. assign all ports to the same network as vlan1 and apply the dante secondary profile. note that the only differences from selecting "use as dante primary dedicated line "are the profile name and color settings. all other settings are the same.</div><div class="display_word">2.2.2. Use as Dante secondary dedecated line Dante secondary (VLAN 1) Select this network structure when the switch is used as a Dante dedicated secondary line and there is no need to partition the network with VLANs. Assign all ports to the same network as VLAN1 and apply the Dante secondary profile. Note that the only differences from selecting "Use as Dante Primary Dedicated Line "are the profile name and color settings. All other settings are the same.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#dante_trunk">2.2.3. Bundle Dante primary/secondary lines</div><div class="search_word">2.2.3. bundle dante primary/secondary lines dante primary (vlan 1) dante secondary (vlan 2) trunk (all) select this network structure when the primary and secondary lines are bundled together for connecting a single lan cable between switches. assign the primary line to vlan1 and the secondary line to vlan2, and apply a dante profile to both vlans. the settings applied are the same for the primary (vlan1) and secondary (vlan2) lines. the trunk port sends and receives both dante primary and secondary traffic bundled together. designate the ports used to connect to other switches and the corresponding ports on the connected switches as trunk ports. the primary line (vlan1) is set as the native vlan (untagged) and the secondary line (vlan2) is set as the tagged vlan. as a precaution, when connecting the switch to another switch on a trunk, be sure to set the same profile-vlan assignment settings in both switches. to change the default primary, secondary, and trunk assignment settings, the horizontal and vertical buttons can be used to toggle between vertical and horizontal partition configurations in default settings. the horizon button does not appear on models with a single row of ports. primary, secondary, and trunk assignments can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. since the gui cannot be accessed from the secondary ports (*), assign the primary profile or trunk status to the port used to connect the computer to the gui. * this page assumes that an ip address is assigned to vlan1.</div><div class="display_word">2.2.3. Bundle Dante primary/secondary lines Dante primary (VLAN 1) Dante secondary (VLAN 2) Trunk (ALL) Select this network structure when the primary and secondary lines are bundled together for connecting a single LAN cable between switches. Assign the primary line to VLAN1 and the secondary line to VLAN2, and apply a Dante profile to both VLANs. The settings applied are the same for the primary (VLAN1) and secondary (VLAN2) lines. The trunk port sends and receives both Dante primary and secondary traffic bundled together. Designate the ports used to connect to other switches and the corresponding ports on the connected switches as trunk ports. The primary line (VLAN1) is set as the native VLAN (untagged) and the secondary line (VLAN2) is set as the tagged VLAN. As a precaution, when connecting the switch to another switch on a trunk, be sure to set the same Profile-VLAN assignment settings in both switches. To change the default primary, secondary, and trunk assignment settings, the Horizontal and Vertical buttons can be used to toggle between vertical and horizontal partition configurations in default settings. The Horizon button does not appear on models with a single row of ports. Primary, secondary, and trunk assignments can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. Since the GUI cannot be accessed from the secondary ports (*), assign the primary profile or trunk status to the port used to connect the computer to the GUI. * This page assumes that an IP address is assigned to VLAN1.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#dante_redundant">2.2.4. Redundant Dante primary/secondary lines</div><div class="search_word">2.2.4. redundant dante primary/secondary lines dante primary (vlan 1) dante secondary (vlan 2) select this network structure when configuring redundant primary and secondary lines and using two lan cables to connect between switches. assign the primary line to vlan1 and the secondary line to vlan2, and apply a dante profile to both vlans. the settings applied are the same for the primary (vlan1) and secondary (vlan2) lines, but in this network configuration, an l2ms filter is applied to ports on the secondary line (vlan2) to prevent loops. note that l2ms agents connected only to a dante secondary port will not be detected by the lan map or yamaha lan monitor. to change the default primary and secondary assignment settings, the horizontal and vertical buttons can be used to toggle between vertical and horizontal partition configurations in default settings. the horizon button does not appear on models with a single row of ports. primary and secondary assignments can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. since the gui cannot be accessed from the secondary ports (*), assign the primary profile to the port used to connect the computer to the gui. * this page assumes that an ip address is assigned to vlan1.</div><div class="display_word">2.2.4. Redundant Dante primary/secondary lines Dante primary (VLAN 1) Dante secondary (VLAN 2) Select this network structure when configuring redundant primary and secondary lines and using two LAN cables to connect between switches. Assign the primary line to VLAN1 and the secondary line to VLAN2, and apply a Dante profile to both VLANs. The settings applied are the same for the primary (VLAN1) and secondary (VLAN2) lines, but in this network configuration, an L2MS filter is applied to ports on the secondary line (VLAN2) to prevent loops. Note that L2MS agents connected only to a Dante secondary port will not be detected by the LAN map or Yamaha LAN Monitor. To change the default primary and secondary assignment settings, the Horizontal and Vertical buttons can be used to toggle between vertical and horizontal partition configurations in default settings. The Horizon button does not appear on models with a single row of ports. Primary and secondary assignments can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. Since the GUI cannot be accessed from the secondary ports (*), assign the primary profile to the port used to connect the computer to the GUI. * This page assumes that an IP address is assigned to VLAN1.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#ndi_profile">2.3. Set NDI profile</div><div class="search_word">2.3. set ndi profile the ndi optimization settings is applied. assign all ports to the same network as vlan1 and apply the ndi profile.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Set NDI profile The NDI optimization settings is applied. Assign all ports to the same network as VLAN1 and apply the NDI profile.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#multiple_profile">2.4. Set multiple ProAV profiles</div><div class="search_word">2.4. set multiple proav profiles multiple proav profiles can be applied by partitioning the network using vlans. with default settings, vlan1 is assigned to the dante primary line, vlan2 to the dante secondary line, and vlan3 to the ndi network. traffic for all selected profiles is sent/received via the specified trunk port. designate the ports used to connect to other switches and the corresponding ports on the connected switches as trunk ports. the vlan1 is set as the native vlan (untagged) and other vlans are set as the tagged vlan. as a precaution, when connecting the switch to another switch on a trunk, be sure to set the same profile-vlan assignment settings in both switches. the vlan assignment for a profile can be changed using the "change vlan "button. note that vlan1 must be assigned to one of the profiles. profile assignments to ports can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. since the gui cannot be accessed from ports not affiliated with vlan1 (*), assign the vlan1 profile or trunk status to the port used to connect the computer to the gui. * this page assumes that an ip address is assigned to vlan1.</div><div class="display_word">2.4. Set multiple ProAV profiles Multiple ProAV profiles can be applied by partitioning the network using VLANs. With default settings, VLAN1 is assigned to the Dante primary line, VLAN2 to the Dante secondary line, and VLAN3 to the NDI network. Traffic for all selected profiles is sent/received via the specified trunk port. Designate the ports used to connect to other switches and the corresponding ports on the connected switches as trunk ports. The VLAN1 is set as the native VLAN (untagged) and other VLANs are set as the tagged VLAN. As a precaution, when connecting the switch to another switch on a trunk, be sure to set the same Profile-VLAN assignment settings in both switches. The VLAN assignment for a profile can be changed using the "Change VLAN "button. Note that VLAN1 must be assigned to one of the profiles. Profile assignments to ports can be changed manually by clicking on the profile selection button and then clicking on the port. Since the GUI cannot be accessed from ports not affiliated with VLAN1 (*), assign the VLAN1 profile or trunk status to the port used to connect the computer to the GUI. * This page assumes that an IP address is assigned to VLAN1.</div></div><div id="gui_en_proav_profile"><div class="search_title" docfname="gui_en_proav_profile" doctitle="ProAV" link="#trademark">3. Trademark attributions</div><div class="search_word">3. trademark attributions dante ™is a trademark of audinate pty ltd. ndi ®is a registered trademark of vizrt ndi ab.</div><div class="display_word">3. Trademark attributions Dante ™is a trademark of Audinate Pty Ltd. NDI ®is a registered trademark of Vizrt NDI AB.</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#swx2210pシリーズ-技術資料">SWX2210P Series Technical Data</div><div class="search_word">swx2210p series technical data thank you for purchasing a yamaha swx2210p series switch. before using the product, be sure to read this manual carefully to ensure the product is installed and settings are configured properly. be sure to observe the warnings and cautions indicated in this manual and use the product correctly and safely.</div><div class="display_word">SWX2210P Series Technical Data Thank you for purchasing a Yamaha SWX2210P series switch. Before using the product, be sure to read this manual carefully to ensure the product is installed and settings are configured properly. Be sure to observe the warnings and cautions indicated in this manual and use the product correctly and safely.</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#このページの使い方">1. How to Use This Page</div><div class="search_word">1. how to use this page select the firmware version. change the “firmware version” at the top of the screen to the version of your device. by default, the latest firmware version is selected. select the item you want to look up. select the item you want to display from the accordion menu on the left side of the screen .</div><div class="display_word">1. How to Use This Page Select the firmware version. Change the “Firmware version” at the top of the screen to the version of your device. By default, the latest firmware version is selected. Select the item you want to look up. Select the item you want to display from the accordion menu on the left side of the screen .</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#スタートアップガイド">2. Startup Guide</div><div class="search_word">2. startup guide this guide describes the setup procedure up to the point swx2210p series settings can start being specified. settings for the swx2210p series can be specified using any of the following three methods. specify settings by executing commands using telnet. specify settings using a web browser. settings using l2ms manager for kitting procedures for proav, refer to the kitting procedures described on the [maintenance and operation functions] - [proav settings] page of this technical reference.</div><div class="display_word">2. Startup Guide This guide describes the setup procedure up to the point SWX2210P series settings can start being specified. Settings for the SWX2210P series can be specified using any of the following three methods. Specify settings by executing commands using TELNET. Specify settings using a web browser. Settings using L2MS manager For kitting procedures for ProAV, refer to the kitting procedures described on the [Maintenance and Operation Functions] - [ProAV Settings] page of this technical reference.</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#telnet-webブラウザーによる設定の開始手順">2.1. Preparation for specifying settings via Telnet or a web browser</div><div class="search_word">2.1. preparation for specifying settings via telnet or a web browser prepare the computer and other items needed for specifying settings. prepare an ethernet cable of category 5 or higher for connecting to the product. to access the unit via telnet, telnet terminal software must be installed on the computer. for a list of compatible web browsers, see the website below. http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/rt/faq/gui/browser.html change the ip address of the computer used to specify settings. the default setting of 192.168.100.240/24 is specified in the unit. change the ip address for the computer used to specify settings so that it includes the segment 192.168.100.0/24 . if a fixed computer ip address is specified, write it down. for instructions on how to change computer ip addresses, refer to the computer instruction manual. use an ethernet cable of category 5 or higher to connect the unit to a computer. switch on the unit. the unit takes approximately 60 seconds to start up. when startup is completed, the indicators for the lan port to which the ethernet cable is connected will light up according to the communication speed and mode. access the unit using the computer for specifying settings. access from a telnet client access the unit (192.168.100.240) using terminal software. when access is successful, a screen that prompts for a username and password is displayed. for factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). after using “admin” to log in, the password must be changed to specify a new password. username: adminpassword: adminswx2210p-10g rev.1.03.13 (fri aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  copyright (c) 2018-2024 yamaha corporation. all rights reserved.please change the default password for admin.new password: (1) new password(confirm): (2) building configuration...[ok] 1 enter the new password. 2 enter the same password again. access from a web browser launch the web browser on the computer for specifying settings and access 192.168.100.240. when access is successful, the following login screen is displayed. if default settings are configured, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and “admin” as the password). for factory default settings, a language selection screen is displayed after successfully logging in. when prompted to change the password after using the default administrative user to log in, specify a new password. after that, specify settings as appropriate for the given product operating environment. for details on specifying settings from a telnet client, refer to command reference . for details on specifying settings via a web browser, refer to help within the gui accessed.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. Preparation for specifying settings via Telnet or a web browser Prepare the computer and other items needed for specifying settings. Prepare an Ethernet cable of category 5 or higher for connecting to the product. To access the unit via TELNET, TELNET terminal software must be installed on the computer. For a list of compatible web browsers, see the website below. http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/RT/FAQ/gui/browser.html Change the IP address of the computer used to specify settings. The default setting of 192.168.100.240/24 is specified in the unit. Change the IP address for the computer used to specify settings so that it includes the segment 192.168.100.0/24 . If a fixed computer IP address is specified, write it down. For instructions on how to change computer IP addresses, refer to the computer instruction manual. Use an Ethernet cable of category 5 or higher to connect the unit to a computer. Switch ON the unit. The unit takes approximately 60 seconds to start up. When startup is completed, the indicators for the LAN port to which the Ethernet cable is connected will light up according to the communication speed and mode. Access the unit using the computer for specifying settings. Access from a TELNET client Access the unit (192.168.100.240) using terminal software. When access is successful, a screen that prompts for a username and password is displayed. For factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). After using “admin” to log in, the password must be changed to specify a new password. Username: adminPassword: adminSWX2210P-10G Rev.1.03.13 (Fri Aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  Copyright (c) 2018-2024 Yamaha Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Please change the default password for admin.New Password: (1) New Password(Confirm): (2) Building configuration...[OK] 1 Enter the new password. 2 Enter the same password again. Access from a web browser Launch the web browser on the computer for specifying settings and access 192.168.100.240. When access is successful, the following login screen is displayed. If default settings are configured, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and “admin” as the password). For factory default settings, a language selection screen is displayed after successfully logging in. When prompted to change the password after using the default administrative user to log in, specify a new password. After that, specify settings as appropriate for the given product operating environment. For details on specifying settings from a TELNET client, refer to Command Reference . For details on specifying settings via a web browser, refer to Help within the GUI accessed.</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#l2msマネージャー-を使用した設定">2.2. Settings using L2MS manager</div><div class="search_word">2.2. settings using l2ms manager this method connects this product to a device operating as an l2ms manager and specifies the settings for this product via the l2ms manager. this method uses l2-level protocols for specifying the settings, so the settings can be specified even if this product and the l2ms manager have ip addresses on different networks. for example, if you have forgotten the ip address of this product and can no longer access it via telnet or a web browser, you can check the ip address assigned to this product or change the settings by connecting an l2ms manager to this product. for information on devices that can be used as an l2ms manager and details on how to use it, refer to l2ms technical reference . with firmware revisions later than rev.1.03.08, when this product is placed under the management of an l2ms manager in the factory default settings, the ip address is automatically changed from a fixed ip address to a dhcp client .</div><div class="display_word">2.2. Settings using L2MS manager This method connects this product to a device operating as an L2MS manager and specifies the settings for this product via the L2MS manager. This method uses L2-level protocols for specifying the settings, so the settings can be specified even if this product and the L2MS manager have IP addresses on different networks. For example, if you have forgotten the IP address of this product and can no longer access it via TELNET or a web browser, you can check the IP address assigned to this product or change the settings by connecting an L2MS manager to this product. For information on devices that can be used as an L2MS manager and details on how to use it, refer to L2MS Technical Reference . With firmware revisions later than Rev.1.03.08, when this product is placed under the management of an L2MS manager in the factory default settings, the IP address is automatically changed from a fixed IP address to a DHCP client .</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#本製品の設定を工場出荷時の状態に戻す">2.3. Restoration of product settings to factory-set state</div><div class="search_word">2.3. restoration of product settings to factory-set state to restore the settings of this product to the factory-set state, the following three ways are available. restore to the factory-set state from a web gui. run the cold start command to restore to the factory-set state. use the led mode button to restore to the factory-set state. to restore the settings to the factory-set state using the led mode button , follow the steps below: turn on the power while pressing the led mode button on the front of this product. press and hold the led mode button and wait about 10 seconds. when all led indicators except the power indicator light up orange, release the led mode button .</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Restoration of product settings to factory-set state To restore the settings of this product to the factory-set state, the following three ways are available. Restore to the factory-set state from a web GUI. Run the cold start command to restore to the factory-set state. Use the LED Mode button to restore to the factory-set state. To restore the settings to the factory-set state using the LED MODE button , follow the steps below: Turn on the power while pressing the LED MODE button on the front of this product. Press and hold the LED MODE button and wait about 10 seconds. When all LED indicators except the POWER indicator light up orange, release the LED MODE button .</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#ファームウェア更新について">3. Updating Firmware</div><div class="search_word">3. updating firmware to ensure reliable operation, we recommend applying the most recent firmware updates, which include new functionality and bug fixes. please verify your system version before applying updates. use the show environment command to check the system version. note that a firmware version downgrade from rev.1.03.13 or later version to rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts.</div><div class="display_word">3. Updating Firmware To ensure reliable operation, we recommend applying the most recent firmware updates, which include new functionality and bug fixes. Please verify your system version before applying updates. Use the show environment command to check the system version. Note that a firmware version downgrade from Rev.1.03.13 or later version to Rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts.</div></div><div id="index"><div class="search_title" docfname="index" doctitle="SWX2210P" link="#使用上のご注意">4. Precautions</div><div class="search_word">4. precautions please note that yamaha accepts no responsibility for damage or losses that result from using the product or specifying settings incorrectly. be aware of this in advance. if plugged into a 200 v ac power supply outlet, the customer is responsible for supplying an appropriate power cord. note that yamaha accepts no responsibility for any of various types of damage or losses caused by the power cord. be aware of this in advance. do not touch the inside of ports with fingers or metallic objects, etc. do not install the product where it is exposed to direct sunlight or unusually high temperatures (such as next to a heater). do not use the product in a location subject to sudden changes in ambient temperature. sudden changes in ambient temperature could cause condensation to form on the product. if condensation forms, let it dry for a while before switching on the power supply. before touching this unit, remove static charge from yourself and your clothing. do not place this unit in locations where there is a strong magnetic field. do not connect equipment that generates noise to the same electrical power supply line as this unit. such conditions might cause malfunctions or faulty operation. using the product could cause noise to occur in nearby devices, such as telephones, radios, or televisions. if noise occurs, try relocating or reorienting the product. do not route communication cables near power cords. power cords could induce high voltages that might cause malfunction. unplug the product from the power outlet while not in use. use enhanced category 5 (cat5e) or better lan cable for 1000base-t connections. this product includes a lithium-ion battery for backup power for clock functionality. therefore, the product and its accessories are disposed of in accordance with local laws and regulations. do not place the magnetic sheet in the accessories near devices that are easily affected by magnetism, such as computers or clocks. do not place magnetic cards, magnetic disks, and the like near the magnetic sheet in the accessories. there is a risk that the recorded contents will be erased.</div><div class="display_word">4. Precautions Please note that Yamaha accepts no responsibility for damage or losses that result from using the product or specifying settings incorrectly. Be aware of this in advance. If plugged into a 200 V AC power supply outlet, the customer is responsible for supplying an appropriate power cord. Note that Yamaha accepts no responsibility for any of various types of damage or losses caused by the power cord. Be aware of this in advance. Do not touch the inside of ports with fingers or metallic objects, etc. Do not install the product where it is exposed to direct sunlight or unusually high temperatures (such as next to a heater). Do not use the product in a location subject to sudden changes in ambient temperature. Sudden changes in ambient temperature could cause condensation to form on the product. If condensation forms, let it dry for a while before switching ON the power supply. Before touching this unit, remove static charge from yourself and your clothing. Do not place this unit in locations where there is a strong magnetic field. Do not connect equipment that generates noise to the same electrical power supply line as this unit. Such conditions might cause malfunctions or faulty operation. Using the product could cause noise to occur in nearby devices, such as telephones, radios, or televisions. If noise occurs, try relocating or reorienting the product. Do not route communication cables near power cords. Power cords could induce high voltages that might cause malfunction. Unplug the product from the power outlet while not in use. Use enhanced category 5 (CAT5e) or better LAN cable for 1000BASE-T connections. This product includes a lithium-ion battery for backup power for clock functionality. Therefore, the product and its accessories are disposed of in accordance with local laws and regulations. Do not place the magnetic sheet in the accessories near devices that are easily affected by magnetism, such as computers or clocks. Do not place magnetic cards, magnetic disks, and the like near the magnetic sheet in the accessories. There is a risk that the recorded contents will be erased.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#インターフェース基本機能">Basic Interface Functions</div><div class="search_word">basic interface functions</div><div class="display_word">Basic Interface Functions</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview here we explain the basic interface functions of this product.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Here we explain the basic interface functions of this product.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#インターフェースの種類">3.1. Interface types</div><div class="search_word">3.1. interface types this product can handle the five interface types shown in the table below. interface types interface id explanation lan port port this is a physical port of this product. this interface is expressed as port followed by “port number printed on the chassis”. specifying lan port #1: port1.1 vlan interface vlan this is a user-defined vlan. this interface is expressed as vlan followed by “vlan id”. specifying vlan1: vlan1 static logical interface sa this is the user-defined link aggregation. multiple lan ports can be grouped together and used as one interface. this interface is expressed as “sa” followed by “logical link id”. specifying a static logical interface for logical link id #1: sa1</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Interface types This product can handle the five interface types shown in the table below. Interface types Interface ID Explanation LAN port port This is a physical port of this product. This interface is expressed as port followed by “port number printed on the chassis”. Specifying LAN port #1: port1.1 VLAN interface vlan This is a User-defined VLAN. This interface is expressed as vlan followed by “VLAN ID”. Specifying VLAN1: vlan1 Static logical interface sa This is the User-defined link aggregation. Multiple LAN ports can be grouped together and used as one interface. This interface is expressed as “sa” followed by “logical link ID”. Specifying a static logical interface for logical link ID #1: sa1</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#インターフェース制御">3.2. Interface control</div><div class="search_word">3.2. interface control the interface on this product can be controlled as shown in the table below. interface control items for each port control items commands explanation set description description sets the description text for the applicable interface. enable/disable shutdown enables/disables the interface. communication speed/communication mode speed-duplex sets the communication speed and communication mode for the interface. (select from the following values.) - auto negotiation - 1gbps / full duplex - 100mbps / full duplex - 100mbps / half duplex - 10mbps / full duplex - 10mbps / half duplex cross/straight automatic detection (auto mdi/mdi-x function) mdix automatically detects the port type (mdi or mdi-x) of the connected port and the cable type (cross or straight). this function gives the ability to interconnect without dependency. speed downshift - this function automatically reduces the speed and attempts to link when a lan cable that cannot be used with 1000base-t is connected. this function is always enabled for lan ports. (cannot be disabled.) eee eee sets whether to use the energy saving technology for ethernet (eee: energy efficient ethernet). this is standard for ieee 802.3az. system-wide (common to all ports) interface control items control items commands explanation mru mru sets the maximum frame size that can be received by the interface, within a range of 1,522–10,240 bytes . bpdu pass through pass-through bpdu sets whether to enable/disable the transmission of bpdu frames (control frames used in the spanning tree). eap pass through pass-through eap sets whether to enable or disable the transmission of eap frames (authentication frames used in ieee 802.1x authentication). command control of each interface is performed as shown on the table below. interface control functionality chart interface name set description enable/disable communication speed/communication mode cross/straight automatic detection eee lan port yes yes yes yes yes vlan interface yes no no no no static logical interface yes yes no no no</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Interface control The interface on this product can be controlled as shown in the table below. Interface control items for each port Control items Commands Explanation Set description description Sets the description text for the applicable interface. Enable/disable shutdown Enables/disables the interface. Communication speed/communication mode speed-duplex Sets the communication speed and communication mode for the interface. (Select from the following values.) - Auto negotiation - 1Gbps / Full duplex - 100Mbps / Full duplex - 100Mbps / Half duplex - 10Mbps / Full duplex - 10Mbps / Half duplex Cross/straight automatic detection (Auto MDI/MDI-X function) mdix Automatically detects the port type (MDI or MDI-X) of the connected port and the cable type (cross or straight). This function gives the ability to interconnect without dependency. Speed downshift - This function automatically reduces the speed and attempts to link when a LAN cable that cannot be used with 1000BASE-T is connected. This function is always enabled for LAN ports. (Cannot be disabled.) EEE eee Sets whether to use the energy saving technology for Ethernet (EEE: Energy Efficient Ethernet). This is standard for IEEE 802.3az. System-wide (common to all ports) interface control items Control items Commands Explanation MRU mru Sets the maximum frame size that can be received by the interface, within a range of 1,522–10,240 bytes . BPDU pass through pass-through bpdu Sets whether to enable/disable the transmission of BPDU frames (control frames used in the spanning tree). EAP pass through pass-through eap Sets whether to enable or disable the transmission of EAP frames (authentication frames used in IEEE 802.1X authentication). Command control of each interface is performed as shown on the table below. Interface control functionality chart Interface name Set description Enable/disable Communication speed/communication mode Cross/straight automatic detection EEE LAN port Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes VLAN interface Yes No No No No Static logical interface Yes Yes No No No</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#lanポートの初期状態">3.3. LAN port defaults</div><div class="search_word">3.3. lan port defaults the product lan ports are in the following state given default settings. all lan ports function as access ports (ports that handle untagged frames), and belong to the default vlan (vlan #1). an ipv4 address (192.168.100.240/24) is assigned to the default vlan (vlan #1) to which all lan ports belong.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. LAN port defaults The product LAN ports are in the following state given default settings. All LAN ports function as access ports (ports that handle untagged frames), and belong to the default VLAN (VLAN #1). An IPv4 address (192.168.100.240/24) is assigned to the default VLAN (VLAN #1) to which all LAN ports belong.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ポートミラーリング">3.4. Port mirroring</div><div class="search_word">3.4. port mirroring this product provides a port mirroring function, which copies the data traffic from a selected lan port to another specified port. the communication status can be analyzed by collecting the copied packets. this product allows you to specify four mirror ports, making all other lan ports allocable as “monitor ports.” however, the following restrictions apply. a single monitor port cannot be mirrored to multiple mirror ports. a port set as a mirror port cannot be used as a monitor port. a lan port that belongs to a logical interface cannot be used as a mirror port. the monitoring direction (transmit/receive, transmit only, receive only) can be selected for the monitor ports. the mirror command can be used to set the port mirroring. the mirror port setting is disabled by default.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Port mirroring This product provides a port mirroring function, which copies the data traffic from a selected LAN port to another specified port. The communication status can be analyzed by collecting the copied packets. This product allows you to specify four mirror ports, making all other LAN ports allocable as “monitor ports.” However, the following restrictions apply. A single monitor port cannot be mirrored to multiple mirror ports. A port set as a mirror port cannot be used as a monitor port. A LAN port that belongs to a logical interface cannot be used as a mirror port. The monitoring direction (transmit/receive, transmit only, receive only) can be selected for the monitor ports. The mirror command can be used to set the port mirroring. The mirror port setting is disabled by default.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#フレームカウンター">3.5. Frame counter</div><div class="search_word">3.5. frame counter this product counts the number of frames transmitted/received for each lan port. (this is called a “frame counter”.) to reference the frame counter, use the show frame counter command. the table below shows the display items for the frame counter and their maximum values. received frame counter display items display item explanation maximum value packets (*1) number of received packets 4,294,967,295 octets number of octets received 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 total-good-packets (*2) number of packets received successfully 4,294,967,295 total-error-packets (*2) number of reception error packets (crc error, alignment error, frame size error) 4,294,967,295 drops (*2) number of packets discarded during reception due to a filter function or other reasons 4,294,967,295 broadcast-and-multicast-packets broadcast and multicast packets received 4,294,967,295 64octet packets number of 64-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 65-127octet packets number of 65 to 127-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 128-255octet packets number of 128 to 255-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 256-511octet packets number of 256 to 511-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 512-1023octet packets number of 512 to 1,023-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 1024-maxoctet packets number of 1,024 to maximum-octet packets received (*3) 4,294,967,295 (*1)  : the packet value is the total of the (*2) packets. (*3) : the value will change, depending on the specified mru value. transmitted frame counter display items display item explanation maximum value packets (*1) number of packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 octets number of octets transmitted 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 total-good-packets (*2) number of packets transmitted successfully 4,294,967,295 total-error-packets (*2) number of transmission error packets (frame size error) 4,294,967,295 drops (*2) number of packets discarded during transmission (since no discarding occurs on the sending side, the counter value is always 0.) - broadcast-and-multicast-packets broadcast and multicast packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 64octet packets number of 64-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 65-127octet packets number of 65 to 127-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 128-255octet packets number of 128 to 255-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 256-511octet packets number of 256 to 511-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 512-1023octet packets number of 512 to 1,023-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 1024-maxoctet packets number of 1,024 to maximum-octet (*3) packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 (*1)  : the packet value is the total of the (*2) packets. (*3) : the value will change, depending on the specified mru value. the frame counter can also be cleared by using the clear counters command. when you execute the show interface command to display the lan port status, the frame counter value to be displayed will be the same frame counter value as the show frame-counter command.</div><div class="display_word">3.5. Frame counter This product counts the number of frames transmitted/received for each LAN port. (This is called a “frame counter”.) To reference the frame counter, use the show frame counter command. The table below shows the display items for the frame counter and their maximum values. Received frame counter display items Display item Explanation Maximum value packets (*1) Number of received packets 4,294,967,295 octets Number of octets received 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 total-good-packets (*2) Number of packets received successfully 4,294,967,295 total-error-packets (*2) Number of reception error packets (CRC error, alignment error, frame size error) 4,294,967,295 drops (*2) Number of packets discarded during reception due to a filter function or other reasons 4,294,967,295 broadcast-and-multicast-packets Broadcast and multicast packets received 4,294,967,295 64octet packets Number of 64-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 65-127octet packets Number of 65 to 127-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 128-255octet packets Number of 128 to 255-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 256-511octet packets Number of 256 to 511-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 512-1023octet packets Number of 512 to 1,023-octet packets received 4,294,967,295 1024-MAXoctet packets Number of 1,024 to maximum-octet packets received (*3) 4,294,967,295 (*1)  : The packet value is the total of the (*2) packets. (*3) : The value will change, depending on the specified MRU value. Transmitted frame counter display items Display item Explanation Maximum value packets (*1) Number of packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 octets Number of octets transmitted 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 total-good-packets (*2) Number of packets transmitted successfully 4,294,967,295 total-error-packets (*2) Number of transmission error packets (Frame size error) 4,294,967,295 drops (*2) Number of packets discarded during transmission (Since no discarding occurs on the sending side, the counter value is always 0.) - broadcast-and-multicast-packets Broadcast and multicast packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 64octet packets Number of 64-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 65-127octet packets Number of 65 to 127-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 128-255octet packets Number of 128 to 255-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 256-511octet packets Number of 256 to 511-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 512-1023octet packets Number of 512 to 1,023-octet packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 1024-MAXoctet packets Number of 1,024 to maximum-octet (*3) packets transmitted 4,294,967,295 (*1)  : The packet value is the total of the (*2) packets. (*3) : The value will change, depending on the specified MRU value. The frame counter can also be cleared by using the clear counters command. When you execute the show interface command to display the LAN port status, the frame counter value to be displayed will be the same frame counter value as the show frame-counter command.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. basic interface functions: list of related commands operations operating commands set description description shutdown shutdown set communication speed and communication mode speed-duplex set cross/straight automatic detection mdix auto set eee eee show eee status information show eee status set mru mru set bpdu pass through pass-through bpdu set eap pass through eap-through bpdu set port mirroring mirror show mirroring port status show mirror show interface status show interface show simplified interface status show interface brief show frame counter show frame-counter clear frame counters clear counters</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Basic interface functions: list of related commands Operations Operating commands Set description description Shutdown shutdown Set communication speed and communication mode speed-duplex Set cross/straight automatic detection mdix auto Set EEE eee Show EEE status information show eee status Set MRU mru Set BPDU pass through pass-through bpdu Set EAP pass through eap-through bpdu Set port mirroring mirror Show mirroring port status show mirror Show interface status show interface Show simplified interface status show interface brief Show frame counter show frame-counter Clear frame counters clear counters</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#lanポートに対する基本設定">5.1. Basic LAN port settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. basic lan port settings some examples of basic lan port settings are shown below. for details on how to make the settings, refer to the command reference. set the description text for lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#description connected to rtx1210-router disable lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#shutdown enable lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown set the communication speed and communication mode for lan port #1 (port1.1) to 100mbps/full . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#speed-duplex 100-full</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Basic LAN port settings Some examples of basic LAN port settings are shown below. For details on how to make the settings, refer to the Command Reference. Set the description text for LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#description Connected to rtx1210-router Disable LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#shutdown Enable LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown Set the communication speed and communication mode for LAN port #1 (port1.1) to 100Mbps/Full . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#speed-duplex 100-full</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ミラーリング設定">5.2. Mirroring settings</div><div class="search_word">5.2. mirroring settings in this example, we will set lan port #1 to monitor the frames transmitted by lan port #4 and the frames transmitted by lan port #5. the roles of the ports are shown below. mirror port: lan port #1 (port1.1) monitor port: lan port #4 (port1.4), lan port #5 (port1.5) set the monitor port for mirror port lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#mirror interface port1.4 direction both (1) yamaha(config-if)#mirror interface port1.5 direction transmit (2) 1 monitor transmitted and received frames 2 monitor transmitted frames confirm the mirroring settings. yamaha#show mirrormonitor port  mirror port  direction============= ============ ==========port1.1       port1.4      both              port1.5      transmit</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Mirroring settings In this example, we will set LAN port #1 to monitor the frames transmitted by LAN port #4 and the frames transmitted by LAN port #5. The roles of the ports are shown below. Mirror port: LAN port #1 (port1.1) Monitor port: LAN port #4 (port1.4), LAN port #5 (port1.5) Set the monitor port for mirror port LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#mirror interface port1.4 direction both (1) Yamaha(config-if)#mirror interface port1.5 direction transmit (2) 1 Monitor transmitted and received frames 2 Monitor transmitted frames Confirm the mirroring settings. Yamaha#show mirrorMonitor Port  Mirror Port  Direction============= ============ ==========port1.1       port1.4      both              port1.5      transmit</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#lanポートの情報表示">5.3. Show LAN port information</div><div class="search_word">5.3. show lan port information confirm the status of lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha#show interface port 1.1interface port1.1  link is up  hardware is ethernet  hw addr: 00a0.deae.b89f  mru 1522  bpdu pass-through: enabled  eap pass-through: enabled  description: connected to router  ifindex 5001  speed-duplex: auto(configured), 1000-full(current)  auto mdi/mdix: on  vlan info :    switchport mode        : access    ingress filter         : enable    acceptable frame types : all    default vlan           :    1    configured vlans       :    1  interface counter:    input  packets                        : 34753           bytes                          : 7806026           drops                          : 12535           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 21176    output packets                        : 10351           bytes                          : 864389           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 7039</div><div class="display_word">5.3. Show LAN port information Confirm the status of LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha#show interface port 1.1Interface port1.1  Link is UP  Hardware is Ethernet  HW addr: 00a0.deae.b89f  MRU 1522  BPDU pass-through: Enabled  EAP pass-through: Enabled  Description: Connected to router  ifIndex 5001  Speed-Duplex: auto(configured), 1000-full(current)  Auto MDI/MDIX: on  Vlan info :    Switchport mode        : access    Ingress filter         : enable    Acceptable frame types : all    Default Vlan           :    1    Configured Vlans       :    1  Interface counter:    input  packets                        : 34753           bytes                          : 7806026           drops                          : 12535           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 21176    output packets                        : 10351           bytes                          : 864389           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 7039</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="interface_interface_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#リンクアグリゲーション">Link Aggregation</div><div class="search_word">link aggregation</div><div class="display_word">Link Aggregation</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview link aggregation is a function used to combine multiple lan ports that connect network devices, and handle them as a single logical interface. link aggregation is a technology that is useful when multiple communications occur. communications can be distributed by using a load balance function within the combined lines. if one lan port fails within the lines that were combined using link aggregation, and communications cannot be made, the other ports will continue communicating. link aggregation function overview the link aggregation functions in this product are shown below. link aggregation functions functions provided contents static link aggregation link aggregation for manually setting the lan ports to combine. this begins to operate as a logical interface when the lan ports link up.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Link aggregation is a function used to combine multiple LAN ports that connect network devices, and handle them as a single logical interface. Link aggregation is a technology that is useful when multiple communications occur. Communications can be distributed by using a load balance function within the combined lines. If one LAN port fails within the lines that were combined using link aggregation, and communications cannot be made, the other ports will continue communicating. Link aggregation function overview The link aggregation functions in this product are shown below. Link aggregation functions Functions provided Contents Static link aggregation Link aggregation for manually setting the LAN ports to combine. This begins to operate as a logical interface when the LAN ports link up.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used load balance this is a function to distribute forwarded frames between the lan ports that are associated with the logical interface. as a distribution rule, the l2/l3/l4 information within frames is used.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Load balance This is a function to distribute forwarded frames between the LAN ports that are associated with the logical interface. As a distribution rule, the L2/L3/L4 information within frames is used.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#スタティック-リンクアグリゲーション-仕様">3.1. Static link aggregation specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. static link aggregation specifications the specifications for static link aggregation of this product are shown below. the link aggregation of this product can be defined into eight interfaces . an interface number from 1–8 can be assigned. a single logical interface can be associated with up to eight lan ports . the settings shown below must be the same for each of the lan ports contained within. port operation port mode (access/trunk [including native vlan settings]) associated vlan associated multiple vlan group it is recommended that the following settings be consistent across all lan ports contained within. communication speed/communication mode flow control storm control l2ms filter/non-l2ms filter the following operations can be performed for the logical interface. add description text ( description command) enable/disable the interface ( shutdown command) configure a vlan and multiple vlan the port-channel load-balance command allows you to select the load balance rule from the following items. the load balance setting is common to all logical interfaces. the default setting is the destination/source mac address . destination mac address source mac address destination/source mac address destination ip address source ip address destination/source ip address destination port number source port number destination/source port numbers use the static-channel-group command to associate a lan port with a static logical interface. when associating a lan port with an interface number for which there is no static logical interface, a new logical interface will be generated. when the associated lan port no longer exists as a result of removing lan ports from a static logical interface, the relevant logical interface will be deleted. one lan port cannot be associated with multiple logical interfaces. in addition, a lan port used as a mirror port for port mirroring cannot be associated with a static logical interface. use the show static-channel-group command to show the static logical interface’s status.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Static link aggregation specifications The specifications for static link aggregation of this product are shown below. The link aggregation of this product can be defined into eight interfaces . An interface number from 1–8 can be assigned. A single logical interface can be associated with up to eight LAN ports . The settings shown below must be the same for each of the LAN ports contained within. Port operation Port mode (access/trunk [including native VLAN settings]) Associated VLAN Associated multiple VLAN group It is recommended that the following settings be consistent across all LAN ports contained within. Communication speed/communication mode Flow control Storm control L2MS filter/non-L2MS filter The following operations can be performed for the logical interface. Add description text ( description command) Enable/disable the interface ( shutdown command) Configure a VLAN and multiple VLAN The port-channel load-balance command allows you to select the load balance rule from the following items. The load balance setting is common to all logical interfaces. The default setting is the destination/source MAC address . Destination MAC address Source MAC address Destination/source MAC address Destination IP address Source IP address Destination/source IP address Destination port number Source port number Destination/source port numbers Use the static-channel-group command to associate a LAN port with a static logical interface. When associating a LAN port with an interface number for which there is no static logical interface, a new logical interface will be generated. When the associated LAN port no longer exists as a result of removing LAN ports from a static logical interface, the relevant logical interface will be deleted. One LAN port cannot be associated with multiple logical interfaces. In addition, a LAN port used as a mirror port for port mirroring cannot be associated with a static logical interface. Use the show static-channel-group command to show the static logical interface’s status.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set the static logical interface static-channel-group show the static logical interface status show static-channel-group set load balance function rules port-channel load-balance</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Set the static logical interface static-channel-group Show the static logical interface status show static-channel-group Set load balance function rules port-channel load-balance</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#スタティック論理インターフェースの設定">5.1. Set the static logical interface</div><div class="search_word">5.1. set the static logical interface in this example, we will set link aggregation to use four lan ports, in order to communicate between l2 switches. static link aggregation is set to static. the logical interface numbers are as follows: switch a: #2, switch b: #5. the lan ports associated with the logical interface are all access ports, and are associated with the vlan #1000. define [switch a] vlan #1000, and associate it with lan ports (#15, #17, #19, #21, #23). together with this, associate lan ports (#17, #19, #21, #23) with the logical interface #2. yamaha(config)#vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.15 (2) yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (3) yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.17 (4) yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (5) yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2 (6) yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.19yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.21yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.23yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2 1 define vlan #1000 2 set lan port #15 3 set the port as access port and associate it with vlan #1000 4 set lan port #17 5 set the port as access port and associate it with vlan #1000 6 associate it with logical interface #2 confirm the setting status of [switch a] logical interface #2. yamaha#show static-channel-group% static aggregator: sa2% member:   port1.17   port1.19   port1.21   port1.23 define [switch b] vlan #1000, and associate it with lan ports (#07, #09, #11, #13, #15). together with this, associate lan ports (#09, #11, #13, #15) with logical interface #5. yamaha(config)#vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.7yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.9yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.11yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.13yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.15yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5 confirm the setting status of [switch b] logical interface #5. yamaha#show static-channel-group% static aggregator: sa5% member:   port1.9   port1.11   port1.13   port1.15 enable [switch a] logical interface. yamaha(config)#interface sa2 (1) yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown (2) 1 set logical interface #2 2 enable the logical interface enable [switch b] logical interface. yamaha(config)#interface sa5 (1) yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown (2) 1 set logical interface #5 2 enable the logical interface confirm the setting status of [switch a] logical interface. yamaha#show interface sa2interface sa2  link is up  hardware is aggregate  mru 1522  bpdu pass-through: enabled  eap pass-through: enabled  description:  ifindex 4502  vlan info :    switchport mode        : access    ingress filter         : enable    acceptable frame types : all    default vlan           : 1000    configured vlans       : 1000  interface counter:    input  packets                        : 2109           bytes                          : 211698           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 2109    output packets                        : 24           bytes                          : 2952           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 24 confirm the setting status of [switch b] logical interface. yamaha#show interface sa5interface sa5  link is up  hardware is aggregate  mru 1522  bpdu pass-through: enabled  eap pass-through: enabled  description:  ifindex 4505  vlan info :    switchport mode        : access    ingress filter         : enable    acceptable frame types : all    default vlan           : 1000    configured vlans       : 1000  interface counter:    input  packets                        : 24           bytes                          : 2952           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 24    output packets                        : 2109           bytes                          : 211698           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 2109</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Set the static logical interface In this example, we will set link aggregation to use four LAN ports, in order to communicate between L2 switches. Static link aggregation is set to static. The logical interface numbers are as follows: Switch A: #2, switch B: #5. The LAN ports associated with the logical interface are all access ports, and are associated with the VLAN #1000. Define [switch A] VLAN #1000, and associate it with LAN ports (#15, #17, #19, #21, #23). Together with this, associate LAN ports (#17, #19, #21, #23) with the logical interface #2. Yamaha(config)#vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.15 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.17 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (5) Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2 (6) Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.19Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.21Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.23Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 2 1 Define VLAN #1000 2 Set LAN port #15 3 Set the port as access port and associate it with VLAN #1000 4 Set LAN port #17 5 Set the port as access port and associate it with VLAN #1000 6 Associate it with logical interface #2 Confirm the setting status of [switch A] logical interface #2. Yamaha#show static-channel-group% Static Aggregator: sa2% Member:   port1.17   port1.19   port1.21   port1.23 Define [switch B] VLAN #1000, and associate it with LAN ports (#07, #09, #11, #13, #15). Together with this, associate LAN ports (#09, #11, #13, #15) with logical interface #5. Yamaha(config)#vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.7Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.9Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.11Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.13Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5Yamaha(config-if)#interface port1.15Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000Yamaha(config-if)#static-channel-group 5 Confirm the setting status of [switch B] logical interface #5. Yamaha#show static-channel-group% Static Aggregator: sa5% Member:   port1.9   port1.11   port1.13   port1.15 Enable [switch A] logical interface. Yamaha(config)#interface sa2 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown (2) 1 Set logical interface #2 2 Enable the logical interface Enable [switch B] logical interface. Yamaha(config)#interface sa5 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#no shutdown (2) 1 Set logical interface #5 2 Enable the logical interface Confirm the setting status of [switch A] logical interface. Yamaha#show interface sa2Interface sa2  Link is UP  Hardware is AGGREGATE  MRU 1522  BPDU pass-through: Enabled  EAP pass-through: Enabled  Description:  ifIndex 4502  Vlan info :    Switchport mode        : access    Ingress filter         : enable    Acceptable frame types : all    Default Vlan           : 1000    Configured Vlans       : 1000  Interface counter:    input  packets                        : 2109           bytes                          : 211698           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 2109    output packets                        : 24           bytes                          : 2952           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 24 Confirm the setting status of [switch B] logical interface. Yamaha#show interface sa5Interface sa5  Link is UP  Hardware is AGGREGATE  MRU 1522  BPDU pass-through: Enabled  EAP pass-through: Enabled  Description:  ifIndex 4505  Vlan info :    Switchport mode        : access    Ingress filter         : enable    Acceptable frame types : all    Default Vlan           : 1000    Configured Vlans       : 1000  Interface counter:    input  packets                        : 24           bytes                          : 2952           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 24    output packets                        : 2109           bytes                          : 211698           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 2109</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_lag"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_lag" doctitle="Link" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation basic interface functions</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation Basic Interface Functions</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe制御">PoE Control</div><div class="search_word">poe control</div><div class="display_word">PoE Control</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview poe (power over ethernet) is a technology that supplies power using an ethernet cable (category 5e or higher). this product complies with ieee 802.3at , which allows the product to supply power to class 4 powered devices. in ieee 802.3at, terms called power supply side (device that supplies power) pse: power sourcing equipment power receiving side (device that receives power): pd: powered device are defined. this product uses alternative a , which uses the signal lines (1, 2, 3, 6) of cables as the power supply method.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview PoE (Power over Ethernet) is a technology that supplies power using an Ethernet cable (category 5e or higher). This product complies with IEEE 802.3at , which allows the product to supply power to Class 4 powered devices. In IEEE 802.3at, terms called Power supply side (device that supplies power) PSE: Power Sourcing Equipment Power receiving side (device that receives power): PD: Powered Device are defined. This product uses Alternative A , which uses the signal lines (1, 2, 3, 6) of cables as the power supply method.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe-給電機能の有効無効-制御">3.1. PoE power supply function enable/disable control</div><div class="search_word">3.1. poe power supply function enable/disable control ports that support poe power supply of this product (hereinafter referred to as poe ports) are as follows. swx2210p-10g: ports 1 to 8 swx2210p-18g: ports 1 to 16 swx2210p-28g: ports 1 to 24 the power supply function of all the poe ports of this product is enabled as the factory default. however, the power supply function can also be disabled on the each port basis. if the connected device is a normal ethernet device, the power will not be supplied and the device will operate as a normal ethernet port .</div><div class="display_word">3.1. PoE power supply function enable/disable control Ports that support PoE power supply of this product (hereinafter referred to as PoE ports) are as follows. SWX2210P-10G: ports 1 to 8 SWX2210P-18G: ports 1 to 16 SWX2210P-28G: ports 1 to 24 The power supply function of all the PoE ports of this product is enabled as the factory default. However, the power supply function can also be disabled on the each port basis. If the connected device is a normal Ethernet device, the power will not be supplied and the device will operate as a normal Ethernet port .</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#給電クラスと同時給電可能なポートの最大数">3.2. Power supply class and maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously</div><div class="search_word">3.2. power supply class and maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously this product is a power supply device that complies with the poe standards. it can supply up to 30 w of power per port . it automatically detects the connected pd, identifies its power class, and starts the power supply. the power classes defined in ieee 802.3at and the maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously are shown below. class power of device that receives power (max) power of device that supplies power maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously (upper limit of poe power supply) swx2210p-10g(124w) swx2210p-18g(247w) swx2210p-28g(370w) 0 13.0 w 15.4 w 8 16 24 1 3.84 w 4.0 w 8 16 24 2 6.49 w 7.0 w 8 16 24 3 13.0 w 15.4 w 8 16 24 4 25.5 w 30.0 w 4 (*) 8 (*) 12 (*) (*): depending on the power consumption of the device that receives power, the simultaneous power supply beyond the number of ports listed can be performed.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Power supply class and maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously This product is a power supply device that complies with the PoE standards. It can supply up to 30 W of power per port . It automatically detects the connected PD, identifies its power class, and starts the power supply. The power classes defined in IEEE 802.3at and the maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously are shown below. Class Power of device that receives power (MAX) Power of device that supplies power Maximum number of ports that can be powered simultaneously (Upper limit of PoE power supply) SWX2210P-10G(124W) SWX2210P-18G(247W) SWX2210P-28G(370W) 0 13.0 W 15.4 W 8 16 24 1 3.84 W 4.0 W 8 16 24 2 6.49 W 7.0 W 8 16 24 3 13.0 W 15.4 W 8 16 24 4 25.5 W 30.0 W 4 (*) 8 (*) 12 (*) (*): Depending on the power consumption of the device that receives power, the simultaneous power supply beyond the number of ports listed can be performed.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#ガードバンド">3.3. Guard band</div><div class="search_word">3.3. guard band a guard band is a margin set for the maximum power supply to prevent unexpected power outages. if the available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band, power supply to a newly connected pd will be suppressed. setting this guard band value appropriately can prevent a newly connected pd from stopping the power supply to other pds. this product allows you to specify the guard band value in the range of 0 to 30 w . the default is 7 w .</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Guard band A guard band is a margin set for the maximum power supply to prevent unexpected power outages. If the available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band, power supply to a newly connected PD will be suppressed. Setting this guard band value appropriately can prevent a newly connected PD from stopping the power supply to other PDs. This product allows you to specify the guard band value in the range of 0 to 30 W . The default is 7 W .</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#給電優先度">3.4. PoE power priority</div><div class="search_word">3.4. poe power priority this product allows you to specify the power supply priority order for each poe port. the priority is critical , high , and low in descending order. the default is low for all ports. among ports with the same priority setting, the smaller the port number, the higher the priority. the priority goes down in the port number order (1 → 2 → 3…​). when an lldp frame containing the power via mdi tlv is received from a pd, the poe port that received the lldp frame operates with the power supply priority specified in the lldp frame regardless of the power supply priority setting.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. PoE power priority This product allows you to specify the power supply priority order for each PoE port. The priority is critical , high , and low in descending order. The default is low for all ports. Among ports with the same priority setting, the smaller the port number, the higher the priority. The priority goes down in the port number order (1 → 2 → 3…​). When an LLDP frame containing the Power via MDI TLV is received from a PD, the PoE port that received the LLDP frame operates with the power supply priority specified in the LLDP frame regardless of the power supply priority setting.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#poe給電動作">3.5. PoE power supply actions</div><div class="search_word">3.5. poe power supply actions this product performs the following processes depending on the power consumption. when the power consumption of the entire system is about to exceed the upper limit of the poe power supply. power supply from poe ports is stopped in the order from the lower priority to ensure that power consumption remains within the upper limit of poe power supply. at this time, the poe state led of the port to which power supply has been stopped lights up orange, and the status led also lights up orange. in addition, “portx.x over system power limit” is output to syslog. if the available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band power will continue to be supplied to pds that are already being powered. however, power will not be supplied to a newly-connected pd regardless of its power supply priority. at this case, the poe state led of the port to which power was not supplied lights up orange, and the status led also lights up orange. when the power consumption of a specific poe port has exceeded the upper limit of the poe power supply per port power supply to the corresponding poe port will be stopped. power supply to other poe ports will continue. at this time, the poe state led of the port to which power supply has been stopped flashes orange, and the status led lights up orange. in addition, “portx.x over load” is output to syslog. if power consumption is other than the above (within normal range) power supply to pds will continue. at this time, the poe state led of the poe port being powered lights up green. in addition, the following processing will be performed if the poe port status or the available power supply amount has changed. when power supply is started “portx.x power on” is output to syslog. the poe state led of the poe port to which power supply has started lights up green. when power supply is stopped “portx.x power off” is output to syslog. the poe state led of the poe port to which power supply has been stopped turns off. when the remaining available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band “guardband on” is output to syslog. when the remaining available power supply amount recovers from a state at or below the guard band “guardband off” is output to syslog.</div><div class="display_word">3.5. PoE power supply actions This product performs the following processes depending on the power consumption. When the power consumption of the entire system is about to exceed the upper limit of the PoE power supply. Power supply from PoE ports is stopped in the order from the lower priority to ensure that power consumption remains within the upper limit of PoE power supply. At this time, the PoE STATE LED of the port to which power supply has been stopped lights up orange, and the STATUS LED also lights up orange. In addition, “PortX.X over system power limit” is output to SYSLOG. If the available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band Power will continue to be supplied to PDs that are already being powered. However, power will not be supplied to a newly-connected PD regardless of its power supply priority. At this case, the PoE STATE LED of the port to which power was not supplied lights up orange, and the STATUS LED also lights up orange. When the power consumption of a specific PoE port has exceeded the upper limit of the PoE power supply per port Power supply to the corresponding PoE port will be stopped. Power supply to other PoE ports will continue. At this time, the PoE STATE LED of the port to which power supply has been stopped flashes orange, and the STATUS LED lights up orange. In addition, “PortX.X over load” is output to SYSLOG. If power consumption is other than the above (within normal range) Power supply to PDs will continue. At this time, the PoE STATE LED of the PoE port being powered lights up green. In addition, the following processing will be performed if the PoE port status or the available power supply amount has changed. When power supply is started “PortX.X power on” is output to SYSLOG. The PoE STATE LED of the PoE port to which power supply has started lights up green. When power supply is stopped “PortX.X power off” is output to SYSLOG. The PoE STATE LED of the PoE port to which power supply has been stopped turns off. When the remaining available power supply amount reaches or falls below the guard band “guardband on” is output to SYSLOG. When the remaining available power supply amount recovers from a state at or below the guard band “guardband off” is output to SYSLOG.</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#lldpによる給電設定">3.6. Power supply setting by LLDP</div><div class="search_word">3.6. power supply setting by lldp when the product receives an lldp frame containing the power via mdi tlv from a pd, it automatically changes the power supply action of the poe port. this function only works on poe ports that can receive lldp frames. the power via mdi tlvs and the corresponding action to be changed are as shown below. power via mdi tlv (ieee802.3) action to be changed requested power priority poe power priority pd requested power value poe port power allocation</div><div class="display_word">3.6. Power supply setting by LLDP When the product receives an LLDP frame containing the Power via MDI TLV from a PD, it automatically changes the power supply action of the PoE port. This function only works on PoE ports that can receive LLDP frames. The Power Via MDI TLVs and the corresponding action to be changed are as shown below. Power Via MDI TLV (IEEE802.3) Action to be changed Requested power priority PoE power priority PD requested power value PoE port power allocation</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set the poe power supply function for the entire system power-inline enable set the poe power supply function on an interface basis power-inline enable set the description text for poe ports power-inline description set the poe port priority power-inline priority set a guard band power-inline guardband show poe power supply information show power-inline</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Set the PoE power supply function for the entire system power-inline enable Set the PoE power supply function on an interface basis power-inline enable Set the description text for PoE ports power-inline description Set the PoE port priority power-inline priority Set a guard band power-inline guardband Show PoE power supply information show power-inline</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#poeポートの給電設定">6. PoE Port Power Supply Settings</div><div class="search_word">6. poe port power supply settings specify the settings for the power supply function of port1.8. yamaha(config)#power-inline enable (1) yamaha(config)#interface port1.8yamaha(config-if)#power-inline description ap1 (2) yamaha(config-if)#power-inline priorty critical (3) yamaha(config-if)#power-inline enable (4) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#exit 1 enable the poe power supply function for the entire system. * not required if the default settings are used 2 set ap1 as the poe port description 3 set the poe port priority to the highest 4 enable the poe power supply function of the interface. * not required if the default settings are used</div><div class="display_word">6. PoE Port Power Supply Settings Specify the settings for the power supply function of port1.8. Yamaha(config)#power-inline enable (1) Yamaha(config)#interface port1.8Yamaha(config-if)#power-inline description AP1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#power-inline priorty critical (3) Yamaha(config-if)#power-inline enable (4) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#exit 1 Enable the PoE power supply function for the entire system. * Not required if the default settings are used 2 Set AP1 as the PoE port description 3 Set the PoE port priority to the highest 4 Enable the PoE power supply function of the interface. * Not required if the default settings are used</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#注意事項">7. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">7. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">7. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="interface_interface_poe"><div class="search_title" docfname="interface_interface_poe" doctitle="PoE" link="#関連文書">8. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">8. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">8. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp-snooping">IGMP Snooping</div><div class="search_word">igmp snooping</div><div class="display_word">IGMP Snooping</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview igmp snooping is a function to suppress consumption of network bandwidth in a vlan environment, by controlling any surplus multicast flooding. on an l2 switch, since multicast packets are distributed per vlan, if there is even one device in the vlan that wants to receive the multicast packet, the packet will be distributed to all ports within the same vlan. operations during multicast distribution (no igmp snooping) when using the igmp snooping function, the igmp messages exchanged between the receiving device and the multicast router are monitored (snooped), the packet from the relevant group will only be distributed to the port, to which the device that wants to receive the multicast packet is connected. operations during multicast distribution (using igmp snooping)</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview IGMP snooping is a function to suppress consumption of network bandwidth in a VLAN environment, by controlling any surplus multicast flooding. On an L2 switch, since multicast packets are distributed per VLAN, if there is even one device in the VLAN that wants to receive the multicast packet, the packet will be distributed to all ports within the same VLAN. Operations during multicast distribution (no IGMP snooping) When using the IGMP snooping function, the IGMP messages exchanged between the receiving device and the multicast router are monitored (snooped), the packet from the relevant group will only be distributed to the port, to which the device that wants to receive the multicast packet is connected. Operations during multicast distribution (using IGMP snooping)</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used igmp (internet group management protocol) this is a protocol to control multicast groups. the multicast router can determine which hosts on the lan are members of the multicast group, and the hosts can communicate which multicast group they belong to. there are three protocol versions, respectively defined by igmpv1 (rfc1112) , igmpv2 (rfc2236) and igmpv3 (rfc3376) . multicast router port this is the lan/sfp port to which the multicast router is connected. the lan/sfp port that receives the igmp general query is automatically acquired as the multicast router port. igmp report suppression function this is a function where the switch controls the data transmission load between the multicast router and the hosts. the messages gathered by this product to perform control are shown below. igmp reports replied to igmp general queries by hosts, sent from the multicast router igmp leave messages notified by the host the report suppression function works with igmpv1/v2/v3. fast leave function if a lan/sfp port receives an igmpv2/v3 leave message, this function immediately disconnects the port from ports receiving multicast traffic (deletes the fdb entry necessary for transmission). normally, when processing igmpv2/v3 messages, if a leave message is received, a group-specific query is transmitted to that port to confirm that the receiver exists, but if the fast leave function is enabled , that action is not performed. for this reason, the fast leave function is effective only when there is a single receiver under the control of the lan/sfp port . the fast leave function operates only when an igmpv2/v3 leave message is received. if the fast leave function is enabled and the auto-assignment option is specified, the port to which the switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port will confirm that a receiver exists when a leave message is received. the auto-assignment option allows you to use the fast leave function in a cascaded switch configuration. igmp query transmission function (igmp querier) this is a function to send igmp general and specific queries. it is used to enable the igmp snooping function in an environment without a multicast router. data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports this function controls multicast data being forwarded to the multicast router port. normally, all multicast group data already acquired by the product is forwarded to the multicast router port, but if this function is enabled , then only multicast group data acquired by receiving an igmp report via the multicast router port is forwarded. if unnecessary multicast data flow between switches is restricting bandwidth, the problem can be mitigated by enabling this function in combination with the l2-unknown-mcast discard command. igmp report forwarding function this function forwards igmp join/leave messages to ports to which a switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port. by enabling this function, igmp join/leave messages will be forwarded to non-querier switches in a cascaded switch configuration. when using the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports in an environment where multiple multicast data flow, we recommend that this function be enabled .</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) This is a protocol to control multicast groups. The multicast router can determine which hosts on the LAN are members of the multicast group, and the hosts can communicate which multicast group they belong to. There are three protocol versions, respectively defined by IGMPv1 (RFC1112) , IGMPv2 (RFC2236) and IGMPv3 (RFC3376) . Multicast Router Port This is the LAN/SFP port to which the multicast router is connected. The LAN/SFP port that receives the IGMP general query is automatically acquired as the multicast router port. IGMP Report Suppression Function This is a function where the switch controls the data transmission load between the multicast router and the hosts. The messages gathered by this product to perform control are shown below. IGMP reports replied to IGMP general queries by hosts, sent from the multicast router IGMP leave messages notified by the host The report suppression function works with IGMPv1/v2/v3. Fast Leave Function If a LAN/SFP port receives an IGMPv2/v3 leave message, this function immediately disconnects the port from ports receiving multicast traffic (deletes the FDB entry necessary for transmission). Normally, when processing IGMPv2/v3 messages, if a leave message is received, a group-specific query is transmitted to that port to confirm that the receiver exists, but if the fast leave function is enabled , that action is not performed. For this reason, the fast leave function is effective only when there is a single receiver under the control of the LAN/SFP port . The fast leave function operates only when an IGMPv2/v3 leave message is received. If the fast leave function is enabled and the auto-assignment option is specified, the port to which the switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port will confirm that a receiver exists when a leave message is received. The auto-assignment option allows you to use the fast leave function in a cascaded switch configuration. IGMP Query Transmission Function (IGMP Querier) This is a function to send IGMP general and specific queries. It is used to enable the IGMP snooping function in an environment without a multicast router. Data Transfer Suppression Function for Multicast Router Ports This function controls multicast data being forwarded to the multicast router port. Normally, all multicast group data already acquired by the product is forwarded to the multicast router port, but if this function is enabled , then only multicast group data acquired by receiving an IGMP report via the multicast router port is forwarded. If unnecessary multicast data flow between switches is restricting bandwidth, the problem can be mitigated by enabling this function in combination with the l2-unknown-mcast discard command. IGMP Report Forwarding Function This function forwards IGMP Join/Leave messages to ports to which a switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port. By enabling this function, IGMP Join/Leave messages will be forwarded to non-querier switches in a cascaded switch configuration. When using the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports in an environment where multiple multicast data flow, we recommend that this function be enabled .</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the operating specifications for igmp snooping are shown below. this product offers snooping functions compatible with igmp v1/v2/v3 . you can use the ip igmp snooping version command to make later versions operate on this product. version settings are made for the vlan interface , and initial settings are for v3 . the difference in operations between the configured version and received frame versions are shown in the table below. if an igmp query whose version is higher than the settings is received, the version will be lowered to the version that was configured, and the query will be forwarded. if an igmp report whose version is higher than the configured version is received, the relevant report will be discarded without being forwarded. if an igmp query and report of a lower version than the specified version is received, it is forwarded unmodified as the received version. the settings to enable/disable igmp snooping are made for the vlan interface . the default value is disabled . the igmp snooping function can handle the following six operations. multicast router port setting igmp report suppression fast leave igmp query transmission suppression of data forwarding to multicast router port igmp report forwarding although the multicast router port is automatically acquired on vlan interfaces where igmp snooping is set to “ enable ”, the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command can also be used to make static settings. the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command is used to check multicast router ports that are set for the vlan interface. the igmp report suppression function is specified for vlan interfaces using the ip igmp snooping report-suppression command. the default value is enabled . when transmitting an igmp report or igmp leave message using the report suppression function, the ipv4 address allocated to the vlan interface will be used for the source ipv4 address. (the address will be set and transmitted as “0.0.0.0” if it has not been allocated.) the fast leave function is set for the vlan interface using the ip igmp snooping fast-leave command. the default value is disabled . if the fast leave function is enabled and the auto-assignment option is specified, and a switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port, the fast leave function is automatically disabled on that port. to determine whether or not a switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port, the basic management tlv “system capabilities” of the lldp frame received on that port is checked to see if “bridge” is contained in the tlv. therefore, when using the auto-assignment option, enable lldp transmission and reception on both this product and the counterpart switch. if lldp is enabled on this product, the basic management tlv will always be sent. the igmp query transmission function is supported in order to allow use of igmp snooping in environments that do not have a multicast router. the igmp query transmission function is controlled with the following two parameters. igmp query transmission function enable/disable the ip igmp snooping querier command is used for vlan interfaces. the default value is disabled . igmp query transmission interval this is executed using the ip igmp snooping query-interval command. the transmission interval can be set from 20–18,000 sec., and the default value is 125 sec. when multiple devices transmit queries within a vlan, the query is sent by the device with the lowest ipv4 address within the vlan. when this product receives a query from a device whose ipv4 address is lower than its own, the query transmission function will be halted. the source ipv4 address that is set when a query is transmitted uses the ipv4 address allocated to the vlan interface. if an ipv4 address has not been allocated, an ipv4 address allocated to a different vlan interface is used instead. this product features a function that forces the ttl value of a received igmp packet to change to “1” if the ttl value is invalid (a value other than “1”), instead of discarding the packet. this is defined as the “ttl check function” , and it can be configured for a vlan interface by using the ip igmp snooping check ttl command. the default setting value for the ttl check function is enabled (packets with invalid ttl values are discarded) . this product features a function that adds the ra (router alert) option to an ip header of a received igmpv2/igmpv3 packet that does not contain the ra option and forwards it instead of discarding. this is defined as the “ra check function” , and it can be configured for a vlan interface by using the ip igmp snooping check ra command. the default value of the ra check function is set to disabled (forward packets that do not contain the ra option) . this product features a function that forces the tos (type of field) value of a received igmpv3 packet to change to “0xc0” if the tos value is invalid (a value other than “0xc0”), instead of discarding the packet. this is defined as the “tos check function” , and it can be configured for a vlan interface by using the ip igmp snooping check tos command. the default value of tos check function is set to disabled (forward packets with invalid tos values) . the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is specified for vlan interfaces using the ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression command. the default value is disabled . the igmp report forwarding function is specified using the ip igmp snooping report-forward command for vlan interfaces. the default value is disabled . when this function is enabled and a switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port, igmp join/leave messages will be forwarded to that port. to determine whether or not a switch is connected under the control of the lan/sfp port, the basic management tlv “system capabilities” of the lldp frame received on that port is checked to see if “bridge” is contained in the tlv. therefore, when using this function, enable lldp transmission and reception on both this product and the counterpart switch. if lldp is enabled on this product, the basic management tlv will always be sent.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The operating specifications for IGMP snooping are shown below. This product offers snooping functions compatible with IGMP v1/v2/v3 . You can use the ip igmp snooping version command to make later versions operate on this product. Version settings are made for the VLAN interface , and initial settings are for v3 . The difference in operations between the configured version and received frame versions are shown in the table below. If an IGMP query whose version is higher than the settings is received, the version will be lowered to the version that was configured, and the query will be forwarded. If an IGMP report whose version is higher than the configured version is received, the relevant report will be discarded without being forwarded. If an IGMP query and report of a lower version than the specified version is received, it is forwarded unmodified as the received version. The settings to enable/disable IGMP snooping are made for the VLAN interface . The default value is disabled . The IGMP snooping function can handle the following six operations. Multicast router port setting IGMP report suppression Fast leave IGMP query transmission Suppression of data forwarding to multicast router port IGMP report forwarding Although the multicast router port is automatically acquired on VLAN interfaces where IGMP snooping is set to “ enable ”, the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command can also be used to make static settings. The show ip igmp snooping mrouter command is used to check multicast router ports that are set for the VLAN interface. The IGMP report suppression function is specified for VLAN interfaces using the ip igmp snooping report-suppression command. The default value is enabled . When transmitting an IGMP report or IGMP leave message using the report suppression function, the IPv4 address allocated to the VLAN interface will be used for the source IPv4 address. (The address will be set and transmitted as “0.0.0.0” if it has not been allocated.) The fast leave function is set for the VLAN interface using the ip igmp snooping fast-leave command. The default value is disabled . If the fast leave function is enabled and the auto-assignment option is specified, and a switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port, the fast leave function is automatically disabled on that port. To determine whether or not a switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port, the basic management TLV “System Capabilities” of the LLDP frame received on that port is checked to see if “Bridge” is contained in the TLV. Therefore, when using the auto-assignment option, enable LLDP transmission and reception on both this product and the counterpart switch. If LLDP is enabled on this product, the basic management TLV will always be sent. The IGMP query transmission function is supported in order to allow use of IGMP snooping in environments that do not have a multicast router. The IGMP query transmission function is controlled with the following two parameters. IGMP query transmission function Enable/disable The ip igmp snooping querier command is used for VLAN interfaces. The default value is disabled . IGMP query transmission interval This is executed using the ip igmp snooping query-interval command. The transmission interval can be set from 20–18,000 sec., and the default value is 125 sec. When multiple devices transmit queries within a VLAN, the query is sent by the device with the lowest IPv4 address within the VLAN. When this product receives a query from a device whose IPv4 address is lower than its own, the query transmission function will be halted. The source IPv4 address that is set when a query is transmitted uses the IPv4 address allocated to the VLAN interface. If an IPv4 address has not been allocated, an IPv4 address allocated to a different VLAN interface is used instead. This product features a function that forces the TTL value of a received IGMP packet to change to “1” if the TTL value is invalid (a value other than “1”), instead of discarding the packet. This is defined as the “TTL check function” , and it can be configured for a VLAN interface by using the ip igmp snooping check ttl command. The default setting value for the TTL check function is enabled (packets with invalid TTL values are discarded) . This product features a function that adds the RA (Router Alert) option to an IP header of a received IGMPv2/IGMPv3 packet that does not contain the RA option and forwards it instead of discarding. This is defined as the “RA check function” , and it can be configured for a VLAN interface by using the ip igmp snooping check ra command. The default value of the RA check function is set to Disabled (forward packets that do not contain the RA option) . This product features a function that forces the ToS (Type of field) value of a received IGMPv3 packet to change to “0xc0” if the ToS value is invalid (a value other than “0xc0”), instead of discarding the packet. This is defined as the “ToS check function” , and it can be configured for a VLAN interface by using the ip igmp snooping check tos command. The default value of ToS check function is set to Disabled (forward packets with invalid ToS values) . The data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is specified for VLAN interfaces using the ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression command. The default value is disabled . The IGMP report forwarding function is specified using the ip igmp snooping report-forward command for VLAN interfaces. The default value is disabled . When this function is enabled and a switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port, IGMP Join/Leave messages will be forwarded to that port. To determine whether or not a switch is connected under the control of the LAN/SFP port, the basic management TLV “System Capabilities” of the LLDP frame received on that port is checked to see if “Bridge” is contained in the TLV. Therefore, when using this function, enable LLDP transmission and reception on both this product and the counterpart switch. If LLDP is enabled on this product, the basic management TLV will always be sent.</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable/disable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping set igmp snooping fast-leave ip igmp snooping fast-leave multicast router port setting ip igmp snooping mrouter interface set the query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval set igmp snooping ttl check ip igmp snooping check ttl set igmp snooping ra check ip igmp snooping check ra set igmp snooping tos check ip igmp snooping check tos set igmp version ip igmp snooping version set igmp report suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression set the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression set igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward set the processing method for unknown multicast frames in the system l2-unknown-mcast set forwarding of linked local multicasting addresses in the system l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local set the processing method for unknown multicast frames at vlan interfaces l2-unknown-mcast set forwarding of multicasting frames at vlan interfaces l2-mcast flood show multicast router port information show ip igmp snooping mrouter show igmp multicast receiver information show ip igmp snooping groups show igmp related information for an interface show ip igmp snooping interface clear igmp group membership entries clear ip igmp snooping</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Enable/disable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Set IGMP snooping fast-leave ip igmp snooping fast-leave Multicast router port setting ip igmp snooping mrouter interface Set the query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval Set IGMP snooping TTL check ip igmp snooping check ttl Set IGMP snooping RA check ip igmp snooping check ra Set IGMP snooping ToS check ip igmp snooping check tos Set IGMP version ip igmp snooping version Set IGMP report suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression Set the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression Set IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward Set the processing method for unknown multicast frames in the system l2-unknown-mcast Set forwarding of linked local multicasting addresses in the system l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Set the processing method for unknown multicast frames at VLAN interfaces l2-unknown-mcast Set forwarding of multicasting frames at VLAN interfaces l2-mcast flood Show multicast router port information show ip igmp snooping mrouter Show IGMP multicast receiver information show ip igmp snooping groups Show IGMP related information for an interface show ip igmp snooping interface Clear IGMP group membership entries clear ip igmp snooping</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp-snooping-の設定マルチキャストルーターあり">5.1. IGMP snooping settings (with multicast router)</div><div class="search_word">5.1. igmp snooping settings (with multicast router) in an environment with a multicast router, enable the igmp snooping function and join a multicast group. data is distributed only to pc1 and pc3. set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . since there is a multicast router, leave the igmp query transmission function as “disabled” . set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (a static setting is not used.) enable the fast leave function . define vlan #10, and set igmp snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (4) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable igmp snooping for vlan #10 3 disable the igmp query transmission function for vlan #10 4 enable the igmp fast leave function for vlan #10 the igmp query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. confirm the multicast router port information. (it should be connected to lan port #1.) yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10vlan    interface             ip-address    expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         192.168.100.216        00:00:49 confirm the information for the multicast recipient. yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsigmp snooping group membershipgroup source list: (r - remote, s - static)vlan   group/source address    interface      flags   uptime     expires  last reporter   version10     239.0.0.1                port1.2        r      00:00:13   00:00:41 192.168.100.2    v310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4    v3</div><div class="display_word">5.1. IGMP snooping settings (with multicast router) In an environment with a multicast router, enable the IGMP snooping function and join a multicast group. Data is distributed only to PC1 and PC3. Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Since there is a multicast router, leave the IGMP query transmission function as “disabled” . Set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (A static setting is not used.) Enable the fast leave function . Define VLAN #10, and set IGMP snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (4) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable IGMP Snooping for VLAN #10 3 Disable the IGMP query transmission function for VLAN #10 4 Enable the IGMP fast leave function for VLAN #10 The IGMP query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. Confirm the multicast router port information. (It should be connected to LAN port #1.) Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10VLAN    Interface             IP-address    Expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         192.168.100.216        00:00:49 Confirm the information for the multicast recipient. Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsIGMP Snooping Group MembershipGroup source list: (R - Remote, S - Static)Vlan   Group/Source Address    Interface      Flags   Uptime     Expires  Last Reporter   Version10     239.0.0.1                port1.2        R      00:00:13   00:00:41 192.168.100.2    V310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4    V3</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp-snooping-の設定マルチキャストルーターなし">5.2. IGMP snooping settings (without multicast router)</div><div class="search_word">5.2. igmp snooping settings (without multicast router) in an environment without a multicast router, enable the igmp snooping function and join a multicast group. data is distributed only to pc1 and pc3. switch #a set lan ports #1–#2 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . enable the igmp query transmission function . set the igmp query transmission interval to 20 sec . switch #b set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (a static setting is not used.) enable the fast leave function . since there is a device that sets invalid ttl values in igmp packets, disable the ttl check function . [switch #a] define vlan #10, and set igmp snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping querier (3) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 20 (4) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable igmp snooping for vlan #10 3 enable the igmp query transmission function for vlan #10 4 set the igmp query transmission interval for vlan #10 to 20 sec. [switch #a] set lan ports #1–#2 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan port #2 as well. [switch #b] define vlan #10, and set igmp snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping check ttl (4) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (5) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable igmp snooping for vlan #10 3 disable the igmp query transmission function for vlan #10 4 disable the ttl check function for vlan #10 5 enable the igmp fast leave function for vlan #10 the igmp query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [switch #b] set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. [switch #b] check the multicast router port information. (it should be connected to lan port #1.) yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10vlan    interface             ip-address    expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         192.168.100.216        00:00:49 [switch #b] check the multicast receiver information. yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsigmp snooping group membershipgroup source list: (r - remote, s - static)vlan   group/source address    interface      flags   uptime     expires  last reporter   version10     239.0.0.1                port1.2        r      00:00:13   00:00:41 192.168.100.2    v310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4    v3</div><div class="display_word">5.2. IGMP snooping settings (without multicast router) In an environment without a multicast router, enable the IGMP snooping function and join a multicast group. Data is distributed only to PC1 and PC3. Switch #A Set LAN ports #1–#2 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Enable the IGMP query transmission function . Set the IGMP query transmission interval to 20 sec . Switch #B Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (A static setting is not used.) Enable the fast leave function . Since there is a device that sets invalid TTL values in IGMP packets, disable the TTL check function . [Switch #A] Define VLAN #10, and set IGMP snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping querier (3) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 20 (4) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable IGMP Snooping for VLAN #10 3 Enable the IGMP query transmission function for VLAN #10 4 Set the IGMP query transmission interval for VLAN #10 to 20 sec. [Switch #A] Set LAN ports #1–#2 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN port #2 as well. [Switch #B] Define VLAN #10, and set IGMP snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) Yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping check ttl (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (5) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable IGMP Snooping for VLAN #10 3 Disable the IGMP query transmission function for VLAN #10 4 Disable the TTL check function for VLAN #10 5 Enable the IGMP fast leave function for VLAN #10 The IGMP query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [Switch #B] Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. [Switch #B] Check the multicast router port information. (It should be connected to LAN port #1.) Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10VLAN    Interface             IP-address    Expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         192.168.100.216        00:00:49 [Switch #B] Check the multicast receiver information. Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsIGMP Snooping Group MembershipGroup source list: (R - Remote, S - Static)Vlan   Group/Source Address    Interface      Flags   Uptime     Expires  Last Reporter   Version10     239.0.0.1                port1.2        R      00:00:13   00:00:41 192.168.100.2    V310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4    V3</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#igmp-snooping-の設定双方向でデータ配信する場合">5.3. IGMP snooping settings (If distributing data in both directions)</div><div class="search_word">5.3. igmp snooping settings (if distributing data in both directions) in a configuration with two switches, both switches are connected to a multicast server and computer. each computer frequently switches between participating multicast groups to minimize the interruption time. switch #a set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . enable the igmp query transmission function . set the igmp query transmission interval to 20 sec . enable the fast leave function and, in order to confirm the existence of multiple multicast receivers connected to the counterpart switch, enable lldp transmission and reception and enable the auto-assignment option . disable the igmp report suppression function . increasing the number of multicast servers or data distributions could cause port bandwidth restrictions, so the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is enabled to only forward the minimum data necessary. also, unknown multicast frames are set to be discarded . to forward igmp reports to non-queriers, enable lldp transmission and reception and also enable the igmp report forwarding function . switch #b set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (a static setting is not used.) enable the fast leave function and, in order to confirm the existence of multiple multicast receivers connected to the counterpart switch, enable lldp transmission and reception and enable the auto-assignment option . disable the igmp report suppression function . increasing the number of multicast servers or data distributions could cause port bandwidth restrictions, so the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is enabled to only forward the minimum data necessary. also, unknown multicast frames are set to be discarded . [switch #a] define vlan #10, and set igmp snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping querier (3) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 20 (4) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment (5) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable (6) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable (7) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-forward enable (8) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable igmp snooping for vlan #10 3 enable the igmp query transmission function for vlan #10 4 set the igmp query transmission interval for vlan #10 to 20 sec. 5 enable the fast leave function and auto-assignment option for vlan #10 6 disable the report suppression function for vlan #10 7 enable the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports for vlan #10 8 enable the report forwarding function for vlan #10 [switch #a] set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. [switch #a] discard unknown multicast frames. yamaha(config)#l2-unknown-mcast discard [switch #a] enable lldp transmission and reception on lan port #1. yamaha(config)# lldp runyamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# lldp-agentyamaha(lldp-agent)# set lldp enable txrx [switch #b] define vlan #10, and set igmp snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (4) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable (5) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable (6) yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-forward enable (7) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable igmp snooping for vlan #10 3 disable the igmp query transmission function for vlan #10 4 enable the fast leave function and auto-assignment option for vlan #10 5 disable the report suppression function for vlan #10 6 enable the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports for vlan #10 7 enable the report forwarding function for vlan #10 the igmp query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [switch #b] set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. [switch #b] discard unknown multicast frames. yamaha(config)#l2-unknown-mcast discard [switch #b] enable lldp transmission and reception on lan port #1. yamaha(config)# lldp runyamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# lldp-agentyamaha(lldp-agent)# set lldp enable txrx [switch #a] check the multicast receiver information. yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsigmp snooping group membershipgroup source list: (r - remote, s - static)vlan   group/source address    interface      flags   uptime     expires  last reporter   version10     239.0.0.1                port1.1        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.3     v310     239.0.0.2                port1.1        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4     v310     239.0.0.3                port1.3        r      00:00:04   00:00:46 192.168.100.1     v310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        r      00:00:03   00:00:47 192.168.100.2     v3 [switch #b] check the multicast router port information. (it should be connected to lan port #1.) yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10vlan    interface                 ip-address    expires10      port1.1(dynamic)          192.168.100.240        00:00:25 [switch #b] check the multicast receiver information. yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsigmp snooping group membershipgroup source list: (r - remote, s - static)vlan   group/source address    interface      flags   uptime     expires  last reporter   version10     239.0.0.1                port1.1        r      00:00:03   00:00:47 192.168.100.2     v310     239.0.0.3                port1.1        r      00:00:04   00:00:46 192.168.100.1     v310     239.0.0.1                port1.3        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.3     v310     239.0.0.2                port1.4        r      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4     v3</div><div class="display_word">5.3. IGMP snooping settings (If distributing data in both directions) In a configuration with two switches, both switches are connected to a multicast server and computer. Each computer frequently switches between participating multicast groups to minimize the interruption time. Switch #A Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Enable the IGMP query transmission function . Set the IGMP query transmission interval to 20 sec . Enable the fast leave function and, in order to confirm the existence of multiple multicast receivers connected to the counterpart switch, enable LLDP transmission and reception and enable the auto-assignment option . Disable the IGMP report suppression function . Increasing the number of multicast servers or data distributions could cause port bandwidth restrictions, so the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is enabled to only forward the minimum data necessary. Also, unknown multicast frames are set to be discarded . To forward IGMP reports to non-queriers, enable LLDP transmission and reception and also enable the IGMP report forwarding function . Switch #B Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (A static setting is not used.) Enable the fast leave function and, in order to confirm the existence of multiple multicast receivers connected to the counterpart switch, enable LLDP transmission and reception and enable the auto-assignment option . Disable the IGMP report suppression function . Increasing the number of multicast servers or data distributions could cause port bandwidth restrictions, so the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports is enabled to only forward the minimum data necessary. Also, unknown multicast frames are set to be discarded . [Switch #A] Define VLAN #10, and set IGMP snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping querier (3) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 20 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment (5) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable (6) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable (7) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-forward enable (8) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable IGMP Snooping for VLAN #10 3 Enable the IGMP query transmission function for VLAN #10 4 Set the IGMP query transmission interval for VLAN #10 to 20 sec. 5 Enable the fast leave function and auto-assignment option for VLAN #10 6 Disable the report suppression function for VLAN #10 7 Enable the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports for VLAN #10 8 Enable the report forwarding function for VLAN #10 [Switch #A] Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. [Switch #A] Discard unknown multicast frames. Yamaha(config)#l2-unknown-mcast discard [Switch #A] Enable LLDP transmission and reception on LAN port #1. Yamaha(config)# lldp runYamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# lldp-agentYamaha(lldp-agent)# set lldp enable txrx [Switch #B] Define VLAN #10, and set IGMP snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#no ip igmp snooping querier (3) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping fast-leave (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable (5) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable (6) Yamaha(config-if)#ip igmp snooping report-forward enable (7) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable IGMP Snooping for VLAN #10 3 Disable the IGMP query transmission function for VLAN #10 4 Enable the fast leave function and auto-assignment option for VLAN #10 5 Disable the report suppression function for VLAN #10 6 Enable the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports for VLAN #10 7 Enable the report forwarding function for VLAN #10 The IGMP query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [Switch #B] Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. [Switch #B] Discard unknown multicast frames. Yamaha(config)#l2-unknown-mcast discard [Switch #B] Enable LLDP transmission and reception on LAN port #1. Yamaha(config)# lldp runYamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# lldp-agentYamaha(lldp-agent)# set lldp enable txrx [Switch #A] Check the multicast receiver information. Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsIGMP Snooping Group MembershipGroup source list: (R - Remote, S - Static)Vlan   Group/Source Address    Interface      Flags   Uptime     Expires  Last Reporter   Version10     239.0.0.1                port1.1        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.3     V310     239.0.0.2                port1.1        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4     V310     239.0.0.3                port1.3        R      00:00:04   00:00:46 192.168.100.1     V310     239.0.0.1                port1.4        R      00:00:03   00:00:47 192.168.100.2     V3 [Switch #B] Check the multicast router port information. (It should be connected to LAN port #1.) Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan10VLAN    Interface                 IP-address    Expires10      port1.1(dynamic)          192.168.100.240        00:00:25 [Switch #B] Check the multicast receiver information. Yamaha#show ip igmp snooping groupsIGMP Snooping Group MembershipGroup source list: (R - Remote, S - Static)Vlan   Group/Source Address    Interface      Flags   Uptime     Expires  Last Reporter   Version10     239.0.0.1                port1.1        R      00:00:03   00:00:47 192.168.100.2     V310     239.0.0.3                port1.1        R      00:00:04   00:00:46 192.168.100.1     V310     239.0.0.1                port1.3        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.3     V310     239.0.0.2                port1.4        R      00:00:02   00:00:48 192.168.100.4     V3</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if you want to change the handling of unknown multicast frames, use the l2-unknown-mcast command.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If you want to change the handling of unknown multicast frames, use the l2-unknown-mcast command.</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_igmp_snooping" doctitle="IGMP" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation vlan</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation VLAN</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld-snooping">MLD Snooping</div><div class="search_word">mld snooping</div><div class="display_word">MLD Snooping</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview mld snooping is a function to suppress consumption of network bandwidth in an ipv6 vlan environment, by controlling any surplus multicast flooding. on an l2 switch, since multicast packets are distributed per vlan, if there is even one device in the vlan that wants to receive the multicast packet, the packet will be distributed to all ports within the same vlan. operations during multicast distribution (no mld snooping) when using the mld snooping function, the mld messages exchanged between the receiving device and the multicast router are monitored (snooped), the packet from the relevant group will only be distributed to the port, to which the device that wants to receive the multicast packet is connected. operations during multicast distribution (using mld snooping)</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview MLD snooping is a function to suppress consumption of network bandwidth in an IPv6 VLAN environment, by controlling any surplus multicast flooding. On an L2 switch, since multicast packets are distributed per VLAN, if there is even one device in the VLAN that wants to receive the multicast packet, the packet will be distributed to all ports within the same VLAN. Operations during multicast distribution (no MLD snooping) When using the MLD snooping function, the MLD messages exchanged between the receiving device and the multicast router are monitored (snooped), the packet from the relevant group will only be distributed to the port, to which the device that wants to receive the multicast packet is connected. Operations during multicast distribution (using MLD snooping)</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used mld (multicast listener discovery) this is a protocol to control multicast groups using ipv6 (a sub-protocol of icmpv6). the multicast router can determine which hosts on the lan are members of the multicast group, and the hosts can communicate which multicast group they belong to. there are two protocol versions, respectively defined by mldv1 (rfc2710) , and mldv2 (rfc3810) . multicast router port this is the lan/sfp port to which the multicast router is connected. the lan/sfp port that receives the mld general query is automatically acquired as the multicast router port. mld report suppression function this is a function where the l2 switch controls the data transmission load between the multicast router and the hosts. the messages gathered by this product to perform control are shown below. mld reports replied to mld general queries by hosts, sent from the multicast router mld done messages notified by the host and mld reports (leave) the report suppression function works with mldv1/v2. mld fast leave function this function allows for the lan/sfp port that received an mldv1 done and an mldv2 report (leave) to immediately stop receiving multicasts (deleting the necessary fdb entry). previously, when an mldv1 done message and an mldv2 report (leave) was received in the course of mld leave processing, a group-specific query was sent to check for the existence of a receiver; but if the fast leave function is enabled , this operation is not performed. for this reason, the fast leave function is effective only when there is a single receiver under the control of the lan/sfp port . mld query transmission function (mld querier) this is a function to send mld general and specific queries. it is used to enable the mld snooping function in an environment without a multicast router.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) This is a protocol to control multicast groups using IPv6 (a sub-protocol of ICMPv6). The multicast router can determine which hosts on the LAN are members of the multicast group, and the hosts can communicate which multicast group they belong to. There are two protocol versions, respectively defined by MLDv1 (RFC2710) , and MLDv2 (RFC3810) . Multicast Router Port This is the LAN/SFP port to which the multicast router is connected. The LAN/SFP port that receives the MLD general query is automatically acquired as the multicast router port. MLD Report Suppression Function This is a function where the L2 switch controls the data transmission load between the multicast router and the hosts. The messages gathered by this product to perform control are shown below. MLD reports replied to MLD general queries by hosts, sent from the multicast router MLD Done messages notified by the host and MLD reports (Leave) The report suppression function works with MLDv1/v2. MLD Fast Leave Function This function allows for the LAN/SFP port that received an MLDv1 Done and an MLDv2 report (Leave) to immediately stop receiving multicasts (deleting the necessary FDB entry). Previously, when an MLDv1 Done message and an MLDv2 report (Leave) was received in the course of MLD leave processing, a group-specific query was sent to check for the existence of a receiver; but if the fast leave function is enabled , this operation is not performed. For this reason, the fast leave function is effective only when there is a single receiver under the control of the LAN/SFP port . MLD Query Transmission Function (MLD Querier) This is a function to send MLD general and specific queries. It is used to enable the MLD snooping function in an environment without a multicast router.</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the operating specifications for mld snooping are shown below. this product offers snooping functions compatible with mld v1/v2 . you can use the ipv6 mld snooping version command to make later versions work on this product. version settings are made for the vlan interface , and initial settings are for v2 . the difference in operations between the configured version and received frame versions are shown in the table below. if an mld query whose version is higher than the settings is received, the version will be lowered to the version that was configured, and the query will be forwarded. if an mld report whose version is higher than the configured version is received, the relevant report will be discarded without being forwarded. the settings to enable/disable mld snooping are made for the vlan interface . the initial setting for the default vlan (vlan #1) and the initial setting after a vlan is generated are both disabled . the mld snooping function can handle the following four operations. multicast router port setting mld report suppression mld fast leave mld query transmission although the multicast router port is automatically acquired on vlan interfaces where mld snooping is set to “ enable ”, the ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface command can also be used to make static settings. the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter command is used to check multicast router ports that are set for the vlan interface. the mld report suppression function is specified for vlan interfaces using the ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression command. the default value is enabled . when transmitting an mld report or mld leave message using the report suppression function, the ipv6 link local address allocated to the vlan interface will be used for the source ipv6 address. (the address will be set and transmitted as “::” if it has not been allocated.) the mld fast leave function is set for the vlan interface using the ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave command. the initial setting for the default vlan (vlan #1) and the initial setting after a vlan is generated are both disabled . the mld query transmission function is supported in order to allow use of mld snooping in environments that do not have a multicast router. the mld query transmission function controls the following two parameters. mld query transmission function enable/disable the ipv6 mld snooping querier command is used for vlan interfaces. the initial setting for the default vlan (vlan #1) and the initial setting after a vlan is generated are both disabled . mld query transmission interval this is set using the ipv6 mld snooping query-interval command. the transmission interval can be set from 20–18,000 sec., and the default value is 125 sec. when multiple devices transmit queries within a vlan, the query is sent by the device with the lowest ipv6 address within the vlan. when this product receives a query from a device whose ipv6 address is lower than its own, the query transmission function will be halted. the source ipv6 address that is set when a query is transmitted uses the ipv6 link local address allocated to the vlan interface. if an ipv6 link local address has not been allocated, an ipv6 link local address allocated to a different vlan interface is used instead. (if no ipv6 link local addresses have been allocated to any vlan interfaces, the query is not transmitted.) in this product, if the hop limit of a received mld packet is invalid (other than 1), the mld packet will be discarded. in this product, if a received mld packet does not contain the router alert option, the mld packet will be discarded.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The operating specifications for MLD snooping are shown below. This product offers snooping functions compatible with MLD v1/v2 . You can use the ipv6 mld snooping version command to make later versions work on this product. Version settings are made for the VLAN interface , and initial settings are for v2 . The difference in operations between the configured version and received frame versions are shown in the table below. If an MLD query whose version is higher than the settings is received, the version will be lowered to the version that was configured, and the query will be forwarded. If an MLD report whose version is higher than the configured version is received, the relevant report will be discarded without being forwarded. The settings to enable/disable MLD snooping are made for the VLAN interface . The initial setting for the default VLAN (VLAN #1) and the initial setting after a VLAN is generated are both disabled . The MLD snooping function can handle the following four operations. Multicast router port setting MLD report suppression MLD fast leave MLD query transmission Although the multicast router port is automatically acquired on VLAN interfaces where MLD snooping is set to “ enable ”, the ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface command can also be used to make static settings. The show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter command is used to check multicast router ports that are set for the VLAN interface. The MLD report suppression function is specified for VLAN interfaces using the ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression command. The default value is enabled . When transmitting an MLD report or MLD leave message using the report suppression function, the IPv6 link local address allocated to the VLAN interface will be used for the source IPv6 address. (The address will be set and transmitted as “::” if it has not been allocated.) The MLD fast leave function is set for the VLAN interface using the ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave command. The initial setting for the default VLAN (VLAN #1) and the initial setting after a VLAN is generated are both disabled . The MLD query transmission function is supported in order to allow use of MLD snooping in environments that do not have a multicast router. The MLD query transmission function controls the following two parameters. MLD query transmission function Enable/disable The ipv6 mld snooping querier command is used for VLAN interfaces. The initial setting for the default VLAN (VLAN #1) and the initial setting after a VLAN is generated are both disabled . MLD query transmission interval This is set using the ipv6 mld snooping query-interval command. The transmission interval can be set from 20–18,000 sec., and the default value is 125 sec. When multiple devices transmit queries within a VLAN, the query is sent by the device with the lowest IPv6 address within the VLAN. When this product receives a query from a device whose IPv6 address is lower than its own, the query transmission function will be halted. The source IPv6 address that is set when a query is transmitted uses the IPv6 link local address allocated to the VLAN interface. If an IPv6 link local address has not been allocated, an IPv6 link local address allocated to a different VLAN interface is used instead. (If no IPv6 link local addresses have been allocated to any VLAN interfaces, the query is not transmitted.) In this product, if the Hop Limit of a received MLD packet is invalid (other than 1), the MLD packet will be discarded. In this product, if a received MLD packet does not contain the Router Alert option, the MLD packet will be discarded.</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable/disable mld snooping ipv6 mld snooping set mld snooping fast-leave ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave multicast router port setting ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface set the query transmission function ipv6 mld snooping querier set the mld query transmission interval ipv6 mld snooping query-interval set the mld version ipv6 mld snooping version set the mld report suppression function ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression show multicast router port information show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter show mld multicast recipient information show ipv6 mld snooping groups show mld related information for an interface show ipv6 mld snooping interface clear the mld group membership entries clear ipv6 mld snooping</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Enable/disable MLD snooping ipv6 mld snooping Set MLD snooping fast-leave ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave Multicast router port setting ipv6 mld snooping mrouter interface Set the query transmission function ipv6 mld snooping querier Set the MLD query transmission interval ipv6 mld snooping query-interval Set the MLD version ipv6 mld snooping version Set the MLD report suppression function ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression Show multicast router port information show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter Show MLD multicast recipient information show ipv6 mld snooping groups Show MLD related information for an interface show ipv6 mld snooping interface Clear the MLD group membership entries clear ipv6 mld snooping</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld-snooping-の設定マルチキャストルーターあり">5.1. MLD snooping settings (with multicast router)</div><div class="search_word">5.1. mld snooping settings (with multicast router) in an environment with a multicast router, enable the mld snooping function and join a multicast group. data is distributed only to pc1 and pc3. set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . since there is a multicast router, leave the mld query transmission function as “disabled” . set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (a static setting is not used.) enable the mld fast leave function . ■ setting procedure define vlan #10, and set mld snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) yamaha(config-if)#no ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave (5) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable the ipv6 function for vlan #10 3 enable mld snooping for vlan #10 4 disable the mld query transmission function for vlan #10 5 enable the mld fast leave function for vlan #10 the mld query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. confirm the multicast router port information. (it should be connected to lan port #1.) yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan10vlan    interface             ip-address    expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         fe80::2a0:deff:feae:b879        00:00:43 confirm the information for the multicast recipient. yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping groupsmld connected group membershipvlan   group address                           interface            uptime   expires  last reporter10     ff15::1                                 port1.2              00:00:13 00:00:41 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e210     ff15::1                                 port1.4              00:00:02 00:00:48 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e4</div><div class="display_word">5.1. MLD snooping settings (with multicast router) In an environment with a multicast router, enable the MLD snooping function and join a multicast group. Data is distributed only to PC1 and PC3. Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Since there is a multicast router, leave the MLD query transmission function as “disabled” . Set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (A static setting is not used.) Enable the MLD fast leave function . ■ Setting Procedure Define VLAN #10, and set MLD snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) Yamaha(config-if)#no ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave (5) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable the IPv6 function for VLAN #10 3 Enable MLD Snooping for VLAN #10 4 Disable the MLD query transmission function for VLAN #10 5 Enable the MLD fast leave function for VLAN #10 The MLD query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. Confirm the multicast router port information. (It should be connected to LAN port #1.) Yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan10VLAN    Interface             IP-address    Expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         fe80::2a0:deff:feae:b879        00:00:43 Confirm the information for the multicast recipient. Yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping groupsMLD Connected Group MembershipVlan   Group Address                           Interface            Uptime   Expires  Last Reporter10     ff15::1                                 port1.2              00:00:13 00:00:41 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e210     ff15::1                                 port1.4              00:00:02 00:00:48 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e4</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#mld-snooping-の設定マルチキャストルーターなし">5.2. MLD snooping settings (without multicast router)</div><div class="search_word">5.2. mld snooping settings (without multicast router) in an environment without a multicast router, enable the mld snooping function and join a multicast group. data is distributed only to pc1 and pc3. switch #a set lan ports #1–#2 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . enable the mld query transmission function . set the mld query transmission interval to* 20 sec*. switch #b set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with vlan #10 . set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (a static setting is not used.) enable the mld fast leave function . [switch #a] define vlan #10, and set mld snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 20 (5) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable the ipv6 function for vlan #10 3 enable mld snooping for vlan #10 4 enable the mld query transmission function for vlan #10 5 set the mld query transmission interval for vlan #10 to 20 sec. [switch #a] set lan ports #1–#2 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan port #2 as well. [switch #b] define vlan #10, and set mld snooping. yamaha(config)# vlan databaseyamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#exityamaha(config)#interface vlan10yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) yamaha(config-if)#no ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave (5) 1 define vlan #10 2 enable the ipv6 function for vlan #10 3 enable mld snooping for vlan #10 4 disable the mld query transmission function for vlan #10 5 enable the mld fast leave function for vlan #10 the mld query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [switch #b] set lan ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #10. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 configure the settings above for lan ports #2–#4 as well. [switch #b] check the multicast router port information. (it should be connected to lan port #1.) yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan10vlan    interface             ip-address    expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         fe80::2a0:deff:feae:b879        00:00:43 [switch #b] check the multicast receiver information. yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping groupsmld connected group membershipvlan   group address                           interface            uptime   expires  last reporter10     ff15::1                                 port1.2              00:00:13 00:00:41 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e210     ff15::1                                 port1.4              00:00:02 00:00:48 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e4</div><div class="display_word">5.2. MLD snooping settings (without multicast router) In an environment without a multicast router, enable the MLD snooping function and join a multicast group. Data is distributed only to PC1 and PC3. Switch #A Set LAN ports #1–#2 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Enable the MLD query transmission function . Set the MLD query transmission interval to* 20 sec*. Switch #B Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports and associate them with VLAN #10 . Set multicast router port acquisition to automatic acquisition only. (A static setting is not used.) Enable the MLD fast leave function . [Switch #A] Define VLAN #10, and set MLD snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping query-interval 20 (5) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable the IPv6 function for VLAN #10 3 Enable MLD Snooping for VLAN #10 4 Enable the MLD query transmission function for VLAN #10 5 Set the MLD query transmission interval for VLAN #10 to 20 sec. [Switch #A] Set LAN ports #1–#2 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN port #2 as well. [Switch #B] Define VLAN #10, and set MLD snooping. Yamaha(config)# vlan databaseYamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 10 (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#exitYamaha(config)#interface vlan10Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (2) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping (3) Yamaha(config-if)#no ipv6 mld snooping querier (4) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 mld snooping fast-leave (5) 1 Define VLAN #10 2 Enable the IPv6 function for VLAN #10 3 Enable MLD Snooping for VLAN #10 4 Disable the MLD query transmission function for VLAN #10 5 Enable the MLD fast leave function for VLAN #10 The MLD query transmission function is disabled in default settings, so there is no need to specify those settings. [Switch #B] Set LAN ports #1–#4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #10. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 10 (1) 1 Configure the settings above for LAN ports #2–#4 as well. [Switch #B] Check the multicast router port information. (It should be connected to LAN port #1.) Yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan10VLAN    Interface             IP-address    Expires10      port1.1(dynamic)         fe80::2a0:deff:feae:b879        00:00:43 [Switch #B] Check the multicast receiver information. Yamaha#show ipv6 mld snooping groupsMLD Connected Group MembershipVlan   Group Address                           Interface            Uptime   Expires  Last Reporter10     ff15::1                                 port1.2              00:00:13 00:00:41 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e210     ff15::1                                 port1.4              00:00:02 00:00:48 fe80::a00:27ff:fe8b:87e4</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if you want to change the handling of unknown multicast frames, use the l2-unknown-mcast command.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If you want to change the handling of unknown multicast frames, use the l2-unknown-mcast command.</div></div><div id="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping"><div class="search_title" docfname="ipmcast_ipmcast_mld_snooping" doctitle="MLD" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation vlan basic ipv6 settings</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation VLAN Basic IPv6 Settings</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#フォワーディングデータベース">Forwarding Database</div><div class="search_word">forwarding database</div><div class="display_word">Forwarding Database</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview the forwarding database (subsequently referred to as the fdb) manages the combination of destination mac addresses, transmission ports, and vlans. this product uses the fdb to determine the forwarding destination port for the received frames. enable/disable acquisition function hold time adjustment for fdb entries acquired timeout clear for fdb entries acquired manual registration of fdb entries (static entries)</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview The Forwarding Database (subsequently referred to as the FDB) manages the combination of destination MAC addresses, transmission ports, and VLANs. This product uses the FDB to determine the forwarding destination port for the received frames. Enable/disable acquisition function Hold Time adjustment for FDB entries acquired Timeout clear for FDB entries acquired Manual registration of FDB entries (static entries)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used fdb abbreviation of “forwarding data base.” this database manages the combination of destination mac address, transmission port, and vlan. fdb entry this is data registered in the fdb, and consists of multiple elements.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used FDB Abbreviation of “Forwarding Data Base.” This database manages the combination of destination MAC address, transmission port, and VLAN. FDB entry This is data registered in the FDB, and consists of multiple elements.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#fdbエントリー">3.1. FDB entry</div><div class="search_word">3.1. fdb entry on this product, the contents listed in the table below are registered as a single entry in the fdb. element managed description mac address device mac addresses can be either unicast or multicast. vlan-id (fid) the vlan id to which the device belongs. this is a value from 1–4094. forwarding destination interface id the interface on which the device exists*. (*: lan port or static logical interface) action the processing method for frames addressed to the device. there are two processing methods, “discard” and “forward”. registration type the registration type of entries. there are the following types: * dynamic …​ entries registered through automatic acquisition * static …​ entries registered manually via commands</div><div class="display_word">3.1. FDB entry On this product, the contents listed in the table below are registered as a single entry in the FDB. Element managed Description MAC address Device MAC addresses can be either unicast or multicast. VLAN-ID (FID) The VLAN ID to which the device belongs. This is a value from 1–4094. Forwarding destination interface ID The interface on which the device exists*. (*: LAN port or static logical interface) Action The processing method for frames addressed to the device. There are two processing methods, “discard” and “forward”. Registration type The registration type of entries. There are the following types: * dynamic …​ Entries registered through automatic acquisition * static …​ Entries registered manually via commands</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#macアドレス">3.1.1. MAC address</div><div class="search_word">3.1.1. mac address this is one of the fdb key items; the vlan-id and mac address are combined to become the record key. operation differs depending on whether the mac address is unicast or multicast. unicast since the forwarding destination interface id must be uniquely determined for a given record key, duplication is not allowed. (multiple combinations of the same vlan-id and mac address do not exist.) multicast multiple forwarding destination interface ids may exist for a given key record. in this case, frames are sent to multiple forwarding destination interface ids. up to 8,192 addresses can be registered in this product, including addresses registered via automatic acquisition and manual registration. the mac addresses of all received frames can be acquired, and the source mac address is acquired and registered in the fdb. (however, if the transmission source mac address is multicast, this is considered an invalid frame and is discarded without being registered.) automatically acquired mac address information is maintained until the ageing timeout.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.1. MAC address This is one of the FDB key items; the VLAN-ID and MAC address are combined to become the record key. Operation differs depending on whether the MAC address is unicast or multicast. Unicast Since the forwarding destination interface ID must be uniquely determined for a given record key, duplication is not allowed. (Multiple combinations of the same VLAN-ID and MAC address do not exist.) Multicast Multiple forwarding destination interface IDs may exist for a given key record. In this case, frames are sent to multiple forwarding destination interface IDs. Up to 8,192 addresses can be registered in this product, including addresses registered via automatic acquisition and manual registration. The MAC addresses of all received frames can be acquired, and the source MAC address is acquired and registered in the FDB. (However, if the transmission source MAC address is multicast, this is considered an invalid frame and is discarded without being registered.) Automatically acquired MAC address information is maintained until the ageing timeout.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#vlan-id">3.1.2. VLAN-ID</div><div class="search_word">3.1.2. vlan-id mac address acquisition is done per vlan, and the mac address and vlan are managed in the fdb as a pair. for different vlans, identical mac addresses are also acquired.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.2. VLAN-ID MAC address acquisition is done per VLAN, and the MAC address and VLAN are managed in the FDB as a pair. For different VLANs, identical MAC addresses are also acquired.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#転送先インターフェースid">3.1.3. Forwarding destination interface ID</div><div class="search_word">3.1.3. forwarding destination interface id the following ids are registered. lan port (port) static interface (sa)</div><div class="display_word">3.1.3. Forwarding destination interface ID The following IDs are registered. LAN port (port) Static interface (sa)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#アクション">3.1.4. Action</div><div class="search_word">3.1.4. action this defines the action for a received frame that matches a key record. if the mac address is unicast, the actions are as follows. forward ... forward to the forwarding destination interface id. discard ... discard without forwarding. if the mac address is multicast, the actions are as follows. forward ... forward to the forwarding destination interface id. discard ... cannot be specified. (the discard setting cannot be made if the mac address is multicast.)</div><div class="display_word">3.1.4. Action This defines the action for a received frame that matches a key record. If the MAC address is unicast, the actions are as follows. forward ... Forward to the forwarding destination interface ID. discard ... Discard without forwarding. If the MAC address is multicast, the actions are as follows. forward ... Forward to the forwarding destination interface ID. discard ... Cannot be specified. (The discard setting cannot be made if the MAC address is multicast.)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#登録種別">3.1.5. Registration type</div><div class="search_word">3.1.5. registration type dynamic …​ registered and deleted automatically. the registration result does not remain in the config file. static …​ registered and deleted manually, and therefore remains in the config file.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.5. Registration type dynamic …​ Registered and deleted automatically. The registration result does not remain in the config file. static …​ Registered and deleted manually, and therefore remains in the config file.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#macアドレスの自動学習">3.2. Automatic MAC address acquisition</div><div class="search_word">3.2. automatic mac address acquisition automatic mac address acquisition refers to the active creation and registration of fdb entries based on the information for the source mac address of the received frame and the information for the reception port. entries registered through automatic acquisition are called “dynamic entries”. a timer (ageing time) is used to monitor individual entries. entries for mac addresses that have not received frames within a certain amount of time will be deleted from the fdb (see below*). this prevents invalid device entries from being left over in the fdb due to power shutoff, being moved and so on. if a frame is received within the specified amount of time, the monitoring timer will be reset. the control specifications for automatic acquisition are shown below. automatic mac address acquisition can be enabled or disabled using the mac-address-table learning command. the setting is enabled by default. if automatic acquisition is changed from enabled to disabled, all dynamic entries that have been learned will be deleted . the acquisition function “disable” setting is useful when you want to flood all ports with all received frames. the aging timer for dynamic entries can be adjusted between 10 and 634 seconds . the value is specified using mac-address-table ageing-time command. this value is set to 300 seconds by default. clear the dynamic entries that have been acquired by using the clear mac-address-table dynamic command. the entire contents of the fdb can be cleared at once; or a vlan number can be specified and all mac addresses acquired by that vlan can be cleared from the fdb. specifying the port number will clear all mac addresses from the fdb that were acquired from that port. use the show mac-address-table command to check the automatic acquisition status. there may be a discrepancy between the time set with the mac-address-table ageing-time command and the time until the dynamic entry is actually deleted from the mac address table.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Automatic MAC address acquisition Automatic MAC address acquisition refers to the active creation and registration of FDB entries based on the information for the source MAC address of the received frame and the information for the reception port. Entries registered through automatic acquisition are called “dynamic entries”. A timer (ageing time) is used to monitor individual entries. Entries for MAC addresses that have not received frames within a certain amount of time will be deleted from the FDB (see below*). This prevents invalid device entries from being left over in the FDB due to power shutoff, being moved and so on. If a frame is received within the specified amount of time, the monitoring timer will be reset. The control specifications for automatic acquisition are shown below. Automatic MAC address acquisition can be enabled or disabled using the mac-address-table learning command. The setting is enabled by default. If automatic acquisition is changed from enabled to disabled, all dynamic entries that have been learned will be deleted . The acquisition function “disable” setting is useful when you want to flood all ports with all received frames. The aging timer for dynamic entries can be adjusted between 10 and 634 seconds . The value is specified using mac-address-table ageing-time command. This value is set to 300 seconds by default. Clear the dynamic entries that have been acquired by using the clear mac-address-table dynamic command. The entire contents of the FDB can be cleared at once; or a VLAN number can be specified and all MAC addresses acquired by that VLAN can be cleared from the FDB. Specifying the port number will clear all MAC addresses from the FDB that were acquired from that port. Use the show mac-address-table command to check the automatic acquisition status. There may be a discrepancy between the time set with the mac-address-table ageing-time command and the time until the dynamic entry is actually deleted from the MAC address table.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#macアドレスの手動設定">3.3. MAC address manual setting</div><div class="search_word">3.3. mac address manual setting in addition to automatic acquisition using received frames, mac addresses can be set on this product by using user commands. entries that have been registered by using commands are called “static entries”. the specifications for manual settings are shown below. use the mac-address-table static command to register static entries. the number of static entries that can be manually registered is 256. when registering static entries, dynamic acquisition will not be performed on the corresponding mac addresses. entries that have already been acquired will be deleted from the fdb, and will be registered as static entries. use the no mac-address-table static command to delete static entries. either “forward” or “discard” can be specified for the destination mac address of a received frame. when forwarding is specified, either the lan port forwarding destination or the static logical interface can be specified. when discarding is specified, frames received by the mac address will not be forwarded to any port, and will be discarded. if registering a multicast mac address, you cannot specify “discard.” also, mac addresses in the following ranges cannot be registered. 0180.c200.0000–0180.c200.000f 0180.c200.0020–0180.c200.002f</div><div class="display_word">3.3. MAC address manual setting In addition to automatic acquisition using received frames, MAC addresses can be set on this product by using user commands. Entries that have been registered by using commands are called “static entries”. The specifications for manual settings are shown below. Use the mac-address-table static command to register static entries. The number of static entries that can be manually registered is 256. When registering static entries, dynamic acquisition will not be performed on the corresponding MAC addresses. Entries that have already been acquired will be deleted from the FDB, and will be registered as static entries. Use the no mac-address-table static command to delete static entries. Either “forward” or “discard” can be specified for the destination MAC address of a received frame. When forwarding is specified, either the LAN port forwarding destination or the static logical interface can be specified. When discarding is specified, frames received by the MAC address will not be forwarded to any port, and will be discarded. If registering a multicast MAC address, you cannot specify “discard.” Also, MAC addresses in the following ranges cannot be registered. 0180.c200.0000–0180.c200.000f 0180.c200.0020–0180.c200.002f</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable/disable the mac address learning function mac-address-table learning set dynamic entry ageing time mac-address-table ageing-time delete dynamic entries clear mac-address-table dynamic register static entries mac-address-table static delete static entries no mac-address-table static view the mac address table show mac-address-table</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Enable/disable the MAC address learning function mac-address-table learning Set dynamic entry ageing time mac-address-table ageing-time Delete dynamic entries clear mac-address-table dynamic Register static entries mac-address-table static Delete static entries no mac-address-table static View the MAC address table show mac-address-table</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#fdbの参照">5.1. Referring to the FDB</div><div class="search_word">5.1. referring to the fdb yamaha#show mac-address-tablevlan  port     mac             fwd      type     timeout   1  port1.2  00a0.de11.2233  forward  static        0   1  port1.1  1803.731e.8c2b  forward  dynamic     300   1  port1.1  782b.cbcb.218d  forward  dynamic     300</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Referring to the FDB Yamaha#show mac-address-tableVLAN  port     mac             fwd      type     timeout   1  port1.2  00a0.de11.2233  forward  static        0   1  port1.1  1803.731e.8c2b  forward  dynamic     300   1  port1.1  782b.cbcb.218d  forward  dynamic     300</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#ダイナミックエントリーの削除">5.2. Delete dynamic entries</div><div class="search_word">5.2. delete dynamic entries deleting an fdb entry registered in the fdb (mac address 00:a0:de:11:22:33) yamaha#clear mac-address-table dynamic address 00a0.de11.2233</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Delete dynamic entries Deleting an FDB entry registered in the FDB (MAC address 00:a0:de:11:22:33) Yamaha#clear mac-address-table dynamic address 00a0.de11.2233</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#ダイナミックエントリー-エージング時間の変更">5.3. Changing the dynamic entry ageing time</div><div class="search_word">5.3. changing the dynamic entry ageing time this example shows how to change the dynamic entry ageing time to 600 seconds. yamaha(config)#mac-address-table ageing-time 600</div><div class="display_word">5.3. Changing the dynamic entry ageing time This example shows how to change the dynamic entry ageing time to 600 seconds. Yamaha(config)#mac-address-table ageing-time 600</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#スタティックエントリーの登録">5.4. Register static entries</div><div class="search_word">5.4. register static entries this example shows how frames addressed to a device associated with vlan #10 (mac address 00:a0:de:11:22:33) can be forwarded to lan port 2 (port1.2). yamaha(config)#mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 forward port1.2 vlan 10 this example shows how to discard the frames sent to a device associated with vlan #10 (mac address 00:a0:de:11:22:33). specifying the interface name (“port1.2” in the example) will have no effect on operations. since this cannot be omitted, specify the lan port. yamaha(config)#mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 discard port1.2 vlan 10</div><div class="display_word">5.4. Register static entries This example shows how frames addressed to a device associated with VLAN #10 (MAC address 00:a0:de:11:22:33) can be forwarded to LAN port 2 (port1.2). Yamaha(config)#mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 forward port1.2 vlan 10 This example shows how to discard the frames sent to a device associated with VLAN #10 (MAC address 00:a0:de:11:22:33). Specifying the interface name (“port1.2” in the example) will have no effect on operations. Since this cannot be omitted, specify the LAN port. Yamaha(config)#mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 discard port1.2 vlan 10</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#スタティックエントリーの削除">5.5. Delete static entries</div><div class="search_word">5.5. delete static entries this example shows how to delete the forwarding settings sent to a device associated with vlan #10 (mac address 00:a0:de:11:22:33). yamaha(config)#no mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 forward port1.2 vlan 10</div><div class="display_word">5.5. Delete static entries This example shows how to delete the forwarding settings sent to a device associated with VLAN #10 (MAC address 00:a0:de:11:22:33). Yamaha(config)#no mac-address-table static 00a0.de11.2233 forward port1.2 vlan 10</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_fdb"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_fdb" doctitle="Forwarding" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#独自ループ検出">Proprietary Loop Detection</div><div class="search_word">proprietary loop detection</div><div class="display_word">Proprietary Loop Detection</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product offers a proprietary system to detect whether there is a loop in the network environment that was configured. a proprietary loop detection frame is sent from the lan port, and the unit monitors whether the frame returns or not. if the transmitted frame returns, the system determines that there is a loop in the port in question.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product offers a proprietary system to detect whether there is a loop in the network environment that was configured. A proprietary loop detection frame is sent from the LAN port, and the unit monitors whether the frame returns or not. If the transmitted frame returns, the system determines that there is a loop in the port in question.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used ldf (loop detection frame) this is a yamaha proprietary ethernet frame that is used to detect loops.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used LDF (Loop Detection Frame) This is a Yamaha proprietary Ethernet frame that is used to detect loops.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#ループ検出-動作仕様">3.1. Loop detection operating specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. loop detection operating specifications the loop detection specifications for this product are shown below. in addition to enabling/disabling the entire system, the loop detection on this product can enable/disable individual ports. when detecting loops in lan ports, the system-wide setting must be set to enable . use the loop-detect command in global configuration mode for the system-wide setting. use the loop-detect command in the interface mode of the relevant port for the individual lan port setting. the default settings for the loop detection function are as shown below. system-wide setting: enabled lan port setting: enabled if the loop detection function is enabled for this product, the following operations are performed. loop detection frames (hereafter “ldf”) are sent every two seconds from the linked-up lan port. the loop detection function cannot be used on static logical interfaces, and ports on which mirror settings have been made (mirror ports). when a lan port receives the loop detection frame that has been sent from the port, a loop occurrence is determined, and the following operations are performed. port blocking when the port number of the transmitting lan port is smaller than the receiving port number, all frames except for ldf are blocked. the ldf will be transmitted periodically, but ldf will not be forwarded from other devices. for the lan ports that were blocked, if the ldf that was transmitted does not return within five seconds, it is determined that the loop has been resolved, and normal communications are resumed. if the blocking duration is specified with the loop-detect blocking interval command, a check is made to see if the loop has been resolved when the specified time has elapsed since the loop was detected. at this time, if the loop is resolved, the blocking status will be cleared, but if the loop is not resolved, the blocking status will continue until the specified time has elapsed again. port detected when the port number of the lan port that was transmitted is larger than the port number during reception, another port is doing the blocking, so communication continues as normal. when a loop is detected, the link/act led indicator on this product will change to flashing orange , the status led indicator will change to illuminating orange , and the following syslog message will be output. [loop]: inf: detected loop! : port1.1 ① 1 displayed every 5 seconds from the start of loop detection the port lamp display on this product is restored as communications are resumed after the loop is resolved, and the following syslog message is output. [loop]: inf: recovered loop! : port1.1 a force-clear can be performed on the loop detection status (detected, blocking) by using the loop-detect reset command. if a linkdown has occurred on the port where a loop has been detected, the detection status will be cleared. the status of the loop detection function can be checked using the show loop-detect command. the following is displayed. system enable/disable status loop detection status (status for each lan port) when an ldf is received by a lan port when the loop detection function is disabled, the received frames from all other ports will be forwarded as-are. however, frames will not be forwarded for static logical interfaces and ports on which mirror settings have been made (mirror ports). in the following kinds of situations, loops in hubs that are connected to this product might not be detected. loops are being detected in a connected hub loop detection frames are not being forwarded by a connected hub if a loop occurs between different port-based vlans or different multiple vlans, the following actions are taken. condition action a loop occurs between ports that belong to different port-based vlans no blocking a loop occurs between ports that belong to different multiple vlans blocking</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Loop detection operating specifications The loop detection specifications for this product are shown below. In addition to enabling/disabling the entire system, the loop detection on this product can enable/disable individual ports. When detecting loops in LAN ports, the system-wide setting must be set to enable . Use the loop-detect command in global configuration mode for the system-wide setting. Use the loop-detect command in the interface mode of the relevant port for the individual LAN port setting. The default settings for the loop detection function are as shown below. System-wide setting: Enabled LAN port setting: Enabled If the loop detection function is enabled for this product, the following operations are performed. Loop detection frames (hereafter “LDF”) are sent every two seconds from the linked-up LAN port. The loop detection function cannot be used on static logical interfaces, and ports on which mirror settings have been made (mirror ports). When a LAN port receives the loop detection frame that has been sent from the port, a loop occurrence is determined, and the following operations are performed. Port Blocking When the port number of the transmitting LAN port is smaller than the receiving port number, all frames except for LDF are blocked. The LDF will be transmitted periodically, but LDF will not be forwarded from other devices. For the LAN ports that were blocked, if the LDF that was transmitted does not return within five seconds, it is determined that the loop has been resolved, and normal communications are resumed. If the blocking duration is specified with the loop-detect blocking interval command, a check is made to see if the loop has been resolved when the specified time has elapsed since the loop was detected. At this time, if the loop is resolved, the blocking status will be cleared, but if the loop is not resolved, the blocking status will continue until the specified time has elapsed again. Port Detected When the port number of the LAN port that was transmitted is larger than the port number during reception, another port is doing the blocking, so communication continues as normal. When a loop is detected, the LINK/ACT LED indicator on this product will change to flashing orange , the STATUS LED indicator will change to illuminating orange , and the following SYSLOG message will be output. [LOOP]: inf: Detected Loop! : port1.1 ① 1 Displayed every 5 seconds from the start of loop detection The port lamp display on this product is restored as communications are resumed after the loop is resolved, and the following SYSLOG message is output. [LOOP]: inf: Recovered Loop! : port1.1 A force-clear can be performed on the loop detection status (detected, blocking) by using the loop-detect reset command. If a linkdown has occurred on the port where a loop has been detected, the detection status will be cleared. The status of the loop detection function can be checked using the show loop-detect command. The following is displayed. System Enable/disable status Loop detection status (status for each LAN port) When an LDF is received by a LAN port when the loop detection function is disabled, the received frames from all other ports will be forwarded as-are. However, frames will not be forwarded for static logical interfaces and ports on which mirror settings have been made (mirror ports). In the following kinds of situations, loops in hubs that are connected to this product might not be detected. Loops are being detected in a connected hub Loop detection frames are not being forwarded by a connected hub If a loop occurs between different port-based VLANs or different multiple VLANs, the following actions are taken. Condition Action A loop occurs between ports that belong to different port-based VLANs No blocking A loop occurs between ports that belong to different multiple VLANs Blocking</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#ループ検出例">3.2. Loop detection examples</div><div class="search_word">3.2. loop detection examples the following shows examples of loop detection in this product. loop detection case configuration example loop detection status 1 a loop is detected when a port receives the ldf that it has transmitted. port1.1: blocking 2 when loops are detected in multiple ports on the same terminal, the port with the largest number is blocked. port1.1: detected port1.3: blocking 3 the loop is avoided by blocking multiple ports. the blocking port is selected using the same rules as case 2. port1.1: detected port1.2: blocking port1.3: blocking 4 when loops are detected in multiple groups, the port with the largest number in each group port1.1: detected, port1.2: blocking port1.3: detected, port1.4: blocking 5 when a loop occurs between two switches, one of the switches detects the loop. ○when detected in port1.3 of switch #a port1.1: detected, port1.3: blocking ○when detected in port1.7 of switch #b port1.5: detected, port1.7: blocking 6 out of the six ports that are connected by cable, the port for which the loop is most quickly detected is the one that is blocked. ○when detected in port1.2 of switch #a port1.1: detected, port1.2: blocking ○when detected in port1.4 of switch #b port1.3: detected, port1.4: blocking ○when detected in port1.6 of switch #c port1.5: detected, port1.6: blocking 7 because the ldf transmitted from each port returns to these ports, port1.5 and port1.6 will both be blocked. port1.5: blocking port1.6: blocking 8 port1.6 of switch #b is blocked. depending on the timing, port1.1 of switch #a will also be blocked; but the loop in port1.1 of switch #a is resolved by blocking port1.6 of switch #b. switch #a port1.1: blocking switch #b port1.5: detected switch #b port1.6: blocking</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Loop detection examples The following shows examples of loop detection in this product. Loop detection case Configuration example Loop detection status 1 A loop is detected when a port receives the LDF that it has transmitted. port1.1: Blocking 2 When loops are detected in multiple ports on the same terminal, the port with the largest number is blocked. port1.1: Detected port1.3: Blocking 3 The loop is avoided by blocking multiple ports. The blocking port is selected using the same rules as case 2. port1.1: Detected port1.2: Blocking port1.3: Blocking 4 When loops are detected in multiple groups, the port with the largest number in each group port1.1: Detected, port1.2: Blocking port1.3: Detected, port1.4: Blocking 5 When a loop occurs between two switches, one of the switches detects the loop. ○When detected in port1.3 of switch #A port1.1: Detected, port1.3: Blocking ○When detected in port1.7 of switch #B port1.5: Detected, port1.7: Blocking 6 Out of the six ports that are connected by cable, the port for which the loop is most quickly detected is the one that is blocked. ○When detected in port1.2 of switch #A port1.1: Detected, port1.2: Blocking ○When detected in port1.4 of switch #B port1.3: Detected, port1.4: Blocking ○When detected in port1.6 of switch #C port1.5: Detected, port1.6: Blocking 7 Because the LDF transmitted from each port returns to these ports, port1.5 and port1.6 will both be blocked. port1.5: Blocking port1.6: Blocking 8 Port1.6 of switch #B is blocked. Depending on the timing, port1.1 of switch #A will also be blocked; but the loop in port1.1 of switch #A is resolved by blocking port1.6 of switch #B. Switch #A port1.1: Blocking Switch #B port1.5: Detected Switch #B port1.6: Blocking</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable/disable loop detection function (system) loop-detect enable/disable enable/disable loop detection function (lan port) loop-detect enable/disable set the port blocking duration when a loop is detected loop-detect blocking interval reset the loop detection status loop-detect reset refer to the setting status of loop detection show loop-detect</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Enable/disable loop detection function (system) loop-detect enable/disable Enable/disable loop detection function (LAN port) loop-detect enable/disable Set the port blocking duration when a loop is detected loop-detect blocking interval Reset the loop detection status loop-detect reset Refer to the setting status of loop detection show loop-detect</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution this example detects any loops occurring on this product using the following configuration, when the loop detection function is enabled. [example 1] loop occurring within this product [example 2] loop occurring in a third-party hub connected to this product this sets lan ports #1 and #3 to detect loops. ■ setting procedure enable the loop detection function for the entire system. yamaha(config)#loop-detect enable (1) 1 enable the loop detection function for the entire system enable the loop detection function for lan ports #1 and #3. yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#loop-detect enable (1) (上記設定をlanﾎﾟｰﾄ #3 に対しても行います｡) 1 enable the loop detection function for each lan port both the loop detection function for the entire system and that for each lan port are enabled in default settings. confirm that the loop detection function has been set. confirm whether the loop detection function is enabled(*) for lan ports #1 and #3. yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        normalport1.2        enable(*)        normalport1.3        enable(*)        normalport1.4        enable(*)        normal   :             :                : if a loop has been detected, the loop detection status can be checked. in the case of example 1: yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        detected (1) port1.2        enable(*)        normalport1.3        enable(*)        blocking (2) port1.4        enable(*)        normal   :             :                : 1 lan port #1 enters the detected status 2 lan port #3 enters the blocking status in the case of example 2: yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        blocking (1) port1.2        enable(*)        normalport1.3        enable(*)        normalport1.4        enable(*)        normal   :             :                : 1 lan port #1 enters the blocking status</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution This example detects any loops occurring on this product using the following configuration, when the loop detection function is enabled. [Example 1] Loop occurring within this product [Example 2] Loop occurring in a third-party hub connected to this product This sets LAN ports #1 and #3 to detect loops. ■ Setting Procedure Enable the loop detection function for the entire system. Yamaha(config)#loop-detect enable (1) 1 Enable the loop detection function for the entire system Enable the loop detection function for LAN ports #1 and #3. Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#loop-detect enable (1) (上記設定をLANポート #3 に対しても行います。) 1 Enable the loop detection function for each LAN port Both the loop detection function for the entire system and that for each LAN port are enabled in default settings. Confirm that the loop detection function has been set. Confirm whether the loop detection function is enabled(*) for LAN ports #1 and #3. Yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: Enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        Normalport1.2        enable(*)        Normalport1.3        enable(*)        Normalport1.4        enable(*)        Normal   :             :                : If a loop has been detected, the loop detection status can be checked. In the case of example 1: Yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: Enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        Detected (1) port1.2        enable(*)        Normalport1.3        enable(*)        Blocking (2) port1.4        enable(*)        Normal   :             :                : 1 LAN port #1 enters the detected status 2 LAN port #3 enters the blocking status In the case of example 2: Yamaha>show loop-detectloop-detect: Enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        Blocking (1) port1.2        enable(*)        Normalport1.3        enable(*)        Normalport1.4        enable(*)        Normal   :             :                : 1 LAN port #1 enters the blocking status</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_loop_detect"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_loop_detect" doctitle="Proprietary" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#マルチプルvlan">Multiple VLAN</div><div class="search_word">multiple vlan</div><div class="display_word">Multiple VLAN</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview multiple vlan allows you to divide ports belonging to the same vlan into multiple groups and block communication between the groups. in addition to dividing ports into multiple groups, you can also have one port participate in multiple groups. this function allows users to easily realize the needs such as those shown in the diagram, where communication between terminals needs to be blocked while each terminal can access the server. example of using multiple vlans</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Multiple VLAN allows you to divide ports belonging to the same VLAN into multiple groups and block communication between the groups. In addition to dividing ports into multiple groups, you can also have one port participate in multiple groups. This function allows users to easily realize the needs such as those shown in the diagram, where communication between terminals needs to be blocked while each terminal can access the server. Example of using multiple VLANs</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#基本動作仕様">3.1. Basic operating specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. basic operating specifications multiple vlan allows you to create groups within a vlan. use the switchport multiple-vlan group command to configure a multiple vlan group. multiple vlans can be configured on lan interfaces and link aggregation logical interfaces. if you wish to configure a multiple vlan group for a trunk port, this will be applied to all relevant vlans that belong to the port in question. the multiple vlan group settings will also be applied to a multicast frame (*1). the maximum number of groups is equal to the number of ports on the product. (*1): the following frames are forwarded to ports with different multiple vlan groups. l2ms control frame control frames used by yamaha wireless access points bpdu frame when bpdu pass through is enabled</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Basic operating specifications Multiple VLAN allows you to create groups within a VLAN. Use the switchport multiple-vlan group command to configure a multiple VLAN group. Multiple VLANs can be configured on LAN interfaces and link aggregation logical interfaces. If you wish to configure a multiple VLAN group for a trunk port, this will be applied to all relevant VLANs that belong to the port in question. The multiple VLAN group settings will also be applied to a multicast frame (*1). The maximum number of groups is equal to the number of ports on the product. (*1): The following frames are forwarded to ports with different multiple VLAN groups. L2MS control frame Control frames used by Yamaha wireless access points BPDU frame when BPDU pass through is enabled</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#マルチプルvlanグループ間の通信例">3.2. Examples of traffic between multiple VLAN groups</div><div class="search_word">3.2. examples of traffic between multiple vlan groups when using multiple vlan group settings (group #1 through #4) as shown in the diagram above, enabling/disabling traffic between specific ports a/b and the reasons for such as shown in the table below. port number a (group) port number b (group) traffic enable/disable reason port1.1 (group 1) port1.2 (group 2) disabled the multiple vlan group is different port1.1 (group 1) port1.3 (group 1) enabled associated with multiple vlan group #1 port1.2 (group 2) port1.4 (group 2) enabled associated with multiple vlan group #2 port1.5 (group 3) port1.7 (group 3,4) enabled associated with multiple vlan group #3 port1.6 (no group) port1.8 (group 4) disabled the multiple vlan group is different port1.7 (group 3,4) port1.8 (group 4) enabled associated with multiple vlan group #4 *in the above example, port1.6 cannot communicate with any port. however, if there are other ports that do not belong to any group, communication is possible between the ports that do not belong to any group.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Examples of traffic between multiple VLAN groups When using multiple VLAN group settings (Group #1 through #4) as shown in the diagram above, enabling/disabling traffic between specific ports A/B and the reasons for such as shown in the table below. Port number A (group) Port number B (group) Traffic enable/disable Reason port1.1 (Group 1) port1.2 (Group 2) Disabled The multiple VLAN group is different port1.1 (Group 1) port1.3 (Group 1) Enabled Associated with multiple VLAN group #1 port1.2 (Group 2) port1.4 (Group 2) Enabled Associated with multiple VLAN group #2 port1.5 (Group 3) port1.7 (Group 3,4) Enabled Associated with multiple VLAN group #3 port1.6 (no group) port1.8 (Group 4) Disabled The multiple VLAN group is different port1.7 (Group 3,4) port1.8 (Group 4) Enabled Associated with multiple VLAN group #4 *In the above example, port1.6 cannot communicate with any port. However, if there are other ports that do not belong to any group, communication is possible between the ports that do not belong to any group.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#関連コマンド一覧">4.1. List of related commands</div><div class="search_word">4.1. list of related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands multiple vlan group settings switchport multiple-vlan group</div><div class="display_word">4.1. List of related commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Multiple VLAN group settings switchport multiple-vlan group</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#マルチプルvlan-の設定">5.1. Multiple VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. multiple vlan settings within vlan #1, communication is allowed between pc1 and server and between pc2 and server, but communication is blocked between pc1 and pc2. example of multiple vlan settings the multiple vlan group settings are as follows. port1.1: associated with multiple vlan groups #1 and #2 port1.2: associated with multiple vlan group #1 port1.3: associated with multiple vlan group #2 associate port1.1 with multiple vlan groups #1 and #2. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1 (1) yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 1 (2) yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 2 (3) yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 join in multiple vlan group #1 3 join in multiple vlan group #2 associate port1.2 with multiple vlan group #1. yamaha(config)# interface port1.2 (1) yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 1 (2) yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 join in multiple vlan group #1 associate port1.3 with multiple vlan group #2. yamaha(config)# interface port1.3 (1) yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 2 (2) yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 join in multiple vlan group #2</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Multiple VLAN settings Within VLAN #1, communication is allowed between PC1 and Server and between PC2 and Server, but communication is blocked between PC1 and PC2. Example of multiple VLAN settings The multiple VLAN group settings are as follows. port1.1: Associated with multiple VLAN groups #1 and #2 port1.2: Associated with multiple VLAN group #1 port1.3: Associated with multiple VLAN group #2 Associate port1.1 with multiple VLAN groups #1 and #2. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1 (1) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 2 (3) Yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Join in multiple VLAN group #1 3 Join in multiple VLAN group #2 Associate port1.2 with multiple VLAN group #1. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.2 (1) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Join in multiple VLAN group #1 Associate port1.3 with multiple VLAN group #2. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.3 (1) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport multiple-vlan group 2 (2) Yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Join in multiple VLAN group #2</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution the points of caution regarding this function are as follows. the multiple vlan group to associate with a link aggregation logical interface must be the same. a multiple vlan group is only applicable to forwarding between ports. voluntary packets will not be affected by the settings of a multiple vlan group. even if a multiple vlan is configured, communication may not work correctly due to the following influences. blocked status of loop detection</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution The points of caution regarding this function are as follows. The multiple VLAN group to associate with a link aggregation logical interface must be the same. A multiple VLAN group is only applicable to forwarding between ports. Voluntary packets will not be affected by the settings of a multiple VLAN group. Even if a multiple VLAN is configured, communication may not work correctly due to the following influences. Blocked status of loop detection</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_multiple_vlan" doctitle="Multiple" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#パススルー">Pass Through</div><div class="search_word">pass through</div><div class="display_word">Pass Through</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview pass through is a function that forwards frames addressed to reserved special mac addresses without discarding them, which would normally be discarded by a normal switch. this product supports pass-through of bpdu frames used in the spanning tree protocol and eap frames used in ieee 802.1x authentication. when the bpdu pass through is enabled, this product can be installed between switches that use the spanning tree protocol. when eap pass through is enabled, this product can be installed between an ieee 802.1x authenticated switch and a computer.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Pass through is a function that forwards frames addressed to reserved special MAC addresses without discarding them, which would normally be discarded by a normal switch. This product supports pass-through of BPDU frames used in the spanning tree protocol and EAP frames used in IEEE 802.1X authentication. When the BPDU pass through is enabled, this product can be installed between switches that use the spanning tree protocol. When EAP pass through is enabled, this product can be installed between an IEEE 802.1X authenticated switch and a computer.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used bpdu (bridge protocol data unit) this is a message used in the spanning tree protocol to avoid loops between compatible devices. eap (extended authentication protocol) this is an authentication protocol that extends ppp, allowing various authentication methods to be used. this protocol is defined in rfc 3748. ieee 802.1x authentication supports the use of this protocol.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) This is a message used in the spanning tree protocol to avoid loops between compatible devices. EAP (Extended authentication protocol) This is an authentication protocol that extends PPP, allowing various authentication methods to be used. This protocol is defined in RFC 3748. IEEE 802.1X authentication supports the use of this protocol.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#bpduパススルー-動作仕様">3.1. Operating specifications for BPDU pass through</div><div class="search_word">3.1. operating specifications for bpdu pass through the specifications for bpdu pass through are indicated below. by enabling bpdu pass through, received bpdu frames can be forwarded without being discarded. if bpdu pass through is disabled, received bpdu frames will be discarded and will not be forwarded. bpdu frames are forwarded to all ports except the port on which the frames were received, regardless of the settings for tagged vlan, port-based vlan, and multiple vlan . you can enable or disable bpdu pass through using the pass-through bpdu command or by navigating to [detailed settings] - [pass through] in the web gui. this function is enabled by default. the bpdu pass through setting is applied on a system-wide basis (common to all ports).</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Operating specifications for BPDU pass through The specifications for BPDU pass through are indicated below. By enabling BPDU pass through, received BPDU frames can be forwarded without being discarded. If BPDU pass through is disabled, received BPDU frames will be discarded and will not be forwarded. BPDU frames are forwarded to all ports except the port on which the frames were received, regardless of the settings for tagged VLAN, port-based VLAN, and multiple VLAN . You can enable or disable BPDU pass through using the pass-through bpdu command or by navigating to [Detailed settings] - [Pass through] in the web GUI. This function is enabled by default. The BPDU pass through setting is applied on a system-wide basis (common to all ports).</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#eapパススルー-動作仕様">3.2. Operating specifications for EAP pass through</div><div class="search_word">3.2. operating specifications for eap pass through the specifications for eap pass through are indicated below. by enabling eap pass through, received eap frames can be forwarded without being discarded. if eap pass through is disabled, received eap frames will be discarded and will not be forwarded. eap frames are forwarded in the same way as normal multicast frames, according to the settings for tagged vlan, port-based vlan, and multiple vlan . you can enable or disable eap pass through using the pass-through eap command or by navigating to [detailed settings] - [pass through] in the web gui. this function is enabled by default. the eap pass through setting is applied on a system-wide basis (common to all ports).</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Operating specifications for EAP pass through The specifications for EAP pass through are indicated below. By enabling EAP pass through, received EAP frames can be forwarded without being discarded. If EAP pass through is disabled, received EAP frames will be discarded and will not be forwarded. EAP frames are forwarded in the same way as normal multicast frames, according to the settings for tagged VLAN, port-based VLAN, and multiple VLAN . You can enable or disable EAP pass through using the pass-through eap command or by navigating to [Detailed settings] - [Pass through] in the web GUI. This function is enabled by default. The EAP pass through setting is applied on a system-wide basis (common to all ports).</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable/disable bpdu pass through pass-through bpdu enable/disable eap pass through pass-through eap</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Enable/disable BPDU pass through pass-through bpdu Enable/disable EAP pass through pass-through eap</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution enable bpdu pass through for installing this product between switches that use the spanning tree protocol. enable bpdu pass through. yamaha(config)#pass-through bpdu enable (1) 1 enable bpdu pass through enable eap pass through for installing this product between an ieee 802.1x authenticated switch and a computer. enable eap pass through. yamaha(config)#pass-through eap enable (1) 1 enable eap pass through</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution Enable BPDU pass through for installing this product between switches that use the spanning tree protocol. Enable BPDU pass through. Yamaha(config)#pass-through bpdu enable (1) 1 Enable BPDU pass through Enable EAP pass through for installing this product between an IEEE 802.1X authenticated switch and a computer. Enable EAP pass through. Yamaha(config)#pass-through eap enable (1) 1 Enable EAP pass through</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_pass_through"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_pass_through" doctitle="Pass" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#vlan">VLAN</div><div class="search_word">vlan</div><div class="display_word">VLAN</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview vlan (virtual lan) is technology that allows a lan to be constructed virtually, without regard to the physical structure of connections. this product lets you use vlans to divide the lan into multiple broadcast domains . the vlans that are supported by this product are shown below. vlan types summary port-based vlan groups that can communicate are configured for each lan port. tagged vlan groups that can communicate are identified, based on the fixed-length tag information appended to the ethernet frame. multiple and different vlans can be made to communicate by means of one lan port.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview VLAN (Virtual LAN) is technology that allows a LAN to be constructed virtually, without regard to the physical structure of connections. This product lets you use VLANs to divide the LAN into multiple broadcast domains . The VLANs that are supported by this product are shown below. VLAN types Summary Port-based VLAN Groups that can communicate are configured for each LAN port. Tagged VLAN Groups that can communicate are identified, based on the fixed-length tag information appended to the Ethernet frame. Multiple and different VLANs can be made to communicate by means of one LAN port.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used broadcast domain this is a range in which broadcast frames can be delivered in a network, such as an ethernet. devices that are connected by relaying a data link layer (mac layer), such as switching hubs, can belong to the same broadcast domain. a broadcast domain generally refers to the network in an ethernet.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Broadcast domain This is a range in which broadcast frames can be delivered in a network, such as an Ethernet. Devices that are connected by relaying a data link layer (MAC layer), such as switching hubs, can belong to the same broadcast domain. A broadcast domain generally refers to the network in an Ethernet.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#vlan-idの定義">3.1. Defining a VLAN ID</div><div class="search_word">3.1. defining a vlan id on product, a maximum of 255 vlans can be defined, with vlan ids ranging from 2–4094. (id #1 is used as the default vlan id.) vlan ids are defined using the vlan command, after the vlan database command is used to enter vlan mode. for details, refer to the command reference.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Defining a VLAN ID On product, a maximum of 255 VLANs can be defined, with VLAN IDs ranging from 2–4094. (ID #1 is used as the default VLAN ID.) VLAN IDs are defined using the vlan command, after the vlan database command is used to enter VLAN mode. For details, refer to the Command Reference.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#lanポートに対するvlan設定">3.2. VLAN settings for the LAN ports</div><div class="search_word">3.2. vlan settings for the lan ports the following settings must be configured after defining the vlans to use, in order to make use of vlan on this product. lan port mode settings vlan associations for lan ports the lan ports on this product are set to one of the following modes. access port this is a port that handles untagged frames. it can be associated with one vlan. trunk port this is a port that handles both tagged and untagged frames. it can be associated with multiple vlans, and is mainly used to connect switches to one another. this product only supports ieee 802.1q. (cisco isl is not supported.) use the switchport mode command to set the lan port mode. when setting the trunk port, use the input filter (“ingress-filter”) to control whether frames not belonging to the specified vlan id will be handled. input filter enabled: only frames set to the specified vlan id will be handled. input filter disabled: frames with any vlan id will be handled. use the show interface switchport command to check the lan port setting mode. use the switchport access vlan command to set which vlans belong to the access port. use the switchport trunk allowed vlan command to set which vlans belong to the trunk port. as the trunk port can be associated with multiple vlans, use the “all”, “none”, “except”, “add” and “remove” settings as shown below. add adds the specified vlan id. vlan ids that can be added are limited by the ids that are defined by the vlan mode. remove deletes the specified vlan id. all adds all vlan ids specified by the vlan mode. the vlan ids added by the vlan mode can also be added after this command is executed. none the trunk port will not be associated with any vlan. except adds all other vlan ids except for the ones specified. the vlan ids added by the vlan mode can also be added after this command is executed. a vlan that uses untagged frames (native vlan) can be specified for the trunk port. use the show vlan command to check which vlans belong to a lan port.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. VLAN settings for the LAN ports The following settings must be configured after defining the VLANs to use, in order to make use of VLAN on this product. LAN port mode settings VLAN associations for LAN ports The LAN ports on this product are set to one of the following modes. Access port This is a port that handles untagged frames. It can be associated with one VLAN. Trunk port This is a port that handles both tagged and untagged frames. It can be associated with multiple VLANs, and is mainly used to connect switches to one another. This product only supports IEEE 802.1Q. (Cisco ISL is not supported.) Use the switchport mode command to set the LAN port mode. When setting the trunk port, use the input filter (“ingress-filter”) to control whether frames not belonging to the specified VLAN ID will be handled. Input filter enabled: Only frames set to the specified VLAN ID will be handled. Input filter disabled: Frames with any VLAN ID will be handled. Use the show interface switchport command to check the LAN port setting mode. Use the switchport access vlan command to set which VLANs belong to the access port. Use the switchport trunk allowed vlan command to set which VLANs belong to the trunk port. As the trunk port can be associated with multiple VLANs, use the “all”, “none”, “except”, “add” and “remove” settings as shown below. add Adds the specified VLAN ID. VLAN IDs that can be added are limited by the IDs that are defined by the VLAN mode. remove Deletes the specified VLAN ID. all Adds all VLAN IDs specified by the VLAN mode. The VLAN IDs added by the VLAN mode can also be added after this command is executed. none The trunk port will not be associated with any VLAN. except Adds all other VLAN IDs except for the ones specified. The VLAN IDs added by the VLAN mode can also be added after this command is executed. A VLAN that uses untagged frames (native VLAN) can be specified for the trunk port. Use the show vlan command to check which VLANs belong to a LAN port.</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#デフォルトvlan">3.3. Default VLAN</div><div class="search_word">3.3. default vlan the default vlan is vlan #1 (vlan1), which exists in this switch by default. as the default vlan is a special vlan, it always exists and cannot be deleted. the following operations can be used to automatically delete the relevant port from the default vlan. setting any vlan other than the default as the vlan for the access port setting any vlan other than the default as the native vlan for the trunk port setting the native vlan for the trunk port to “none”</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Default VLAN The default VLAN is VLAN #1 (vlan1), which exists in this switch by default. As the default VLAN is a special VLAN, it always exists and cannot be deleted. The following operations can be used to automatically delete the relevant port from the default VLAN. Setting any VLAN other than the default as the VLAN for the access port Setting any VLAN other than the default as the native VLAN for the trunk port Setting the native VLAN for the trunk port to “none”</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#ネイティブvlan">3.4. Native VLAN</div><div class="search_word">3.4. native vlan a native vlan is a vlan that associates untagged frames received by the lan port that was set as a trunk port. defining a lan port as a trunk port will set the default vlan (vlan #1) as the native vlan. use the switchport trunk native vlan command when specifying a certain vlan as the native vlan. if you do not want to handle untagged frames on the lan port, you can set the native vlan to none. (specify “none” with the “ switchport trunk native vlan ” command.)</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Native VLAN A native VLAN is a VLAN that associates untagged frames received by the LAN port that was set as a trunk port. Defining a LAN port as a trunk port will set the default VLAN (VLAN #1) as the native VLAN. Use the switchport trunk native vlan command when specifying a certain VLAN as the native VLAN. If you do not want to handle untagged frames on the LAN port, you can set the native VLAN to none. (Specify “none” with the “ switchport trunk native vlan ” command.)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#関連コマンド一覧">4.1. List of related commands</div><div class="search_word">4.1. list of related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enter vlan mode vlan database define vlan interface, or change a predefined vlan vlan set access port (untagged port) switchport mode access set associated vlan of an access port (untagged port) switchport access vlan set trunk port (tagged port) switchport mode trunk set associated vlan for trunk port (tagged port) switchport trunk allowed vlan set native vlan for trunk port (tagged port) switchport trunk native vlan show vlan information show vlan</div><div class="display_word">4.1. List of related commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Enter VLAN mode vlan database Define VLAN interface, or change a predefined VLAN vlan Set access port (untagged port) switchport mode access Set associated VLAN of an access port (untagged port) switchport access vlan Set trunk port (tagged port) switchport mode trunk Set associated VLAN for trunk port (tagged port) switchport trunk allowed vlan Set native VLAN for trunk port (tagged port) switchport trunk native vlan Show VLAN information show vlan</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#ポートベースvlan-の設定">5.1. Port-based VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. port-based vlan settings in this example, a port-based vlan is configured for this product in order to allow communication between hosts a–b and hosts c–d. the lan port settings for this product are as follows. lan ports #1 and #2: set as access port, and associated with vlan #1000 lan ports #3 and #4: set as access port, and associated with vlan #2000 ■ setting procedure switch to vlan mode using the vlan database command, and define two vlans using the vlan command. yamaha(config)# vlan database (1) yamaha(config-vlan)# vlan 1000 (2) yamaha(config-vlan)# vlan 2000 (3) yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 switch to vlan mode 2 create vlan #1000 3 create vlan #2000 set lan ports #1–2 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #1000. yamaha(config)# interface port1.1 (1) yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode access (2) yamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1000 (3) yamaha(config-if)# interface port1.2 (4) yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode access (5) yamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1000 (6) yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 set the ports as access port 3 define a vlan id 4 switch to interface mode 5 set the ports as access port 6 define a vlan id set lan ports #3–4 as access ports, and associate them with vlan #2000. yamaha(config)# interface port1.3yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2000yamaha(config-if)# interface port1.4yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessyamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2000yamaha(config-if)# exit confirm the vlan settings. yamaha#show vlan brief(u)-untagged, (t)-taggedvlan id  name            state   member ports======= ================ ======= ===================================1       default          active  port1.5(u) port1.6(u) port1.7(u)                  port1.8(u) port1.9(u) port1.10(u)1000    vlan1000         active  port1.1(u) port1.2(u)2000    vlan2000         active  port1.3(u) port1.4(u)</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Port-based VLAN settings In this example, a port-based VLAN is configured for this product in order to allow communication between hosts A–B and hosts C–D. The LAN port settings for this product are as follows. LAN ports #1 and #2: Set as access port, and associated with VLAN #1000 LAN ports #3 and #4: Set as access port, and associated with VLAN #2000 ■ Setting Procedure Switch to VLAN mode using the vlan database command, and define two VLANs using the vlan command. Yamaha(config)# vlan database (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)# vlan 1000 (2) Yamaha(config-vlan)# vlan 2000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 Switch to VLAN mode 2 Create VLAN #1000 3 Create VLAN #2000 Set LAN ports #1–2 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #1000. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.1 (1) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode access (2) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)# interface port1.2 (4) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode access (5) Yamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1000 (6) Yamaha(config-if)# exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Set the ports as access port 3 Define a VLAN ID 4 Switch to interface mode 5 Set the ports as access port 6 Define a VLAN ID Set LAN ports #3–4 as access ports, and associate them with VLAN #2000. Yamaha(config)# interface port1.3Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2000Yamaha(config-if)# interface port1.4Yamaha(config-if)# switchport mode accessYamaha(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2000Yamaha(config-if)# exit Confirm the VLAN settings. Yamaha#show vlan brief(u)-Untagged, (t)-TaggedVLAN ID  Name            State   Member ports======= ================ ======= ===================================1       default          ACTIVE  port1.5(u) port1.6(u) port1.7(u)                  port1.8(u) port1.9(u) port1.10(u)1000    VLAN1000         ACTIVE  port1.1(u) port1.2(u)2000    VLAN2000         ACTIVE  port1.3(u) port1.4(u)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#タグvlan-の設定">5.2. Tagged VLAN settings</div><div class="search_word">5.2. tagged vlan settings in this example, a tagged vlan is configured between #a and #b of this product, in order to communicate between hosts a–b and hosts c–d. the lan port settings for #a and #b of this product are as follows. lan port #1: set as access port, and associated with vlan #1000 lan port #2: set as access port, and associated with vlan #2000 lan port #3: set as trunk port, and associated with lan #1000 and vlan #2000 [switch #a/#b] define vlan. yamaha(config)#vlan database (1) yamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000 (2) yamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 2000 (3) 1 switch to vlan mode 2 define vlan #1000 3 define vlan #2000 [switch #a/#b] set lan port #1 as the access port, and associate it with vlan #1000. yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (1) yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode access (2) yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (3) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 set the ports as access port 3 associate it with vlan #1000 [switch #a/#b] set lan port #2 as an access port, and associate it with vlan #2000. yamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (1) yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode access (2) yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2000 (3) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 set the ports as access port 3 associate it with vlan #2000 [switch #a/#b] set lan port #3 as a trunk port, and associate it with vlan #1000/#2000. yamaha(config)#interface port1.3 (1) yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode trunk (2) yamaha(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1000 (3) yamaha(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2000 (4) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 switch to interface mode 2 set the port as trunk port 3 add vlan #1000 4 add vlan #2000 confirm the vlan settings. yamaha#show vlan brief(u)-untagged, (t)-taggedvlan id name                             state   member ports======= ================================ ======= ===================================1       default                          active  port1.3(u) port1.4(u) port1.5(u)                                                 port1.6(u) port1.7(u) port1.8(u)                                                 port1.9(u) port1.10(u)1000    vlan1000                         active  port1.1(u) port1.3(t)2000    vlan2000                         active  port1.2(u) port1.3(t)</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Tagged VLAN settings In this example, a tagged VLAN is configured between #A and #B of this product, in order to communicate between hosts A–B and hosts C–D. The LAN port settings for #A and #B of this product are as follows. LAN port #1: Set as access port, and associated with VLAN #1000 LAN port #2: Set as access port, and associated with VLAN #2000 LAN port #3: Set as trunk port, and associated with LAN #1000 and VLAN #2000 [Switch #A/#B] Define VLAN. Yamaha(config)#vlan database (1) Yamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 1000 (2) Yamaha(config-vlan)#vlan 2000 (3) 1 Switch to vlan mode 2 Define VLAN #1000 3 Define VLAN #2000 [Switch #A/#B] Set LAN port #1 as the access port, and associate it with VLAN #1000. Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode access (2) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 1000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Set the ports as access port 3 Associate it with VLAN #1000 [Switch #A/#B] Set LAN port #2 as an access port, and associate it with VLAN #2000. Yamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode access (2) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Set the ports as access port 3 Associate it with VLAN #2000 [Switch #A/#B] Set LAN port #3 as a trunk port, and associate it with VLAN #1000/#2000. Yamaha(config)#interface port1.3 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport mode trunk (2) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1000 (3) Yamaha(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2000 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Switch to interface mode 2 Set the port as trunk port 3 Add VLAN #1000 4 Add VLAN #2000 Confirm the VLAN settings. Yamaha#show vlan brief(u)-Untagged, (t)-TaggedVLAN ID Name                             State   Member ports======= ================================ ======= ===================================1       default                          ACTIVE  port1.3(u) port1.4(u) port1.5(u)                                                 port1.6(u) port1.7(u) port1.8(u)                                                 port1.9(u) port1.10(u)1000    VLAN1000                         ACTIVE  port1.1(u) port1.3(t)2000    VLAN2000                         ACTIVE  port1.2(u) port1.3(t)</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="layer2_layer2_vlan"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer2_layer2_vlan" doctitle="VLAN" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4基本設定">Basic IPv4 Settings</div><div class="search_word">basic ipv4 settings</div><div class="display_word">Basic IPv4 Settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product is compatible with the following ipv4 network environment settings , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the settings of the switch). ipv4 address settings route information settings arp table settings</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product is compatible with the following IPv4 network environment settings , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the settings of the switch). IPv4 address settings Route information settings ARP table settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used ipv4 link local address this is an address that is only valid within the same segment, within the range of 169.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.255.255/16 .</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used IPv4 Link Local Address This is an address that is only valid within the same segment, within the range of 169.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.255.255/16 .</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4アドレスの設定">3.1. IPv4 address settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. ipv4 address settings this product lets you specify the ipv4 address and subnet mask for a vlan interface . as the setting method, both fixed settings and automatic settings via dhcp are supported. to set the fixed/automatic ipv4 address, use the ip address command. the ipv4 address setting cannot be left unspecified. the following actions occur if addresses are specified automatically by dhcp. the hostname option (option code 12) can be added to the discover/request message. the lease time requested to the dhcp server is fixed at 72 hours . (the actual lease time will depend on the setting of the dhcp server.) if the ip address command is executed with automatic settings and the settings are changed to fixed settings, a release message for the ipv4 address obtained is sent to the dhcp server. the information obtained from the dhcp server can be checked using the show dhcp lease . an ipv4 address can only be specified for one vlan interface . if an ipv4 address already specified for a vlan interface is specified for another vlan interface, the ipv4 address for the old vlan interface will be deleted. the ipv4 address that is allocated to a vlan interface can be checked using the show ip interface command. in the initial state, 192.168.100.240/24 is fixed for the default vlan (vlan #1) .</div><div class="display_word">3.1. IPv4 address settings This product lets you specify the IPv4 address and subnet mask for a VLAN interface . As the setting method, both fixed settings and automatic settings via DHCP are supported. To set the fixed/automatic IPv4 address, use the ip address command. The IPv4 address setting cannot be left unspecified. The following actions occur if addresses are specified automatically by DHCP. The HostName option (option code 12) can be added to the Discover/Request message. The lease time requested to the DHCP server is fixed at 72 hours . (The actual lease time will depend on the setting of the DHCP server.) If the ip address command is executed with automatic settings and the settings are changed to fixed settings, a release message for the IPv4 address obtained is sent to the DHCP server. The information obtained from the DHCP server can be checked using the show dhcp lease . An IPv4 address can only be specified for one VLAN interface . If an IPv4 address already specified for a VLAN interface is specified for another VLAN interface, the IPv4 address for the old VLAN interface will be deleted. The IPv4 address that is allocated to a VLAN interface can be checked using the show ip interface command. In the initial state, 192.168.100.240/24 is fixed for the default VLAN (VLAN #1) .</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#auto-ip機能">3.2. Auto IP function</div><div class="search_word">3.2. auto ip function as part of the ipv4 address setting functionality, this product provides an auto ip function which automatically generates ipv4 link local addresses based on the mac address. the auto ip function only works when an ipv4 address has not been allocated from the dhcp server. (the ipv4 address must be set to “dhcp” as a prerequisite.) this function confirms whether the automatically-generated ipv4 link local address does not already exist on the network via arp. if it has been confirmed that the address does not already exist, the generated address will start to be used. if the ipv4 address was allocated from the dhcp server after the ipv4 link local address was determined via auto ip, the ipv4 link local address is discarded, and the ip address obtained from the dhcp server is used. the auto ip function can only be enabled for vlan interfaces whose ipv4 address is specified . in the initial state, the default vlan (vlan #1) is enabled.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Auto IP function As part of the IPv4 address setting functionality, this product provides an auto IP function which automatically generates IPv4 link local addresses based on the MAC address. The auto IP function only works when an IPv4 address has not been allocated from the DHCP server. (The IPv4 address must be set to “DHCP” as a prerequisite.) This function confirms whether the automatically-generated IPv4 link local address does not already exist on the network via ARP. If it has been confirmed that the address does not already exist, the generated address will start to be used. If the IPv4 address was allocated from the DHCP server after the IPv4 link local address was determined via auto IP, the IPv4 link local address is discarded, and the IP address obtained from the DHCP server is used. The auto IP function can only be enabled for VLAN interfaces whose IPv4 address is specified . In the initial state, the default VLAN (VLAN #1) is enabled.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ルート情報の設定">3.3. Route information settings</div><div class="search_word">3.3. route information settings this product refers to a routing table when sending syslog messages and when sending out voluntary ipv4 packets as an ipv4 host for ntp-based time adjustments and so on. this product uses the following functions to perform the routing table operations. set vlan interface route information set default gateway show route information</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Route information settings This product refers to a routing table when sending syslog messages and when sending out voluntary IPv4 packets as an IPv4 host for NTP-based time adjustments and so on. This product uses the following functions to perform the routing table operations. Set VLAN interface route information Set default gateway Show route information</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#vlanインターフェースのルート情報">3.3.1. Route information for VLAN interfaces</div><div class="search_word">3.3.1. route information for vlan interfaces when setting an ipv4 address on this product for a vlan interface, the correspondence between the network address and vlan id is automatically set as route information.</div><div class="display_word">3.3.1. Route information for VLAN interfaces When setting an IPv4 address on this product for a VLAN interface, the correspondence between the network address and VLAN ID is automatically set as route information.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#デフォルトゲートウェイの設定">3.3.2. Set default gateway</div><div class="search_word">3.3.2. set default gateway the destination for ipv4 packets sent to network addresses that are not set in the routing table can be set as the default gateway on this product. to set the default gateway, use the ip route command. to show the default gateway, use the show ip route command.</div><div class="display_word">3.3.2. Set default gateway The destination for IPv4 packets sent to network addresses that are not set in the routing table can be set as the default gateway on this product. To set the default gateway, use the ip route command. To show the default gateway, use the show ip route command.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ルート情報の表示">3.3.3. Show route information</div><div class="search_word">3.3.3. show route information this product is provided with an fib (forwarding information base: ip forwarding table) as route information. fib is a database that is referenced when deciding how to forward ip packets. use the show ip route command to check the fib.</div><div class="display_word">3.3.3. Show route information This product is provided with an FIB (Forwarding Information Base: IP forwarding table) as route information. FIB is a database that is referenced when deciding how to forward IP packets. Use the show ip route command to check the FIB.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#arp-テーブルの設定">3.4. ARP table settings</div><div class="search_word">3.4. arp table settings when sending ipv4 packets, this product uses arp (address resolution protocol) to obtain the mac addresses from the ipv4 addresses. the correspondence between ipv4 address and mac address is saved in the arp table with the following specifications. the arp entries saved in the arp table manage the following information. ipv4 address mac address vlan interface the number of arp table entries is guaranteed to operate up to 512 entries . with the default settings, dynamic entries saved in the arp table are maintained for 300 sec . the entry timeout value can be changed using the arp-ageing-timeout command. dynamic entries saved in the arp table can be cleared regardless of the timeout value, by using the clear arp-cache command. use the show arp command to check the arp table.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. ARP table settings When sending IPv4 packets, this product uses ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) to obtain the MAC addresses from the IPv4 addresses. The correspondence between IPv4 address and MAC address is saved in the ARP table with the following specifications. The ARP entries saved in the ARP table manage the following information. IPv4 address MAC address VLAN interface The number of ARP table entries is guaranteed to operate up to 512 entries . With the default settings, dynamic entries saved in the ARP table are maintained for 300 sec . The entry timeout value can be changed using the arp-ageing-timeout command. Dynamic entries saved in the ARP table can be cleared regardless of the timeout value, by using the clear arp-cache command. Use the show arp command to check the ARP table.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. function types operations operating commands ipv4 address settings ipv4 address settings ip address show ipv4 address show ip interface set dynamic ipv4 address by dhcp client ip address dhcp show dhcp client status show dhcp lease route information settings set default gateway ip route show default gateway show ip route arp table settings show arp table show arp set the dynamic entry hold time arp-ageing-timeout clear dynamic entries clear arp-cache</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Function types Operations Operating commands IPv4 address settings IPv4 address settings ip address Show IPv4 address show ip interface Set dynamic IPv4 address by DHCP client ip address dhcp Show DHCP client status show dhcp lease Route information settings Set default gateway ip route Show default gateway show ip route ARP table settings Show ARP table show arp Set the dynamic entry hold time arp-ageing-timeout Clear dynamic entries clear arp-cache</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv4ネットワーク環境の設定-dhcp">5.1. IPv4 network environment settings (DHCP)</div><div class="search_word">5.1. ipv4 network environment settings (dhcp) in this example, the ipv4 addresses are set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. the ipv4 address is set automatically by dhcp for the default vlan (vlan #1). check the ipv4 address that is currently set. if the default settings are still in effect, the fixed ipv4 address (192.168.100.240/24) is set. yamaha#show ip interface briefinterface            ip-address                status                protocolvlan1                192.168.100.240/24        up                    up specify dhcp for the default vlan (vlan #1). changing the ip address may disable access to this product. use particular caution when making any changes. yamaha#configure terminalenter configuration commands, one per line.  end with cntl/z.yamaha(config)#interface vlan1yamaha(config-if)#ip address dhcpdo you really want to change ip address? [y/n]:y use telnet to access the ip address allocated by the dhcp server and log in. username:******password:******swx2210p-10g rev.1.03.03 (thu jan 16 13:20:45 2020)  copyright (c) 2018-2020 yamaha corporation. all rights reserved.yamaha>enablepassword:******yamaha# after logging in, check the information provided by the dhcp server. yamaha#show dhcp leaseinterface   vlan1-----------------------------------------------------------------ip address:                     192.168.1.9expires:                        2019/10/13 18:47:32renew:                          2019/10/12 18:47:32rebind:                         2019/10/13 12:47:33server:options:  subnet-mask                   255.255.255.0  default-gateway               192.168.1.1  dhcp-lease-time               172800  domain-name-servers           192.168.1.1  dhcp-server-identifier        192.168.1.1  domain-name                   domain.test</div><div class="display_word">5.1. IPv4 network environment settings (DHCP) In this example, the IPv4 addresses are set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. The IPv4 address is set automatically by DHCP for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). Check the IPv4 address that is currently set. If the default settings are still in effect, the fixed IPv4 address (192.168.100.240/24) is set. Yamaha#show ip interface briefInterface            IP-Address                Status                Protocolvlan1                192.168.100.240/24        up                    up Specify DHCP for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). Changing the IP address may disable access to this product. Use particular caution when making any changes. Yamaha#configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line.  End with CNTL/Z.Yamaha(config)#interface vlan1Yamaha(config-if)#ip address dhcpDo you really want to change IP address? [y/N]:y Use TELNET to access the IP address allocated by the DHCP server and log in. Username:******Password:******SWX2210P-10G Rev.1.03.03 (Thu Jan 16 13:20:45 2020)  Copyright (c) 2018-2020 Yamaha Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Yamaha>enablePassword:******Yamaha# After logging in, check the information provided by the DHCP server. Yamaha#show dhcp leaseInterface   vlan1-----------------------------------------------------------------IP Address:                     192.168.1.9Expires:                        2019/10/13 18:47:32Renew:                          2019/10/12 18:47:32Rebind:                         2019/10/13 12:47:33Server:Options:  subnet-mask                   255.255.255.0  default-gateway               192.168.1.1  dhcp-lease-time               172800  domain-name-servers           192.168.1.1  dhcp-server-identifier        192.168.1.1  domain-name                   domain.test</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution when the ipv4 address settings are changed, all of the following commands related to remote access control will be deleted. use particular caution when changing the ipv4 address. telnet-server access http-server access tftp-server access snmp-server access</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution When the IPv4 address settings are changed, all of the following commands related to remote access control will be deleted. Use particular caution when changing the IPv4 address. telnet-server access http-server access tftp-server access snmp-server access</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv4_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation l2 switching function: vlan remote access function: remote access control yamaha rtpro: what is arp?</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation L2 Switching Function: VLAN Remote Access Function: Remote Access Control Yamaha RTpro: What is ARP?</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6基本設定">Basic IPv6 Settings</div><div class="search_word">basic ipv6 settings</div><div class="display_word">Basic IPv6 Settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product is compatible with the following ipv6 network environment settings , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the switch settings). ipv6 address settings route information settings neighbor cache table settings</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product is compatible with the following IPv6 network environment settings , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the switch settings). IPv6 address settings Route information settings Neighbor cache table settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used ra (router advertisement) this is a system that automatically sets address information and network settings on the ipv6 network for devices of the network that is associated with a router. ipv6 address the ipv6 address is 128 bits expressed as hexadecimal. the address is divided into eight fields delimited by “:” with 16 bits in each field. 2001:02f8:0000:0000:1111:2222:0000:4444 the expression can be abbreviated according to the following rules. if the beginning of a field is a zero, the zero can be omitted. a field that consists of four zeros can be abbreviated as a single zero. multiple fields consisting only of consecutive zeros can be abbreviated as “::” in only one location for the entire address . applying these rules to the above address, we get the following. 2001:2f8::1111:2222:0:4444 ipv6 link-local address this is an address that is only valid within the same segment, and is in the following range. [start] fe80:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 [end] fe80:0000:0000:0000:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used RA (Router Advertisement) This is a system that automatically sets address information and network settings on the IPv6 network for devices of the network that is associated with a router. IPv6 address The IPv6 address is 128 bits expressed as hexadecimal. The address is divided into eight fields delimited by “:” with 16 bits in each field. 2001:02f8:0000:0000:1111:2222:0000:4444 The expression can be abbreviated according to the following rules. If the beginning of a field is a zero, the zero can be omitted. A field that consists of four zeros can be abbreviated as a single zero. Multiple fields consisting only of consecutive zeros can be abbreviated as “::” in only one location for the entire address . Applying these rules to the above address, we get the following. 2001:2f8::1111:2222:0:4444 IPv6 link-local address This is an address that is only valid within the same segment, and is in the following range. [Start] FE80:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 [End] FE80:0000:0000:0000:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6アドレスの設定">3.1. IPv6 address settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. ipv6 address settings this product lets you specify the ipv6 address and prefix length for a vlan interface . as the setting method, both fixed settings and automatic settings via ra (router advertisement) are supported. in order to specify an ipv6 address, ipv6 functionality must be enabled for the corresponding vlan interface. to enable ipv6 functionality, use the ipv6 enable command. when ipv6 functionality is enabled, an ipv6 link local address is automatically assigned. to set a fixed/automatic ipv6 address, use the ipv6 address command. for ipv6 addresses, one global address and one link local address can be specified only for a single vlan interface . if an ipv6 address already specified for a vlan interface is specified for another vlan interface, the ipv6 address for the old vlan interface will be deleted. the ipv6 address that can be specified for one vlan interface can be either the fixed or automatic setting . the ipv6 address that is allocated to a vlan interface can be checked using the show ipv6 interface command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. IPv6 address settings This product lets you specify the IPv6 address and prefix length for a VLAN interface . As the setting method, both fixed settings and automatic settings via RA (router advertisement) are supported. In order to specify an IPv6 address, IPv6 functionality must be enabled for the corresponding VLAN interface. To enable IPv6 functionality, use the ipv6 enable command. When IPv6 functionality is enabled, an IPv6 link local address is automatically assigned. To set a fixed/automatic IPv6 address, use the ipv6 address command. For IPv6 addresses, one global address and one link local address can be specified only for a single VLAN interface . If an IPv6 address already specified for a VLAN interface is specified for another VLAN interface, the IPv6 address for the old VLAN interface will be deleted. The IPv6 address that can be specified for one VLAN interface can be either the fixed or automatic setting . The IPv6 address that is allocated to a VLAN interface can be checked using the show ipv6 interface command.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ルート情報の設定">3.2. Route information settings</div><div class="search_word">3.2. route information settings this product refers to a routing table when sending syslog messages and when sending out voluntary ipv6 packets as an ipv6 host for ntp-based time adjustments and so on. this product uses the following functions to perform the routing table operations. set vlan interface route information set default gateway show route information</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Route information settings This product refers to a routing table when sending syslog messages and when sending out voluntary IPv6 packets as an IPv6 host for NTP-based time adjustments and so on. This product uses the following functions to perform the routing table operations. Set VLAN interface route information Set default gateway Show route information</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#vlanインターフェースのルート情報">3.2.1. Route information for VLAN interfaces</div><div class="search_word">3.2.1. route information for vlan interfaces when setting an ipv6 address on this product for a vlan interface, the correspondence between the network address and vlan id is automatically set as route information. when releasing ipv6 addresses set for the vlan interface, the above settings will be deleted.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.1. Route information for VLAN interfaces When setting an IPv6 address on this product for a VLAN interface, the correspondence between the network address and VLAN ID is automatically set as route information. When releasing IPv6 addresses set for the VLAN interface, the above settings will be deleted.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#デフォルトゲートウェイの設定">3.2.2. Set default gateway</div><div class="search_word">3.2.2. set default gateway the destination for ipv6 packets sent to network addresses that are not set in the routing table can be set as the default gateway on this product. to set the default gateway, use the ipv6 route command. to show the default gateway, use the show ipv6 route command.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.2. Set default gateway The destination for IPv6 packets sent to network addresses that are not set in the routing table can be set as the default gateway on this product. To set the default gateway, use the ipv6 route command. To show the default gateway, use the show ipv6 route command.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ルート情報の表示">3.2.3. Show route information</div><div class="search_word">3.2.3. show route information this product is provided with an fib (forwarding information base: ip forwarding table) as route information. fib is a database that is referenced when deciding how to forward ip packets. use the show ipv6 route command to check the fib.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.3. Show route information This product is provided with an FIB (Forwarding Information Base: IP forwarding table) as route information. FIB is a database that is referenced when deciding how to forward IP packets. Use the show ipv6 route command to check the FIB.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#neighbor-キャッシュテーブルの設定">3.3. Neighbor cache table settings</div><div class="search_word">3.3. neighbor cache table settings when sending ipv6 packets, this product uses neighbor discovery protocol to obtain the mac addresses from the ipv6 addresses. the correspondence between ipv6 address and mac address is saved in the neighbor cache table with the following specifications. the neighbor cache entries saved in the neighbor cache table manage the following information. ipv6 address mac address vlan interface up to 10 entries are saved in the neighbor cache table. if the maximum number of entries is reached and a new neighbor is found, the oldest neighbor is deleted and the new neighbor is registered. dynamic entries saved in the neighbor cache table can be cleared by using the clear ipv6 neighbors command. use the show ipv6 neighbor command to check the neighbor cache table.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Neighbor cache table settings When sending IPv6 packets, this product uses Neighbor Discovery Protocol to obtain the MAC addresses from the IPv6 addresses. The correspondence between IPv6 address and MAC address is saved in the neighbor cache table with the following specifications. The neighbor cache entries saved in the neighbor cache table manage the following information. IPv6 address MAC address VLAN interface Up to 10 entries are saved in the neighbor cache table. If the maximum number of entries is reached and a new neighbor is found, the oldest neighbor is deleted and the new neighbor is registered. Dynamic entries saved in the neighbor cache table can be cleared by using the clear ipv6 neighbors command. Use the show ipv6 neighbor command to check the neighbor cache table.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. function types operations operating commands ipv6 address settings enable/disable ipv6 addresses ipv6 enable/disable ipv6 address settings ipv6 address show ipv6 address show ipv6 interface set ra setting for ipv6 address ipv6 address autoconfig route information settings set default gateway ipv6 route show default gateway show ipv6 route show route information show ipv6 route neighbor cache settings show neighbor cache table show ipv6 neighbors clear neighbor cache table clear ipv6 neighbors</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Function types Operations Operating commands IPv6 address settings Enable/disable IPv6 addresses ipv6 enable/disable IPv6 address settings ipv6 address Show IPv6 address show ipv6 interface Set RA setting for IPv6 address ipv6 address autoconfig Route information settings Set default gateway ipv6 route Show default gateway show ipv6 route Show route information show ipv6 route Neighbor cache settings Show neighbor cache table show ipv6 neighbors Clear neighbor cache table clear ipv6 neighbors</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6ネットワーク環境の設定-固定設定">5.1. Setting up an IPv6 network environment (fixed settings)</div><div class="search_word">5.1. setting up an ipv6 network environment (fixed settings) in this example, the ipv6 addresses are manually set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. the ipv6 address is set manually for the default vlan (vlan #1). this sets 2001:db8:1::2/64 for the default vlan (vlan #1). yamaha#configure terminalenter configuration commands, one per line.  end with cntl/z.yamaha(config)#interface vlan1yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (1) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:1::2/64 (2) 1 enable ipv6 2 specify an ipv6 address check the ipv6 address that was set. yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#show ipv6 interface briefinterface        ip-address                                  status                protocolvlan1            2001:db8:1::2/64                            up                    up                 fe80::2a0:deff:fe:2/64</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Setting up an IPv6 network environment (fixed settings) In this example, the IPv6 addresses are manually set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. The IPv6 address is set manually for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). This sets 2001:db8:1::2/64 for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). Yamaha#configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line.  End with CNTL/Z.Yamaha(config)#interface vlan1Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (1) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 address 2001:db8:1::2/64 (2) 1 Enable IPv6 2 Specify an IPv6 address Check the IPv6 address that was set. Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#show ipv6 interface briefInterface        IP-Address                                  Status                Protocolvlan1            2001:db8:1::2/64                            up                    up                 fe80::2a0:deff:fe:2/64</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#ipv6ネットワーク環境の設定-raによる自動設定">5.2. Setting up an IPv6 network environment (automatic settings using RA)</div><div class="search_word">5.2. setting up an ipv6 network environment (automatic settings using ra) in this example, the ipv6 addresses are automatically set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. the ipv6 address is set automatically by ra for the default vlan (vlan #1). specify ra for the default vlan (vlan #1). yamaha#configure terminalenter configuration commands, one per line.  end with cntl/z.yamaha(config)#interface vlan1yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (1) yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 address autoconfig (2) 1 enable ipv6 2 set up ra check the ipv6 address that was obtained from ra. yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#show ipv6 interface briefinterface        ip-address                                  status                protocolvlan1            2001:db8::2a0:deff:fe:2/64                  up                    up                 fe80::2a0:deff:fe:2/64</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Setting up an IPv6 network environment (automatic settings using RA) In this example, the IPv6 addresses are automatically set on this product, and an environment is set up for accessing the unit from a remote terminal. The IPv6 address is set automatically by RA for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). Specify RA for the default VLAN (VLAN #1). Yamaha#configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line.  End with CNTL/Z.Yamaha(config)#interface vlan1Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 enable (1) Yamaha(config-if)#ipv6 address autoconfig (2) 1 Enable IPv6 2 Set up RA Check the IPv6 address that was obtained from RA. Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#show ipv6 interface briefInterface        IP-Address                                  Status                Protocolvlan1            2001:db8::2a0:deff:fe:2/64                  up                    up                 fe80::2a0:deff:fe:2/64</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution when the ipv6 address settings are changed, all of the following commands related to remote access control will be deleted. use particular caution when changing the ipv6 address. telnet-server access http-server access tftp-server access snmp-server access</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution When the IPv6 address settings are changed, all of the following commands related to remote access control will be deleted. Use particular caution when changing the IPv6 address. telnet-server access http-server access tftp-server access snmp-server access</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ipv6_basic" doctitle="Basic" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation l2 switching function: vlan remote access function: remote access control</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation L2 Switching Function: VLAN Remote Access Function: Remote Access Control</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#ipv4ipv6共通設定">IPv4/IPv6 Common Settings</div><div class="search_word">ipv4/ipv6 common settings</div><div class="display_word">IPv4/IPv6 Common Settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product is compatible with the following network environment settings that are common to ipv4 and ipv6 , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the settings of the switch). dns client settings</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product is compatible with the following network environment settings that are common to IPv4 and IPv6 , mainly for the purpose of maintenance (configuring the settings of the switch). DNS client settings</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#dns-クライアントの設定">3.1. DNS client settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. dns client settings this product supports dns (domain name system) clients . if an fqdn (fully qualified domain name) has been set for an ntp server or a syslog server, an inquiry is made to the dns server to retrieve the ipv4/ipv6 address. this product provides the following dns client control functions. set ip address of the dns server set default domain name set search domain list inquiries to the dns server are enabled by default, and the setting can be changed by using the dns-client enable/disable command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. DNS client settings This product supports DNS (Domain Name System) clients . If an FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) has been set for an NTP server or a syslog server, an inquiry is made to the DNS server to retrieve the IPv4/IPv6 address. This product provides the following DNS client control functions. Set IP address of the DNS server Set default domain name Set search domain list Inquiries to the DNS server are enabled by default, and the setting can be changed by using the dns-client enable/disable command.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#dns-サーバーのipアドレス設定">3.1.1. Set IP address of the DNS server</div><div class="search_word">3.1.1. set ip address of the dns server up to three ip addresses can be set for the dns server, using the methods shown below. manual setting using the dns-client name-server command this lets you specify the ipv4/ipv6 address. automatic setting via dhcp this product always gives priority to the information that was set via commands . check the configured dns servers by using the show dns-client command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.1. Set IP address of the DNS server Up to three IP addresses can be set for the DNS server, using the methods shown below. Manual setting using the dns-client name-server command This lets you specify the IPv4/IPv6 address. Automatic setting via DHCP This product always gives priority to the information that was set via commands . Check the configured DNS servers by using the show dns-client command.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#デフォルトドメインの設定">3.1.2. Set default domain name</div><div class="search_word">3.1.2. set default domain name only one default domain can be set using the methods shown below. the domain can be specified using up to 256 characters . manual setting using the dns-client domain-name command automatic setting via dhcp just as with dns server ip addresses, this product prioritizes information specified with commands . check the default domain that was set by using the show dns-client command. the use of a default domain is only allowed if there are no listings in the search domain list.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.2. Set default domain name Only one default domain can be set using the methods shown below. The domain can be specified using up to 256 characters . Manual setting using the dns-client domain-name command Automatic setting via DHCP Just as with DNS server IP addresses, this product prioritizes information specified with commands . Check the default domain that was set by using the show dns-client command. The use of a default domain is only allowed if there are no listings in the search domain list.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#検索ドメインリストの設定">3.1.3. Set search domain list</div><div class="search_word">3.1.3. set search domain list this product uses a search domain list to manage the domain names used when inquiring with the dns. up to six domain names can be set on the search domain list using the method below. manual setting using the dns-client domain-list command the search domain list that has been set can be checked using the show dns-client command. the search domain list must be within 255 characters total for all domain names registered .</div><div class="display_word">3.1.3. Set search domain list This product uses a search domain list to manage the domain names used when inquiring with the DNS. Up to six domain names can be set on the search domain list using the method below. Manual setting using the dns-client domain-list command The search domain list that has been set can be checked using the show dns-client command. The search domain list must be within 255 characters total for all domain names registered .</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. function types operations operating commands dns client settings dns client settings dns-client enable/disable set dns server address dns-client name-server set default domain name dns-client domain-name set search domain list dns-client domain-list show dns client settings show dns-client</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Function types Operations Operating commands DNS client settings DNS client settings dns-client enable/disable Set DNS server address dns-client name-server Set default domain name dns-client domain-name Set search domain list dns-client domain-list Show DNS client settings show dns-client</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#dnsクライアントの設定">5.1. DNS client settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. dns client settings set dns client settings for this product to prepare an environment for dns queries. specify 192.168.100.1 and 192.168.100.2 as the ip addresses of the servers for dns queries. specify example.com as the default domain used for dns queries. ■ setting procedure enable the dns query functionality. yamaha(config)#dns-client enable since this is specified as the default value, we do not need to set this specifically. specify the dns servers. yamaha(config)#dns-client name-server 192.168.100.1yamaha(config)#dns-client name-server 192.168.100.2 set the default domain. yamaha(config)#dns-client domain-name example.com check the dns client information that was set. yamaha#show dns-clientdns client is enabled default domain  : example.com domain list     : name servers    : 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.2 * - values assigned by dhcp client.</div><div class="display_word">5.1. DNS client settings Set DNS client settings for this product to prepare an environment for DNS queries. Specify 192.168.100.1 and 192.168.100.2 as the IP addresses of the servers for DNS queries. Specify example.com as the default domain used for DNS queries. ■ Setting Procedure Enable the DNS query functionality. Yamaha(config)#dns-client enable Since this is specified as the default value, we do not need to set this specifically. Specify the DNS servers. Yamaha(config)#dns-client name-server 192.168.100.1Yamaha(config)#dns-client name-server 192.168.100.2 Set the default domain. Yamaha(config)#dns-client domain-name example.com Check the DNS client information that was set. Yamaha#show dns-clientDNS client is enabled Default domain  : example.com Domain list     : Name Servers    : 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.2 * - Values assigned by DHCP Client.</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="layer3_layer3_ip_common"><div class="search_title" docfname="layer3_layer3_ip_common" doctitle="IPv4/IPv6" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#本製品で使われるオープンソースソフトウェアのライセンスについて">About Licenses of Open Source Software Used in This Product</div><div class="search_word">about licenses of open source software used in this product</div><div class="display_word">About Licenses of Open Source Software Used in This Product</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#オープンソースソフトウェア一覧">1. List of Open Source Software</div><div class="search_word">1. list of open source software the open source software used in this product and their licenses are shown in the table below. open source software and licenses open source software license u-boot gplv2 openlldp gplv2 openssl openssl wide-dhcpv6 3-clause bsd crypt-md5.c 2-clause bsd explorercanvas apache 2.0 jqcanvas mit jqplot mit/gpl2 jquery mit jquery datetimepicker plugin mit jquery file upload plugin mit jquery iframe transport plugin mit jquery xdomainrequest transport plugin mit jquery migrate mit jquery ui mit jquery ui touch punch mit/gpl2 jquery ui widget mit jquery ui ympicker mit/gpl2 powertip mit about gpl/lgpl licensed software this product includes software licensed under the gnu general public license (gpl) or gnu lesser general public license (lgpl). customers may obtain the source code of the software and reproduce, distribute, and modify it in accordance with the gpl or lgpl. any portion of the source code of this product that is licensed under the gpl or lgpl may be provided by yamaha (for a period of five years from the final shipment date). yamaha shall not be liable for any damages arising from changes, additions, deletions, or other actions to the software of this product made by a third party other than yamaha (or a party authorized by yamaha). reuse of source codes provided by yamaha is not guaranteed. yamaha shall not be liable for the source codes. software other than those licensed under the gpl/lgpl this product uses open source software in accordance with the license conditions provided by the copyright holders. yamaha shall not be liable for the source codes.</div><div class="display_word">1. List of Open Source Software The open source software used in this product and their licenses are shown in the table below. Open source software and licenses Open source software License u-boot GPLv2 OpenLLDP GPLv2 OpenSSL OpenSSL Wide-DHCPv6 3-clause BSD crypt-md5.c 2-clause BSD ExplorerCanvas Apache 2.0 jqCanvas MIT jqPlot MIT/GPL2 jQuery MIT jQuery DateTimePicker plugin MIT jQuery File Upload Plugin MIT jQuery Iframe Transport Plugin MIT jQuery XDomainRequest Transport Plugin MIT jQuery Migrate MIT jQuery UI MIT jQuery UI Touch Punch MIT/GPL2 jQuery UI Widget MIT jQuery UI Ympicker MIT/GPL2 PowerTip MIT About GPL/LGPL licensed software This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). Customers may obtain the source code of the software and reproduce, distribute, and modify it in accordance with the GPL or LGPL. Any portion of the source code of this product that is licensed under the GPL or LGPL may be provided by Yamaha (for a period of five years from the final shipment date). Yamaha shall not be liable for any damages arising from changes, additions, deletions, or other actions to the software of this product made by a third party other than Yamaha (or a party authorized by Yamaha). Reuse of source codes provided by Yamaha is not guaranteed. Yamaha shall not be liable for the source codes. Software other than those licensed under the GPL/LGPL This product uses open source software in accordance with the license conditions provided by the copyright holders. Yamaha shall not be liable for the source codes.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#ライセンス条文一覧">2. List of License Terms</div><div class="search_word">2. list of license terms</div><div class="display_word">2. List of License Terms</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#gplv2">2.1. GPLv2</div><div class="search_word">2.1. gplv2 gnu general public license                       version 2, june 1991 copyright (c) 1989, 1991 free software foundation, inc., 51 franklin street, fifth floor, boston, ma 02110-1301 usa everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.                            preamble  the licenses for most software are designed to take away yourfreedom to share and change it.  by contrast, the gnu general publiclicense is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change freesoftware--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  thisgeneral public license applies to most of the free softwarefoundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit tousing it.  (some other free software foundation software is covered bythe gnu lesser general public license instead.)  you can apply it toyour programs, too.  when we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, notprice.  our general public licenses are designed to make sure that youhave the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge forthis service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get itif you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of itin new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  to protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbidanyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.these restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if youdistribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  for example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whethergratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights thatyou have.  you must make sure that they, too, receive or can get thesource code.  and you must show them these terms so they know theirrights.  we protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,distribute and/or modify the software.  also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certainthat everyone understands that there is no warranty for this freesoftware.  if the software is modified by someone else and passed on, wewant its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, sothat any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the originalauthors' reputations.  finally, any free program is threatened constantly by softwarepatents.  we wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a freeprogram will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making theprogram proprietary.  to prevent this, we have made it clear that anypatent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.  the precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution andmodification follow.                    gnu general public license   terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification  0. this license applies to any program or other work which containsa notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributedunder the terms of this general public license.  the "program", below,refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the program"means either the program or any derivative work under copyright law:that is to say, a work containing the program or a portion of it,either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into anotherlanguage.  (hereinafter, translation is included without limitation inthe term "modification".)  each licensee is addressed as "you".activities other than copying, distribution and modification are notcovered by this license; they are outside its scope.  the act ofrunning the program is not restricted, and the output from the programis covered only if its contents constitute a work based on theprogram (independent of having been made by running the program).whether that is true depends on what the program does.  1. you may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the program'ssource code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that youconspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriatecopyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all thenotices that refer to this license and to the absence of any warranty;and give any other recipients of the program a copy of this licensealong with the program.you may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, andyou may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.  2. you may modify your copy or copies of the program or any portionof it, thus forming a work based on the program, and copy anddistribute such modifications or work under the terms of section 1above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:    a) you must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.    b) you must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in    whole or in part contains or is derived from the program or any    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third    parties under the terms of this license.    c) if the modified program normally reads commands interactively    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this    license.  (exception: if the program itself is interactive but    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on    the program is not required to print an announcement.)these requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  ifidentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the program,and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works inthemselves, then this license, and its terms, do not apply to thosesections when you distribute them as separate works.  but when youdistribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work basedon the program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms ofthis license, whose permissions for other licensees extend to theentire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contestyour rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is toexercise the right to control the distribution of derivative orcollective works based on the program.in addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the programwith the program (or with a work based on the program) on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work underthe scope of this license.  3. you may copy and distribute the program (or a work based on it,under section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms ofsections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:    a) accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of sections    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,    b) accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be    distributed under the terms of sections 1 and 2 above on a medium    customarily used for software interchange; or,    c) accompany it with the information you received as to the offer    to distribute corresponding source code.  (this alternative is    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you    received the program in object code or executable form with such    an offer, in accord with subsection b above.)the source code for a work means the preferred form of the work formaking modifications to it.  for an executable work, complete sourcecode means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus anyassociated interface definition files, plus the scripts used tocontrol compilation and installation of the executable.  however, as aspecial exception, the source code distributed need not includeanything that is normally distributed (in either source or binaryform) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of theoperating system on which the executable runs, unless that componentitself accompanies the executable.if distribution of executable or object code is made by offeringaccess to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalentaccess to copy the source code from the same place counts asdistribution of the source code, even though third parties are notcompelled to copy the source along with the object code.  4. you may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the programexcept as expressly provided under this license.  any attemptotherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the program isvoid, and will automatically terminate your rights under this license.however, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you underthis license will not have their licenses terminated so long as suchparties remain in full compliance.  5. you are not required to accept this license, since you have notsigned it.  however, nothing else grants you permission to modify ordistribute the program or its derivative works.  these actions areprohibited by law if you do not accept this license.  therefore, bymodifying or distributing the program (or any work based on theprogram), you indicate your acceptance of this license to do so, andall its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifyingthe program or works based on it.  6. each time you redistribute the program (or any work based on theprogram), the recipient automatically receives a license from theoriginal licensor to copy, distribute or modify the program subject tothese terms and conditions.  you may not impose any furtherrestrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.you are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties tothis license.  7. if, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patentinfringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this license, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this license.  if you cannotdistribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under thislicense and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence youmay not distribute the program at all.  for example, if a patentlicense would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the program byall those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, thenthe only way you could satisfy both it and this license would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the program.if any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances.it is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe anypatents or other property right claims or to contest validity of anysuch claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting theintegrity of the free software distribution system, which isimplemented by public license practices.  many people have madegenerous contributions to the wide range of software distributedthrough that system in reliance on consistent application of thatsystem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willingto distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannotimpose that choice.this section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed tobe a consequence of the rest of this license.  8. if the distribution and/or use of the program is restricted incertain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, theoriginal copyright holder who places the program under this licensemay add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excludingthose countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or amongcountries not thus excluded.  in such case, this license incorporatesthe limitation as if written in the body of this license.  9. the free software foundation may publish revised and/or new versionsof the general public license from time to time.  such new versions willbe similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail toaddress new problems or concerns.each version is given a distinguishing version number.  if the programspecifies a version number of this license which applies to it and "anylater version", you have the option of following the terms and conditionseither of that version or of any later version published by the freesoftware foundation.  if the program does not specify a version number ofthis license, you may choose any version ever published by the free softwarefoundation.  10. if you wish to incorporate parts of the program into other freeprograms whose distribution conditions are different, write to the authorto ask for permission.  for software which is copyrighted by the freesoftware foundation, write to the free software foundation; we sometimesmake exceptions for this.  our decision will be guided by the two goalsof preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software andof promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.                            no warranty  11. because the program is licensed free of charge, there is no warrantyfor the program, to the extent permitted by applicable law.  except whenotherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or other partiesprovide the program "as is" without warranty of any kind, either expressedor implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties ofmerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.  the entire risk asto the quality and performance of the program is with you.  should theprogram prove defective, you assume the cost of all necessary servicing,repair or correction.  12. in no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writingwill any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify and/orredistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you for damages,including any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arisingout of the use or inability to use the program (including but not limitedto loss of data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained byyou or third parties or a failure of the program to operate with any otherprograms), even if such holder or other party has been advised of thepossibility of such damages.                     end of terms and conditions            how to apply these terms to your new programs  if you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatestpossible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make itfree software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  to do so, attach the following notices to the program.  it is safestto attach them to the start of each source file to most effectivelyconvey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at leastthe "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>    copyright (c) <year>  <name of author>    this program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify    it under the terms of the gnu general public license as published by    the free software foundation; either version 2 of the license, or    (at your option) any later version.    this program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,    but without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of    merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.  see the    gnu general public license for more details.    you should have received a copy of the gnu general public license along    with this program; if not, write to the free software foundation, inc.,    51 franklin street, fifth floor, boston, ma 02110-1301 usa.also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.if the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like thiswhen it starts in an interactive mode:    gnomovision version 69, copyright (c) year name of author    gnomovision comes with absolutely no warranty; for details type `show w'.    this is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.the hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriateparts of the general public license.  of course, the commands you use maybe called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even bemouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.you should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or yourschool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, ifnecessary.  here is a sample; alter the names:  yoyodyne, inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program  `gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by james hacker.  <signature of ty coon>, 1 april 1989  ty coon, president of vicethis general public license does not permit incorporating your program intoproprietary programs.  if your program is a subroutine library, you mayconsider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with thelibrary.  if this is what you want to do, use the gnu lesser generalpublic license instead of this license.</div><div class="display_word">2.1. GPLv2 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE                       Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.                            Preamble  The licenses for most software are designed to take away yourfreedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General PublicLicense is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change freesoftware--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  ThisGeneral Public License applies to most of the Free SoftwareFoundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit tousing it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered bythe GNU Lesser General Public License instead.)  You can apply it toyour programs, too.  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, notprice.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that youhave the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge forthis service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get itif you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of itin new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbidanyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if youdistribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whethergratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights thatyou have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get thesource code.  And you must show them these terms so they know theirrights.  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,distribute and/or modify the software.  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certainthat everyone understands that there is no warranty for this freesoftware.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, wewant its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, sothat any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the originalauthors' reputations.  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by softwarepatents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a freeprogram will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making theprogram proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that anypatent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution andmodification follow.                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  0. This License applies to any program or other work which containsa notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributedunder the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into anotherlanguage.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation inthe term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are notcovered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act ofrunning the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Programis covered only if its contents constitute a work based on theProgram (independent of having been made by running the Program).Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program'ssource code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that youconspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriatecopyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all thenotices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this Licensealong with the Program.You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, andyou may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portionof it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy anddistribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third    parties under the terms of this License.    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  Ifidentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works inthemselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to thosesections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when youdistribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work basedon the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms ofthis License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to theentire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contestyour rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is toexercise the right to control the distribution of derivative orcollective works based on the Program.In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Programwith the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume ofa storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work underthe scope of this License.  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms ofSections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium    customarily used for software interchange; or,    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you    received the program in object code or executable form with such    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work formaking modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete sourcecode means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus anyassociated interface definition files, plus the scripts used tocontrol compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as aspecial exception, the source code distributed need not includeanything that is normally distributed (in either source or binaryform) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of theoperating system on which the executable runs, unless that componentitself accompanies the executable.If distribution of executable or object code is made by offeringaccess to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalentaccess to copy the source code from the same place counts asdistribution of the source code, even though third parties are notcompelled to copy the source along with the object code.  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Programexcept as expressly provided under this License.  Any attemptotherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program isvoid, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you underthis License will not have their licenses terminated so long as suchparties remain in full compliance.  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have notsigned it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify ordistribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions areprohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, bymodifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on theProgram), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, andall its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifyingthe Program or works based on it.  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on theProgram), the recipient automatically receives a license from theoriginal licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject tothese terms and conditions.  You may not impose any furtherrestrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties tothis License.  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patentinfringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement orotherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do notexcuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannotdistribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under thisLicense and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence youmay not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patentlicense would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program byall those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, thenthe only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the Program.If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances.It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe anypatents or other property right claims or to contest validity of anysuch claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting theintegrity of the free software distribution system, which isimplemented by public license practices.  Many people have madegenerous contributions to the wide range of software distributedthrough that system in reliance on consistent application of thatsystem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willingto distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannotimpose that choice.This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed tobe a consequence of the rest of this License.  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted incertain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, theoriginal copyright holder who places the Program under this Licensemay add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excludingthose countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or amongcountries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporatesthe limitation as if written in the body of this License.  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versionsof the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions willbe similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail toaddress new problems or concerns.Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Programspecifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "anylater version", you have the option of following the terms and conditionseither of that version or of any later version published by the FreeSoftware Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number ofthis License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free SoftwareFoundation.  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other freeprograms whose distribution conditions are different, write to the authorto ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the FreeSoftware Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimesmake exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goalsof preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software andof promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.                            NO WARRANTY  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTYFOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHENOTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIESPROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSEDOR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK ASTO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THEPROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITINGWILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/ORREDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITEDTO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BYYOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHERPROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatestpossible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make itfree software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safestto attach them to the start of each source file to most effectivelyconvey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at leastthe "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or    (at your option) any later version.    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the    GNU General Public License for more details.    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along    with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,    51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like thiswhen it starts in an interactive mode:    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriateparts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use maybe called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even bemouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or yourschool, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, ifnecessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  Ty Coon, President of ViceThis General Public License does not permit incorporating your program intoproprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you mayconsider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with thelibrary.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser GeneralPublic License instead of this License.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#openssl">2.2. OpenSSL</div><div class="search_word">2.2. openssl license issues  ==============  the openssl toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of  the openssl license and the original ssleay license apply to the toolkit.  see below for the actual license texts.  openssl license  ---------------/* ==================================================================== * copyright (c) 1998-2018 the openssl project.  all rights reserved. * * redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in *    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the *    distribution. * * 3. all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this *    software must display the following acknowledgment: *    "this product includes software developed by the openssl project *    for use in the openssl toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. the names "openssl toolkit" and "openssl project" must not be used to *    endorse or promote products derived from this software without *    prior written permission. for written permission, please contact *    openssl-core@openssl.org. * * 5. products derived from this software may not be called "openssl" *    nor may "openssl" appear in their names without prior written *    permission of the openssl project. * * 6. redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following *    acknowledgment: *    "this product includes software developed by the openssl project *    for use in the openssl toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * this software is provided by the openssl project ``as is'' and any * expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the * implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular * purpose are disclaimed.  in no event shall the openssl project or * its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, * special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but * not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; * loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) * however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, * strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) * arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if advised * of the possibility of such damage. * ==================================================================== * * this product includes cryptographic software written by eric young * (eay@cryptsoft.com).  this product includes software written by tim * hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ original ssleay license -----------------------/* copyright (c) 1995-1998 eric young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * all rights reserved. * * this package is an ssl implementation written * by eric young (eay@cryptsoft.com). * the implementation was written so as to conform with netscapes ssl. * * this library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to.  the following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the rc4, rsa, * lhash, des, etc., code; not just the ssl code.  the ssl documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is tim hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * copyright remains eric young's, and as such any copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * if this package is used in a product, eric young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * this can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. redistributions of source code must retain the copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software *    must display the following acknowledgement: *    "this product includes cryptographic software written by *     eric young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" *    the word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library *    being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. if you include any windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from *    the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: *    "this product includes software written by tim hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" * * this software is provided by eric young ``as is'' and * any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the * implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose * are disclaimed.  in no event shall the author or contributors be liable * for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential * damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods * or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) * however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict * liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way * out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of * such damage. * * the licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed.  i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the gnu public licence.] */</div><div class="display_word">2.2. OpenSSL LICENSE ISSUES  ==============  The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of  the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.  See below for the actual license texts.  OpenSSL License  ---------------/* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1998-2018 The OpenSSL Project.  All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in *    the documentation and/or other materials provided with the *    distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this *    software must display the following acknowledgment: *    "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project *    for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to *    endorse or promote products derived from this software without *    prior written permission. For written permission, please contact *    openssl-core@openssl.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" *    nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written *    permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following *    acknowledgment: *    "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project *    for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com).  This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ Original SSLeay License -----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to.  The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code.  The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software *    must display the following acknowledgement: *    "This product includes cryptographic software written by *     Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" *    The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library *    being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from *    the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: *    "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed.  i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#wide-dhcpv6">2.3. Wide-DHCPv6</div><div class="search_word">2.3. wide-dhcpv6 $kame: copyright,v 1.2 2004/07/29 19:02:18 jinmei exp $copyright (c) 1998-2004 wide project.all rights reserved.redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that the following conditionsare met:1. redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright   notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2. redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright   notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the   documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3. neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors   may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software   without specific prior written permission.this software is provided by the project and contributors ``as is'' andany express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, theimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purposeare disclaimed.  in no event shall the project or contributors be liablefor any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequentialdamages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goodsor services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption)however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strictliability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any wayout of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility ofsuch damage.</div><div class="display_word">2.3. Wide-DHCPv6 $KAME: COPYRIGHT,v 1.2 2004/07/29 19:02:18 jinmei Exp $Copyright (C) 1998-2004 WIDE Project.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that the following conditionsare met:1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright   notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright   notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the   documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors   may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software   without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' ANDANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAYOUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#crypt-md5c">2.4. crypt-md5.c</div><div class="search_word">2.4. crypt-md5.c * copyright (c) 2003 poul-henning kamp * all rights reserved. * * redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * * this software is provided by the author and contributors ``as is'' and * any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the * implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose * are disclaimed.  in no event shall the author or contributors be liable * for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential * damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods * or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) * however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict * liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way * out of the use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of * such damage.</div><div class="display_word">2.4. crypt-md5.c * Copyright (c) 2003 Poul-Henning Kamp * All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#explorercanvas">2.5. ExplorerCanvas</div><div class="search_word">2.5. explorercanvas copyright 2006 google inc.licensed under the apache license, version 2.0 (the "license");you may not use this file except in compliance with the license.you may obtain a copy of the license at  http://www.apache.org/licenses/license-2.0unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, softwaredistributed under the license is distributed on an "as is" basis,without warranties or conditions of any kind, either express or implied.see the license for the specific language governing permissions andlimitations under the license.</div><div class="display_word">2.5. ExplorerCanvas Copyright 2006 Google Inc.Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.You may obtain a copy of the License at  http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, softwaredistributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.See the License for the specific language governing permissions andlimitations under the License.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jqcanvas">2.6. jqCanvas</div><div class="search_word">2.6. jqcanvas the mit licensecopyright (c) 2008 david kwast <david *dot* kwast *at* gmail>permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "software"), to dealin the software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the software, and to permit persons to whom the software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included inall copies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind, express orimplied, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose and noninfringement. in no event shall theauthors or copyright holders be liable for any claim, damages or otherliability, whether in an action of contract, tort or otherwise, arising from,out of or in connection with the software or the use or other dealings inthe software.</div><div class="display_word">2.6. jqCanvas The MIT LicenseCopyright (c) 2008 David Kwast <david *dot* kwast *at* gmail>Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to dealin the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included inall copies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jqplot">2.7. jqPlot</div><div class="search_word">2.7. jqplot title: jqplot chartspure javascript plotting plugin for jquery.about: versionversion: 1.0.4revision: 1121about: copyright & licensecopyright (c) 2009-2012 chris leonellojqplot is currently available for use in all personal or commercial projectsunder both the mit and gpl version 2.0 licenses. this means that you canchoose the license that best suits your project and use it accordingly.see <gpl version 2> and <mit license> contained within this distribution for further information.the author would appreciate an email letting him know of any substantialuse of jqplot.  you can reach the author at: chris at jqplot dot comor see http://www.jqplot.com/info.php.  this is, of course, not required.if you are feeling kind and generous, consider supporting the project bymaking a donation at: http://www.jqplot.com/donate.php.sprintf functions contained in jqplot.sprintf.js by ash searle:    version 2007.04.27    author ash searle    http://hexmen.com/blog/2007/03/printf-sprintf/    http://hexmen.com/js/sprintf.js    the author (ash searle) has placed this code in the public domain:    "this code is unrestricted: you are free to use it however you like."</div><div class="display_word">2.7. jqPlot Title: jqPlot ChartsPure JavaScript plotting plugin for jQuery.About: Versionversion: 1.0.4revision: 1121About: Copyright & LicenseCopyright (c) 2009-2012 Chris LeonellojqPlot is currently available for use in all personal or commercial projectsunder both the MIT and GPL version 2.0 licenses. This means that you canchoose the license that best suits your project and use it accordingly.See <GPL Version 2> and <MIT License> contained within this distribution for further information.The author would appreciate an email letting him know of any substantialuse of jqPlot.  You can reach the author at: chris at jqplot dot comor see http://www.jqplot.com/info.php.  This is, of course, not required.If you are feeling kind and generous, consider supporting the project bymaking a donation at: http://www.jqplot.com/donate.php.sprintf functions contained in jqplot.sprintf.js by Ash Searle:    version 2007.04.27    author Ash Searle    http://hexmen.com/blog/2007/03/printf-sprintf/    http://hexmen.com/js/sprintf.js    The author (Ash Searle) has placed this code in the public domain:    "This code is unrestricted: you are free to use it however you like."</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery">2.8. jQuery</div><div class="search_word">2.8. jquery jquery javascript library v1.9.1http://jquery.com/includes sizzle.jshttp://sizzlejs.com/copyright 2005, 2012 jquery foundation, inc. and other contributorsreleased under the mit licensehttp://jquery.org/licensedate: 2013-2-4</div><div class="display_word">2.8. jQuery jQuery JavaScript Library v1.9.1http://jquery.com/Includes Sizzle.jshttp://sizzlejs.com/Copyright 2005, 2012 jQuery Foundation, Inc. and other contributorsReleased under the MIT licensehttp://jquery.org/licenseDate: 2013-2-4</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-datetimepicker-plugin">2.9. jQuery DateTimePicker plugin</div><div class="search_word">2.9. jquery datetimepicker plugin copyright (c) 2013 http://xdsoft.netpermission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "software"), to dealin the software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the software, and to permit persons to whom the software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included inall copies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind, express orimplied, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose and noninfringement. in no event shall theauthors or copyright holders be liable for any claim, damages or otherliability, whether in an action of contract, tort or otherwise, arising from,out of or in connection with the software or the use or other dealings inthe software.</div><div class="display_word">2.9. jQuery DateTimePicker plugin Copyright (c) 2013 http://xdsoft.netPermission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to dealin the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included inall copies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-file-upload-plugin-jquery-iframe-transport-plugin-jquery-xdomainrequest-transport-plugin">2.10. jQuery File Upload Plugin / jQuery Iframe Transport Plugin / jQuery XDomainRequest Transport Plugin</div><div class="search_word">2.10. jquery file upload plugin / jquery iframe transport plugin / jquery xdomainrequest transport plugin mit licensecopyright © 2010 sebastian tschan, https://blueimp.netpermission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "software"), to dealin the software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the software, and to permit persons to whom the software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in allcopies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind, express orimplied, including but not limited to the warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose and noninfringement. in no event shall theauthors or copyright holders be liable for any claim, damages or otherliability, whether in an action of contract, tort or otherwise, arising from,out of or in connection with the software or the use or other dealings in thesoftware.</div><div class="display_word">2.10. jQuery File Upload Plugin / jQuery Iframe Transport Plugin / jQuery XDomainRequest Transport Plugin MIT LicenseCopyright © 2010 Sebastian Tschan, https://blueimp.netPermission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copyof this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to dealin the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rightsto use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sellcopies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software isfurnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in allcopies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THESOFTWARE.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-migrate">2.11. jQuery Migrate</div><div class="search_word">2.11. jquery migrate copyright jquery foundation and other contributors, https://jquery.org/this software consists of voluntary contributions made by manyindividuals. for exact contribution history, see the revision historyavailable at https://github.com/jquery/jquery-migratethe following license applies to all parts of this software except asdocumented below:====permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"software"), to deal in the software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the software, and topermit persons to whom the software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind,express or implied, including but not limited to the warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement. in no event shall the authors or copyright holders beliable for any claim, damages or other liability, whether in an actionof contract, tort or otherwise, arising from, out of or in connectionwith the software or the use or other dealings in the software.====all files located in the node_modules and external directories areexternally maintained libraries used by this software which have theirown licenses; we recommend you read them, as their terms may differ fromthe terms above.</div><div class="display_word">2.11. jQuery Migrate Copyright jQuery Foundation and other contributors, https://jquery.org/This software consists of voluntary contributions made by manyindividuals. For exact contribution history, see the revision historyavailable at https://github.com/jquery/jquery-migrateThe following license applies to all parts of this software except asdocumented below:====Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and topermit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.====All files located in the node_modules and external directories areexternally maintained libraries used by this software which have theirown licenses; we recommend you read them, as their terms may differ fromthe terms above.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-ui">2.12. jQuery UI</div><div class="search_word">2.12. jquery ui copyright jquery foundation and other contributors, https://jquery.org/this software consists of voluntary contributions made by manyindividuals. for exact contribution history, see the revision historyavailable at https://github.com/jquery/jquery-uithe following license applies to all parts of this software except asdocumented below:====permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"software"), to deal in the software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the software, and topermit persons to whom the software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind,express or implied, including but not limited to the warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement. in no event shall the authors or copyright holders beliable for any claim, damages or other liability, whether in an actionof contract, tort or otherwise, arising from, out of or in connectionwith the software or the use or other dealings in the software.====copyright and related rights for sample code are waived via cc0. samplecode is defined as all source code contained within the demos directory.cc0: http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/====all files located in the node_modules and external directories areexternally maintained libraries used by this software which have theirown licenses; we recommend you read them, as their terms may differ fromthe terms above.</div><div class="display_word">2.12. jQuery UI Copyright jQuery Foundation and other contributors, https://jquery.org/This software consists of voluntary contributions made by manyindividuals. For exact contribution history, see the revision historyavailable at https://github.com/jquery/jquery-uiThe following license applies to all parts of this software except asdocumented below:====Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and topermit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.====Copyright and related rights for sample code are waived via CC0. Samplecode is defined as all source code contained within the demos directory.CC0: http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/====All files located in the node_modules and external directories areexternally maintained libraries used by this software which have theirown licenses; we recommend you read them, as their terms may differ fromthe terms above.</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-ui-touch-punch">2.13. jQuery UI Touch Punch</div><div class="search_word">2.13. jquery ui touch punch jquery ui touch punch 0.2.3copyright 2011–2014, dave furferodual licensed under the mit or gpl version 2 licenses.depends: jquery.ui.widget.js jquery.ui.mouse.js</div><div class="display_word">2.13. jQuery UI Touch Punch jQuery UI Touch Punch 0.2.3Copyright 2011–2014, Dave FurferoDual licensed under the MIT or GPL Version 2 licenses.Depends: jquery.ui.widget.js jquery.ui.mouse.js</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#jquery-ui-ympicker">2.14. jQuery UI Ympicker</div><div class="search_word">2.14. jquery ui ympicker jquery ui ympicker 1.8.21copyright 2012, authors.txt (http://jqueryui.com/about)dual licensed under the mit or gpl version 2 licenses.http://jquery.org/licensehttp://docs.jquery.com/ui/ympickerdepends:    jquery.ui.core.js</div><div class="display_word">2.14. jQuery UI Ympicker jQuery UI Ympicker 1.8.21Copyright 2012, AUTHORS.txt (http://jqueryui.com/about)Dual licensed under the MIT or GPL Version 2 licenses.http://jquery.org/licensehttp://docs.jquery.com/UI/YmpickerDepends:    jquery.ui.core.js</div></div><div id="license"><div class="search_title" docfname="license" doctitle="About" link="#powertip">2.15. PowerTip</div><div class="search_word">2.15. powertip copyright (c) 2018 steven benner (http://stevenbenner.com/)permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"software"), to deal in the software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the software, and topermit persons to whom the software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:the above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the software.the software is provided "as is", without warranty of any kind,express or implied, including but not limited to the warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement. in no event shall the authors or copyright holders beliable for any claim, damages or other liability, whether in an actionof contract, tort or otherwise, arising from, out of or in connectionwith the software or the use or other dealings in the software.</div><div class="display_word">2.15. PowerTip Copyright (c) 2018 Steven Benner (http://stevenbenner.com/)Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaininga copy of this software and associated documentation files (the"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, includingwithout limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and topermit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject tothe following conditions:The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall beincluded in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.</div></div><div id="notice_notice_login_security"><div class="search_title" docfname="notice_notice_login_security" doctitle="Login" link="#ログインセキュリティー">Login Security</div><div class="search_word">login security</div><div class="display_word">Login Security</div></div><div id="notice_notice_login_security"><div class="search_title" docfname="notice_notice_login_security" doctitle="Login" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product includes the following user account management improvements as countermeasures for ensuring cyber security. to eliminate the risk of malicious cyber-attacks and ensure the product is used safely, be sure to read this document carefully and specify an appropriate user password before use. for more information, refer to user account management . mandatory administrator registration at least one administrator account must be registered for this product. therefore, a default administrative user (username: admin and password: admin) has been specified for logging in to the product the first time. when first logging into the switch, specify admin as the username and password. after logging in using the default administrative user account, the user is prompted to change the password setting. stricter limits on guest user operations if the privileged password is not changed from the default setting, use of the privileged password will be restricted to the following operation. users without administrator rights cannot transition to the privileged exec mode. factory settings cannot be restored using cli/ gui operations. cannot accept connections as a tftp server. change the privileged password before performing the above operations. countermeasure for brute-force attacks as a countermeasure against brute-force attacks, login restrictions are applied after a login fails. if an incorrect password is entered three successive times when logging into the switch via the console, web gui, or other means, login is disabled for one minute thereafter, even if the correct password is entered. if the password is entered incorrectly, wait at least one minute before trying to login again.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product includes the following user account management improvements as countermeasures for ensuring cyber security. To eliminate the risk of malicious cyber-attacks and ensure the product is used safely, be sure to read this document carefully and specify an appropriate user password before use. For more information, refer to User Account Management . Mandatory administrator registration At least one administrator account must be registered for this product. Therefore, a default administrative user (username: admin and password: admin) has been specified for logging in to the product the first time. When first logging into the switch, specify admin as the username and password. After logging in using the default administrative user account, the user is prompted to change the password setting. Stricter limits on guest user operations If the privileged password is not changed from the default setting, use of the privileged password will be restricted to the following operation. Users without administrator rights cannot transition to the privileged EXEC mode. Factory settings cannot be restored using CLI/ GUI operations. Cannot accept connections as a TFTP server. Change the privileged password before performing the above operations. Countermeasure for Brute-Force Attacks As a countermeasure against brute-force attacks, login restrictions are applied after a login fails. If an incorrect password is entered three successive times when logging into the switch via the console, web GUI, or other means, login is disabled for one minute thereafter, even if the correct password is entered. If the password is entered incorrectly, wait at least one minute before trying to login again.</div></div><div id="notice_notice_login_security"><div class="search_title" docfname="notice_notice_login_security" doctitle="Login" link="#対象機種とリビジョン">2. Applicable Models and Revisions</div><div class="search_word">2. applicable models and revisions user account management has been improved in the following models and revisions. models revisions swx3220-16mt swx3220-16tms rev.4.02.10 or later swx3200-52gt swx3200-28gt rev.4.00.25 or later swx3100-18gt swx3100-10g rev.4.01.29 or later swx2322p-16mt rev.2.06.10 or later swx2320-16mt rev.2.05.10 or later swx2310-52gt swx2310-28gt swx2310-18gt swx2310-10g rev.2.04.11 or later swr2310-28gt swr2310-18gt swr2310-10g rev.2.04.12 or later swx2310p-28gt swx2310p-18g swx2310p-10g rev.2.02.24 or later swr2311p-10g rev.2.02.25 or later swp2-10smf swp2-10mmf rev.2.03.16 or later swx2220p-26nt swx2220p-18nt rev.1.05.06 or later swx2221p-10nt rev.1.05.03 or later swx2220-26nt swx2220-18nt rev.1.04.06 or later swx2220-10nt rev.1.04.03 or later swx2210p-10g: rev.1.03.13 or later</div><div class="display_word">2. Applicable Models and Revisions User account management has been improved in the following models and revisions. Models Revisions SWX3220-16MT SWX3220-16TMs Rev.4.02.10 or later SWX3200-52GT SWX3200-28GT Rev.4.00.25 or later SWX3100-18GT SWX3100-10G Rev.4.01.29 or later SWX2322P-16MT Rev.2.06.10 or later SWX2320-16MT Rev.2.05.10 or later SWX2310-52GT SWX2310-28GT SWX2310-18GT SWX2310-10G Rev.2.04.11 or later SWR2310-28GT SWR2310-18GT SWR2310-10G Rev.2.04.12 or later SWX2310P-28GT SWX2310P-18G SWX2310P-10G Rev.2.02.24 or later SWR2311P-10G Rev.2.02.25 or later SWP2-10SMF SWP2-10MMF Rev.2.03.16 or later SWX2220P-26NT SWX2220P-18NT Rev.1.05.06 or later SWX2221P-10NT Rev.1.05.03 or later SWX2220-26NT SWX2220-18NT Rev.1.04.06 or later SWX2220-10NT Rev.1.04.03 or later SWX2210P-10G: Rev.1.03.13 or later</div></div><div id="notice_notice_login_security"><div class="search_title" docfname="notice_notice_login_security" doctitle="Login" link="#ファームウェア更新時の注意点">3. Precautions When Updating Firmware</div><div class="search_word">3. precautions when updating firmware if the firmware is updated with stronger user account management functionality, be sure to register an administrator account according to the following procedure before using the switch. register the administrator account with the previous firmware running, which has not been updated with stronger user account management functionality. if an administrator account already exists, then no account registration is necessary. however, if a password was not specified for the administrator account, be sure to specify a password. it is not a problem if the user name for the administrator account is the default “admin”. yamaha>enableyamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#username (username) privilege on password (password) create a guest user if necessary, create a guest user. if using the username command, create it with the privilege option disabled (off). yamaha(config)#username (username) privilege off password (password) change the privileged password the default privileged password setting is “admin”. to change the privileged password using a command, use the enable password command. yamaha(config)#enable password (special privileged access password) update the firmware to the version with a countermeasure taken update the firmware to the version with a countermeasure taken in accordance with firmware update .</div><div class="display_word">3. Precautions When Updating Firmware If the firmware is updated with stronger user account management functionality, be sure to register an administrator account according to the following procedure before using the switch. Register the administrator account with the previous firmware running, which has not been updated with stronger user account management functionality. If an administrator account already exists, then no account registration is necessary. However, if a password was not specified for the administrator account, be sure to specify a password. It is not a problem if the user name for the administrator account is the default “admin”. Yamaha>enableYamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#username (username) privilege on password (password) Create a guest user If necessary, create a guest user. If using the username command, create it with the privilege option disabled (off). Yamaha(config)#username (username) privilege off password (password) Change the privileged password The default privileged password setting is “admin”. To change the privileged password using a command, use the enable password command. Yamaha(config)#enable password (special privileged access password) Update the firmware to the version with a countermeasure taken Update the firmware to the version with a countermeasure taken in accordance with Firmware Update .</div></div><div id="notice_notice_login_security"><div class="search_title" docfname="notice_notice_login_security" doctitle="Login" link="#関連文書">4. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">4. related documentation user account management remote access control firmware update</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Documentation User account management Remote Access Control Firmware Update</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#起動情報の管理">Boot Information Management</div><div class="search_word">boot information management</div><div class="display_word">Boot Information Management</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview as system boot information, this product manages the information shown in the table below. management item description system startup time time that the system booted up running firmware information firmware version currently running, and date generated firmware information for previous startup version and generated date of the firmware for the previous startup reason for boot reason why the system booted up. the following reasons for boot are recorded: * boot due to power on * reboot due to “reload” command * reboot due to “cold start” command * reboot due to firmware update * reboot due to kernel panic * reboot due to unidentified reason this product stores the current boot information and information on the previous four boots, for a total of five boot records.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview As system boot information, this product manages the information shown in the table below. Management item Description System startup time Time that the system booted up Running firmware information Firmware version currently running, and date generated Firmware information for previous startup Version and generated date of the firmware for the previous startup Reason for boot Reason why the system booted up. The following reasons for boot are recorded: * Boot due to power on * Reboot due to “reload” command * Reboot due to “cold start” command * Reboot due to firmware update * Reboot due to kernel panic * Reboot due to unidentified reason This product stores the current boot information and information on the previous four boots, for a total of five boot records.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#関連コマンド">2. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">2. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands show boot information show boot clear boot information clear boot list</div><div class="display_word">2. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Show boot information show boot Clear boot information clear boot list</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#コマンド実行例">3. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">3. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">3. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#起動情報の表示">3.1. Show boot information</div><div class="search_word">3.1. show boot information this shows the current boot information. yamaha>show boot 0 running exec: swx2210p rev.1.03.13 (wed sep  4 08:33:10 2024)previous exec: swx2210p rev.1.03.13 (wed sep  4 08:33:10 2024)restart by reload command this shows a list of the boot history. yamaha>show boot listno. date       time     info--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------  0 2024/09/17 16:47:54 restart by reload command  1 2024/09/06 14:54:13 power-on boot--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Show boot information This shows the current boot information. Yamaha>show boot 0 Running EXEC: SWX2210P Rev.1.03.13 (Wed Sep  4 08:33:10 2024)Previous EXEC: SWX2210P Rev.1.03.13 (Wed Sep  4 08:33:10 2024)Restart by reload command This shows a list of the boot history. Yamaha>show boot listNo. Date       Time     Info--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------  0 2024/09/17 16:47:54 Restart by reload command  1 2024/09/06 14:54:13 Power-on boot--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#起動情報のクリア">3.2. Clear boot information</div><div class="search_word">3.2. clear boot information this clears the boot information. yamaha#clear boot list</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Clear boot information This clears the boot information. Yamaha#clear boot list</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#注意事項">4. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">4. points of caution none.</div><div class="display_word">4. Points of Caution None.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_boot_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_boot_info" doctitle="Boot" link="#関連文書">5. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">5. related documentation none.</div><div class="display_word">5. Related Documentation None.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#ケーブル診断機能">Cable Diagnostics Function</div><div class="search_word">cable diagnostics function</div><div class="display_word">Cable Diagnostics Function</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview the cable diagnostic function can be used to easily check whether or not the lan cable connected to the lan port has a faulty connection/circuit. it can be used to troubleshoot network problems or as an easy way to check cables when setting up networks.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview The cable diagnostic function can be used to easily check whether or not the LAN cable connected to the LAN port has a faulty connection/circuit. It can be used to troubleshoot network problems or as an easy way to check cables when setting up networks.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used tdr (time domain reflector) the tdr is used to measure the length of lan cables or the location of damage based on the reflected signals from a pulse signal sent through the lan cables.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used TDR (Time Domain Reflector) The TDR is used to measure the length of LAN cables or the location of damage based on the reflected signals from a pulse signal sent through the LAN cables.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#ケーブル診断方法">3.1. How to diagnose cables</div><div class="search_word">3.1. how to diagnose cables the cable diagnostic function can easily diagnose lan cables using the time domain reflection (tdr) method. cable diagnostics is started by executing the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface command. item description cable status the following cable states can be detected. - ok: the cable is electrically connected. - open: either no device is connected on the opposite end or the cable is faulty. - short: a short circuit occurred. results are displayed for each pair. distance to the cable failure point if the cable status is “open” or “short”, then the distance to the fault is displayed. results are displayed for each pair. estimated cable length if the cable status is ok for all pairs, the estimated cable length is displayed. measurement is possible only when the link is up. results from executing cable diagnostics the previous time can be checked using the show test cable-diagnostics tdr command. only the immediately previous diagnostic results are retained and then overwritten the next time the cable diagnostics command is executed again. the immediately previous results can be deleted using the clear test cable-diagnostics tdr command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. How to diagnose cables The cable diagnostic function can easily diagnose LAN cables using the time domain reflection (TDR) method. Cable diagnostics is started by executing the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface command. Item Description Cable status The following cable states can be detected. - OK: The cable is electrically connected. - Open: Either no device is connected on the opposite end or the cable is faulty. - Short: A short circuit occurred. Results are displayed for each pair. Distance to the cable failure point If the cable status is “Open” or “Short”, then the distance to the fault is displayed. Results are displayed for each pair. Estimated cable length If the cable status is OK for all pairs, the estimated cable length is displayed. Measurement is possible only when the link is up. Results from executing cable diagnostics the previous time can be checked using the show test cable-diagnostics tdr command. Only the immediately previous diagnostic results are retained and then overwritten the next time the cable diagnostics command is executed again. The immediately previous results can be deleted using the clear test cable-diagnostics tdr command.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands perform the cable diagnostics test cable-diagnostics tdr interface display cable diagnostics show test cable-diagnostics tdr clear cable diagnostic results clear test cable-diagnostics tdr</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Perform the cable diagnostics test cable-diagnostics tdr interface Display cable diagnostics show test cable-diagnostics tdr Clear cable diagnostic results clear test cable-diagnostics tdr</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#設定例">5. Setting Examples</div><div class="search_word">5. setting examples</div><div class="display_word">5. Setting Examples</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#ケーブル診断の実行">5.1. Perform the cable diagnostics</div><div class="search_word">5.1. perform the cable diagnostics diagnose of the lan cable connected to port 1.1 as follows. yamaha# test cable-diagnostics tdr interface port1.1 ↓the port will be temporarily down during test. continue? (y/n): y ↓cable-diagnostic is running...port     pair  status  fault distance  length--------------------------------------------------port1.1  1     ok      -               50 +/- 15 m         2     ok      -         3     ok      -         4     ok      -</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Perform the cable diagnostics Diagnose of the LAN cable connected to port 1.1 as follows. Yamaha# test cable-diagnostics tdr interface port1.1 ↓The port will be temporarily down during test. Continue? (y/N): y ↓Cable-diagnostic is running...Port     Pair  Status  Fault distance  Length--------------------------------------------------port1.1  1     OK      -               50 +/- 15 m         2     OK      -         3     OK      -         4     OK      -</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#前回の診断結果の確認">5.2. Checking previous diagnostic results</div><div class="search_word">5.2. checking previous diagnostic results display the previous diagnostic results as follows. yamaha# show test cable-diagnostics tdrlast run on fri feb 26 10:30:00 2021port     pair  status  fault distance  length-------------------------------------------------port1.3  1     ok      -               -         2     ok      -         3     open    5 +/- 3 m         4     open    5 +/- 3 m</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Checking previous diagnostic results Display the previous diagnostic results as follows. Yamaha# show test cable-diagnostics tdrLast run on Fri Feb 26 10:30:00 2021Port     Pair  Status  Fault distance  Length-------------------------------------------------port1.3  1     OK      -               -         2     OK      -         3     Open    5 +/- 3 m         4     Open    5 +/- 3 m</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution this function performs simplified diagnostics. note that it cannot be used for precision diagnosis of more specialized equipment. when the shutdown command is set for the port to be diagnosed, cable diagnosis cannot be performed. be aware that communication is temporarily stopped during cable diagnostics. the estimated cable length cannot be measured when the opposing port is linked up with a link speed of less than 1 gbps or is shut down.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution This function performs simplified diagnostics. Note that it cannot be used for precision diagnosis of more specialized equipment. When the shutdown command is set for the port to be diagnosed, cable diagnosis cannot be performed. Be aware that communication is temporarily stopped during cable diagnostics. The estimated cable length cannot be measured when the opposing port is linked up with a link speed of less than 1 Gbps or is shut down.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_cable_diagnostics" doctitle="Cable" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#筐体情報の表示">Show Chassis Information</div><div class="search_word">show chassis information</div><div class="display_word">Show Chassis Information</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#コマンドによる筐体情報の表示">1.1. Use commands to show chassis information</div><div class="search_word">1.1. use commands to show chassis information this product provides the display functions shown in the table below. display item explanation commands inventory information shows information for this product, such as inventory name, model number, and product id. show inventory operating information shows the operating information for this product’s programs, such as running software information, cpu usage, memory usage, boot time. show environment technical support information outputs all data relevant to the operating state that might be necessary as analytic information for technical support. show tech-support</div><div class="display_word">1.1. Use commands to show chassis information This product provides the display functions shown in the table below. Display item Explanation Commands Inventory information Shows information for this product, such as inventory name, model number, and product ID. show inventory Operating information Shows the operating information for this product’s programs, such as running software information, CPU usage, memory usage, boot time. show environment Technical support information Outputs all data relevant to the operating state that might be necessary as analytic information for technical support. show tech-support</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#技術サポート情報のリモート取得">1.2. Obtain technical support information remotely</div><div class="search_word">1.2. obtain technical support information remotely a tftp client installed on a pc or other remote terminal can be used to obtain the technical support information (the output results of “show tech-support”) from this product. in order to operate this product’s tftp server, use the steps shown below to set up a network environment that allows remote access. set the ipv4/ipv6 address on a desired vlan. use the “tftp-server enable” command to start the tftp server function of this product. if necessary, hosts able to access the tftp server can be specified using the “tftp-server access” command. if using a tftp client, specify techinfo in the remote path for obtaining technical support information.</div><div class="display_word">1.2. Obtain technical support information remotely A TFTP client installed on a PC or other remote terminal can be used to obtain the technical support information (the output results of “show tech-support”) from this product. In order to operate this product’s TFTP server, use the steps shown below to set up a network environment that allows remote access. Set the IPv4/IPv6 address on a desired VLAN. Use the “tftp-server enable” command to start the TFTP server function of this product. If necessary, hosts able to access the TFTP server can be specified using the “tftp-server access” command. If using a TFTP client, specify techinfo in the remote path for obtaining technical support information.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#関連コマンド">2. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">2. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands show inventory information show inventory show operating information show environment show technical support information show tech-support</div><div class="display_word">2. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Show inventory information show inventory Show operating information show environment Show technical support information show tech-support</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#コマンド実行例">3. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">3. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">3. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#製品情報の表示">3.1. Show inventory information</div><div class="search_word">3.1. show inventory information check the inventory information of the main unit. name (name) description (descr) vendor name (vendor) product id (pid) version id (vid) serial number (sn) yamaha>show inventoryname: l2 poe switchdescr: swx2210p-10gvendor: yamahapid: swx2210p-10gvid: 0000sn: 1234567890</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Show inventory information Check the inventory information of the main unit. Name (NAME) Description (DESCR) Vendor Name (Vendor) Product ID (PID) Version ID (VID) Serial number (SN) Yamaha>show inventoryNAME: L2 PoE switchDESCR: SWX2210P-10GVendor: YamahaPID: SWX2210P-10GVID: 0000SN: 1234567890</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#稼動情報の表示">3.2. Show operating information</div><div class="search_word">3.2. show operating information this checks the system operating information (as shown below). boot version poe version firmware revision serial number mac address cpu usage ratio memory usage ratio fan operating status fan rpm rtc version startup time current time elapsed time from boot unit temperature status unit temperature yamaha>show environmentswx2210p-10g bootrom ver.1.04swx2210p-10g poerom ver.1.2.0.15swx2210p-10g rev.1.03.13 (wed sep  4 08:33:10 2024)main=swx2210p-10g ver=00 serial=1234567890 mac-address=ac44.f200.0000cpu:  42%(5sec)   43%(1min)   43%(5min)    memory:  51% usedfan status: normalfan speed: fan1=2689rpm fan2=2561rpmrtc version: 1boot time: 2024/09/18 16:47:54 +09:00current time: 2024/09/19 17:14:56 +09:00elapsed time from boot: 1days 00:27:27temperature status: normaltemperature: 49 degree cyamaha></div><div class="display_word">3.2. Show operating information This checks the system operating information (as shown below). Boot version PoE version Firmware revision Serial number MAC address CPU usage ratio Memory usage ratio Fan operating status Fan RPM RTC version Startup time Current time Elapsed time from boot Unit temperature status Unit temperature Yamaha>show environmentSWX2210P-10G BootROM Ver.1.04SWX2210P-10G PoEROM Ver.1.2.0.15SWX2210P-10G Rev.1.03.13 (Wed Sep  4 08:33:10 2024)main=SWX2210P-10G ver=00 serial=1234567890 MAC-Address=ac44.f200.0000CPU:  42%(5sec)   43%(1min)   43%(5min)    Memory:  51% usedFan status: NormalFan speed: FAN1=2689RPM FAN2=2561RPMRTC version: 1Boot time: 2024/09/18 16:47:54 +09:00Current time: 2024/09/19 17:14:56 +09:00Elapsed time from boot: 1days 00:27:27Temperature status: NormalTemperature: 49 degree CYamaha></div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#技術サポート情報の表示">3.3. Show technical support information</div><div class="search_word">3.3. show technical support information the following commands show information that is useful for technical support. show running-config show environment show inventory show boot all show logging show users show interface show frame-counter show vlan brief show loop-detect show mac-address-table show l2ms show qos queue-counters show ip igmp snooping groups show ip igmp snooping interface show ipv6 mld snooping groups show ipv6 mld snooping interface show power-inline yamaha#show tech-support## information for yamaha technical support#*** show running-config ***!dns-client enable!!...## end of information for yamaha technical support#</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Show technical support information The following commands show information that is useful for technical support. show running-config show environment show inventory show boot all show logging show users show interface show frame-counter show vlan brief show loop-detect show mac-address-table show l2ms show qos queue-counters show ip igmp snooping groups show ip igmp snooping interface show ipv6 mld snooping groups show ipv6 mld snooping interface show power-inline Yamaha#show tech-support## Information for Yamaha Technical Support#*** show running-config ***!dns-client enable!!...## End of Information for Yamaha Technical Support#</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#注意事項">4. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">4. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">4. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_chassis_info"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_chassis_info" doctitle="Show" link="#関連文書">5. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">5. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">5. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#コンフィグ管理">Config Management</div><div class="search_word">config management</div><div class="display_word">Config Management</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product uses the following config information to maintain the value of settings. config type description user operations possible running config (running-config) the currently-running setting values. managed in ram. view / save to startup config startup config (startup-config) saved setting values. managed in rom. view / delete default config (default-config) the default setting values. managed in rom. no operations possible</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product uses the following config information to maintain the value of settings. Config type Description User operations possible Running config (running-config) The currently-running setting values. Managed in RAM. View / Save to startup config Startup config (startup-config) Saved setting values. Managed in ROM. View / Delete Default config (default-config) The default setting values. Managed in ROM. No operations possible</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#ランニングコンフィグ">3.1. Running config</div><div class="search_word">3.1. running config running-config is the settings that are currently operating; since it is maintained in ram, it is destroyed at reboot. on this product, commands executed in configuration mode are immediately applied to running-config, and the unit operates according to these settings. the contents of running-config can be viewed by using the show running-config command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Running config running-config is the settings that are currently operating; since it is maintained in RAM, it is destroyed at reboot. On this product, commands executed in configuration mode are immediately applied to running-config, and the unit operates according to these settings. The contents of running-config can be viewed by using the show running-config command.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#スタートアップコンフィグ">3.2. Startup config</div><div class="search_word">3.2. startup config startup-config is settings that are saved in flash rom, and the contents are preserved through reboot. when this product is started, the settings of startup-config are applied as the initial settings of running-config. if you attempt to start up in a state where startup-config does not exist, such as after executing the cold start command, the default-config is automatically applied. the running-config settings can be saved in startup-config by the copy running-config startup-config command or the write command. this product can only store one startup config on the flash rom. if a startup config exists and you save a new startup config, the old startup config will be overwritten. the contents of startup-config can be erased by the erase startup-config command and viewed by the show startup-config command.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Startup config startup-config is settings that are saved in flash ROM, and the contents are preserved through reboot. When this product is started, the settings of startup-config are applied as the initial settings of running-config. If you attempt to start up in a state where startup-config does not exist, such as after executing the cold start command, the default-config is automatically applied. The running-config settings can be saved in startup-config by the copy running-config startup-config command or the write command. This product can only store one startup config on the flash ROM. If a startup config exists and you save a new startup config, the old startup config will be overwritten. The contents of startup-config can be erased by the erase startup-config command and viewed by the show startup-config command.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#デフォルトコンフィグ">3.3. Default config</div><div class="search_word">3.3. default config default-config contains settings saved in internal flash rom that are needed for this product to operate minimally as a switch. like startup-config, the contents are preserved even after a restart. the factory settings are maintained as default-config. if startup-config does not exist when the system starts, default-config is copied to startup-config, and applied to running-config. the contents of default-config cannot be viewed.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Default config default-config contains settings saved in internal flash ROM that are needed for this product to operate minimally as a switch. Like startup-config, the contents are preserved even after a restart. The factory settings are maintained as default-config. If startup-config does not exist when the system starts, default-config is copied to startup-config, and applied to running-config. The contents of default-config cannot be viewed.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#起動時のコンフィグファイルの決定">3.4. Deciding the config file at startup</div><div class="search_word">3.4. deciding the config file at startup the following describes the flow for deciding the config file used when this product starts up. if the startup-config exists, the corresponding data is applied as running-config in ram. if startup-config does not exist in rom, default-config is applied as running-config in ram.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Deciding the config file at startup The following describes the flow for deciding the config file used when this product starts up. If the startup-config exists, the corresponding data is applied as running-config in RAM. If startup-config does not exist in ROM, default-config is applied as running-config in RAM.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#tftpによるコンフィグファイルの制御">3.5. Controlling the config file via TFTP</div><div class="search_word">3.5. controlling the config file via tftp if this product’s tftp server function is enabled, a tftp client installed on a pc or other remote terminal can be used to perform the following. acquire the currently running running-config and startup-config apply previously prepared settings files as running-config and startup-config in order for the tftp server to function correctly, an ip address accessible to this product must be specified. the settings files can be acquired/set from a remote terminal in binary mode. specify the following as the remote path of the acquisition source/transmission destination of the settings files. settings file to be acquired/set remote path of the acquisition source/transmission destination running-config config startup-config # 0 config0 startup-config # 0 (config only) reconfig (destination only) the startup-config settings are applied as running-config after the system is restarted. if you specify “reconfig” as the destination remote path, this product will automatically restart after receiving the settings file.</div><div class="display_word">3.5. Controlling the config file via TFTP If this product’s TFTP server function is enabled, a TFTP client installed on a PC or other remote terminal can be used to perform the following. Acquire the currently running running-config and startup-config Apply previously prepared settings files as running-config and startup-config In order for the TFTP server to function correctly, an IP address accessible to this product must be specified. The settings files can be acquired/set from a remote terminal in binary mode. Specify the following as the remote path of the acquisition source/transmission destination of the settings files. Settings file to be acquired/set Remote path of the acquisition source/transmission destination running-config config startup-config # 0 config0 startup-config # 0 (config only) reconfig (destination only) The startup-config settings are applied as running-config after the system is restarted. If you specify “reconfig” as the destination remote path, this product will automatically restart after receiving the settings file.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands save running config copy running-config startup-config save running config write erase startup config erase startup-config show startup config show startup-config</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Save running config copy running-config startup-config Save running config write Erase startup config erase startup-config Show startup config show startup-config</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#ランニングコンフィグの保存">5.1. Save running config</div><div class="search_word">5.1. save running config save running-config. yamaha#copy running-config startup-configbuilding configuration...[ok]yamaha#</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Save running config Save running-config. Yamaha#copy running-config startup-configBuilding configuration...[OK]Yamaha#</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#スタートアップコンフィグの消去">5.2. Erase startup config</div><div class="search_word">5.2. erase startup config erase startup-config. yamaha#erase startup-config (1) erasing...[ok]yamaha# 1 erase startup-config</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Erase startup config Erase startup-config. Yamaha#erase startup-config (1) erasing...[OK]Yamaha# 1 Erase startup-config</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_config"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_config" doctitle="Config" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#dante最適設定">Dante Optimization Settings</div><div class="search_word">dante optimization settings</div><div class="display_word">Dante Optimization Settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview the dante setting optimization function makes it easy to build the optimal environment for dante digital audio networks. the function allows users to easily configure all dante settings at the same time without having to think about individual dante settings (such as qos, igmp snooping, disable flow control, and disable eee settings).</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview The Dante setting optimization function makes it easy to build the optimal environment for Dante digital audio networks. The function allows users to easily configure all Dante settings at the same time without having to think about individual Dante settings (such as QoS, IGMP snooping, disable flow control, and disable EEE settings).</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used dante dante is a digital audio network specification developed by the audinate corporation. adecia adecia is yamaha’s teleconferencing system. it connects processors, microphones, and speakers used for teleconferencing via a lan (dante). adecia components devices (teleconferencing processors, microphones, and speakers) included in adecia systems. lldp protocol for passing device information to neighboring devices.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Dante Dante is a digital audio network specification developed by the Audinate Corporation. ADECIA ADECIA is Yamaha’s teleconferencing system. It connects processors, microphones, and speakers used for teleconferencing via a LAN (Dante). ADECIA Components Devices (teleconferencing processors, microphones, and speakers) included in ADECIA systems. LLDP Protocol for passing device information to neighboring devices.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details dante settings can be optimized by the following two methods. automatic optimization settings using lldp automatically applies optimized settings by receiving lldp frames independently from adecia components. manual optimization settings via the web gui apply a dante profile from the proav settings page in the web gui of this product. the settings that can be collectively specified at the same time using the dante setting optimization function are listed below. for automatic setting optimization using lldp, the applicable settings will differ depending on the adecia component firmware version. object of setting function commands applicability lldp (adecia v2.5 or earlier) lldp (adecia v2.8 or later) web gui entire system disable flow control flowcontrol disable yes enable qos qos enable yes yes yes optimize transmission queue by dscp value qos dscp-queue 8 2 yes yes yes qos dscp-queue 26 3 yes yes qos dscp-queue 34 4 yes yes qos dscp-queue 46 5 yes yes yes qos dscp-queue 48 5 yes yes qos dscp-queue 56 7 yes yes yes qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 yes yes yes always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local yes yes sets mru mru 1522 yes enable lldp lldp run yes yes vlan interface set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary yes flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood yes yes enable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping enable yes yes yes set igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 yes yes yes enable igmp snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment yes yes enable igmp query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier yes yes yes set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 yes yes yes disable igmp packet ttl value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable yes yes yes disable igmp packet ra checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable yes yes disable igmp packet tos checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable yes yes disable igmp report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable yes yes enable igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable yes yes enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable yes yes set always forwarding ptp packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 yes yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 yes yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 yes yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 yes yes l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 yes yes lan/sfp port set qos trust mode to dscp qos trust dscp yes yes yes disable flow control flowcontrol disable yes yes yes disable eee eee disable yes yes yes enable lldp transmission and reception lldp-agent / set lldp enable tx rx yes yes use the dante optimization setting function after you have made all of the basic switch settings (such as vlan and ip). if you make new changes to the settings, the dante optimization settings will not follow.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details Dante settings can be optimized by the following two methods. Automatic optimization settings using LLDP Automatically applies optimized settings by receiving LLDP frames independently from ADECIA components. Manual optimization settings via the Web GUI Apply a Dante profile from the ProAV settings page in the web GUI of this product. The settings that can be collectively specified at the same time using the Dante setting optimization function are listed below. For automatic setting optimization using LLDP, the applicable settings will differ depending on the ADECIA component firmware version. Object of setting Function Commands Applicability LLDP (ADECIA V2.5 or earlier) LLDP (ADECIA V2.8 or later) Web GUI Entire system Disable flow control flowcontrol disable Yes Enable QoS qos enable Yes Yes Yes Optimize transmission queue by DSCP value qos dscp-queue 8 2 Yes Yes Yes qos dscp-queue 26 3 Yes Yes qos dscp-queue 34 4 Yes Yes qos dscp-queue 46 5 Yes Yes Yes qos dscp-queue 48 5 Yes Yes qos dscp-queue 56 7 Yes Yes Yes qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 Yes Yes Yes Always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Yes Yes Sets MRU mru 1522 Yes Enable LLDP lldp run Yes Yes VLAN interface Set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary Yes Flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood Yes Yes Enable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping enable Yes Yes Yes Set IGMP snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 Yes Yes Yes Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment Yes Yes Enable IGMP query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier Yes Yes Yes Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 Yes Yes Yes Disable IGMP packet TTL value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable Yes Yes Yes Disable IGMP packet RA checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable Yes Yes Disable IGMP packet ToS checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable Yes Yes Disable IGMP report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable Yes Yes Enable IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable Yes Yes Enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable Yes Yes Set always forwarding PTP packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 Yes Yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 Yes Yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 Yes Yes l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 Yes Yes l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 Yes Yes LAN/SFP port Set QoS trust mode to DSCP qos trust dscp Yes Yes Yes Disable flow control flowcontrol disable Yes Yes Yes Disable EEE eee disable Yes Yes Yes Enable LLDP transmission and reception lldp-agent / set lldp enable tx rx Yes Yes Use the Dante optimization setting function after you have made all of the basic switch settings (such as VLAN and IP). If you make new changes to the settings, the Dante optimization settings will not follow.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#lldpによる自動最適設定">3.1. Automatic optimization settings using LLDP</div><div class="search_word">3.1. automatic optimization settings using lldp settings optimized for dante can be applied automatically by receiving lldp frames created independently by adecia components. automatic optimization settings via lldp are set by the lldp auto-setting command. by default, this product is set to enable automatic optimization settings via lldp. if this function is enabled and an lldp frame is received from an adecia component, then the settings are automatically applied to the running-config settings for the overall system, for the vlan interface that received the frame, and for the lan/sfp port where the lldp frame was received. in adecia v2.8 or the later version, the function is disabled if even one of the automatically specified settings differs from factory settings. if you save using the copy running-config startup-config command or the write command, the settings are also applied to the startup-config that is used for the next and subsequent startups. even if the port to which the device is connected experiences a link-down state after automatic optimization settings, the automatically added settings are maintained. this function can be used only for a physical interface (lan/sfp port). it cannot be used with a link aggregated logical interface. in addition, lan/sfp port modes can only be used at access ports. they cannot be used at trunk ports. in order to use this function, reception of lldp frames must be enabled. for this reason, check in advance that the following settings have been made. enable lldp functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. create lldp agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. specify the lldp frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. lldp frame transmission and reception are enabled in product default settings.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Automatic optimization settings using LLDP Settings optimized for Dante can be applied automatically by receiving LLDP frames created independently by ADECIA components. Automatic optimization settings via LLDP are set by the lldp auto-setting command. By default, this product is set to enable automatic optimization settings via LLDP. If this function is enabled and an LLDP frame is received from an ADECIA component, then the settings are automatically applied to the running-config settings for the overall system, for the VLAN interface that received the frame, and for the LAN/SFP port where the LLDP frame was received. In ADECIA V2.8 or the later version, the function is disabled if even one of the automatically specified settings differs from factory settings. If you save using the copy running-config startup-config command or the write command, the settings are also applied to the startup-config that is used for the next and subsequent startups. Even if the port to which the device is connected experiences a link-down state after automatic optimization settings, the automatically added settings are maintained. This function can be used only for a physical interface (LAN/SFP port). It cannot be used with a link aggregated logical interface. In addition, LAN/SFP port modes can only be used at access ports. They cannot be used at trunk ports. In order to use this function, reception of LLDP frames must be enabled. For this reason, check in advance that the following settings have been made. Enable LLDP functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. Create LLDP agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. Specify the LLDP frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. LLDP frame transmission and reception are enabled in product default settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#web-guiからの手動最適設定">3.2. Manual optimization settings via the Web GUI</div><div class="search_word">3.2. manual optimization settings via the web gui apply a dante profile from the [proav settings] - [proav profile] pages in the web gui of this product. for details, refer to proav settings .</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Manual optimization settings via the Web GUI Apply a Dante profile from the [ProAV settings] - [ProAV profile] pages in the web GUI of this product. For details, refer to ProAV Settings .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details on the commands, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set dante automatic optimization settings function using lldp lldp auto-setting enable lldp function lldp run create lldp agent lldp-agent set lldp transmission/reception mode set lldp set flow control (system) flowcontrol set flow control (interface) flowcontrol enable qos qos set dscp - transmission queue id conversion table qos dscp-queue set qos trust mode qos trust set eee eee set mru mru set forwarding linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local set forwarding unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast set forwarding multicast frames l2-mcast flood enable/disable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping set igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping version set igmp snooping fast-leave ip igmp snooping fast-leave set igmp query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval set igmp packet ttl value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl set igmp packet ra checking function ip igmp snooping check ra set igmp packet tos checking function ip igmp snooping check tos set igmp report suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression set igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable set profile type proav profile-type</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details on the commands, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Set Dante automatic optimization settings function using LLDP lldp auto-setting Enable LLDP function lldp run Create LLDP agent lldp-agent Set LLDP transmission/reception mode set lldp Set flow control (system) flowcontrol Set flow control (interface) flowcontrol Enable QoS qos Set DSCP - transmission queue ID conversion table qos dscp-queue Set QoS trust mode qos trust Set EEE eee Set MRU mru Set forwarding linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Set forwarding unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast Set forwarding multicast frames l2-mcast flood Enable/disable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Set IGMP snooping version ip igmp snooping version Set IGMP snooping fast-leave ip igmp snooping fast-leave Set IGMP query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval Set IGMP packet TTL value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl Set IGMP packet RA checking function ip igmp snooping check ra Set IGMP packet ToS checking function ip igmp snooping check tos Set IGMP report suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression Set IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable Enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable Set profile type proav profile-type</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#lldpによる自動最適設定">5.1. Automatic optimization settings using LLDP</div><div class="search_word">5.1. automatic optimization settings using lldp enable automatic optimization settings using lldp. enable lldp transmission and reception on port1.1. yamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#lldp-agent (1) yamaha(lldp-agent)#set lldp enable txrx (2) yamaha(lldp-agent)#exityamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#lldp run (3) yamaha(config)#lldp auto-setting enable (4) 1 create lldp agent, mode transition 2 set lldp transmission/reception mode 3 enable lldp function 4 enable automatic optimization settings using lldp</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Automatic optimization settings using LLDP Enable automatic optimization settings using LLDP. Enable LLDP transmission and reception on port1.1. Yamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#lldp-agent (1) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#set lldp enable txrx (2) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#exitYamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#lldp run (3) Yamaha(config)#lldp auto-setting enable (4) 1 Create LLDP agent, mode transition 2 Set LLDP transmission/reception mode 3 Enable LLDP function 4 Enable automatic optimization settings using LLDP</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution it is assumed that you will use the dante optimization setting function after you have made all of the basic switch settings (such as vlan and ip). if you make new changes to the settings (such as adding a vlan), the dante optimization settings will not follow. manual optimization settings via the web gui note that if you use this function when settings such as qos settings, flow control settings, eee settings, and igmp snooping have already been made, those settings are overwritten by dante-optimized settings. using lldp to specify settings automatically this function can be used only for a physical interface (lan/sfp port). it cannot be used with a link aggregated logical interface. lan/sfp port modes can only be used at access ports. they cannot be used at trunk ports. in adecia v2.8 or the later version, the function is disabled if even one of the automatically specified settings differs from factory settings.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution It is assumed that you will use the Dante optimization setting function after you have made all of the basic switch settings (such as VLAN and IP). If you make new changes to the settings (such as adding a VLAN), the Dante optimization settings will not follow. Manual optimization settings via the Web GUI Note that if you use this function when settings such as QoS settings, flow control settings, EEE settings, and IGMP snooping have already been made, those settings are overwritten by Dante-optimized settings. Using LLDP to specify settings automatically This function can be used only for a physical interface (LAN/SFP port). It cannot be used with a link aggregated logical interface. LAN/SFP port modes can only be used at access ports. They cannot be used at trunk ports. In ADECIA V2.8 or the later version, the function is disabled if even one of the automatically specified settings differs from factory settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_dante_optimization"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_dante_optimization" doctitle="Dante" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation proav settings lldp qos flow control igmp snooping basic interface functions adecia product information</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation ProAV Settings LLDP QoS Flow Control IGMP Snooping Basic Interface Functions ADECIA Product Information</div></div><div id="oam_oam_default"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_default" doctitle="List" link="#デフォルト設定一覧">List of Default Settings</div><div class="search_word">list of default settings swx2210p series default settings are indicated below. system-wide default settings category setting parameter setting value console telnet console timeout 600 sec number of vtys 4 number of lines displayed 24 password default administrative user user name: admin password: admin administrator password admin encrypt password not encrypted time management time zone jst (utc＋9.0) ntp server none ntp update cycle none snmp action disabled syslog debug level log output off information level log output on error level log output on syslog server none firmware update download url for swx2210p-10g: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-10g.bin for swx2210p-18g: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-18g.bin for swx2210p-28g: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-28g.bin permit downward revision prohibit timeout 300 sec lldp action enabled automatic setting function enabled l2ms action enabled role agent access control telnet server status start (port 23) telnet server access allow access from all hosts tftp server status do not start http server status start (port 80) secure http server status start (port 443) http/https server access allow access from all hosts snmp server status start (port 161) snmp server access allow access from all hosts interface control mru 1,522 byte bpdu pass through enabled eap pass through enabled link aggregation none l2 switching automatic mac address acquisition enabled automatic mac address acquisition aging time 300 sec proprietary loop detection enabled multiple vlan none ip multicast igmp snooping disabled mld snooping disabled dns client action enabled traffic control qos disabled flow control (ieee 802.3x) disabled poe supply power supply actions enabled guard band 7 w web gui language setting japanese default settings per lan port category setting parameter setting value basic settings speed/communication mode setting auto cross/straight automatic detection enabled port description none eee disabled port mode access associated vlan id 1 (default vlan) l2ms l2ms filter disabled non-l2ms filter disabled l2 switching proprietary loop detection enabled traffic control qos trust mode cos flow control (ieee 802.3x) disabled storm control disabled lldp agent transmit/receive mode enabled poe supply power supply actions enabled poe power priority low settings for default vlan (vlan1) setting parameter setting value ipv4 address 192.168.100.240/24 igmp snooping action disabled mld snooping action disabled</div><div class="display_word">List of Default Settings SWX2210P series default settings are indicated below. System-wide default settings Category Setting Parameter Setting value Console Telnet console timeout 600 sec Number of VTYs 4 Number of lines displayed 24 Password Default administrative user User name: admin Password: admin Administrator password admin Encrypt password Not encrypted Time Management Time zone JST (UTC＋9.0) NTP server None NTP update cycle None SNMP Action Disabled SYSLOG debug level log output OFF information level log output ON error level log output ON SYSLOG server None Firmware Update Download URL For SWX2210P-10G: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-10g.bin For SWX2210P-18G: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-18g.bin For SWX2210P-28G: firmware-update url http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-28g.bin Permit downward revision Prohibit Timeout 300 sec LLDP Action Enabled Automatic setting function Enabled L2MS Action Enabled Role Agent Access control Telnet server status Start (port 23) Telnet server access Allow access from all hosts TFTP server status Do not start HTTP server status Start (port 80) Secure HTTP server status Start (port 443) HTTP/HTTPS server access Allow access from all hosts SNMP server status Start (port 161) SNMP server access Allow access from all hosts Interface control MRU 1,522 Byte BPDU pass through Enabled EAP pass through Enabled Link Aggregation None L2 switching Automatic MAC address acquisition Enabled Automatic MAC address acquisition aging time 300 sec Proprietary Loop Detection Enabled Multiple VLAN None IP multicast IGMP snooping Disabled MLD snooping Disabled DNS client Action Enabled Traffic control QoS Disabled Flow control (IEEE 802.3x) Disabled PoE supply Power supply actions Enabled Guard band 7 W Web GUI Language setting Japanese Default settings per LAN port Category Setting Parameter Setting value Basic settings Speed/communication mode setting auto Cross/straight automatic detection Enabled Port description None EEE Disabled Port Mode Access Associated VLAN ID 1 (default VLAN) L2MS L2MS filter Disabled non-L2MS filter Disabled L2 switching Proprietary Loop Detection Enabled Traffic control QoS trust mode CoS Flow control (IEEE 802.3x) Disabled Storm Control Disabled LLDP agent Transmit/receive mode Enabled PoE supply Power supply actions Enabled PoE power priority Low Settings for default VLAN (vlan1) Setting Parameter Setting value IPv4 Address 192.168.100.240/24 IGMP Snooping Action Disabled MLD Snooping Action Disabled</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#ファームウェア更新">Firmware Update</div><div class="search_word">firmware update</div><div class="display_word">Firmware Update</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product offers the following two firmware update functions, in order to correct problems in the program and to add new functionality. firmware updates can be transmitted and applied to this product from a remote terminal such as a computer. this product’s built-in http client can access an http server, to download and apply the latest firmware. these update functions can be used to upgrade or downgrade the version of firmware used on this product. note that a firmware version downgrade from rev.1.03.13 or later version to rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts. when successfully finished writing the updated firmware, the system is automatically rebooted in order to apply the new firmware .</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product offers the following two firmware update functions, in order to correct problems in the program and to add new functionality. Firmware updates can be transmitted and applied to this product from a remote terminal such as a computer. This product’s built-in HTTP client can access an HTTP server, to download and apply the latest firmware. These update functions can be used to upgrade or downgrade the version of firmware used on this product. Note that a firmware version downgrade from Rev.1.03.13 or later version to Rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts. When successfully finished writing the updated firmware, the system is automatically rebooted in order to apply the new firmware .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#更新ファームウェア送付による更新">3.1. Update by transmitting the firmware update</div><div class="search_word">3.1. update by transmitting the firmware update this function transmits firmware updates to this product from a remote terminal, such as a computer, and applies it as boot firmware. the update process is executed using a tftp client or the web gui .</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Update by transmitting the firmware update This function transmits firmware updates to this product from a remote terminal, such as a computer, and applies it as boot firmware. The update process is executed using a TFTP client or the Web GUI .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#tftpクライアントを使用したファームウェア更新">3.1.1. Using a TFTP client to update the firmware</div><div class="search_word">3.1.1. using a tftp client to update the firmware firmware can be updated by using a tftp client installed on a computer or other remote terminal to transmit the updated firmware to this device. in order to operate this product’s tftp server, use the steps shown below to set up a network environment that allows remote access. set the ipv4/ipv6 address on a desired vlan. enable the tftp server. enable the server using the tftp-server enable command. if necessary, hosts able to access the tftp server can be specified using the tftp-server access command. follow the rules below when sending the firmware update using the tftp client. set the transmission mode to “ binary mode ”. as shown in the table below, specify the remote path to which the firmware update is sent. if an administrative password has been specified for this product, use the form “/password” to specify the administrative password following the remote path. when updating firmware that uses tftp clients, the following two types of updates are possible. updated firmware type remote path internal firmware exec boot loader boot if there is no problem with the firmware update that was sent, the firmware update will be saved.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.1. Using a TFTP client to update the firmware Firmware can be updated by using a TFTP client installed on a computer or other remote terminal to transmit the updated firmware to this device. In order to operate this product’s TFTP server, use the steps shown below to set up a network environment that allows remote access. Set the IPv4/IPv6 address on a desired VLAN. Enable the TFTP server. Enable the server using the tftp-server enable command. If necessary, hosts able to access the TFTP server can be specified using the tftp-server access command. Follow the rules below when sending the firmware update using the TFTP client. Set the transmission mode to “ binary mode ”. As shown in the table below, specify the remote path to which the firmware update is sent. If an administrative password has been specified for this product, use the form “/PASSWORD” to specify the administrative password following the remote path. When updating firmware that uses TFTP clients, the following two types of updates are possible. Updated firmware Type Remote path Internal firmware exec Boot loader boot If there is no problem with the firmware update that was sent, the firmware update will be saved.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#web-gui-ローカルファイル指定によるファームウェア更新">3.1.2. Updating the firmware by specifying a local file in the Web GUI</div><div class="search_word">3.1.2. updating the firmware by specifying a local file in the web gui specify the firmware update located on the terminal accessing the web gui, and apply it to this product. this function does not do a version comparison with the existing firmware, and will overwrite the specified firmware regardless of version. to update firmware by specifying a local file, click [maintenance] - [firmware update] in the web gui on the computer. (refer to the part shown in a red frame on the screenshot below.) refer to the help contents within the gui for the specific operation method. initial screen on the web gui for updating firmware using a computer</div><div class="display_word">3.1.2. Updating the firmware by specifying a local file in the Web GUI Specify the firmware update located on the terminal accessing the Web GUI, and apply it to this product. This function does not do a version comparison with the existing firmware, and will overwrite the specified firmware regardless of version. To update firmware by specifying a local file, click [Maintenance] - [Firmware update] in the Web GUI on the computer. (Refer to the part shown in a red frame on the screenshot below.) Refer to the help contents within the GUI for the specific operation method. Initial screen on the Web GUI for updating firmware using a computer</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#httpクライアントを使用した更新">3.2. Using an HTTP client to update the firmware</div><div class="search_word">3.2. using an http client to update the firmware this method of firmware update uses an http client to obtain the firmware update from a specified url, and then apply it to this product. this function assumes that the firmware version will be upgraded. downgrading to a previous version will only be permitted only if the downward revision permission is given. the firmware cannot be rewritten with the same version of firmware. an http client can be used to update the firmware using the methods below. use the firmware-update command in the cli (command-line interface). execute update firmware via network in the web gui. updating the firmware with an http client is done by using the settings value shown in the table below. setting parameter explanation download source url sets the source url from which the firmware is downloaded. a url of up to 255 characters in length can be set. the initial value is set as follows for each model. swx2210p-10g: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-10g.bin swx2210p-18g: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-18g.bin swx2210p-28g: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-28g.bin http proxy server specifies the proxy server to use for updating firmware. specify it either as an ipv4/ipv6 address or fqdn. fqdns can be up to 255 characters long. no proxy server is specified in default settings. https proxy server permit downward revision sets whether the current version of firmware can be downgraded to a previous version. the default value is “don’t allow”. overwriting the firmware with the same version of firmware is not permitted. timeout specifies the timer for monitoring the completion of the processes shown below. * version check of old and new firmware * the download monitoring timer from the specified url can be specified from 100 seconds to 86,400 seconds , and the initial setting is set to 300 seconds . for instructions on using the firmware-update command, refer to “ examples of command execution ” or the “ command reference ”. to update firmware over the network using the web gui, execute [maintenance] - [firmware update] on the web gui. (refer to the part shown in a red frame on the screenshot below.) refer to the help contents within the gui for the specific operation method. initial web gui screen for updating firmware via the network</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Using an HTTP client to update the firmware This method of firmware update uses an HTTP client to obtain the firmware update from a specified URL, and then apply it to this product. This function assumes that the firmware version will be upgraded. Downgrading to a previous version will only be permitted only if the downward revision permission is given. The firmware cannot be rewritten with the same version of firmware. An HTTP client can be used to update the firmware using the methods below. Use the firmware-update command in the CLI (command-line interface). Execute update firmware via network in the Web GUI. Updating the firmware with an HTTP client is done by using the settings value shown in the table below. Setting parameter Explanation Download source URL Sets the source URL from which the firmware is downloaded. A URL of up to 255 characters in length can be set. The initial value is set as follows for each model. SWX2210P-10G: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-10g.bin SWX2210P-18G: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-18g.bin SWX2210P-28G: http://www.rtpro.yamaha.co.jp/firmware/revision-up/swx2210p-28g.bin HTTP proxy server Specifies the proxy server to use for updating firmware. Specify it either as an IPv4/IPv6 address or FQDN. FQDNs can be up to 255 characters long. No proxy server is specified in default settings. HTTPS proxy server Permit downward revision Sets whether the current version of firmware can be downgraded to a previous version. The default value is “Don’t allow”. Overwriting the firmware with the same version of firmware is not permitted. Timeout Specifies the timer for monitoring the completion of the processes shown below. * Version check of old and new firmware * The download monitoring timer from the specified URL can be specified from 100 seconds to 86,400 seconds , and the initial setting is set to 300 seconds . For instructions on using the firmware-update command, refer to “ Examples of Command Execution ” or the “ Command Reference ”. To update firmware over the network using the Web GUI, execute [Maintenance] - [Firmware update] on the Web GUI. (Refer to the part shown in a red frame on the screenshot below.) Refer to the help contents within the GUI for the specific operation method. Initial Web GUI Screen for Updating Firmware via the Network</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#書き込み後の再起動">3.3. Reboot after writing</div><div class="search_word">3.3. reboot after writing when successfully finished writing the firmware update, the system is automatically rebooted.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Reboot after writing When successfully finished writing the firmware update, the system is automatically rebooted.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set firmware update site firmware-update url specify http proxy server to use for updating firmware firmware-update http-proxy specify https proxy server to use for updating firmware firmware-update https-proxy execute firmware update firmware-update execute set firmware download timeout duration firmware-update timeout permit downward revision firmware-update revision-down show firmware update function settings show firmware-update</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Set firmware update site firmware-update url Specify HTTP proxy server to use for updating firmware firmware-update http-proxy Specify HTTPS proxy server to use for updating firmware firmware-update https-proxy Execute firmware update firmware-update execute Set firmware download timeout duration firmware-update timeout Permit downward revision firmware-update revision-down Show firmware update function settings show firmware-update</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#httpクライアントを使用した更新">5.1. Using an HTTP client to update the firmware</div><div class="search_word">5.1. using an http client to update the firmware in this example, the firmware update is stored on the local http server, and this product is set to manage the firmware in order to perform the update. change the download url to http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin . the downward revision setting is left disabled . the timeout value is left at 300 sec . the download url is changed, and the firmware update settings are confirmed. yamaha(config)#firmware-update url http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin (1) yamaha(config)#exit    yamaha#show firmware-update (2) url:http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin    timeout:300 (seconds)    revision-down:disable 1 set download source url 2 show firmware update function settings the firmware update is executed. yamaha#firmware-update execute (1) found the new revision firmware    current revision: rev.1.03.01    new revision:     rev.1.03.02    update to this firmware? (y/n)y (2) download...    %% completed the firmware download    %% updating... (3) 1 execute firmware update 2 enter y 3 the system automatically reboots pressing “ctrl+c” during the firmware update process will interrupt the update. yamaha#firmware-update execute    found the new revision firmware    current revision: rev.1.03.01    new revision:     rev.1.03.02    update to this firmware? (y/n)y    download... (1) %% canceled the firmware download 1 press the ctrl and c keys</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Using an HTTP client to update the firmware In this example, the firmware update is stored on the local HTTP server, and this product is set to manage the firmware in order to perform the update. Change the download URL to http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin . The downward revision setting is left disabled . The timeout value is left at 300 sec . The download URL is changed, and the firmware update settings are confirmed. Yamaha(config)#firmware-update url http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin (1) Yamaha(config)#exit    Yamaha#show firmware-update (2) url:http://192.168.100.1/swx2210p-10g.bin    timeout:300 (seconds)    revision-down:disable 1 Set download source URL 2 Show firmware update function settings The firmware update is executed. Yamaha#firmware-update execute (1) Found the new revision firmware    Current Revision: Rev.1.03.01    New Revision:     Rev.1.03.02    Update to this firmware? (Y/N)y (2) Download...    %% Completed the firmware download    %% Updating... (3) 1 Execute firmware update 2 Enter y 3 The system automatically reboots Pressing “CTRL+C” during the firmware update process will interrupt the update. Yamaha#firmware-update execute    Found the new revision firmware    Current Revision: Rev.1.03.01    New Revision:     Rev.1.03.02    Update to this firmware? (Y/N)y    Download... (1) %% Canceled the firmware download 1 Press the Ctrl and C keys</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution note that a firmware version downgrade from rev.1.03.13 or later version to rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution Note that a firmware version downgrade from Rev.1.03.13 or later version to Rev.1.03.12 or earlier version is not possible due to compatibility with new parts.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_firm_up"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_firm_up" doctitle="Firmware" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation led indicator control</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation LED Indicator Control</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2ms-layer2-management-service">L2MS (Layer2 Management Service)</div><div class="search_word">l2ms (layer2 management service)</div><div class="display_word">L2MS (Layer2 Management Service)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview l2ms (layer2 management service) is functionality for managing yamaha network devices at the layer 2 level. l2ms consists of one manager that performs centralized control and multiple agents that are controlled by the manager. the swx2210p functions as an l2ms agent. the following illustrates how to connect the computer, manager, and agents. l2ms connection method the l2ms manager includes commands for managing the agents and a web gui for specifying the settings or checking the status of agents. these can be used to operate the agents. the manager is connected to agents via ethernet cables and uses a proprietary protocol for communication. this functionality has the following characteristics. initial settings are not required although ip addresses must be specified if using telnet or ssh, default settings do not need to be specified for agents, because the functionality uses a proprietary protocol for communication. when ethernet cables are connected, the manager automatically recognizes subordinate agents. multiple supported terminals can be controlled simultaneously the manager can recognize and control multiple agents simultaneously. for details on the managers that can manage the swx2210p, refer to the technical information on each l2ms manager. technical reference: lan map/switch control gui/yamaha lan monitor: function comparison table</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview L2MS (Layer2 Management Service) is functionality for managing Yamaha network devices at the layer 2 level. L2MS consists of one manager that performs centralized control and multiple agents that are controlled by the manager. The SWX2210P functions as an L2MS agent. The following illustrates how to connect the computer, manager, and agents. L2MS connection method The L2MS manager includes commands for managing the agents and a web GUI for specifying the settings or checking the status of agents. These can be used to operate the agents. The manager is connected to agents via Ethernet cables and uses a proprietary protocol for communication. This functionality has the following characteristics. Initial settings are not required Although IP addresses must be specified if using Telnet or SSH, default settings do not need to be specified for agents, because the functionality uses a proprietary protocol for communication. When Ethernet cables are connected, the manager automatically recognizes subordinate agents. Multiple supported terminals can be controlled simultaneously The manager can recognize and control multiple agents simultaneously. For details on the managers that can manage the SWX2210P, refer to the technical information on each L2MS manager. Technical Reference: LAN Map/Switch Control GUI/Yamaha LAN Monitor: Function Comparison Table</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used manager a manager is a device that manages yamaha network devices functioning as an agent based on l2ms and switch control functionality. it manages yamaha network switches and yamaha wireless access points within the network. agent a yamaha network switch or yamaha wireless access point that is managed by a manager based on l2ms and switch control functionality. settings can be checked or changed from the manager.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Manager A manager is a device that manages Yamaha network devices functioning as an agent based on L2MS and switch control functionality. It manages Yamaha network switches and Yamaha wireless access points within the network. Agent A Yamaha network switch or Yamaha wireless access point that is managed by a manager based on L2MS and switch control functionality. Settings can be checked or changed from the manager.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#対応機種">3.1. Compatible models</div><div class="search_word">3.1. compatible models for manages that can manage the swx2210p as an agent, see the link below. technical reference: lan map/switch control gui/yamaha lan monitor: function comparison table</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Compatible models For manages that can manage the SWX2210P as an agent, see the link below. Technical Reference: LAN Map/Switch Control GUI/Yamaha LAN Monitor: Function Comparison Table</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2msのプロトコル">3.2. L2MS protocol</div><div class="search_word">3.2. l2ms protocol l2ms control is performed using the proprietary protocol l2 frames indicated below. content of l2ms protocol l2 frames item value destination mac 01:a0:de:00:e8:12 to 01:a0:de:00:e8:15 ethertype 0xe812 if a firewall is specified between the manager and agents, the firewall settings must allow these l2 frames to pass through. also, when using yamaha lan monitor to update the swx2210p series firmware with l2ms, use the following unicast l2ms. content of unicast l2ms protocol l2 frames item value destination mac unicast destination mac address ethertype 0xe813</div><div class="display_word">3.2. L2MS protocol L2MS control is performed using the proprietary protocol L2 frames indicated below. Content of L2MS Protocol L2 Frames Item Value Destination MAC 01:a0:de:00:e8:12 to 01:a0:de:00:e8:15 Ethertype 0xe812 If a firewall is specified between the manager and agents, the firewall settings must allow these L2 frames to pass through. Also, when using Yamaha LAN Monitor to update the SWX2210P series firmware with L2MS, use the following unicast L2MS. Content of Unicast L2MS Protocol L2 Frames Item Value Destination MAC Unicast destination MAC address Ethertype 0xe813</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#エージェントの監視">3.3. Monitoring agents</div><div class="search_word">3.3. monitoring agents managers monitor subordinate agents by sending query frames at regular intervals. agents respond to query frames by sending a response frame to notify the manager that they exist. for the settings for query frames to be sent by the manager, refer to the technical information on the manager.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Monitoring agents Managers monitor subordinate agents by sending query frames at regular intervals. Agents respond to query frames by sending a response frame to notify the manager that they exist. For the settings for query frames to be sent by the manager, refer to the technical information on the manager.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#エージェントの占有">3.4. Agent ownership</div><div class="search_word">3.4. agent ownership no agent may be simultaneously controlled by multiple managers. therefore, only specify one manager per network. if an agent receives a query frame after rebooting, that agent will be managed by the manager that sent the query frame. that relationship is canceled if any of the following occur. the agent has not received a query frame for 30 seconds the manager is restarted, or the management status of the l2ms is reset</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Agent ownership No agent may be simultaneously controlled by multiple managers. Therefore, only specify one manager per network. If an agent receives a query frame after rebooting, that agent will be managed by the manager that sent the query frame. That relationship is canceled if any of the following occur. The agent has not received a query frame for 30 seconds The manager is restarted, or the management status of the L2MS is reset</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#エージェントの操作">3.5. Agent operations</div><div class="search_word">3.5. agent operations if a manager sets a setting for an l2ms-compliant agent or checks its operating status, such actions are referred to as “operating the agent”. each manager is provided with commands and a web gui for operating the agents. for detailed operating instructions, refer to the technical information on each manager.</div><div class="display_word">3.5. Agent operations If a manager sets a setting for an L2MS-compliant agent or checks its operating status, such actions are referred to as “operating the agent”. Each manager is provided with commands and a web GUI for operating the agents. For detailed operating instructions, refer to the technical information on each manager.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#エージェントからの情報通知">3.6. Information notifications from agents</div><div class="search_word">3.6. information notifications from agents if an agent managed by a manager detects a change or error in its own status, it sends information to notify the manager. information sent from the agent is output in the manager syslog or web gui. for details, refer to the technical information on each manager. the following information is included in notifications from the swx2210p. port link up/down status loop detection fan stopped due to error per-port power supply function status per-device power supply function error</div><div class="display_word">3.6. Information notifications from agents If an agent managed by a manager detects a change or error in its own status, it sends information to notify the manager. Information sent from the agent is output in the manager SYSLOG or web GUI. For details, refer to the technical information on each manager. The following information is included in notifications from the SWX2210P. Port link up/down status Loop detection Fan stopped due to error Per-port power supply function status Per-device power supply function error</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2msフィルター-non-l2msフィルター">3.7. L2MS filter/non-L2MS filter</div><div class="search_word">3.7. l2ms filter/non-l2ms filter by using the l2ms filter function, you can prohibit the transmission and reception of l2ms control frames used for l2ms control. by using the non-l2ms filter function, you can also restrict the transmission and reception of frames other than l2ms control frames. the l2ms filter and non-l2ms filter can be set on a per-port basis. when setting them, use the l2ms filter command and non-l2ms filter command, respectively.</div><div class="display_word">3.7. L2MS filter/non-L2MS filter By using the L2MS filter function, you can prohibit the transmission and reception of L2MS control frames used for L2MS control. By using the non-L2MS filter function, you can also restrict the transmission and reception of frames other than L2MS control frames. The L2MS filter and non-L2MS filter can be set on a per-port basis. When setting them, use the l2ms filter command and non-l2ms filter command, respectively.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2msの有効化-無効化">3.8. Enabling/disabling L2MS</div><div class="search_word">3.8. enabling/disabling l2ms you can enable/disable l2ms using the l2ms enable and l2ms disable commands. if l2ms is disabled, l2ms control frames are forwarded in the same way as frames other than l2ms control frames, and they can no longer be managed by the l2ms manager. l2ms is enabled by default.</div><div class="display_word">3.8. Enabling/disabling L2MS You can enable/disable L2MS using the l2ms enable and l2ms disable commands. If L2MS is disabled, L2MS control frames are forwarded in the same way as frames other than L2MS control frames, and they can no longer be managed by the L2MS manager. L2MS is enabled by default.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#初期ipアドレスについて">3.9. Default IP address</div><div class="search_word">3.9. default ip address in the factory default settings or the status immediately after execution of the cold start command, a fixed ip address is set. (l2ms functions as an agent.) at this time, if the agent is managed by the manager, the dhcp client setting will automatically be configured. this is to avoid duplicate ip addresses if multiple agents exist. since ip addresses are assigned by the dhcp server within the network, agent web guis can be accessed via the http proxy server. if a dhcp server does not exist in the network, then ip addresses cannot be obtained and agent ip addresses must be specified on the manager lan map. once the ip setting is specified and the startup config has been saved, it will not be automatically specified in the dhcp client thereafter.</div><div class="display_word">3.9. Default IP address In the factory default settings or the status immediately after execution of the cold start command, a fixed IP address is set. (L2MS functions as an agent.) At this time, if the agent is managed by the manager, the DHCP client setting will automatically be configured. This is to avoid duplicate IP addresses if multiple agents exist. Since IP addresses are assigned by the DHCP server within the network, agent web GUIs can be accessed via the HTTP proxy server. If a DHCP server does not exist in the network, then IP addresses cannot be obtained and agent IP addresses must be specified on the manager LAN map. Once the IP setting is specified and the startup config has been saved, it will not be automatically specified in the DHCP client thereafter.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. basic interface functions: list of related commands operations operating commands switch to l2ms mode l2ms configuration enable l2ms function l2ms enable enable sending/receiving l2ms control frames l2ms filter enable sending/receiving frames other than l2ms control frames non-l2ms filter show l2ms information show l2ms</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Basic interface functions: list of related commands Operations Operating commands Switch to L2MS mode l2ms configuration Enable L2MS function l2ms enable Enable sending/receiving L2MS control frames l2ms filter Enable sending/receiving frames other than L2MS control frames non-l2ms filter Show L2MS information show l2ms</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2msフィルターの設定">5.1. L2MS filter setting</div><div class="search_word">5.1. l2ms filter setting disable sending or receiving l2ms control frames at lan port #1 (port1.1). yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#l2ms filter enable</div><div class="display_word">5.1. L2MS filter setting Disable sending or receiving L2MS control frames at LAN port #1 (port1.1). Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#l2ms filter enable</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#l2msの設定">5.2. L2MS setting</div><div class="search_word">5.2. l2ms setting disable l2ms so that it cannot be managed by the l2ms manager. yamaha(config)#l2ms configurationyamaha(config-l2ms)#l2ms disable</div><div class="display_word">5.2. L2MS setting Disable L2MS so that it cannot be managed by the L2MS manager. Yamaha(config)#l2ms configurationYamaha(config-l2ms)#l2ms disable</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution for precautions on using l2ms, refer to the technical information on each manager.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution For precautions on using L2MS, refer to the technical information on each manager.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#他機能との併用について">6.1. Use in conjunction with other functionality</div><div class="search_word">6.1. use in conjunction with other functionality</div><div class="display_word">6.1. Use in conjunction with other functionality</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#ループ検出機能との併用">6.1.1. Use in conjunction with loop detection functionality</div><div class="search_word">6.1.1. use in conjunction with loop detection functionality l2ms communication is not possible on ports blocked by loop detection functionality.</div><div class="display_word">6.1.1. Use in conjunction with loop detection functionality L2MS communication is not possible on ports blocked by loop detection functionality.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#リンクアグリゲーションとの併用">6.1.2. Use in conjunction with link aggregation</div><div class="search_word">6.1.2. use in conjunction with link aggregation if link aggregation is used, l2ms communication is considered to be occurring on “the lowest-numbered linked-up lan port associated with the logical interface”. if link aggregation is used in conjunction with the monitoring function for connected terminals and a terminal is discovered at the end of a logical interface connection, then the terminal is considered to be connected to “the lowest-numbered linked-up lan port associated with the logical interface” and the corresponding port number is shown. in configuration 1, l2ms communication is assumed to be occurring between respective ports 1.1. in configuration 2, l2ms communication is assumed to be occurring between manager port 1.1 and agent port 1.1.</div><div class="display_word">6.1.2. Use in conjunction with link aggregation If link aggregation is used, L2MS communication is considered to be occurring on “the lowest-numbered linked-up LAN port associated with the logical interface”. If link aggregation is used in conjunction with the monitoring function for connected terminals and a terminal is discovered at the end of a logical interface connection, then the terminal is considered to be connected to “the lowest-numbered linked-up LAN port associated with the logical interface” and the corresponding port number is shown. In Configuration 1, L2MS communication is assumed to be occurring between respective ports 1.1. In Configuration 2, L2MS communication is assumed to be occurring between manager port 1.1 and agent port 1.1.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#ルーターl2msマネージャーのスイッチ制御コマンドの使用">6.1.3. Using switch control commands of router L2MS managers</div><div class="search_word">6.1.3. using switch control commands of router l2ms managers the switch control commands of router l2ms managers are commands for the swx2200 series. these commands do not support use on the swx2210p series. however, power supply control using the switch control function execute start-poe-supply command and the switch control function execute stop-poe-supply command is supported.</div><div class="display_word">6.1.3. Using switch control commands of router L2MS managers The switch control commands of router L2MS managers are commands for the SWX2200 series. These commands do not support use on the SWX2210P series. However, power supply control using the switch control function execute start-poe-supply command and the switch control function execute stop-poe-supply command is supported.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#syslogメッセージ一覧">7. SYSLOG Message List</div><div class="search_word">7. syslog message list l2ms outputs the following syslog messages. output messages appended with the “[ l2ms]” prefix. output level message meaning informational start l2ms (agent) the l2ms unit is started as an agent. start management by manager (<manager_mac_address>) agent is placed under the control of the manager. release from manager (<manager_mac_address>) agent is no longer managed by the manager. received config from manager (<manager_mac_address>) config is received from the manager. restart for update settings. config received from the manager is reflected and the system is restarted. send config to manager (<manager_mac_address>) config is sent to the manager.</div><div class="display_word">7. SYSLOG Message List L2MS outputs the following SYSLOG messages. Output messages appended with the “[ L2MS]” prefix. Output Level Message Meaning Informational Start L2MS (agent) The L2MS unit is started as an agent. Start management by manager (<Manager_MAC_Address>) Agent is placed under the control of the manager. Release from manager (<Manager_MAC_Address>) Agent is no longer managed by the manager. Received config from manager (<Manager_MAC_Address>) CONFIG is received from the manager. Restart for update settings. CONFIG received from the manager is reflected and the system is restarted. Send config to manager (<Manager_MAC_Address>) CONFIG is sent to the manager.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_l2ms"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_l2ms" doctitle="L2MS" link="#関連文書">8. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">8. related documentation switch control functions of yamaha routers</div><div class="display_word">8. Related Documentation Switch control functions of Yamaha routers</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#ledインジケーター制御">LED Indicator Control</div><div class="search_word">led indicator control</div><div class="display_word">LED Indicator Control</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product is equipped with five types of led indicators: [power], [status], [link/act], [speed], and [poe state] , as well as an led mode button to be used for switching the led mode. swx2210p led indicators</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product is equipped with five types of LED indicators: [POWER], [STATUS], [LINK/ACT], [SPEED], and [PoE STATE] , as well as an LED MODE button to be used for switching the LED MODE. SWX2210P LED indicators</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#ledインジケーター点灯仕様">3.1. LED indicator illumination specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. led indicator illumination specifications the led indicator illumination specifications for this product are shown below. swx2210p led indicators indicator illumination status description power unlit power off steady green power on status led unlit normal steady orange any of the following conditions: - power supply is stopped due to exceeding of the total supply capacity - power supply is suppressed by a guard band - power supply is stopped due to an overcurrent - a loop is detected and communication is blocked flashing orange a system error is detected (fan error/temperature error/power supply error) link/act unlit any of the following conditions: - link is down - the indicator mode is in off mode steady green link is up flashing green while forwarding data flashing orange a loop is detected and communication is blocked speed unlit any of the following conditions: - link is down - connecting via 10base-t - the indicator mode is in off mode steady orange connecting via 100base-tx steady green connecting via 1000base-t poe state unlit any of the following conditions: - power is not supplied - the indicator mode is in off mode steady green power is being normally supplied steady orange any of the following conditions: - power supply is stopped due to exceeding of the total supply capacity - power supply is suppressed by a guard band flashing orange power supply is stopped due to an overcurrent</div><div class="display_word">3.1. LED indicator illumination specifications The LED indicator illumination specifications for this product are shown below. SWX2210P LED indicators Indicator Illumination status Description POWER Unlit Power off Steady green Power on STATUS LED Unlit Normal Steady orange Any of the following conditions: - Power supply is stopped due to exceeding of the total supply capacity - Power supply is suppressed by a guard band - Power supply is stopped due to an overcurrent - A loop is detected and communication is blocked Flashing orange A system error is detected (fan error/temperature error/power supply error) LINK/ACT Unlit Any of the following conditions: - Link is down - The indicator mode is in OFF mode Steady green Link is up Flashing green While forwarding data Flashing orange A loop is detected and communication is blocked SPEED Unlit Any of the following conditions: - Link is down - Connecting via 10BASE-T - The indicator mode is in OFF mode Steady orange Connecting via 100BASE-TX Steady green Connecting via 1000BASE-T PoE STATE Unlit Any of the following conditions: - Power is not supplied - The indicator mode is in OFF mode Steady green Power is being normally supplied Steady orange Any of the following conditions: - Power supply is stopped due to exceeding of the total supply capacity - Power supply is suppressed by a guard band Flashing orange Power supply is stopped due to an overcurrent</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#led-modeについて">3.2. About LED modes</div><div class="search_word">3.2. about led modes</div><div class="display_word">3.2. About LED modes</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#表示モードと表示モードの切り替え">3.2.1. Indicator modes and switching between them</div><div class="search_word">3.2.1. indicator modes and switching between them this product offers the following two indicator modes. mode name function overview link/act mode the link/act led indicates the link status, the speed led indicates the connection speed, and the poe state led indicates the power supply status. off mode the link/act led, speed led, and poe state led turn off to reduce power consumption. the indicator mode can be switched using the led mode button. the flowchart below shows how to switch the indicator mode. switching the indicator mode (when the default led mode is the link/act mode)</div><div class="display_word">3.2.1. Indicator modes and switching between them This product offers the following two indicator modes. Mode name Function Overview LINK/ACT mode The LINK/ACT LED indicates the link status, the SPEED LED indicates the connection speed, and the PoE STATE LED indicates the power supply status. OFF mode The LINK/ACT LED, SPEED LED, and PoE STATE LED turn off to reduce power consumption. The indicator mode can be switched using the LED MODE button. The flowchart below shows how to switch the indicator mode. Switching the indicator mode (when the default LED mode is the LINK/ACT mode)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#offモードのled表示">3.2.2. LED indication for OFF mode</div><div class="search_word">3.2.2. led indication for off mode when the led mode is in the off mode, all the link/act led, speed led, and poe state led turn off regardless of the link status, loop detection status, and poe power supply status.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.2. LED indication for OFF mode When the LED mode is in the OFF mode, all the LINK/ACT LED, SPEED LED, and PoE STATE LED turn off regardless of the link status, loop detection status, and PoE power supply status.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#システム起動後のledモードの変更">3.2.3. Changing the LED mode after system startup</div><div class="search_word">3.2.3. changing the led mode after system startup this product enables the led mode after system startup (the default led mode) to be changed. the initial default led mode is set to link/act mode, but it can be changed using the led-mode default command. you can check the default led mode and the currently displayed led mode using the show led-mode command.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.3. Changing the LED mode after system startup This product enables the LED mode after system startup (the default LED mode) to be changed. The initial default LED mode is set to LINK/ACT mode, but it can be changed using the led-mode default command. You can check the default LED mode and the currently displayed LED mode using the show led-mode command.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#その他のled表示">3.3. Other LED indications</div><div class="search_word">3.3. other led indications when you turn on the power while holding down the led mode button and keep that state for approximately 10 seconds, all port leds turn orange regardless of the led mode status and return to the factory default settings.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Other LED indications When you turn on the power while holding down the LED MODE button and keep that state for approximately 10 seconds, all port LEDs turn orange regardless of the LED mode status and return to the factory default settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands show lan port status show interface show loop detection setting status show loop-detect show poe power supply information show power-inline set default led mode led-mode default show led mode show led-mode</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Show LAN port status show interface Show loop detection setting status show loop-detect Show PoE power supply information show power-inline Set default LED mode led-mode default Show LED mode show led-mode</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#lan-ポートの状態確認">5.1. Checking LAN port status</div><div class="search_word">5.1. checking lan port status use the show interface command to check the lan port status. yamaha#show interfaceinterface port1.1  link is up  hardware is ethernet  hw addr: ac44.f230.02c9  mru 1522  bpdu pass-through: enabled  eap pass-through: enabled  description:  ifindex 5001  speed-duplex: auto(configured), 10-half(current)  auto mdi/mdix: on  vlan info:    switchport mode         : access    ingress filter          : enable    acceptable frame types  : all    default vlan            :    1    configured vlans        :    1  interface counter:    input  packets                        : 46290           bytes                          : 6834572           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 31605    output packets                        : 37816           bytes                          : 16869972           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 19050  ：(shows information for all lan ports)</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Checking LAN port status Use the show interface command to check the LAN port status. Yamaha#show interfaceInterface port1.1  Link is UP  Hardware is Ethernet  HW addr: ac44.f230.02c9  MRU 1522  BPDU pass-through: Enabled  EAP pass-through: Enabled  Description:  ifIndex 5001  Speed-Duplex: auto(configured), 10-half(current)  Auto MDI/MDIX: on  Vlan info:    Switchport mode         : access    Ingress filter          : enable    Acceptable frame types  : all    Default Vlan            :    1    Configured Vlans        :    1  Interface counter:    input  packets                        : 46290           bytes                          : 6834572           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 31605    output packets                        : 37816           bytes                          : 16869972           drops                          : 0           broadcast-and-multicast-packets: 19050  ：(Shows information for all LAN ports)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#lan-ポート-ループ検出状態の確認">5.2. Checking LAN port loop detection status</div><div class="search_word">5.2. checking lan port loop detection status check the lan port loop detection status. yamaha#show loop-detectloop-detect: enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        normalport1.2        enable(*)        normalport1.3        enable(*)        detectedport1.4        enable(*)        normalport1.5        enable(*)        blockingport1.6        enable(*)        normalport1.7        enable(*)        normalport1.8        enable(*)        normalport1.9        enable(*)        normalport1.10       enable(*)        normal</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Checking LAN port loop detection status Check the LAN port loop detection status. Yamaha#show loop-detectloop-detect: Enableport        loop-detect         status-----------------------------------------port1.1        enable(*)        Normalport1.2        enable(*)        Normalport1.3        enable(*)        Detectedport1.4        enable(*)        Normalport1.5        enable(*)        Blockingport1.6        enable(*)        Normalport1.7        enable(*)        Normalport1.8        enable(*)        Normalport1.9        enable(*)        Normalport1.10       enable(*)        Normal</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#初期ledモードの設定">5.3. Set default LED mode</div><div class="search_word">5.3. set default led mode set the default led mode to the off mode. yamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#led-mode default off (1) yamaha(config)#exityamaha#show led-mode (2) default mode : offcurrent mode : off 1 set default led mode 2 show led mode</div><div class="display_word">5.3. Set default LED mode Set the default LED mode to the OFF mode. Yamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#led-mode default off (1) Yamaha(config)#exitYamaha#show led-mode (2) default mode : offcurrent mode : off 1 Set default LED mode 2 Show LED mode</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_led"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_led" doctitle="LED" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp">LLDP</div><div class="search_word">lldp</div><div class="display_word">LLDP</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview lldp is a protocol for passing device management information between a device and its neighboring devices.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview LLDP is a protocol for passing device management information between a device and its neighboring devices.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used lldp link layer discovery protocol. this is defined in ieee 802.1ab. lldp-med lldp for media endpont devices. this is defined in ansi/tia-1057.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol. This is defined in IEEE 802.1AB. LLDP-MED LLDP for Media Endpont Devices. This is defined in ANSI/TIA-1057.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#動作仕様">3.1. Operating specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. operating specifications</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Operating specifications</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#基本仕様">3.1.1. Basic specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1.1. basic specifications this product supports the following operations. lldp frames are transmitted from any lan port to convey information about the device itself. lldp frames are received at any lan port to obtain information about neighboring devices. lldp sends and receives information using type, length, and value (tlv) attributes. for details on the tlv information sent by this product, refer to tlv list . the following settings are required in order to use the lldp function. enable lldp functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. create lldp agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. specify the lldp frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. the lldp function is enabled in default settings for this product. lldp frames are always transmitted without tags, regardless of the vlan settings of the transmitting switch port. they are also transmitted without tags from a trunk port without a native vlan.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.1. Basic specifications This product supports the following operations. LLDP frames are transmitted from any LAN port to convey information about the device itself. LLDP frames are received at any LAN port to obtain information about neighboring devices. LLDP sends and receives information using Type, Length, and Value (TLV) attributes. For details on the TLV information sent by this product, refer to TLV list . The following settings are required in order to use the LLDP function. Enable LLDP functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. Create LLDP agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. Specify the LLDP frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. The LLDP function is enabled in default settings for this product. LLDP frames are always transmitted without tags, regardless of the VLAN settings of the transmitting switch port. They are also transmitted without tags from a trunk port without a native VLAN.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#送信情報の設定">3.1.2. Transmitted information settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1.2. transmitted information settings in this product, only the type of management address to be sent in the basic management tlvs can be set using the set management-address-tlv command. any other transmitted information cannot be changed. the lldp frames to be sent from the device itself always contain the following tlvs. for details, refer to 3.2 tlv list . required tlvs basic management tlvs ieee 802.1 tlv ieee 802.3 tlv lldp-med tlv (only when an lldp frame containing an lldp-med tlv is received from a neighboring device)</div><div class="display_word">3.1.2. Transmitted information settings In this product, only the type of management address to be sent in the basic management TLVs can be set using the set management-address-tlv command. Any other transmitted information cannot be changed. The LLDP frames to be sent from the device itself always contain the following TLVs. For details, refer to 3.2 TLV list . Required TLVs Basic management TLVs IEEE 802.1 TLV IEEE 802.3 TLV LLDP-MED TLV (only when an LLDP frame containing an LLDP-MED TLV is received from a neighboring device)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#送信タイマーの設定">3.1.3. Transmission timer setting</div><div class="search_word">3.1.3. transmission timer setting lldp frame transmission interval is specified by the set timer msg-tx-interval command. the multiplier for calculating the hold time (ttl) for device information is set by the set msg-tx-hold command. the ttl for lldp transmission is the result of the following calculation. the default is 121 seconds. ttl = ( value set by the “set timer msg-tx-interval” command ) × ( value set by the “set msg-tx-hold” command ) + 1 (second)</div><div class="display_word">3.1.3. Transmission timer setting LLDP frame transmission interval is specified by the set timer msg-tx-interval command. The multiplier for calculating the hold time (TTL) for device information is set by the set msg-tx-hold command. The TTL for LLDP transmission is the result of the following calculation. The default is 121 seconds. TTL = ( value set by the “set timer msg-tx-interval” command ) × ( value set by the “set msg-tx-hold” command ) + 1 (second)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#最大接続台数の設定">3.1.4. Maximum connected devices setting</div><div class="search_word">3.1.4. maximum connected devices setting the maximum number of connected devices that can be managed by the corresponding port is set by the set too-many-neighbors limit command. the default value for the maximum number of connected devices is 5 devices .</div><div class="display_word">3.1.4. Maximum connected devices setting The maximum number of connected devices that can be managed by the corresponding port is set by the set too-many-neighbors limit command. The default value for the maximum number of connected devices is 5 devices .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp情報の確認">3.1.5. Checking LLDP information</div><div class="search_word">3.1.5. checking lldp information lldp interface settings and received information about neighbor devices can be checked by using the show lldp interface command or the show lldp neighbors command. to clear the lldp frame counter, use the clear lldp counters command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.5. Checking LLDP information LLDP interface settings and received information about neighbor devices can be checked by using the show lldp interface command or the show lldp neighbors command. To clear the LLDP frame counter, use the clear lldp counters command.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#tlv一覧">3.2. TLV list</div><div class="search_word">3.2. tlv list the tlvs supported by this product are listed below. required tlvs basic management tlvs ieee 802.1 tlv ieee 802.3 tlv lldp-med tlv for detailed specifications of each tlv, refer to ieee 802.1ab (lldp) and ansi/tia-1057 (lldp-med). the tlvs that are transmitted by this product are explained below.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. TLV list The TLVs supported by this product are listed below. Required TLVs Basic management TLVs IEEE 802.1 TLV IEEE 802.3 TLV LLDP-MED TLV For detailed specifications of each TLV, refer to IEEE 802.1AB (LLDP) and ANSI/TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED). The TLVs that are transmitted by this product are explained below.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#必須tlv">3.2.1. Required TLVs</div><div class="search_word">3.2.1. required tlvs these are tlvs that lldp-compliant devices always transmitted. three tlvs are transmitted: chassis id, port id, and ttl. the required tlvs are listed below. type description length value (only fixed values are listed) chassis id chassis id 6 bytes mac address of the device port id port id 7 to 8 bytes port name (port1.x) time to live (ttl) hold time of device information (sec) 2 bytes</div><div class="display_word">3.2.1. Required TLVs These are TLVs that LLDP-compliant devices always transmitted. Three TLVs are transmitted: chassis ID, port ID, and TTL. The required TLVs are listed below. Type Description Length Value (only fixed values are listed) Chassis ID Chassis ID 6 bytes MAC address of the device Port ID Port ID 7 to 8 bytes Port name (port1.X) Time To Live (TTL) Hold time of device information (sec) 2 bytes</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#基本管理tlv">3.2.2. Basic management TLVs</div><div class="search_word">3.2.2. basic management tlvs these tlvs contain system-related management information such as name, system capabilities, and address. the basic management tlvs are listed below. type description length value (only fixed values are listed) port description port description string 7 to 8 bytes system name system name string 10 to 10 bytes system description system description string 28 bytes swx2210p-xxg rev.1.03.xx system capabilities capabilities supported by the system 2 bytes 0x0004（bridge） enabled system capabilities 2 bytes 0x0004（bridge） management address management address ip address (4 bytes) or mac address (6 bytes) 4 or 6 bytes interface sub-type 1 byte 0x02 (ifindex) interface number 1 to 2 bytes ifindex value</div><div class="display_word">3.2.2. Basic management TLVs These TLVs contain system-related management information such as name, system capabilities, and address. The basic management TLVs are listed below. Type Description Length Value (only fixed values are listed) Port Description Port description string 7 to 8 bytes System Name System name string 10 to 10 bytes System Description System description string 28 bytes SWX2210P-XXG Rev.1.03.XX System Capabilities Capabilities supported by the system 2 bytes 0x0004（bridge） Enabled system capabilities 2 bytes 0x0004（bridge） Management Address Management address IP address (4 bytes) or MAC address (6 bytes) 4 or 6 bytes Interface sub-type 1 byte 0x02 (ifIndex) Interface number 1 to 2 bytes ifIndex value</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#ieee-8021-tlv">3.2.3. IEEE 802.1 TLV</div><div class="search_word">3.2.3. ieee 802.1 tlv these tlvs contain information such as the vlan and link aggregation for the corresponding port. the ieee 802.1 tlvs are listed below. type description length value (only fixed values are listed) port vlan id port vlan number 2 bytes port and protocol vlan id protocol vlan support and enable/disable 1 byte 0x00 (no support) protocol vlan number 2 bytes 0x0000 protocol identity byte string that identifies the protocol 0 to 255 bytes link aggregation aggregation capability and status 2 bytes ifindex number of aggregation logical interface 1 to 2 bytes vlan name name of the vlan to which the port belongs 0 to 32 bytes</div><div class="display_word">3.2.3. IEEE 802.1 TLV These TLVs contain information such as the VLAN and link aggregation for the corresponding port. The IEEE 802.1 TLVs are listed below. Type Description Length Value (only fixed values are listed) Port VLAN ID Port VLAN number 2 bytes Port and Protocol VLAN ID Protocol VLAN support and enable/disable 1 byte 0x00 (no support) Protocol VLAN number 2 bytes 0x0000 Protocol Identity Byte string that identifies the protocol 0 to 255 bytes Link Aggregation Aggregation capability and status 2 bytes ifIndex number of aggregation logical interface 1 to 2 bytes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN to which the port belongs 0 to 32 bytes</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#ieee-8023-tlv">3.2.4. IEEE 802.3 TLV</div><div class="search_word">3.2.4. ieee 802.3 tlv these tlvs are used for transmitting information such as the auto negotiation support information and maximum frame size information for the corresponding port. the ieee 802.3 tlvs are listed below. type description length value (only fixed values are listed) mac/phy configuration/status auto negotiation support, and whether enabled or disabled 1 byte supported communication method for auto negotiation 2 bytes lan port: 0x6c01 (10/100/1000m) operational mau type data signaling rate and duplex mode (ietf rfc 4836) 2 bytes power via mdi mdi power support status 1 byte pse power pair selection of wiring to be used for power supply 1 byte 0x01 (signal line) power class class0 to class4 1 byte power type pse device/pd device 2 bit 0b00 (pse device) power source primary/secondary 2 bit 0b01 (primary) priority 2 bit power required from pd device (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes power supply of pse device (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes maximum frame size maximum frame size 2 bytes</div><div class="display_word">3.2.4. IEEE 802.3 TLV These TLVs are used for transmitting information such as the auto negotiation support information and maximum frame size information for the corresponding port. The IEEE 802.3 TLVs are listed below. Type Description Length Value (only fixed values are listed) MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Auto negotiation support, and whether enabled or disabled 1 byte Supported communication method for auto negotiation 2 bytes LAN port: 0x6C01 (10/100/1000M) Operational MAU Type Data signaling rate and duplex mode (IETF RFC 4836) 2 bytes Power Via MDI MDI power support status 1 byte PSE power pair Selection of wiring to be used for power supply 1 byte 0x01 (signal line) Power class Class0 to Class4 1 byte Power type PSE Device/PD Device 2 bit 0b00 (PSE Device) Power source Primary/Secondary 2 bit 0b01 (Primary) Priority 2 bit Power required from PD device (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes Power supply of PSE device (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes Maximum Frame Size Maximum frame size 2 bytes</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp-med-tlv">3.2.5. LLDP-MED TLV</div><div class="search_word">3.2.5. lldp-med tlv if an lldp frame containing an lldp-med tlv is received from a neighboring device, this tlv will also be contained in the lldp frame sent from this product. the lldp-med tlvs are listed below. type description length value (only fixed values are listed) lldp-med capabilities transmittable lldp-med tlvs 2 bytes 0x0009 (lldp-med capabilities, extended power-via-mdi tlv ) device type 1 byte 0x04 (network connectivity) extended power-via-mdi power type pse device/pd device 2 bit 0b00 (pse device) power source primary/secondary 2 bit 0b01 (primary) power priority 4 bit power required from pd (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes</div><div class="display_word">3.2.5. LLDP-MED TLV If an LLDP frame containing an LLDP-MED TLV is received from a neighboring device, this TLV will also be contained in the LLDP frame sent from this product. The LLDP-MED TLVs are listed below. Type Description Length Value (only fixed values are listed) LLDP-MED Capabilities Transmittable LLDP-MED TLVs 2 bytes 0x0009 (LLDP-MED Capabilities, Extended Power-via-MDI TLV ) Device type 1 byte 0x04 (Network Connectivity) Extended Power-via-MDI Power type PSE Device/PD Device 2 bit 0b00 (PSE Device) Power source Primary/Secondary 2 bit 0b01 (Primary) Power priority 4 bit Power required from PD (in units of 0.1 watts) 2 bytes</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable lldp function lldp run create lldp agent lldp-agent set lldp transmission/reception mode set lldp set the type of management address set management-address-tlv set the lldp frame transmission interval set timer msg-tx-interval set the multiplier for calculating the hold time (ttl) for device information set msg-tx-hold set the maximum number of connected devices that can be managed by each port set too-many-neighbors limit show interface status show lldp interface show connected device information for all interfaces show lldp neighbors clear lldp frame counters clear lldp counters</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Enable LLDP function lldp run Create LLDP agent lldp-agent Set LLDP transmission/reception mode set lldp Set the type of management address set management-address-tlv Set the LLDP frame transmission interval set timer msg-tx-interval Set the multiplier for calculating the hold time (TTL) for device information set msg-tx-hold Set the maximum number of connected devices that can be managed by each port set too-many-neighbors limit Show interface status show lldp interface Show connected device information for all interfaces show lldp neighbors Clear LLDP frame counters clear lldp counters</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldpフレームの送受信の設定">5.1. Set LLDP frame transmission/reception</div><div class="search_word">5.1. set lldp frame transmission/reception for port1.1, enable lldp frame transmission/reception. set the lldp frame transmission interval to 60 seconds. set the lldp frame ttl to 181 seconds. specify 10 as the maximum number of connected devices managed by the port. yamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#lldp-agent (1) yamaha(lldp-agent)#set timer msg-tx-interval 60 (2) yamaha(lldp-agent)#set msg-tx-hold 3 (3) yamaha(lldp-agent)#set too-many-neighbors limit 10 (4) yamaha(lldp-agent)#set lldp enable txrx (5) yamaha(lldp-agent)#exityamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#lldp run (6) yamaha(config)#exit 1 create lldp agent, mode transition 2 set transmission interval 3 set multiplier for ttl calculation: ttl = 60 x 3 + 1 = 181 seconds 4 maximum connected devices setting 5 set lldp transmission/reception mode 6 enable lldp function</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Set LLDP frame transmission/reception For port1.1, enable LLDP frame transmission/reception. Set the LLDP frame transmission interval to 60 seconds. Set the LLDP frame TTL to 181 seconds. Specify 10 as the maximum number of connected devices managed by the port. Yamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#lldp-agent (1) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#set timer msg-tx-interval 60 (2) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#set msg-tx-hold 3 (3) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#set too-many-neighbors limit 10 (4) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#set lldp enable txrx (5) Yamaha(lldp-agent)#exitYamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#lldp run (6) Yamaha(config)#exit 1 Create LLDP agent, mode transition 2 Set transmission interval 3 Set multiplier for TTL calculation: TTL = 60 x 3 + 1 = 181 seconds 4 Maximum connected devices setting 5 Set LLDP transmission/reception mode 6 Enable LLDP function</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp-インターフェース状態の表示">5.2. Show LLDP interface status</div><div class="search_word">5.2. show lldp interface status show the port1.1 lldp interface information. yamaha#show lldp interface port1.1 (1) agent mode                          : nearest bridgeenable (tx/rx)                      : y/ymessage fast transmit time          : 1message transmission interval       : 60reinitialisation delay              : 2med enabled                         : ydevice type                         : network_connectivitylldp agent traffic statistics  total frames transmitted          : 1  total entries aged                : 0  total frames received             : 0  total frames received in error    : 0  total frames discarded            : 0  total discarded tlvs              : 0  total unrecognised tlvs           : 0 1 show interface information</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Show LLDP interface status Show the port1.1 LLDP interface information. Yamaha#show lldp interface port1.1 (1) Agent Mode                          : Nearest bridgeEnable (tx/rx)                      : Y/YMessage fast transmit time          : 1Message transmission interval       : 60Reinitialisation delay              : 2MED Enabled                         : YDevice Type                         : NETWORK_CONNECTIVITYLLDP Agent traffic statistics  Total frames transmitted          : 1  Total entries aged                : 0  Total frames received             : 0  Total frames received in error    : 0  Total frames discarded            : 0  Total discarded TLVs              : 0  Total unrecognised TLVs           : 0 1 Show interface information</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp-接続機器の情報の表示">5.3. Show LLDP connected device information</div><div class="search_word">5.3. show lldp connected device information show lldp connected device information. yamaha#show lldp neighbors (1) interface name                  : port1.1system name                     : swx2210psystem description              : swx2210p-28g rev.1.03.13port description                : port1.1system capabilities             : l2 switchinginterface numbering             : 2interface number                : 5001oid number                      :management ip address           : 192.168.100.241mandatory tlvs  chassis id type    chassis mac address         : ac44.f284.ef22  port id type    interface name              : port1.1  ttl (time to live)            : 1218021 origin specific tlvs  port vlan id                  : 1  pp vlan id                    : 0  remote vlans configured    vlan id                     : 1    vlan name                   : default  remote protocols advertised:    ipv4  remote vid usage digest       : 0  remote management vlan        : 08023 origin specific tlvs  autonego support              : supported enabled  autonego capability           : 27649  operational mau type          : 30  power via mdi capability (raw data)    mdi power support           : 0x2    pse power pair              : 0x1    power class                 : 0x0    type/source/priority        : 0x0/0x1/0x3    pd requested power value    : 0.0 w    pse allocated power value   : 0.0 w  link aggregation status       : disabled  link aggregation port id      : 0  max frame size                : 1522 1 show connected device information</div><div class="display_word">5.3. Show LLDP connected device information Show LLDP connected device information. Yamaha#show lldp neighbors (1) Interface Name                  : port1.1System Name                     : SWX2210PSystem Description              : SWX2210P-28G Rev.1.03.13Port Description                : port1.1System Capabilities             : L2 SwitchingInterface Numbering             : 2Interface Number                : 5001OID Number                      :Management IP Address           : 192.168.100.241Mandatory TLVs  CHASSIS ID TYPE    Chassis MAC ADDRESS         : ac44.f284.ef22  PORT ID TYPE    INTERFACE NAME              : port1.1  TTL (Time To Live)            : 1218021 ORIGIN SPECIFIC TLVs  Port Vlan id                  : 1  PP Vlan id                    : 0  Remote VLANs Configured    VLAN ID                     : 1    VLAN Name                   : default  Remote Protocols Advertised:    IPv4  Remote VID Usage Digest       : 0  Remote Management Vlan        : 08023 ORIGIN SPECIFIC TLVs  AutoNego Support              : Supported Enabled  AutoNego Capability           : 27649  Operational MAU Type          : 30  Power via MDI Capability (raw data)    MDI power support           : 0x2    PSE power pair              : 0x1    Power class                 : 0x0    Type/source/priority        : 0x0/0x1/0x3    PD requested power value    : 0.0 W    PSE allocated power value   : 0.0 W  Link Aggregation Status       : Disabled  Link Aggregation Port ID      : 0  Max Frame Size                : 1522 1 Show connected device information</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp" doctitle="LLDP" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#lldp自動設定">LLDP Automatic Settings</div><div class="search_word">lldp automatic settings</div><div class="display_word">LLDP Automatic Settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview the lldp automatic setting specifies sending/receiving proprietary lldp frames to automatically perform specific processes, such as specifying settings based on information in lldp notifications or saving log data. the following are automatically specified or executed by using the lldp automatic setting. dante optimization settings when the components of the yamaha adecia teleconferencing system are connected, the optimal settings for using dante are automatically reflected. power shutoff advance notification by the schedule function when the poe power shutoff is scheduled for the port to which the yamaha wireless access point is connected, you will be notified of the power shutoff timing in advance, and the yamaha wireless access point will save a log just before the power shutoff. to determine yamaha network switch and wireless access point models that support lldp automatic setting function, refer to lldp automatic setting examples . to determine adecia components, refer to adecia product information .</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview The LLDP automatic setting specifies sending/receiving proprietary LLDP frames to automatically perform specific processes, such as specifying settings based on information in LLDP notifications or saving log data. The following are automatically specified or executed by using the LLDP automatic setting. Dante Optimization Settings When the components of the Yamaha ADECIA teleconferencing system are connected, the optimal settings for using Dante are automatically reflected. Power shutoff advance notification by the schedule function When the PoE power shutoff is scheduled for the port to which the Yamaha wireless access point is connected, you will be notified of the power shutoff timing in advance, and the Yamaha wireless access point will save a log just before the power shutoff. To determine Yamaha network switch and wireless access point models that support LLDP automatic setting function, refer to LLDP automatic setting examples . To determine ADECIA components, refer to ADECIA product information .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used lldp link layer discovery protocol. this is defined in ieee 802.1ab. adecia adecia is yamaha’s teleconferencing system. it connects processors, microphones, and speakers used for teleconferencing via a lan (dante). adecia component devices (teleconferencing processors, microphones, and speakers) included in adecia systems.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol. This is defined in IEEE 802.1AB. ADECIA ADECIA is Yamaha’s teleconferencing system. It connects processors, microphones, and speakers used for teleconferencing via a LAN (Dante). ADECIA Component Devices (teleconferencing processors, microphones, and speakers) included in ADECIA systems.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#基本仕様">3.1. Basic specifications</div><div class="search_word">3.1. basic specifications if the lldp automatic setting function is enabled, proprietary lldp frames will be sent and received. the lldp automatic setting as a whole can be enabled and disabled using the lldp auto-setting command. the default setting for this product is enabled . functions enabled with the lldp automatic setting can be selected using the lldp auto-setting function command. the default setting for this product is to use all functions . in order to use this function, reception of lldp frames must be enabled. for this reason, check in advance that the following settings have been made. enable lldp functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. create lldp agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. specify the lldp frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. lldp frame transmission and reception are enabled in product default settings.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Basic specifications If the LLDP automatic setting function is enabled, proprietary LLDP frames will be sent and received. The LLDP automatic setting as a whole can be enabled and disabled using the lldp auto-setting command. The default setting for this product is enabled . Functions enabled with the LLDP automatic setting can be selected using the lldp auto-setting function command. The default setting for this product is to use all functions . In order to use this function, reception of LLDP frames must be enabled. For this reason, check in advance that the following settings have been made. Enable LLDP functionality for the overall system using the lldp run command. Create LLDP agents at applicable interfaces using the lldp-agent command. Specify the LLDP frame transmit/receive mode using the set lldp command. LLDP frame transmission and reception are enabled in product default settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#dante最適設定">3.2. Dante Optimization Settings</div><div class="search_word">3.2. dante optimization settings this function automatically applies settings optimized for dante by receiving lldp frames created independently by adecia components. for more information, refer to dante optimization settings .</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Dante Optimization Settings This function automatically applies settings optimized for Dante by receiving LLDP frames created independently by ADECIA components. For more information, refer to Dante Optimization Settings .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#スケジュール機能による給電停止の事前通知">3.3. Power shutoff advance notification by the schedule function</div><div class="search_word">3.3. power shutoff advance notification by the schedule function when a poe power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port on a yamaha network switch, this function periodically notifies of the remaining time from 10 minutes before the power shutoff until the schedule execution via lldp. when a wireless access point is notified of the remaining time until the power shutoff via lldp, it can prevent the log from being lost due to the power shutoff by saving the log just before the power supply is shut off. if the following criteria are satisfied at a specific port whose lldp transmission interval is set to a value greater than 30 seconds, the lldp transmission interval will be overridden and changed to 30 seconds. lldp is used and the lldp automatic setting function is enabled. the poe power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port. less than 10 minutes remain until the schedule execution. if the schedule is executed, the schedule setting is deleted, or the setting is changed to a time more than 10 minutes later, the lldp transmission interval will return to the original setting value. if the lldp transmission interval is overridden and changed to 30 seconds by this function, then an asterisk is appended to the lldp transmission interval value shown by the show lldp interface command. example of lldp transmission interval shown by the show lldp interface command swx#show lldp interface port1.2agent mode                    : nearest bridgeenable (tx/rx)                : y/ymessage fast transmit time    : 1message transmission interval : 30*reinitialization delay        : 2med enabled                   : ydevice type                   : network_connectivitylldp agent traffic statistics  total frames transmitted       : 0  total entries aged             : 0  total frames received          : 0  total frames received in error : 0  total frames discarded         : 0  total discarded tlvs           : 0  total unrecognised tlvs        : 0* - assigned by lldp. if the above functionality is used, note the following precautions. precautions advance notification of a power shutoff is provided only if the power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port. note that the notification will not be provided if the power shutoff is scheduled for the entire system.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Power shutoff advance notification by the schedule function When a PoE power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port on a Yamaha network switch, this function periodically notifies of the remaining time from 10 minutes before the power shutoff until the schedule execution via LLDP. When a wireless access point is notified of the remaining time until the power shutoff via LLDP, it can prevent the log from being lost due to the power shutoff by saving the log just before the power supply is shut off. If the following criteria are satisfied at a specific port whose LLDP transmission interval is set to a value greater than 30 seconds, the LLDP transmission interval will be overridden and changed to 30 seconds. LLDP is used and the LLDP automatic setting function is enabled. The PoE power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port. Less than 10 minutes remain until the schedule execution. If the schedule is executed, the schedule setting is deleted, or the setting is changed to a time more than 10 minutes later, the LLDP transmission interval will return to the original setting value. If the LLDP transmission interval is overridden and changed to 30 seconds by this function, then an asterisk is appended to the LLDP transmission interval value shown by the show lldp interface command. Example of LLDP transmission interval shown by the show lldp interface command SWX#show lldp interface port1.2Agent Mode                    : Nearest bridgeEnable (tx/rx)                : Y/YMessage fast transmit time    : 1Message transmission interval : 30*Reinitialization delay        : 2MED Enabled                   : YDevice Type                   : NETWORK_CONNECTIVITYLLDP Agent traffic statistics  Total frames transmitted       : 0  Total entries aged             : 0  Total frames received          : 0  Total frames received in error : 0  Total frames discarded         : 0  Total discarded TLVs           : 0  Total unrecognised TLVs        : 0* - Assigned by LLDP. If the above functionality is used, note the following precautions. Precautions Advance notification of a power shutoff is provided only if the power shutoff is scheduled for a specific port. Note that the notification will not be provided if the power shutoff is scheduled for the entire system.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enable lldp automatic settings lldp auto-setting set functions to be enabled with the lldp automatic setting lldp auto-setting function enable lldp function lldp run create lldp agent lldp-agent set lldp transmission/reception mode set lldp show interface status show lldp interface</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Enable LLDP automatic settings lldp auto-setting Set functions to be enabled with the LLDP automatic setting lldp auto-setting function Enable LLDP function lldp run Create LLDP agent lldp-agent Set LLDP transmission/reception mode set lldp Show interface status show lldp interface</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#設定例">5. Setting Examples</div><div class="search_word">5. setting examples for instructions on how to configure respective yamaha network switch and wireless access point settings, refer to the following. technical reference: lldp automatic setting examples</div><div class="display_word">5. Setting Examples For instructions on how to configure respective Yamaha network switch and wireless access point settings, refer to the following. Technical reference: LLDP automatic setting examples</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_lldp_auto_setting" doctitle="LLDP" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation lldp dante optimization settings schedule function technical reference: lldp automatic setting examples adecia product information</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation LLDP Dante Optimization Settings Schedule Function Technical reference: LLDP automatic setting examples ADECIA product information</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#proav設定">ProAV Settings</div><div class="search_word">proav settings</div><div class="display_word">ProAV Settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview from the web gui “proav settings” page, you can perform simple gui operations to collectively configure optimal settings for avoip networks on which to transmit audio and video traffic such as dante and ndi. the following proav profiles can be set on this product. dante ndi this technical reference explains the details on the commands that are set when a proav profile is applied, as well as kitting (initial setup) and troubleshooting. for details on how to use the web gui “proav settings” page, refer to the gui technical reference.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview From the web GUI “ProAV Settings” page, you can perform simple GUI operations to collectively configure optimal settings for AVoIP networks on which to transmit audio and video traffic such as Dante and NDI. The following ProAV profiles can be set on this product. Dante NDI This technical reference explains the details on the commands that are set when a ProAV profile is applied, as well as kitting (initial setup) and troubleshooting. For details on how to use the web GUI “ProAV Settings” page, refer to the GUI technical reference.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used dante dante is a professional audio networking solution developed by audinate, inc. a single lan cable can be used to carry out bidirectional communication of all the information required for a digital audio system, such as multi-channel audio transmission, clock synchronization signals, and control signals. ndi ndi is a new protocol developed by newtek, inc. to support live video production workflows over ip. in a typical gigabit ethernet environment, this protocol enables real-time mutual transmission of information such as video, audio, and metadata. yamaha lan monitor yamaha lan monitor is a computer application that allows you to monitor and control yamaha switch information and connected devices on your computer.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Dante Dante is a professional audio networking solution developed by Audinate, Inc. A single LAN cable can be used to carry out bidirectional communication of all the information required for a digital audio system, such as multi-channel audio transmission, clock synchronization signals, and control signals. NDI NDI is a new protocol developed by Newtek, Inc. to support live video production workflows over IP. In a typical Gigabit Ethernet environment, this protocol enables real-time mutual transmission of information such as video, audio, and metadata. Yamaha LAN Monitor Yamaha LAN Monitor is a computer application that allows you to monitor and control Yamaha switch information and connected devices on your computer.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#proavプロファイル詳細">3. Details on ProAV Profiles</div><div class="search_word">3. details on proav profiles</div><div class="display_word">3. Details on ProAV Profiles</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#danteプロファイル">3.1. Dante profiles</div><div class="search_word">3.1. dante profiles the following commands are collectively applied by dante profiles. list of commands applied by dante profiles object of setting function commands entire system disable flow control flowcontrol disable enable qos qos enable optimize transmission queue by dscp value qos dscp-queue 8 2 qos dscp-queue 26 3 qos dscp-queue 34 4 qos dscp-queue 46 5 qos dscp-queue 48 5 qos dscp-queue 56 7 qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local sets mru mru 1522 enable lldp lldp run vlan interface set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood enable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping enable set igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 enable igmp snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment enable igmp query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 disable igmp packet ttl value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable disable igmp packet ra checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable disable igmp packet tos checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable disable igmp report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable enable igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable always forward ptp packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 lan/sfp port set qos trust mode to dscp qos trust dscp disable flow control flowcontrol disable disable eee eee disable enable lldp transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx set l2ms filter l2ms filter disable / enable (*1) details on the settings are as follows: disable flow control disabling flow control ensures that transmission and reception of dante traffic continue even when the bandwidth is congested. enable qos by enabling qos , the priority is given to dante traffic forwarding. by optimizing transmission queues by dscp value , dscp values related to dante traffic are assigned to high-priority transmission queues. by setting the qos trust mode to dscp , the priority control is performed by referring to the dscp values. enable igmp snooping by enabling igmp snooping , multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports where multicast receivers exist, and unnecessary traffic is not forwarded. set the igmp snooping version to igmpv3 . in a network configuration using multiple switches, if the switches have different versions, a warning message will be displayed on the “multicast page” of the proav gui. when using a dante network, set the version to igmpv3. by enabling the igmp snooping fast leave function , multicast traffic forwarding stops immediately when a multicast receiver stops receiving it. when a multicast receiver switches between audio and video, the multicast traffic before the switching can be prevented from causing noise. by enabling the auto-assignment option of the fast leave function , fast leave is not performed on ports connecting switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. this prevents immediate stop of multicast traffic forwarding when receivers who want to receive the multicast traffic still exist on the opposing switch. enable the igmp query transmission function (querier function) . when igmp snooping is used, a querier must exist on the same network. if there are multiple queriers on the same network, the querier with the smallest ip address becomes the representative querier, and the other queriers automatically stop transmitting queries. by setting the igmp query transmission interval to 30 seconds , the igmp snooping learning state can converge more quickly. by disabling the igmp packet ttl value/ra/tos checking function , even if an invalid igmp packet is received, the information is appropriately corrected and the igmp packet is forwarded. by enabling the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports , you can conserve the bandwidth between switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. normally, all multicast traffic is forwarded to the multicast router port regardless of existence of a multicast receiver. therefore, in a bidirectional transmission environment, unnecessary multicast traffic consumes the bandwidth between switches. by using this function, multicast traffic is forwarded only if a multicast receiver exists on the opposing switch, thereby conserving the bandwidth between switches. by disabling the igmp report suppression function , igmp reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. by enabling the igmp report suppression function , igmp reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. always forward control-use multicast packets by always forwarding linked local multicasts , control packets such as mdns used by dante are always forwarded when igmp snooping is enabled. by always forwarding ptp packets , control packets for time synchronization used by dante are always forwarded when igmp snooping is enabled. by flooding unknown multicasts , multicast traffic without a receiver is forwarded when igmp snooping is enabled. disable jumbo frames by setting the mru to 1522 bytes , jumbo frame forwarding is disabled. disable eee disabling the power saving function prevents the function from affecting data transfer performance. enable lldp enabling lldp transmission and reception enables the igmp snooping fast leave function and the igmp report forwarding function . this is because these two igmp functions operate by using lldp to determine whether the opposing device is a switch. set l2ms filter (*1) only if the dante network is configured as a redundant dante primary/secondary configuration, the l2ms filter is enabled on the dante secondary port. l2ms refers to a yamaha-original control packet used to monitor and control yamaha switches with integrated management applications such as yamaha lan monitor. in the redundant configuration, the switches are connected with two cables, a primary cable and a secondary cable. therefore, enabling the l2ms filter prevents control packets from looping and causing congestion. in addition, in network configurations other than the redundant configuration, the l2ms filter is disabled . set profile type this setting is used as an identifier to identify the profile type in the proav gui.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Dante profiles The following commands are collectively applied by Dante profiles. List of commands applied by Dante profiles Object of setting Function Commands Entire system Disable flow control flowcontrol disable Enable QoS qos enable Optimize transmission queue by DSCP value qos dscp-queue 8 2 qos dscp-queue 26 3 qos dscp-queue 34 4 qos dscp-queue 46 5 qos dscp-queue 48 5 qos dscp-queue 56 7 qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 Always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Sets MRU mru 1522 Enable LLDP lldp run VLAN interface Set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary Flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood Enable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping enable Set IGMP snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment Enable IGMP query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 Disable IGMP packet TTL value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable Disable IGMP packet RA checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable Disable IGMP packet ToS checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable Enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable Disable IGMP report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable Enable IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable Always forward PTP packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 LAN/SFP port Set QoS trust mode to DSCP qos trust dscp Disable flow control flowcontrol disable Disable EEE eee disable Enable LLDP transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx Set L2MS filter l2ms filter disable / enable (*1) Details on the settings are as follows: Disable flow control Disabling flow control ensures that transmission and reception of Dante traffic continue even when the bandwidth is congested. Enable QoS By enabling QoS , the priority is given to Dante traffic forwarding. By optimizing transmission queues by DSCP value , DSCP values related to Dante traffic are assigned to high-priority transmission queues. By setting the QoS trust mode to DSCP , the priority control is performed by referring to the DSCP values. Enable IGMP snooping By enabling IGMP snooping , multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports where multicast receivers exist, and unnecessary traffic is not forwarded. Set the IGMP snooping version to IGMPv3 . In a network configuration using multiple switches, if the switches have different versions, a warning message will be displayed on the “Multicast page” of the ProAV GUI. When using a Dante network, set the version to IGMPv3. By enabling the IGMP snooping fast leave function , multicast traffic forwarding stops immediately when a multicast receiver stops receiving it. When a multicast receiver switches between audio and video, the multicast traffic before the switching can be prevented from causing noise. By enabling the auto-assignment option of the fast leave function , fast leave is not performed on ports connecting switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. This prevents immediate stop of multicast traffic forwarding when receivers who want to receive the multicast traffic still exist on the opposing switch. Enable the IGMP query transmission function (querier function) . When IGMP snooping is used, a querier must exist on the same network. If there are multiple queriers on the same network, the querier with the smallest IP address becomes the representative querier, and the other queriers automatically stop transmitting queries. By setting the IGMP query transmission interval to 30 seconds , the IGMP snooping learning state can converge more quickly. By disabling the IGMP packet TTL value/RA/ToS checking function , even if an invalid IGMP packet is received, the information is appropriately corrected and the IGMP packet is forwarded. By enabling the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports , you can conserve the bandwidth between switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. Normally, all multicast traffic is forwarded to the multicast router port regardless of existence of a multicast receiver. Therefore, in a bidirectional transmission environment, unnecessary multicast traffic consumes the bandwidth between switches. By using this function, multicast traffic is forwarded only if a multicast receiver exists on the opposing switch, thereby conserving the bandwidth between switches. By disabling the IGMP report suppression function , IGMP reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. By enabling the IGMP report suppression function , IGMP reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. Always forward control-use multicast packets By always forwarding linked local multicasts , control packets such as mDNS used by Dante are always forwarded when IGMP snooping is enabled. By always forwarding PTP packets , control packets for time synchronization used by Dante are always forwarded when IGMP snooping is enabled. By flooding unknown multicasts , multicast traffic without a receiver is forwarded when IGMP snooping is enabled. Disable jumbo frames By setting the MRU to 1522 bytes , jumbo frame forwarding is disabled. Disable EEE Disabling the power saving function prevents the function from affecting data transfer performance. Enable LLDP Enabling LLDP transmission and reception enables the IGMP snooping fast leave function and the IGMP report forwarding function . This is because these two IGMP functions operate by using LLDP to determine whether the opposing device is a switch. Set L2MS filter (*1) Only if the Dante network is configured as a redundant Dante primary/secondary configuration, the L2MS filter is enabled on the Dante secondary port. L2MS refers to a Yamaha-original control packet used to monitor and control Yamaha switches with integrated management applications such as Yamaha LAN Monitor. In the redundant configuration, the switches are connected with two cables, a primary cable and a secondary cable. Therefore, enabling the L2MS filter prevents control packets from looping and causing congestion. In addition, in network configurations other than the redundant configuration, the L2MS filter is disabled . Set profile type This setting is used as an identifier to identify the profile type in the ProAV GUI.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#ndiプロファイル">3.2. NDI profiles</div><div class="search_word">3.2. ndi profiles the following commands are collectively applied by ndi profiles. list of commands applied by ndi profiles object of setting function commands entire system enable flow control flowcontrol enable disable qos qos disable always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local sets mru mru 1522 enable lldp lldp run vlan interface set profile type proav profile-type ndi flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood enable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping enable set igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping version 2 enable igmp snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment enable igmp query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 125 disable igmp packet ttl value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable disable igmp packet ra checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable disable igmp packet tos checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable disable igmp report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable enable igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable lan/sfp port enable flow control flowcontrol enable disable eee eee disable enable lldp transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx details on the settings are as follows: enable flow control by enabling flow control , when the bandwidth becomes congested, traffic transmission is temporarily stopped until the congestion clears, preventing packet loss. disable qos by disabling qos , packets will be forwarded without priority control. enable igmp snooping by enabling igmp snooping , multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports where multicast receivers exist, and unnecessary traffic is not forwarded. set the igmp snooping version to igmpv2 . in a network configuration using multiple switches, if the switches have different versions, a warning message will be displayed on the “multicast page” of the proav gui. when using an ndi network, set the version to igmpv2. by enabling the igmp snooping fast leave function , multicast traffic forwarding stops immediately when a multicast receiver stops receiving it. when a multicast receiver switches between audio and video, the multicast traffic before the switching can be prevented from causing noise. by enabling the auto-assignment option of the fast leave function , fast leave is not performed on ports connecting switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. this prevents immediate stop of multicast traffic forwarding when receivers who want to receive the multicast traffic still exist on the opposing switch. enable the igmp query transmission function (querier function) . when igmp snooping is used, a querier must exist on the same network. if there are multiple queriers on the same network, the querier with the smallest ip address becomes the representative querier, and the other queriers automatically stop transmitting queries. set the igmp query interval value to the default of 125 seconds . by disabling the igmp packet ttl value/ra/tos checking function , even if an invalid igmp packet is received, the information is appropriately corrected and the igmp packet is forwarded. by enabling the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports , you can conserve the bandwidth between switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. normally, all multicast traffic is forwarded to the multicast router port regardless of existence of a multicast receiver. therefore, in a bidirectional transmission environment, unnecessary multicast traffic consumes the bandwidth between switches. by using this function, multicast traffic is forwarded only if a multicast receiver exists on the opposing switch, thereby conserving the bandwidth between switches. by disabling the igmp report suppression function , igmp reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. by enabling the igmp report suppression function , igmp reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. always forward control-use multicast packets by always forwarding linked local multicasts , control packets such as mdns used by ndi are always forwarded when igmp snooping is enabled. by flooding unknown multicasts , multicast traffic without a receiver is forwarded when igmp snooping is enabled. disable jumbo frames by setting the mru to 1522 bytes , jumbo frame forwarding is disabled. disable eee disabling the power saving function prevents the function from affecting data transfer performance. enable lldp enabling lldp transmission and reception enables the igmp snooping fast leave function and the igmp report forwarding function . this is because these two igmp functions operate by using lldp to determine whether the opposing device is a switch. set profile type this setting is used as an identifier to identify the profile type in the proav gui.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. NDI profiles The following commands are collectively applied by NDI profiles. List of commands applied by NDI profiles Object of setting Function Commands Entire system Enable flow control flowcontrol enable Disable QoS qos disable Always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Sets MRU mru 1522 Enable LLDP lldp run VLAN interface Set profile type proav profile-type ndi Flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood Enable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping enable Set IGMP snooping version ip igmp snooping version 2 Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment Enable IGMP query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 125 Disable IGMP packet TTL value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable Disable IGMP packet RA checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable Disable IGMP packet ToS checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable Enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable Disable IGMP report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable Enable IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable LAN/SFP port Enable flow control flowcontrol enable Disable EEE eee disable Enable LLDP transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx Details on the settings are as follows: Enable flow control By enabling flow control , when the bandwidth becomes congested, traffic transmission is temporarily stopped until the congestion clears, preventing packet loss. Disable QoS By disabling QoS , packets will be forwarded without priority control. Enable IGMP snooping By enabling IGMP snooping , multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports where multicast receivers exist, and unnecessary traffic is not forwarded. Set the IGMP snooping version to IGMPv2 . In a network configuration using multiple switches, if the switches have different versions, a warning message will be displayed on the “Multicast page” of the ProAV GUI. When using an NDI network, set the version to IGMPv2. By enabling the IGMP snooping fast leave function , multicast traffic forwarding stops immediately when a multicast receiver stops receiving it. When a multicast receiver switches between audio and video, the multicast traffic before the switching can be prevented from causing noise. By enabling the auto-assignment option of the fast leave function , fast leave is not performed on ports connecting switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. This prevents immediate stop of multicast traffic forwarding when receivers who want to receive the multicast traffic still exist on the opposing switch. Enable the IGMP query transmission function (querier function) . When IGMP snooping is used, a querier must exist on the same network. If there are multiple queriers on the same network, the querier with the smallest IP address becomes the representative querier, and the other queriers automatically stop transmitting queries. Set the IGMP query interval value to the default of 125 seconds . By disabling the IGMP packet TTL value/RA/ToS checking function , even if an invalid IGMP packet is received, the information is appropriately corrected and the IGMP packet is forwarded. By enabling the data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports , you can conserve the bandwidth between switches in a network configuration using multiple switches. Normally, all multicast traffic is forwarded to the multicast router port regardless of existence of a multicast receiver. Therefore, in a bidirectional transmission environment, unnecessary multicast traffic consumes the bandwidth between switches. By using this function, multicast traffic is forwarded only if a multicast receiver exists on the opposing switch, thereby conserving the bandwidth between switches. By disabling the IGMP report suppression function , IGMP reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. By enabling the IGMP report suppression function , IGMP reports are forwarded directly without being proxied in a network configuration using multiple switches. Always forward control-use multicast packets By always forwarding linked local multicasts , control packets such as mDNS used by NDI are always forwarded when IGMP snooping is enabled. By flooding unknown multicasts , multicast traffic without a receiver is forwarded when IGMP snooping is enabled. Disable jumbo frames By setting the MRU to 1522 bytes , jumbo frame forwarding is disabled. Disable EEE Disabling the power saving function prevents the function from affecting data transfer performance. Enable LLDP Enabling LLDP transmission and reception enables the IGMP snooping fast leave function and the IGMP report forwarding function . This is because these two IGMP functions operate by using LLDP to determine whether the opposing device is a switch. Set profile type This setting is used as an identifier to identify the profile type in the ProAV GUI.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#複数プロファイル併用時の設定">3.3. Settings for using multiple profiles</div><div class="search_word">3.3. settings for using multiple profiles on the “custom” page of the proav profile, you can set any profile for each port. depending on the profile combination, conflicts in settings may occur, resulting in differences in settings compared to the case where a single profile is used.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Settings for using multiple profiles On the “Custom” page of the ProAV profile, you can set any profile for each port. Depending on the profile combination, conflicts in settings may occur, resulting in differences in settings compared to the case where a single profile is used.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#danteとndi併用時">3.3.1. When using both Dante and NDI</div><div class="search_word">3.3.1. when using both dante and ndi list of commands applied when both dante and ndi are used object of setting function dante profiles ndi profiles entire system enable flow control flowcontrol enable enable qos qos enable optimize transmission queue by dscp value qos dscp-queue 8 2 qos dscp-queue 26 3 qos dscp-queue 34 4 qos dscp-queue 46 5 qos dscp-queue 48 5 qos dscp-queue 56 7 qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local sets mru mru 1522 enable lldp lldp run vlan interface set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary proav profile-type ndi flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood l2-unknown-mcast flood enable igmp snooping ip igmp snooping enable ip igmp snooping enable set igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 ip igmp snooping version 2 enable igmp snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment enable igmp query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier ip igmp snooping querier set igmp query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 ip igmp snooping query-interval 125 disable igmp packet ttl value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable ip igmp snooping check ttl disable disable igmp packet ra checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable ip igmp snooping check ra disable disable igmp packet tos checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable ip igmp snooping check tos disable enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable disable igmp report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable enable igmp report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable ip igmp snooping report-forward enable always forward ptp packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 - l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 lan/sfp port set qos trust mode qos trust dscp qos trust port-priority qos port-priority-queue 2 set flow control flowcontrol disable flowcontrol enable disable eee eee disable eee disable enable lldp transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx set l2ms filter l2ms filter disable l2ms filter disable differences between using multiple profiles and using a single profile are as follows: flow control flow control is enabled for the entire system. flow control is disabled on ports with a dante profile applied. flow control is enabled on ports with an ndi profile applied. qos qos is enabled for the entire system. the transmission queues are optimized based on the dscp values across the entire system. for ports with a dante profile applied, by setting the qos trust mode to dscp , the priority control is performed by referring to the dscp values. for ports with an ndi profile applied, by setting the qos trust mode to port priority and fixing the transmission queue to 2 (default) , the packet forwarding priority control is not performed.</div><div class="display_word">3.3.1. When using both Dante and NDI List of commands applied when both Dante and NDI are used Object of setting Function Dante profiles NDI profiles Entire system Enable flow control flowcontrol enable Enable QoS qos enable Optimize transmission queue by DSCP value qos dscp-queue 8 2 qos dscp-queue 26 3 qos dscp-queue 34 4 qos dscp-queue 46 5 qos dscp-queue 48 5 qos dscp-queue 56 7 qos dscp-queue [not indicated above] 0 Always forward linked local multicasts l2-unknown-mcast forward link-local Sets MRU mru 1522 Enable LLDP lldp run VLAN interface Set profile type proav profile-type dante-primary/dante-secondary proav profile-type ndi Flood unknown multicasts l2-unknown-mcast flood l2-unknown-mcast flood Enable IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping enable ip igmp snooping enable Set IGMP snooping version ip igmp snooping version 3 ip igmp snooping version 2 Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave function ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment ip igmp snooping fast-leave auto-assignment Enable IGMP query transmission function ip igmp snooping querier ip igmp snooping querier Set IGMP query transmission interval ip igmp snooping query-interval 30 ip igmp snooping query-interval 125 Disable IGMP packet TTL value checking function ip igmp snooping check ttl disable ip igmp snooping check ttl disable Disable IGMP packet RA checking function ip igmp snooping check ra disable ip igmp snooping check ra disable Disable IGMP packet ToS checking function ip igmp snooping check tos disable ip igmp snooping check tos disable Enable data transfer suppression function for multicast router ports ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable ip igmp snooping mrouter-port data-suppression enable Disable IGMP report-suppression function ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable ip igmp snooping report-suppression disable Enable IGMP report forwarding function ip igmp snooping report-forward enable ip igmp snooping report-forward enable Always forward PTP packets l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.129 - l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.130 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.131 l2-mcast flood 224.0.1.132 l2-mcast flood 239.254.3.3 LAN/SFP port Set QoS trust mode qos trust dscp qos trust port-priority qos port-priority-queue 2 Set flow control flowcontrol disable flowcontrol enable Disable EEE eee disable eee disable Enable LLDP transmission and reception lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx lldp-agent set lldp enable tx rx Set L2MS filter l2ms filter disable l2ms filter disable Differences between using multiple profiles and using a single profile are as follows: Flow control Flow control is enabled for the entire system. Flow control is disabled on ports with a Dante profile applied. Flow control is enabled on ports with an NDI profile applied. QoS QoS is enabled for the entire system. The transmission queues are optimized based on the DSCP values across the entire system. For ports with a Dante profile applied, by setting the QoS trust mode to DSCP , the priority control is performed by referring to the DSCP values. For ports with an NDI profile applied, by setting the QoS trust mode to port priority and fixing the transmission queue to 2 (default) , the packet forwarding priority control is not performed.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#キッティングとトラブルシューティング">4. Kitting and Troubleshooting</div><div class="search_word">4. kitting and troubleshooting by utilizing the “yamaha lan monitor”, an integrated management tool for yamaha network devices, you can easily perform kitting (initial setup) and troubleshooting. yamaha lan monitor can be downloaded for free. for details on how to install and use yamaha lan monitor, refer to the user guide.</div><div class="display_word">4. Kitting and Troubleshooting By utilizing the “Yamaha LAN Monitor”, an integrated management tool for Yamaha network devices, you can easily perform kitting (initial setup) and troubleshooting. Yamaha LAN Monitor can be downloaded for free. For details on how to install and use Yamaha LAN Monitor, refer to the user guide.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#キッティング-ipアドレスを意識せずに初期設定する">4.1. [Kitting] Initial setup without having to think about IP addresses</div><div class="search_word">4.1. [kitting] initial setup without having to think about ip addresses normally, when using two or more switches in a network, you must appropriately set the ip address of each switch to avoid ip address duplication. however, if you have a closed avoip network that does not need to be connected to an external network, you can use the auto ip function of the switches to automatically assign link local addresses. by combining a yamaha switch in the factory default settings with yamaha lan monitor, you can easily apply the proav profile without having to think about setting ip addresses. as a preliminary step, install yamaha lan monitor on your computer and set the ip address of the network adapter used by the computer to “acquire automatically”. this procedure allows the computer to operate with a link local address. (*if a dhcp server exists, the ip address can be acquired via dhcp. however, since a closed avoip network is assumed this time, the explanation of dhcp is omitted.) connect multiple switches in the factory default settings, connect the computer to a port on any switch, and start yamaha lan monitor. when you start it, the following screen will appear. make sure that the correct network adapter of the computer is selected in the upper left corner of the screen and that the ip address of the computer is a link local address starting with “169.254. . ” you can check the ip address by clicking the switch icon on yamaha lan monitor. the default ip address of the yamaha switch is “192.168.100.240/24”. when the switch is placed under the management of yamaha lan monitor in its factory default settings (state without any changes to its settings), the address will automatically switch to a link local address. if the ip address of the switch starts with “169.254. . ”, the switch is operating with a link local address. if the address remains as “192.168.100.240”, wait a while until it switches to a link local address, and then refresh the display. note that, if the yamaha switch settings have already been changed from the default settings, the switch will not automatically switch to a link local address. if the address does not switch to the link local address after a while, reset the switch to its default settings. with this product, you can physically initialize the settings by turning on the power while holding down the led mode button on the front of the chassis, and then releasing the button when all port leds turn orange. once you have confirmed that the ip address of the switch has changed to a link local address, click the “web gui” button. the computer browser automatically opens and displays the web gui of the switch. on the web gui login screen, enter the username “admin” and password “admin”. after selecting the language, you will be asked to change your password. set a password of your choice. once you have logged in to the web gui, click the “proav settings” button in the global menu at the top of the screen. the “proav profile” page will appear as shown below. finally, apply the proav profile on the settings page. the proav profile setup is now completed.</div><div class="display_word">4.1. [Kitting] Initial setup without having to think about IP addresses Normally, when using two or more switches in a network, you must appropriately set the IP address of each switch to avoid IP address duplication. However, if you have a closed AVoIP network that does not need to be connected to an external network, you can use the Auto IP function of the switches to automatically assign link local addresses. By combining a Yamaha switch in the factory default settings with Yamaha LAN Monitor, you can easily apply the ProAV profile without having to think about setting IP addresses. As a preliminary step, install Yamaha LAN Monitor on your computer and set the IP address of the network adapter used by the computer to “Acquire automatically”. This procedure allows the computer to operate with a link local address. (*If a DHCP server exists, the IP address can be acquired via DHCP. However, since a closed AVoIP network is assumed this time, the explanation of DHCP is omitted.) Connect multiple switches in the factory default settings, connect the computer to a port on any switch, and start Yamaha LAN Monitor. When you start it, the following screen will appear. Make sure that the correct network adapter of the computer is selected in the upper left corner of the screen and that the IP address of the computer is a link local address starting with “169.254. . ” You can check the IP address by clicking the switch icon on Yamaha LAN Monitor. The default IP address of the Yamaha switch is “192.168.100.240/24”. When the switch is placed under the management of Yamaha LAN Monitor in its factory default settings (state without any changes to its settings), the address will automatically switch to a link local address. If the IP address of the switch starts with “169.254. . ”, the switch is operating with a link local address. If the address remains as “192.168.100.240”, wait a while until it switches to a link local address, and then refresh the display. Note that, if the Yamaha switch settings have already been changed from the default settings, the switch will not automatically switch to a link local address. If the address does not switch to the link local address after a while, reset the switch to its default settings. With this product, you can physically initialize the settings by turning on the power while holding down the LED MODE button on the front of the chassis, and then releasing the button when all port LEDs turn orange. Once you have confirmed that the IP address of the switch has changed to a link local address, click the “Web GUI” button. The computer browser automatically opens and displays the web GUI of the switch. On the web GUI login screen, enter the username “admin” and password “admin”. After selecting the language, you will be asked to change your password. Set a password of your choice. Once you have logged in to the web GUI, click the “ProAV Settings” button in the global menu at the top of the screen. The “ProAV Profile” page will appear as shown below. Finally, apply the ProAV profile on the settings page. The ProAV profile setup is now completed.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#キッティング-複数のヤマハスイッチに同一設定を一括適用する">4.2. [Kitting] Applying the same settings to multiple Yamaha switches at once</div><div class="search_word">4.2. [kitting] applying the same settings to multiple yamaha switches at once yamaha lan monitor can distribute configuration files (config files) to multiple yamaha switches at once. if you are using link local addresses as the ip addresses and want to apply the same settings to all switches, you can efficiently configure the settings for multiple switches. note that, if the switch is operated with a fixed ip address, you will need to reconfigure the ip address setting to prevent ip address duplication. follow the steps in 4.1 to apply the proav profile to one switch. click on the “list” tab at the top of the screen. a list of detected yamaha switches will be displayed. click the “config import/export” tab at the top of the screen. additionally, check the switch to which the proav profile has already been applied, and click the “config export” button. the “config export” dialog will appear. select the directory in which you want to save the config file and click the “execute” button. the dialog will display the progress and result of the export. click the “ok” button when the export is completed. additionally, check the switch to which you want to apply the proav profile, and click the “config import” button. if you want to apply the profile to multiple switches, check multiple check boxes. the “config import” dialog will appear. select the config file saved in the previous step as an import file, and click the “execute” button. you can specify a config file for each selected switch, or you can specify the same config file for all selected switches. in an environment where different models of switches are used, specify the appropriate config file for each model. the dialog will display the progress and result of the import. click the “ok” button when the import is completed. the switch that receives config will automatically reboot and the new settings will be applied after the bootup. you can also update the firmware on multiple yamaha switches at once by following the similar procedure using the “firmware update” button. in this way, yamaha lan monitor can be used as a kitting tool for multi-device environments, so please make use of it.</div><div class="display_word">4.2. [Kitting] Applying the same settings to multiple Yamaha switches at once Yamaha LAN Monitor can distribute configuration files (CONFIG files) to multiple Yamaha switches at once. If you are using link local addresses as the IP addresses and want to apply the same settings to all switches, you can efficiently configure the settings for multiple switches. Note that, if the switch is operated with a fixed IP address, you will need to reconfigure the IP address setting to prevent IP address duplication. Follow the steps in 4.1 to apply the ProAV profile to one switch. Click on the “List” tab at the top of the screen. A list of detected Yamaha switches will be displayed. Click the “Config Import/Export” tab at the top of the screen. Additionally, check the switch to which the ProAV profile has already been applied, and click the “CONFIG export” button. The “CONFIG export” dialog will appear. Select the directory in which you want to save the CONFIG file and click the “Execute” button. The dialog will display the progress and result of the export. Click the “OK” button when the export is completed. Additionally, check the switch to which you want to apply the ProAV profile, and click the “CONFIG import” button. If you want to apply the profile to multiple switches, check multiple check boxes. The “CONFIG import” dialog will appear. Select the CONFIG file saved in the previous step as an import file, and click the “Execute” button. You can specify a CONFIG file for each selected switch, or you can specify the same CONFIG file for all selected switches. In an environment where different models of switches are used, specify the appropriate CONFIG file for each model. The dialog will display the progress and result of the import. Click the “OK” button when the import is completed. The switch that receives CONFIG will automatically reboot and the new settings will be applied after the bootup. You can also update the firmware on multiple Yamaha switches at once by following the similar procedure using the “Firmware Update” button. In this way, Yamaha LAN Monitor can be used as a kitting tool for multi-device environments, so please make use of it.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#トラブルシューティング-ネットワークの状態を確認する">4.3. [Troubleshooting] Checking the network status</div><div class="search_word">4.3. [troubleshooting] checking the network status by using yamaha lan monitor, you can visualize the connection configuration of the entire network, and also check traffic bandwidth usage and poe power supply status. click the switch icon. “port status” is selected by default, which displays real-time link status on the front panel at the top of the screen. the tree view at the bottom left of the screen allows you to check the current network connection configuration, and the connected device view at the bottom right of the screen allows you to see which devices are connected to which ports. to check the traffic bandwidth usage, click the “bandwidth usage (%)” button. the bandwidth utilization of each port is displayed as the percentage against the link speed. when the bandwidth utilization is close to its upper limit, the port icon appears yellow, orange, or red. to check the poe power supply status, click “poe power supply status (class)”. the power supply class is displayed for ports that are supplying power, and the device details view in the upper left corner of the screen shows the total power supply and the power supply of each port.</div><div class="display_word">4.3. [Troubleshooting] Checking the network status By using Yamaha LAN Monitor, you can visualize the connection configuration of the entire network, and also check traffic bandwidth usage and PoE power supply status. Click the switch icon. “Port Status” is selected by default, which displays real-time link status on the front panel at the top of the screen. The tree view at the bottom left of the screen allows you to check the current network connection configuration, and the connected device view at the bottom right of the screen allows you to see which devices are connected to which ports. To check the traffic bandwidth usage, click the “Bandwidth Usage (%)” button. The bandwidth utilization of each port is displayed as the percentage against the link speed. When the bandwidth utilization is close to its upper limit, the port icon appears yellow, orange, or red. To check the PoE power supply status, click “PoE Power Supply Status (Class)”. The power supply class is displayed for ports that are supplying power, and the device details view in the upper left corner of the screen shows the total power supply and the power supply of each port.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#トラブルシューティング-dante機器の状態を確認する">4.4. [Troubleshooting] Checking the Dante device status</div><div class="search_word">4.4. [troubleshooting] checking the dante device status yamaha lan monitor allows you to check the status of dante devices and open dante controller with one click if it is installed on your computer. note that, in order to view dante devices, dante control and monitoring and dante discovery must be installed when yamaha lan monitor is installed. with a dante device connected to the yamaha switch, click on the dante device icon. you can monitor the status of the primary and secondary ports, the number of transmission and reception flows, etc. you can also check information such as whether the operating mode of the dante device is “redundant mode” or “daisy chain mode”. dante controller can be started by clicking the “dante controller” button in the top right or center of the screen. (dante controller must be installed beforehand.) you can seamlessly switch between yamaha lan monitor and dante controller on a single computer, making troubleshooting more efficient.</div><div class="display_word">4.4. [Troubleshooting] Checking the Dante device status Yamaha LAN Monitor allows you to check the status of Dante devices and open Dante Controller with one click if it is installed on your computer. Note that, in order to view Dante devices, Dante Control and Monitoring and Dante Discovery must be installed when Yamaha LAN Monitor is installed. With a Dante device connected to the Yamaha switch, click on the Dante device icon. You can monitor the status of the primary and secondary ports, the number of transmission and reception flows, etc. You can also check information such as whether the operating mode of the Dante device is “redundant mode” or “daisy chain mode”. Dante Controller can be started by clicking the “Dante Controller” button in the top right or center of the screen. (Dante Controller must be installed beforehand.) You can seamlessly switch between Yamaha LAN Monitor and Dante Controller on a single computer, making troubleshooting more efficient.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#注意事項">5. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">5. points of caution the settings configured collectively in proav settings are intended for use when this product is used as a switch dedicated to the avoip network. when building a complex network, such as mixing an existing in-house network with an avoip network, use the gui advanced settings pages and commands to appropriately configure the settings. when applying the proav profile, ports that belong to a logical interface must be detached from the logical interface. if necessary, first detach the ports from the logical interface, assign the profile, and then re-attach them to the logical interface. the proav profile assumes an avoip network consisting only of yamaha switches. note that, when the igmp snooping function is used in a multi-vendor environment, determination of the opposing device via lldp may not work.</div><div class="display_word">5. Points of Caution The settings configured collectively in ProAV settings are intended for use when this product is used as a switch dedicated to the AVoIP network. When building a complex network, such as mixing an existing in-house network with an AVoIP network, use the GUI advanced settings pages and commands to appropriately configure the settings. When applying the ProAV profile, ports that belong to a logical interface must be detached from the logical interface. If necessary, first detach the ports from the logical interface, assign the profile, and then re-attach them to the logical interface. The ProAV profile assumes an AVoIP network consisting only of Yamaha switches. Note that, when the IGMP snooping function is used in a multi-vendor environment, determination of the opposing device via LLDP may not work.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#関連文書">6. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">6. related documentation none.</div><div class="display_word">6. Related Documentation None.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_proav"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_proav" doctitle="ProAV" link="#商標名称について">7. Trademarks and Trade Names</div><div class="search_word">7. trademarks and trade names dante™ is a registered trademark of audinate pty ltd. ndi® is a registered trademark of vizrt ndi ab.</div><div class="display_word">7. Trademarks and Trade Names Dante™ is a registered trademark of Audinate Pty Ltd. NDI® is a registered trademark of Vizrt NDI AB.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#リモートアクセス制御">Remote Access Control</div><div class="search_word">remote access control</div><div class="display_word">Remote Access Control</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product lets you restrict access to the following applications that implement network services. telnet server http server / secure http server tftp server snmp server</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product lets you restrict access to the following applications that implement network services. TELNET server HTTP server / secure HTTP server TFTP server SNMP server</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the following three functions are provided to limit access to network services. control whether to leave the service in question running in the background on the system (start/stop control) change reception port number limit the source ip addresses that can access services currently running the following functions that correspond to each network service are shown in the table below. network service access control network service start/stop control change reception port number access source restriction telnet server yes yes yes http server × (always booted) yes yes secure http server yes yes yes tftp server yes yes yes snmp server × (always booted) × (always 161) yes multiple instances of a network service cannot be started. if the start control is applied to the same service that is currently running, the service will restart. consequently, any connected sessions will be disconnected . when restricting access to network services, you can specify the source ip address (*1) and whether to allow or deny access (*2) . (*1)…​snmp servers also allow you to specify the community name or user name of the access destination (*2)…​snmp servers only allow you to specify the access permission conditions. the default settings for the network services are shown in the table below. network service start/stop status reception port number access source restriction telnet server run 23 allow all http server run 80 allow all secure http server run 443 tftp server stop 69 allow all snmp server run 161 allow all</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The following three functions are provided to limit access to network services. Control whether to leave the service in question running in the background on the system (start/stop control) Change reception port number Limit the source IP addresses that can access services currently running The following functions that correspond to each network service are shown in the table below. Network service access control Network service Start/stop control Change reception port number Access source restriction TELNET server Yes Yes Yes HTTP server × (Always booted) Yes Yes Secure HTTP server Yes Yes Yes TFTP server Yes Yes Yes SNMP server × (Always booted) × (Always 161) Yes Multiple instances of a network service cannot be started. If the start control is applied to the same service that is currently running, the service will restart. Consequently, any connected sessions will be disconnected . When restricting access to network services, you can specify the source IP address (*1) and whether to allow or deny access (*2) . (*1)…​SNMP servers also allow you to specify the community name or user name of the access destination (*2)…​SNMP servers only allow you to specify the access permission conditions. The default settings for the network services are shown in the table below. Network service Start/stop status Reception port number Access source restriction TELNET server run 23 Allow all HTTP server run 80 Allow all Secure HTTP server run 443 TFTP server stop 69 Allow all SNMP server run 161 Allow all</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. network service operations operating commands telnet server start/stop and change reception port number telnet-server enable (use argument to specify port number) ip address access control telnet-server access show settings show telnet-server http server change http server’s reception port number http-server enable (use argument to specify port number) start/stop secure http server and change reception port number http-server secure enable (use argument to specify port number) ip address access control http-server access show settings show http-server tftp server start/stop and change reception port number tftp-server enable (use argument to specify port number) ip address access control tftp-server access snmp server access control by ip address and community name or user name snmp-server access</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Network service Operations Operating commands TELNET server Start/stop and change reception port number telnet-server enable (use argument to specify port number) IP address access control telnet-server access Show settings show telnet-server HTTP server Change HTTP server’s reception port number http-server enable (use argument to specify port number) Start/stop secure HTTP server and change reception port number http-server secure enable (use argument to specify port number) IP address access control http-server access Show settings show http-server TFTP server Start/stop and change reception port number tftp-server enable (use argument to specify port number) IP address access control tftp-server access SNMP server Access control by IP address and community name or user name snmp-server access</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#telnetサーバーに対するアクセス制御">5.1. TELNET server access control</div><div class="search_word">5.1. telnet server access control this example restricts access to the telnet server. change the telnet server’s reception port to 1024. connection to the telnet server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. if you specify telnet-server access, access from ip addresses that do not meet the conditions is denied. yamaha(config)#telnet-server enable 1024 (1) yamaha(config)#telnet-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#show telnet-server (3) service:enableport:1024access:    permit 192.168.100.1 1 change the reception port to 1024 and reboot the telnet server 2 allow access only from 192.168.100.1 3 check the settings</div><div class="display_word">5.1. TELNET server access control This example restricts access to the TELNET server. Change the TELNET server’s reception port to 1024. Connection to the TELNET server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. If you specify telnet-server access, access from IP addresses that do not meet the conditions is denied. Yamaha(config)#telnet-server enable 1024 (1) Yamaha(config)#telnet-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#show telnet-server (3) Service:EnablePort:1024Access:    permit 192.168.100.1 1 Change the reception port to 1024 and reboot the TELNET server 2 Allow access only from 192.168.100.1 3 Check the settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#httpサーバーに対するアクセス制限">5.2. HTTP server access restrictions</div><div class="search_word">5.2. http server access restrictions this example restricts access to the http server. change the http server’s reception port to 8000 and the secure http server’s reception port to 9000. connection to the http server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. if you specify http-server access, access from ip addresses that do not meet the conditions is denied. yamaha(config)#http-server enable 8000 (1) yamaha(config)#http-server secure enable 9000 (2) yamaha(config)#http-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (3) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#show http-server (4) http :enable(8000)https:enable(9000)access:    permit 192.168.100.1 1 change the reception port to 8000 and reboot the http server 2 change the reception port to 9000 and reboot the secure http server 3 allow access only from 192.168.100.1 4 check the settings</div><div class="display_word">5.2. HTTP server access restrictions This example restricts access to the HTTP server. Change the HTTP server’s reception port to 8000 and the secure HTTP server’s reception port to 9000. Connection to the HTTP server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. If you specify http-server access, access from IP addresses that do not meet the conditions is denied. Yamaha(config)#http-server enable 8000 (1) Yamaha(config)#http-server secure enable 9000 (2) Yamaha(config)#http-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (3) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#show http-server (4) HTTP :Enable(8000)HTTPS:Enable(9000)Access:    permit 192.168.100.1 1 Change the reception port to 8000 and reboot the HTTP server 2 Change the reception port to 9000 and reboot the secure HTTP server 3 Allow access only from 192.168.100.1 4 Check the settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#tftpサーバーに対するアクセス制限">5.3. TFTP server access restrictions</div><div class="search_word">5.3. tftp server access restrictions this example restricts access to the tftp server. change the tftp server’s reception port to 2048. connection to the tftp server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. yamaha(config)#tftp-server enable 2048 (1) yamaha(config)#tftp-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (2) 1 change the reception port to 2048 and reboot the tftp server 2 allow access only from 192.168.100.1</div><div class="display_word">5.3. TFTP server access restrictions This example restricts access to the TFTP server. Change the TFTP server’s reception port to 2048. Connection to the TFTP server is allowed only by clients from 192.168.100.1. Yamaha(config)#tftp-server enable 2048 (1) Yamaha(config)#tftp-server access permit 192.168.100.1 (2) 1 Change the reception port to 2048 and reboot the TFTP server 2 Allow access only from 192.168.100.1</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#snmpサーバーに対するアクセス制限">5.4. SNMP server access restrictions</div><div class="search_word">5.4. snmp server access restrictions this restricts access to the snmp server. access to “public” communities is restricted to clients from 192.168.100.0/24. in addition, access to “private” communities is restricted to clients from 192.168.100.1. yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.0/24 community public (1) yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.1 community private (2) 1 the community name “public” allows access only from 192.168.100.0/24 2 the community name “private” allows access only from 192.168.100.1 access to the snmp server is restricted to clients with username “user1” from 192.168.100.0/24. yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.0/24 user user1 (1) 1 allow access only from 192.168.100.0/24 and the username “user1”</div><div class="display_word">5.4. SNMP server access restrictions This restricts access to the SNMP server. Access to “public” communities is restricted to clients from 192.168.100.0/24. In addition, access to “private” communities is restricted to clients from 192.168.100.1. Yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.0/24 community public (1) Yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.1 community private (2) 1 The community name “public” allows access only from 192.168.100.0/24 2 The community name “private” allows access only from 192.168.100.1 Access to the SNMP server is restricted to clients with username “user1” from 192.168.100.0/24. Yamaha(config)#snmp-server access permit 192.168.100.0/24 user user1 (1) 1 Allow access only from 192.168.100.0/24 and the username “user1”</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if you change the ipv4/ipv6 address settings, all settings related to restrictions on access source ip address will be reset. use particular caution when changing the ipv4/ipv6 address settings.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If you change the IPv4/IPv6 address settings, all settings related to restrictions on access source IP address will be reset. Use particular caution when changing the IPv4/IPv6 address settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_remote_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_remote_control" doctitle="Remote" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation user account management</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation User account management</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#スケジュール機能">Schedule Function</div><div class="search_word">schedule function</div><div class="display_word">Schedule Function</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview scheduling functionality is used to execute specific processes when any particular time or event occurs. this functionality enables the following types of actions using a yamaha network switch. supplies poe power to wireless lan access points only during the specified period. shuts down a port during the specified period. for information on the functions that can be executed by this product, refer to function details and executable commands .</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Scheduling functionality is used to execute specific processes when any particular time or event occurs. This functionality enables the following types of actions using a Yamaha network switch. Supplies PoE power to wireless LAN access points only during the specified period. Shuts down a port during the specified period. For information on the functions that can be executed by this product, refer to Function Details and Executable Commands .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used trigger general term for conditions/criteria, such as that the internal clock time matches a specified time or that a specific event occurs. time trigger condition that the internal clock time matches a specified time. action action executed when a trigger is activated.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Trigger General term for conditions/criteria, such as that the internal clock time matches a specified time or that a specific event occurs. Time Trigger Condition that the internal clock time matches a specified time. Action Action executed when a trigger is activated.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details scheduling functionality involves specifying “triggers” and actions, which are the two parameter settings for executing specific process “actions” when a particular specified time or event trigger occurs. this product only supports time trigger .</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details Scheduling functionality involves specifying “triggers” and actions, which are the two parameter settings for executing specific process “actions” when a particular specified time or event trigger occurs. This product only supports time trigger .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#時刻トリガー">3.1. Time Trigger</div><div class="search_word">3.1. time trigger time triggers can be specified in terms of year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. time triggers are specified using the schedule command. available setting parameters are indicated below. type specification method setting value example date month 1-12 one specific month (such as only december) 12 multiple specific months (such as only january and february) 1,2 range from specific month to december (such as february to december) 2- range from specific month to specific month (such as february to july) 2-7 range from january to specific month (such as january to july) -7 every month * day 1-31 one specific day (such as day 1 only) 1 multiple specific days (such as days 1 and 2 only) 1,2 range from specific day to last day (such as day 2 to month-end) 2- range from specific day to specific day (such as days 2 to 7) 2-7 range from day 1 to specific day (such as days 1 to 7) -7 every day * specific day-of-week only (such as monday only) mon multiple specific days of the week only (such as saturday and sundays only) sat,sun range from specific day-of-week to specific day-of-week (such as monday to friday) mon-fri range from sunday to specific day-of-the-week (such as sunday to friday) -fri hours, minutes, seconds hours 0-23 specific hour only (such as 23:00 only) 23 multiple specific hours only (such as 01:00 and 22:00 only) 1,22 range from specific hour to 23:00 (such as 02:00 to 23:00) 2- range from specific hour to specific hour (such as 02:00 to 21:00) 2-21 range from hour 00:00 to specific hour (such as 00:00 to 21:00) -21 each hour * minutes 0-59 one specific minute only (such as minute 59 only) 59 multiple specific minutes only (such as minutes 1 and 50 only) 1,50 range from specific minute to minute 59 (such as minutes 2 to 59) 2- range from specific minute to specific minute (such as minutes 2 to 50) 2-50 range from minute 0 to specific minute (such as minutes 0 to 50) -50 each minute * seconds 0-59 one specific second only (such as second 59 only) this setting may be omitted. 59</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Time Trigger Time triggers can be specified in terms of year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Time triggers are specified using the schedule command. Available setting parameters are indicated below. Type Specification method Setting value example Date Month 1-12 One specific month (such as only December) 12 Multiple specific months (such as only January and February) 1,2 Range from specific month to December (such as February to December) 2- Range from specific month to specific month (such as February to July) 2-7 Range from January to specific month (such as January to July) -7 Every month * Day 1-31 One specific day (such as day 1 only) 1 Multiple specific days (such as days 1 and 2 only) 1,2 Range from specific day to last day (such as day 2 to month-end) 2- Range from specific day to specific day (such as days 2 to 7) 2-7 Range from day 1 to specific day (such as days 1 to 7) -7 Every day * Specific day-of-week only (such as Monday only) mon Multiple specific days of the week only (such as Saturday and Sundays only) sat,sun Range from specific day-of-week to specific day-of-week (such as Monday to Friday) mon-fri Range from Sunday to specific day-of-the-week (such as Sunday to Friday) -fri Hours, minutes, seconds Hours 0-23 Specific hour only (such as 23:00 only) 23 Multiple specific hours only (such as 01:00 and 22:00 only) 1,22 Range from specific hour to 23:00 (such as 02:00 to 23:00) 2- Range from specific hour to specific hour (such as 02:00 to 21:00) 2-21 Range from hour 00:00 to specific hour (such as 00:00 to 21:00) -21 Each hour * Minutes 0-59 One specific minute only (such as minute 59 only) 59 Multiple specific minutes only (such as minutes 1 and 50 only) 1,50 Range from specific minute to minute 59 (such as minutes 2 to 59) 2- Range from specific minute to specific minute (such as minutes 2 to 50) 2-50 Range from minute 0 to specific minute (such as minutes 0 to 50) -50 Each minute * Seconds 0-59 One specific second only (such as second 59 only) This setting may be omitted. 59</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#アクション">3.2. Action</div><div class="search_word">3.2. action processes executed when a time trigger is activated are called actions. to specify actions, use the schedule template command to switch to the schedule template mode and then specify the action using the cli-command command. this product supports the following actions. action command for settings description executes specified command cli-command command executes the specified commands in ascending order of id numbers.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Action Processes executed when a time trigger is activated are called actions. To specify actions, use the schedule template command to switch to the schedule template mode and then specify the action using the cli-command command. This product supports the following actions. Action Command for settings Description Executes specified command cli-command command Executes the specified commands in ascending order of ID numbers.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operating mode commands description global configuration mode schedule specifies a schedule template id that specifies the trigger and defines the action. schedule template specifies the schedule template id and switches to the schedule template mode. schedule template mode description specifies description of the schedule template. action enables/disables the schedule template. use disable to temporarily disable schedule function. cli-command defines command executed when trigger is activated.</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operating mode Commands Description Global configuration mode schedule Specifies a schedule template ID that specifies the trigger and defines the action. schedule template Specifies the schedule template ID and switches to the schedule template mode. Schedule template mode description Specifies description of the schedule template. action Enables/disables the schedule template. Use disable to temporarily disable schedule function. cli-command Defines command executed when trigger is activated.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#設定例">5. Setting Examples</div><div class="search_word">5. setting examples</div><div class="display_word">5. Setting Examples</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#特定の時間帯だけ無線lanアクセスポイントにpoe給電する場合poe対応モデルのみ">5.1. To supply PoE power to wireless LAN access points only during the specified period (only for PoE-supported models)</div><div class="search_word">5.1. to supply poe power to wireless lan access points only during the specified period (only for poe-supported models) supply poe power to wireless lan access points connected to port1.1 and port1.2 on weekdays only between 8:00 and 17:00. yamaha#yamaha# configure terminalyamaha(config)# schedule 1 time */mon-fri 8:00:00 1yamaha(config)# schedule template 1yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.1yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 power-inline enableyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.2yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 power-inline enableyamaha(config-schedule)# exityamaha(config)#yamaha(config)# schedule 2 time */mon-fri 17:00:00 2yamaha(config)# schedule template 2yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.1yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 power-inline disableyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.2yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 power-inline disableyamaha(config-schedule)# endyamaha#</div><div class="display_word">5.1. To supply PoE power to wireless LAN access points only during the specified period (only for PoE-supported models) Supply PoE power to wireless LAN access points connected to port1.1 and port1.2 on weekdays only between 8:00 and 17:00. Yamaha#Yamaha# configure terminalYamaha(config)# schedule 1 time */mon-fri 8:00:00 1Yamaha(config)# schedule template 1Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.1Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 power-inline enableYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.2Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 power-inline enableYamaha(config-schedule)# exitYamaha(config)#Yamaha(config)# schedule 2 time */mon-fri 17:00:00 2Yamaha(config)# schedule template 2Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.1Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 power-inline disableYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.2Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 power-inline disableYamaha(config-schedule)# endYamaha#</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#特定の時間帯だけポートをシャットダウンする場合">5.2. To shut down a port during the specified period</div><div class="search_word">5.2. to shut down a port during the specified period shut down port1.3 and port1.4 from 17:00 on friday to 8:00 on the following monday. yamaha#yamaha# configure terminalyamaha(config)# schedule 1 time */fri 17:00:00 1yamaha(config)# schedule template 1yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.3yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 shutdownyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.4yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 shutdownyamaha(config-schedule)# exityamaha(config)#yamaha(config)# schedule 2 time */mon 8:00:00 2yamaha(config)# schedule template 2yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.3yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 no shutdownyamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.4yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 no shutdownyamaha(config-schedule)# endyamaha#</div><div class="display_word">5.2. To shut down a port during the specified period Shut down port1.3 and port1.4 from 17:00 on Friday to 8:00 on the following Monday. Yamaha#Yamaha# configure terminalYamaha(config)# schedule 1 time */fri 17:00:00 1Yamaha(config)# schedule template 1Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.3Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 shutdownYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.4Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 shutdownYamaha(config-schedule)# exitYamaha(config)#Yamaha(config)# schedule 2 time */mon 8:00:00 2Yamaha(config)# schedule template 2Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 1 configure terminalYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 2 interface port1.3Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 3 no shutdownYamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 4 interface port1.4Yamaha(config-schedule)# cli-command 5 no shutdownYamaha(config-schedule)# endYamaha#</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#実行可能コマンド">6. Executable Commands</div><div class="search_word">6. executable commands only the following commands can be executed for the schedule function. configure terminal interface shutdown no shutdown power-inline disable (poe-supported models only) power-inline enable (poe-supported models only) write end exit (this command cannot be executed in the privileged exec mode)</div><div class="display_word">6. Executable Commands Only the following commands can be executed for the schedule function. configure terminal interface shutdown no shutdown power-inline disable (PoE-supported models only) power-inline enable (PoE-supported models only) write end exit (This command cannot be executed in the privileged EXEC mode)</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#syslog">7. SYSLOG</div><div class="search_word">7. syslog the schedule function outputs the following syslog messages. level output description info [schedule]:inf: id:x command is done the schedule template id:x command was executed when the trigger was activated. error [schedule]:err: execution failed at schedule template id: x, cli-command id: y. execution of cli-command id: y failed in the schedule template id: x.</div><div class="display_word">7. SYSLOG The schedule function outputs the following SYSLOG messages. Level Output Description Info [SCHEDULE]:inf: ID:X command is done The schedule template ID:X command was executed when the trigger was activated. Error [SCHEDULE]:err: Execution failed at schedule template ID: X, cli-command ID: Y. Execution of cli-command ID: Y failed in the schedule template ID: X.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#注意事項">8. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">8. points of caution when actions are executed, the cli-command executes actions in ascending id number order. when actions are executed, even if a command specified by the cli-command results in an execution error, the remaining commands are executed. if multiple triggers are activated simultaneously, then actions are executed in ascending order of schedule template id number. if the trigger activation time elapses due to the time setting being set manually by the clock set command or being changed by ntp, then any existing triggers scheduled to be activated within 59 seconds of when the current time setting was changed will be activated. if the trigger activation time was changed backward manually by the clock set command or by ntp, then the time triggers are checked again starting from the time to which it was set back. this function can be used to periodically save the configuration, but periodic rewriting will consume rom capacity more quickly. rom failures due to frequent rewriting are not warranted for free repairs, even if they occur during the warranty period.</div><div class="display_word">8. Points of Caution When actions are executed, the cli-command executes actions in ascending ID number order. When actions are executed, even if a command specified by the cli-command results in an execution error, the remaining commands are executed. If multiple triggers are activated simultaneously, then actions are executed in ascending order of schedule template ID number. If the trigger activation time elapses due to the time setting being set manually by the clock set command or being changed by NTP, then any existing triggers scheduled to be activated within 59 seconds of when the current time setting was changed will be activated. If the trigger activation time was changed backward manually by the clock set command or by NTP, then the time triggers are checked again starting from the time to which it was set back. This function can be used to periodically save the configuration, but periodic rewriting will consume ROM capacity more quickly. ROM failures due to frequent rewriting are not warranted for free repairs, even if they occur during the warranty period.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_schedule"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_schedule" doctitle="Schedule" link="#関連文書">9. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">9. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">9. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmp">SNMP</div><div class="search_word">snmp</div><div class="display_word">SNMP</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview setting snmp (simple network management protocol) makes it possible to monitor and change network management information for snmp management software. in this instance, this product will operate as an snmp agent. this product supports communication using snmpv1, snmpv2c, and snmpv3. in terms of management information bases (mib), it supports rfc1213 (mib-ii) and private mibs (yamaha switches). snmpv1 and snmpv2c notify the recipient of the group name (called a “community”), and communicate only with hosts that belong to that community. in this instance, different community names can be given for the two access modes, read-only and read-write. in this sense, community names function as a kind of password; but since community names are sent over a network using plain text, they carry inherent security risks. the use of snmpv3 is recommended when more secure communications are required. snmpv3 offers communication content authentication and encryption. snmpv3 does away with the concept of community and instead uses security models called “usm” (user-based security model) and “vacm” (view-based access control model). these models provide a higher level of security. this product does not use vacm for access control. snmp messages that notify the status of this product are called “traps.” this product transmits standard snmp traps. in snmpv1, trap requests that do not ask for an answer with the confirmation of receipt from the recipient are specified as the notification message format. however, with snmpv2c and snmpv3, either an “inform” request asking for an answer from the recipient, or a trap request can be selected. since this product does not specifically determine a default value for the read-only and community trap names used in snmpv1 and snmpv2c, you can specify a community name as appropriate. however, community names are sent over the network in plain text, so be careful to never use a login password or administrator password as the community name. by default, no access is possible in each snmp version. the transmission host for the trap is not set, so traps will not be sent anywhere. this product can restrict access to the snmp server. specifying access restrictions can restrict access from unintended hosts.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview Setting SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) makes it possible to monitor and change network management information for SNMP management software. In this instance, this product will operate as an SNMP agent. This product supports communication using SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. In terms of management information bases (MIB), it supports RFC1213 (MIB-II) and private MIBs (Yamaha switches). SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c notify the recipient of the group name (called a “community”), and communicate only with hosts that belong to that community. In this instance, different community names can be given for the two access modes, read-only and read-write. In this sense, community names function as a kind of password; but since community names are sent over a network using plain text, they carry inherent security risks. The use of SNMPv3 is recommended when more secure communications are required. SNMPv3 offers communication content authentication and encryption. SNMPv3 does away with the concept of community and instead uses security models called “USM” (User-based Security Model) and “VACM” (View-based Access Control Model). These models provide a higher level of security. This product does not use VACM for access control. SNMP messages that notify the status of this product are called “traps.” This product transmits standard SNMP traps. In SNMPv1, trap requests that do not ask for an answer with the confirmation of receipt from the recipient are specified as the notification message format. However, with SNMPv2c and SNMPv3, either an “inform” request asking for an answer from the recipient, or a trap request can be selected. Since this product does not specifically determine a default value for the read-only and community trap names used in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, you can specify a community name as appropriate. However, community names are sent over the network in plain text, so be careful to never use a login password or administrator password as the community name. By default, no access is possible in each SNMP version. The transmission host for the trap is not set, so traps will not be sent anywhere. This product can restrict access to the SNMP server. Specifying access restrictions can restrict access from unintended hosts.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the main characteristics of each snmp version and the snmp setting policies are explained below. for specific examples of settings, see “examples of command execution” below.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The main characteristics of each SNMP version and the SNMP setting policies are explained below. For specific examples of settings, see “Examples of Command Execution” below.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv1">3.1. SNMPv1</div><div class="search_word">3.1. snmpv1 this is authentication between the snmp manager and agent by using community names. the controlling device (this product) is divided and managed by zones called “communities”. accessing the mib objects community names specified using the snmp-server community command are used to permit access. access is possible from a vlan interface whose ip address has been specified. snmp traps the status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. the snmp-server enable trap command is used to specify the kind of trap to send.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. SNMPv1 This is authentication between the SNMP manager and agent by using community names. The controlling device (this product) is divided and managed by zones called “communities”. Accessing the MIB objects Community names specified using the snmp-server community command are used to permit access. Access is possible from a VLAN interface whose IP address has been specified. SNMP traps The status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. The snmp-server enable trap command is used to specify the kind of trap to send.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv2c">3.2. SNMPv2c</div><div class="search_word">3.2. snmpv2c as with snmpv1, community names are used for authentication between the snmp manager and agents. the snmp-server community command is used to specify the community names used to access switches by snmpv2c. the “getbulk” and “inform” requests are also now supported from this version. these requests are used to efficiently retrieve multiple mib objects, and to confirm replies to notification packets sent from this product. accessing the mib objects community names specified using the snmp-server community command are used to permit access. access is possible from a vlan interface whose ip address has been specified. snmp traps the status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. also, the settings of this command can be used to select whether the transmitted message format is a trap or inform request. inform requests are used to request confirmation of reply to the recipient.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. SNMPv2c As with SNMPv1, community names are used for authentication between the SNMP manager and agents. The snmp-server community command is used to specify the community names used to access switches by SNMPv2c. The “GetBulk” and “Inform” requests are also now supported from this version. These requests are used to efficiently retrieve multiple MIB objects, and to confirm replies to notification packets sent from this product. Accessing the MIB objects Community names specified using the snmp-server community command are used to permit access. Access is possible from a VLAN interface whose IP address has been specified. SNMP traps The status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. Also, the settings of this command can be used to select whether the transmitted message format is a trap or inform request. Inform requests are used to request confirmation of reply to the recipient.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv3">3.3. SNMPv3</div><div class="search_word">3.3. snmpv3 in addition to all of the functions offered in snmpv2, snmpv3 offers more robust security functions. snmpv3 can authenticate and encrypt snmp packets sent across the network to protect packets from eavesdropping, spoofing, falsification, replay attacks, and other risks and achieve security levels not possible with snmpv1 or snmpv2c functionality, such as community names or snmp manager ip addresses. security snmpv3 offers the following security functions. usm (user-based security model) usm is a model for maintaining security at the message level. it offers authentication and encryption based on shared key cryptography and prevents falsification of message streams. security level this product supports the following security levels. communications are always authenticated and encrypted. authpriv : authentication and encryption user authentication for authentication, hmac is used in the procedure to authenticate the integrity (whether data has been falsified or not) and the source. a hash is used in the authentication key to confirm whether the message has been falsified, and whether the sender is the user themselves. hmac-sha-96 is supported as the hash algorithm. encryption with snmpv3, snmp messages are encrypted for the purpose of preventing leakage of managed information. the aes128-cfb encryption scheme is supported. the snmp-server user command can be used to specify usernames, access privileges, and passwords. this product allows you to set up one readonly user and one readwrite user. vacm (view-based access control model) vacm is a model for controlling access to snmp messages. this product does not use vacm for access control, so all mib views are accessible. snmp traps the status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. in order to transmit a trap, the snmp-server user command must first be used to configure the user. also, the settings of this command can be used to select whether the transmitted message format is a trap or inform request. inform requests are used to request confirmation of reply to the recipient.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. SNMPv3 In addition to all of the functions offered in SNMPv2, SNMPv3 offers more robust security functions. SNMPv3 can authenticate and encrypt SNMP packets sent across the network to protect packets from eavesdropping, spoofing, falsification, replay attacks, and other risks and achieve security levels not possible with SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c functionality, such as community names or SNMP manager IP addresses. Security SNMPv3 offers the following security functions. USM (User-based Security Model) USM is a model for maintaining security at the message level. It offers authentication and encryption based on shared key cryptography and prevents falsification of message streams. Security level This product supports the following security levels. Communications are always authenticated and encrypted. AuthPriv : authentication and encryption User authentication For authentication, HMAC is used in the procedure to authenticate the integrity (whether data has been falsified or not) and the source. A hash is used in the authentication key to confirm whether the message has been falsified, and whether the sender is the user themselves. HMAC-SHA-96 is supported as the hash algorithm. Encryption With SNMPv3, SNMP messages are encrypted for the purpose of preventing leakage of managed information. The AES128-CFB encryption scheme is supported. The snmp-server user command can be used to specify usernames, access privileges, and passwords. This product allows you to set up one ReadOnly user and one ReadWrite user. VACM (View-based Access Control Model) VACM is a model for controlling access to SNMP messages. This product does not use VACM for access control, so all MIB views are accessible. SNMP traps The status of switches can be sent to hosts specified using the snmp-server host command. In order to transmit a trap, the snmp-server user command must first be used to configure the user. Also, the settings of this command can be used to select whether the transmitted message format is a trap or inform request. Inform requests are used to request confirmation of reply to the recipient.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpサーバーへのアクセス制限">3.4. Restricting SNMP server access</div><div class="search_word">3.4. restricting snmp server access hosts able to access the product’s snmp server can be specified using the snmp-server access command. access from unintended hosts can be restricted by only allowing access from the intended snmp manager. default settings accept access from all hosts. specify access restrictions based on the operating environment. for more information about access restrictions, refer to remote access control .</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Restricting SNMP server access Hosts able to access the product’s SNMP server can be specified using the snmp-server access command. Access from unintended hosts can be restricted by only allowing access from the intended SNMP manager. Default settings accept access from all hosts. Specify access restrictions based on the operating environment. For more information about access restrictions, refer to Remote Access Control .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmib">3.5. Private MIBs</div><div class="search_word">3.5. private mibs this product supports yamahasw, which is a proprietary private mib for switch management. this private mib allows the obtaining of information for yamaha’s proprietary functions, and for more detailed information about the switch. for information about supported private mibs and how to obtain private mibs, refer to snmp mib reference .</div><div class="display_word">3.5. Private MIBs This product supports yamahaSW, which is a proprietary private MIB for switch management. This private MIB allows the obtaining of information for Yamaha’s proprietary functions, and for more detailed information about the switch. For information about supported private MIBs and how to obtain private MIBs, refer to SNMP MIB Reference .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details on the commands, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set host that receives snmp notifications snmp-server host set notification type to transmit snmp-server enable trap set system contact snmp-server contact set system location snmp-server location set snmp community snmp-server community set snmp user snmp-server user specify snmp server access settings snmp-server access show snmp community information show snmp community show snmp user information show snmp user</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details on the commands, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Set host that receives SNMP notifications snmp-server host Set notification type to transmit snmp-server enable trap Set system contact snmp-server contact Set system location snmp-server location Set SNMP community snmp-server community Set SNMP user snmp-server user Specify SNMP server access settings snmp-server access Show SNMP community information show snmp community Show SNMP user information show snmp user</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv1-設定例">5.1. SNMPv1 setting example</div><div class="search_word">5.1. snmpv1 setting example this example makes snmpv1-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. set the read-only community name to “public”. set the trap destination as “192.168.100.11”, and set “snmptrapname” as the trap community name. hosts that can access communities named “public” are restricted to only 192.168.100.0/24. yamaha(config)# snmp-server community public ro                  　          ... 1yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.100.11 traps version 1 snmptrapname ... 2yamaha(config)# snmp-server access 192.168.100.0/24 community public         ... 3</div><div class="display_word">5.1. SNMPv1 setting example This example makes SNMPv1-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. Set the read-only community name to “public”. Set the trap destination as “192.168.100.11”, and set “snmptrapname” as the trap community name. Hosts that can access communities named “public” are restricted to only 192.168.100.0/24. Yamaha(config)# snmp-server community public ro                  　          ... 1Yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.100.11 traps version 1 snmptrapname ... 2Yamaha(config)# snmp-server access 192.168.100.0/24 community public         ... 3</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv2c-設定例">5.2. SNMPv2c setting example</div><div class="search_word">5.2. snmpv2c setting example this example makes snmpv2c-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. set the readable/writable community name as “private”. specify the notification message destination as “192.168.100.12”, the notification type as “inform” request format, and the notification destination community name as “snmpinformsname”. hosts that can access communities named “private” are restricted to only 192.168.100.12. yamaha(config)# snmp-server community private rw                  　               ...1yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.100.12 informs version 2c snmpinformsname ...2yamaha(config)# snmp-server access 192.168.100.12 community private                ...3</div><div class="display_word">5.2. SNMPv2c setting example This example makes SNMPv2c-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. Set the readable/writable community name as “private”. Specify the notification message destination as “192.168.100.12”, the notification type as “inform” request format, and the notification destination community name as “snmpinformsname”. Hosts that can access communities named “private” are restricted to only 192.168.100.12. Yamaha(config)# snmp-server community private rw                  　               ...1Yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.100.12 informs version 2c snmpinformsname ...2Yamaha(config)# snmp-server access 192.168.100.12 community private                ...3</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmpv3-設定例">5.3. SNMPv3 setting example</div><div class="search_word">5.3. snmpv3 setting example this example makes snmpv3-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. create a user “admin1” with the readwrite privilege. the authentication algorithm is fixed to “hmac-sha-96”. set the password “passwd1234”. the encryption algorithm is fixed to “aes128-cfb”. set the encryption password “passwd1234”. create a user “user1” with the readonly privilege. the authentication algorithm is fixed to “hmac-sha-96”. set the password “passwd5678”. the encryption algorithm is fixed to “aes128-cfb”. set the encryption password “passwd5678”. send notifications in trap format (without response confirmation) to 192.168.10.3. send notifications in inform request format to 192.168.20.3. yamaha(config)# snmp-server user admin1 admin auth sha passwd1234 priv aes passwd1234  ... 1yamaha(config)# snmp-server user user1 guest auth sha passwd5678 priv aes passwd5678   ... 2yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.10.13 traps version 3 priv admin1             ... 3yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.20.13 informs version 3 priv admin1           ... 4</div><div class="display_word">5.3. SNMPv3 setting example This example makes SNMPv3-based network monitoring possible under the following conditions. Create a user “admin1” with the ReadWrite privilege. The authentication algorithm is fixed to “HMAC-SHA-96”. Set the password “passwd1234”. The encryption algorithm is fixed to “AES128-CFB”. Set the encryption password “passwd1234”. Create a user “user1” with the ReadOnly privilege. The authentication algorithm is fixed to “HMAC-SHA-96”. Set the password “passwd5678”. The encryption algorithm is fixed to “AES128-CFB”. Set the encryption password “passwd5678”. Send notifications in trap format (without response confirmation) to 192.168.10.3. Send notifications in inform request format to 192.168.20.3. Yamaha(config)# snmp-server user admin1 admin auth sha passwd1234 priv aes passwd1234  ... 1Yamaha(config)# snmp-server user user1 guest auth sha passwd5678 priv aes passwd5678   ... 2Yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.10.13 traps version 3 priv admin1             ... 3Yamaha(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.20.13 informs version 3 priv admin1           ... 4</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution check the snmp version that can be used with the snmp manager beforehand. it is necessary to configure this product in accordance with the snmp version that will be used. the specifications of character strings for community name are as follows. when enclosed in “”, the character string in “” is used. the case where there is a character string outside the “” is not supported. the use of \ is not supported. the use of only double quotation marks is not supported.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution Check the SNMP version that can be used with the SNMP manager beforehand. It is necessary to configure this product in accordance with the SNMP version that will be used. The specifications of character strings for community name are as follows. When enclosed in “”, the character string in “” is used. The case where there is a character string outside the “” is not supported. The use of \ is not supported. The use of only double quotation marks is not supported.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_snmp"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_snmp" doctitle="SNMP" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation yamaha rtpro snmp yamaha rtpro private mib snmp mib reference remote access control</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation Yamaha RTpro SNMP Yamaha RTpro Private MIB SNMP MIB Reference Remote Access Control</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#syslog">SYSLOG</div><div class="search_word">syslog</div><div class="display_word">SYSLOG</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product provides the syslog functions shown below as a means to ascertain the operating state. functions to collect, reference, and delete the log that is accumulated inside this product functions for output to the telnet console simultaneously with logging functions for transmitting to a previously-registered notification destination (syslog server) simultaneously with logging logging, output to the telnet console, and notifications to the syslog server are performed according to the output level specified by the user. processing occurs only for the permitted messages. logging occurs in ram, and is automatically backed up to flash rom or can be backed up manually. notifications to the syslog server are done simultaneously with logging, but only if a syslog server has been registered.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product provides the SYSLOG functions shown below as a means to ascertain the operating state. Functions to collect, reference, and delete the log that is accumulated inside this product Functions for output to the TELNET console simultaneously with logging Functions for transmitting to a previously-registered notification destination (SYSLOG server) simultaneously with logging Logging, output to the TELNET console, and notifications to the SYSLOG server are performed according to the output level specified by the user. Processing occurs only for the permitted messages. Logging occurs in RAM, and is automatically backed up to flash ROM or can be backed up manually. Notifications to the SYSLOG server are done simultaneously with logging, but only if a SYSLOG server has been registered.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used none</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the syslog function is described below. logging occurs in ram, and can accumulate up to 1500 items. the following three methods for backing up to a flash rom are available. automatic backup performed every hour since system boot manual backup performed by the save logging command automatic backup for system restart that occurs due to reload command or firmware update the logs accumulated in ram can be viewed by the show logging command. the ram and flash rom logs can be deleted using the clear logging command. the log information in ram will not be deleted by execution of a backup. in addition, the logs backed up in the flash rom are expanded into ram when the system is started. therefore, even if the system is restarted using the reload command or firmware update, new logs will be accumulated as continuation of the logs at the previous startup. log transmission occurs only if the notification destination (syslog server) has been registered. you can use the logging host command to register up to two notification destinations. specify the notification destination either by ip address or fqdn. as the port number of the notification destination, the default port number 514 is used. (this setting cannot be freely set by the user.) the logging format command can be used to change the format of log notifications to not include the header portion (time stamp and host name). the following are log examples. without the format specified (no logging format) <134>jan  1 00:00:00 yamaha [     imi]:inf: configuration file is saved in "config0" with the format specified (logging format legacy) <134>[     imi]:inf: configuration file is saved in "config0" the level of log that is transmitted (syslog priority) can be set using the logging trap command. this product allows you to enable or disable output for each level of log. with the factory settings, the output level enables only information and error.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The SYSLOG function is described below. Logging occurs in RAM, and can accumulate up to 1500 items. The following three methods for backing up to a flash ROM are available. Automatic backup performed every hour since system boot Manual backup performed by the save logging command Automatic backup for system restart that occurs due to reload command or firmware update The logs accumulated in RAM can be viewed by the show logging command. The RAM and flash ROM logs can be deleted using the clear logging command. The log information in RAM will not be deleted by execution of a backup. In addition, the logs backed up in the flash ROM are expanded into RAM when the system is started. Therefore, even if the system is restarted using the reload command or firmware update, new logs will be accumulated as continuation of the logs at the previous startup. Log transmission occurs only if the notification destination (SYSLOG server) has been registered. You can use the logging host command to register up to two notification destinations. Specify the notification destination either by IP address or FQDN. As the port number of the notification destination, the default port number 514 is used. (This setting cannot be freely set by the user.) The logging format command can be used to change the format of log notifications to not include the header portion (time stamp and host name). The following are log examples. Without the format specified (no logging format) <134>Jan  1 00:00:00 Yamaha [     IMI]:inf: Configuration file is saved in "config0" With the format specified (logging format legacy) <134>[     IMI]:inf: Configuration file is saved in "config0" The level of log that is transmitted (SYSLOG priority) can be set using the logging trap command. This product allows you to enable or disable output for each level of log. With the factory settings, the output level enables only Information and Error.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#関連コマンド一覧">4. List of Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. list of related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. function name command name set log output level logging trap set log output destined to telnet console logging stdout set log notification destination (syslog server) logging host change the log notification format logging format back up log save logging clear log clear logging show log show logging</div><div class="display_word">4. List of Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Function name Command name Set log output level logging trap Set log output destined to TELNET console logging stdout Set log notification destination (SYSLOG server) logging host Change the log notification format logging format Back up log save logging Clear log clear logging Show log show logging</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#コマンド設定例">5. Examples of Command Settings</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command settings enable debug-level log output, and start log output to the syslog server (192.168.1.100). also output informational-level log to the telnet console. yamaha(config)# logging trap debug (1) yamaha(config)# logging host 192.168.1.100 (2) yamaha(config)# logging stdout info (3) 1 enable the debug-level log output 2 register a syslog server 3 output an informational-level log to the telnet console stop notifications to the syslog server. yamaha(config)# no logging host save and show the accumulated log information. yamaha# save logging (1) yamaha# show logging (2) 2018/10/05 15:58:47:[    l2ms]:inf: start l2ms(agent)2018/10/05 15:58:47:[    vlan]:inf: interface vlan1 changed state to up2018/10/05 15:58:47:[      if]:inf: interface port1.4 changed state to up (10-half)2018/10/05 15:58:49:[    l2ms]:inf: start management by manager(00a0.dec9.d6d2)2018/10/05 15:59:32:[   dhcpc]:inf: dhcp gets ip address: 192.168.1.92018/10/05 15:59:46:[ session]:inf: login succeeded as (noname) for telnet: 192.168.1.6 : 1 save the log in ram to rom 2 show the accumulated logs clear the accumulated log information. yamaha# clear logging (1) yamaha# show logging (2) (3) 1 clear all accumulated logs 2 show the logs 3 nothing is shown because they have been erased</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Settings Enable debug-level log output, and start log output to the SYSLOG server (192.168.1.100). Also output informational-level log to the TELNET console. Yamaha(config)# logging trap debug (1) Yamaha(config)# logging host 192.168.1.100 (2) Yamaha(config)# logging stdout info (3) 1 Enable the debug-level log output 2 Register a SYSLOG server 3 Output an informational-level log to the TELNET console Stop notifications to the SYSLOG server. Yamaha(config)# no logging host Save and show the accumulated log information. Yamaha# save logging (1) Yamaha# show logging (2) 2018/10/05 15:58:47:[    L2MS]:inf: Start L2MS(Agent)2018/10/05 15:58:47:[    VLAN]:inf: Interface vlan1 changed state to up2018/10/05 15:58:47:[      IF]:inf: Interface port1.4 changed state to up (10-half)2018/10/05 15:58:49:[    L2MS]:inf: Start management by manager(00a0.dec9.d6d2)2018/10/05 15:59:32:[   DHCPC]:inf: DHCP gets IP address: 192.168.1.92018/10/05 15:59:46:[ SESSION]:inf: Login succeeded as (noname) for TELNET: 192.168.1.6 : 1 Save the log in RAM to ROM 2 Show the accumulated logs Clear the accumulated log information. Yamaha# clear logging (1) Yamaha# show logging (2) (3) 1 Clear all accumulated logs 2 Show the logs 3 Nothing is shown because they have been erased</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_syslog"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_syslog" doctitle="SYSLOG" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#時刻管理">Time Management</div><div class="search_word">time management</div><div class="display_word">Time Management</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product provides the functions shown below for managing the date and time. manual (user-configured) date/time information setting function automatic date/time setting information function via network time zone setting function note that a function to set summertime (dst: daylight saving time) is not provided.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product provides the functions shown below for managing the date and time. Manual (user-configured) date/time information setting function Automatic date/time setting information function via network Time zone setting function Note that a function to set summertime (DST: Daylight Saving Time) is not provided.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used utc（coordinated universal time） this is an official time used when recording worldwide times. utc is used as a basis to determine standard time in all countries around the world. for instance, japan (jst, or japan standard time) is nine hours ahead of coordinated universal time, and is thus shown as “+0900 (jst)”. sntp（simple network time protocol） this is a simple protocol to correct clocks by using sntp packets. this protocol is defined in rfc4330.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used UTC（Coordinated Universal Time） This is an official time used when recording worldwide times. UTC is used as a basis to determine standard time in all countries around the world. For instance, Japan (JST, or Japan standard time) is nine hours ahead of Coordinated Universal Time, and is thus shown as “+0900 (JST)”. SNTP（Simple Network Time Protocol） This is a simple protocol to correct clocks by using SNTP packets. This protocol is defined in RFC4330.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#日付時刻の手動設定">3.1. Manually setting the date and time</div><div class="search_word">3.1. manually setting the date and time use the clock set command to directly enter clock setting values.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Manually setting the date and time Use the clock set command to directly enter clock setting values.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#日付時刻の自動設定">3.2. Automatically setting the date and time</div><div class="search_word">3.2. automatically setting the date and time date and time information is collected from a specified time server, and set in this product. defined in rfc4330, sntp (simple network time protocol) is used as a communication protocol. up to two time servers can be specified using an ipv4 address, ipv6 address, or fully qualified domain name (fqdn). port number 123 is used for the sntp client. (this setting cannot be changed by the user.) the ntpdate command can be used to select one of two methods for automatically setting date and time settings. one-shot update (a function to update when a command is inputted) interval update (a function to update in a 1–24-hour cycle from command input) if clock settings are synchronized with two time servers specified, queries are processed in the order they are displayed by the show ntpdate command, which is ntp server 1 and then ntp server 2. queries to ntp server 2 are only processed if synchronization with ntp server 1 fails. by default, interval updates are not performed. if a time server is specified and interval update is enabled, but the default time cannot be set, the time server will be queried one minute after the port is linked up, regardless of the interval cycle time. synchronization is blocked during command execution, and an error message is outputted if a timeout occurs.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Automatically setting the date and time Date and time information is collected from a specified time server, and set in this product. Defined in RFC4330, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used as a communication protocol. Up to two time servers can be specified using an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or fully qualified domain name (FQDN). Port number 123 is used for the SNTP client. (This setting cannot be changed by the user.) The ntpdate command can be used to select one of two methods for automatically setting date and time settings. One-shot update (a function to update when a command is inputted) Interval update (a function to update in a 1–24-hour cycle from command input) If clock settings are synchronized with two time servers specified, queries are processed in the order they are displayed by the show ntpdate command, which is NTP server 1 and then NTP server 2. Queries to NTP server 2 are only processed if synchronization with NTP server 1 fails. By default, interval updates are not performed. If a time server is specified and interval update is enabled, but the default time cannot be set, the time server will be queried one minute after the port is linked up, regardless of the interval cycle time. Synchronization is blocked during command execution, and an error message is outputted if a timeout occurs.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#タイムゾーンの設定">3.3. Time zone setting</div><div class="search_word">3.3. time zone setting in order to manage the time for the region considered as the “base of daily life”, the “clock timezone” command is used to manage the time zone of the users, and reflect this into the time. the time zone can be set in ±1 hour increments for coordinated universal time (utc), from -12 hours to +13 hours. the default time zone value for this product is +9.0 .</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Time zone setting In order to manage the time for the region considered as the “base of daily life”, the “clock timezone” command is used to manage the time zone of the users, and reflect this into the time. The time zone can be set in ±1 hour increments for Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), from -12 hours to +13 hours. The default time zone value for this product is +9.0 .</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set clock manually clock set set time zone clock timezone show current time show clock set ntp server ntpdate server synchronize time from ntp server (one-shot update) ntpdate oneshot synchronize time from ntp server (update interval) ntpdate interval show ntp server time synchronization settings show ntpdate</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Set clock manually clock set Set time zone clock timezone Show current time show clock Set NTP server ntpdate server Synchronize time from NTP server (one-shot update) ntpdate oneshot Synchronize time from NTP server (update interval) ntpdate interval Show NTP server time synchronization settings show ntpdate</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#時刻の手動設定">5.1. Set clock manually</div><div class="search_word">5.1. set clock manually in this example, the time zone is set to jst and the current time is set to 2018.11.01 15:50:59 . yamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#clock timezone jst (1) yamaha(config)#exityamaha#clock set 15:50:59 nov 1 2018 (2) yamaha#show clock (3) 15:50:59 jst thu jan 1 2018 1 time zone setting 2 time settings 3 show current time</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Set clock manually In this example, the time zone is set to JST and the current time is set to 2018.11.01 15:50:59 . Yamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#clock timezone JST (1) Yamaha(config)#exitYamaha#clock set 15:50:59 Nov 1 2018 (2) Yamaha#show clock (3) 15:50:59 JST Thu Jan 1 2018 1 Time zone setting 2 Time settings 3 Show current time</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#時刻の自動設定">5.2. Automatically setting the time</div><div class="search_word">5.2. automatically setting the time in this example, the time zone is set to +9.00 and the local address 192.168.1.1 and ntp.nict.jp are specified as the ntp servers. also, the ntp server update cycle is changed to once every 24 hours . yamaha#configure terminalyamaha(config)#clock timezone +9:00 (1) yamaha(config)#ntpdate server ipv4 192.168.1.1 (2) yamaha(config)#ntpdate server name ntp.nict.jp (3) yamaha(config)#ntpdate interval 24 (4) yamaha(config)#exityamaha#show clock (5) 10:03:20 gmt+9:00 wed oct 10 2018yamaha#show ntpdate (6) ntp server 1 : 192.168.1.1ntp server 2 : ntp.nict.jpadjust time : wed oct 10 11:46:30 2018 + interval 24 hoursync server : 192.168.1.1 1 time zone setting 2 set ntp server 3 set ntp server 4 set ntp server update cycle to 24 hours 5 show current time 6 show ntp time synchronization settings</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Automatically setting the time In this example, the time zone is set to +9.00 and the local address 192.168.1.1 and ntp.nict.jp are specified as the NTP servers. Also, the NTP server update cycle is changed to once every 24 hours . Yamaha#configure terminalYamaha(config)#clock timezone +9:00 (1) Yamaha(config)#ntpdate server ipv4 192.168.1.1 (2) Yamaha(config)#ntpdate server name ntp.nict.jp (3) Yamaha(config)#ntpdate interval 24 (4) Yamaha(config)#exitYamaha#show clock (5) 10:03:20 GMT+9:00 Wed Oct 10 2018Yamaha#show ntpdate (6) NTP server 1 : 192.168.1.1NTP server 2 : ntp.nict.jpadjust time : Wed Oct 10 11:46:30 2018 + interval 24 hoursync server : 192.168.1.1 1 Time zone setting 2 Set NTP server 3 Set NTP server 4 Set NTP server update cycle to 24 hours 5 Show current time 6 Show NTP time synchronization settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="oam_oam_time"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_time" doctitle="Time" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation rfc 4330: simple network time protocol (sntp) version 4 for ipv4, ipv6 and osi</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation RFC 4330: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 4 for IPv4, IPv6 and OSI</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#ユーザーアカウント管理">User Account Management</div><div class="search_word">user account management</div><div class="display_word">User Account Management</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product provides the functions shown below for managing user accounts. functions for setting user information functions for user authentication by user name and password</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product provides the functions shown below for managing user accounts. Functions for setting user information Functions for user authentication by user name and password</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used default administrative user users with administrator rights specified in default factory settings. username: admin and password: admin administrative user users with administrator rights. administrative users are users with the privilege option switched on using the username command. general user users without administrator rights and that require entering the privileged password in order to access the privileged exec mode. general users are users with the privilege option switched off using the username command. privileged password the password used to assign administrator rights and specified using the enable password command. unnamed user users with a blank username setting. rev. 1.03.12 or earlier firmware versions permitted using unnamed user accounts under factory default settings, but unnamed user accounts were eliminated for newer firmware versions with stronger user account management functionality.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Default Administrative User Users with administrator rights specified in default factory settings. Username: admin and password: admin Administrative User Users with administrator rights. Administrative users are users with the privilege option switched on using the username command. General User Users without administrator rights and that require entering the privileged password in order to access the privileged EXEC mode. General users are users with the privilege option switched off using the username command. Privileged Password The password used to assign administrator rights and specified using the enable password command. Unnamed User Users with a blank username setting. Rev. 1.03.12 or earlier firmware versions permitted using unnamed user accounts under factory default settings, but unnamed user accounts were eliminated for newer firmware versions with stronger user account management functionality.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#ユーザーアカウント機能の設定">3.1. User account function settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1. user account function settings</div><div class="display_word">3.1. User account function settings</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#ユーザー情報の設定">3.1.1. User information settings</div><div class="search_word">3.1.1. user information settings use the username command to specify the following user information. user name password assignment of administrator rights with factory default settings, the administrative username and password are both “admin”.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.1. User information settings Use the username command to specify the following user information. User name Password Assignment of administrator rights With factory default settings, the administrative username and password are both “admin”.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#特権パスワードの設定">3.1.2. Setting the privileged password</div><div class="search_word">3.1.2. setting the privileged password the privileged password is set using the enable password command. the privileged password is used for the following applications. to initialize devices to transition users without administrator rights to the privileged exec mode by using the console to use a tftp client to send a config file or firmware to the switch “ admin ” is the privileged password specified in default factory settings, but the operations described above cannot be performed if the privileged password is the default setting. to perform any of those operations, change the privileged password in advance.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.2. Setting the privileged password The privileged password is set using the enable password command. The privileged password is used for the following applications. To initialize devices To transition users without administrator rights to the privileged EXEC mode by using the console To use a TFTP client to send a config file or firmware to the switch “ admin ” is the privileged password specified in default factory settings, but the operations described above cannot be performed if the privileged password is the default setting. To perform any of those operations, change the privileged password in advance.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#管理者権限">3.1.3. Administrator rights</div><div class="search_word">3.1.3. administrator rights user login operations can be restricted depending on whether or not the user has administrator rights. administrative users (users with administrator rights) can change device settings or update firmware. general users (users without administrator rights) can only view device information without changing any settings. specifically, the following differences apply depending on whether or not the user has administrator rights. cli web gui administrative user (with rights) general user (without rights) administrative user (with rights) general user (without rights) show device information yes yes yes yes view settings yes no yes limited (*1) change settings yes no yes no restart or initialize devices yes no yes no update firmware yes no yes no *1: cannot view passwords or other security-related settings. once the enable command is executed and the privileged password is entered, the privileged exec mode can be accessed to perform operations equivalent to an administrative user, even if logged in as a general user. for information about the rights required to execute each command, refer to the command reference.</div><div class="display_word">3.1.3. Administrator rights User login operations can be restricted depending on whether or not the user has administrator rights. Administrative users (users with administrator rights) can change device settings or update firmware. General users (users without administrator rights) can only view device information without changing any settings. Specifically, the following differences apply depending on whether or not the user has administrator rights. CLI Web GUI Administrative user (with rights) General user (without rights) Administrative user (with rights) General user (without rights) Show device information Yes Yes Yes Yes View settings Yes No Yes Limited (*1) Change settings Yes No Yes No Restart or initialize devices Yes No Yes No Update firmware Yes No Yes No *1: Cannot view passwords or other security-related settings. Once the enable command is executed and the privileged password is entered, the privileged EXEC mode can be accessed to perform operations equivalent to an administrative user, even if logged in as a general user. For information about the rights required to execute each command, refer to the command reference.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#パスワードの暗号化">3.1.4. Encrypt password</div><div class="search_word">3.1.4. encrypt password specified passwords can be encrypted using the password-encryption command. to encrypt a password, specify the password-encryption enable setting. once a password has been encrypted, it cannot be restored to an unencrypted character string state, even by specifying the password-encryption disable setting. encryption applies to the passwords specified by the following commands. enable password command username command</div><div class="display_word">3.1.4. Encrypt password Specified passwords can be encrypted using the password-encryption command. To encrypt a password, specify the password-encryption enable setting. Once a password has been encrypted, it cannot be restored to an unencrypted character string state, even by specifying the password-encryption disable setting. Encryption applies to the passwords specified by the following commands. enable password command username command</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#ユーザーの認証">3.2. User authentication</div><div class="search_word">3.2. user authentication</div><div class="display_word">3.2. User authentication</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#コンソールにログインする場合">3.2.1. When logging in to the console</div><div class="search_word">3.2.1. when logging in to the console when the following login prompt appears after connecting to the console, log in by entering the specified username and password. username:password: for factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). after using “admin” to log in, the password must be changed to specify a new password. username: adminpassword: (1) swx2210p-10g rev.1.03.13 (fri aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  copyright (c) 2018-2024 yamaha corporation. all rights reserved.please change the default password for admin.new password: (2) new password(confirm): (3) saving ...succeeded to write configuration 1 enter “admin” 2 enter the new password. 3 enter the same password again. if an incorrect password is entered three successive times, login by that same user is restricted for one minute. username: userpassword:% incorrect username or password, or login as user is restricted.password:% incorrect username or password, or login as user is restricted.password:% incorrect username or password, or blocked upon 3 failed login attempts for user.% please try again later. if a login restriction occurs, the following message is output in the info level syslog. connection method output message serial console login access from serial console as \{username} was restricted telnet login access from telnet as \{username} was restricted: \{ip address} web gui login access from http as \{username} was restricted: \{ip address} note that if a user with a login restriction enters an incorrect password again, the remaining time until the restriction is cancelled is reset to one minute again.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.1. When logging in to the console When the following login prompt appears after connecting to the console, log in by entering the specified username and password. Username:Password: For factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). After using “admin” to log in, the password must be changed to specify a new password. Username: adminPassword: (1) SWX2210P-10G Rev.1.03.13 (Fri Aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  Copyright (c) 2018-2024 Yamaha Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Please change the default password for admin.New Password: (2) New Password(Confirm): (3) Saving ...Succeeded to write configuration 1 Enter “admin” 2 Enter the new password. 3 Enter the same password again. If an incorrect password is entered three successive times, login by that same user is restricted for one minute. Username: UserPassword:% Incorrect username or password, or login as User is restricted.Password:% Incorrect username or password, or login as User is restricted.Password:% Incorrect username or password, or blocked upon 3 failed login attempts for User.% Please try again later. If a login restriction occurs, the following message is output in the INFO level SYSLOG. Connection method Output message Serial console Login access from serial console as \{username} was restricted TELNET Login access from TELNET as \{username} was restricted: \{IP address} Web GUI Login access from HTTP as \{username} was restricted: \{IP address} Note that if a user with a login restriction enters an incorrect password again, the remaining time until the restriction is cancelled is reset to one minute again.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#webguiにログインする場合">3.2.2. When logging in to the web GUI</div><div class="search_word">3.2.2. when logging in to the web gui when the following login form appears after accessing the web gui, log in by entering the specified username and password. for factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). then specify a new password because the login password must be changed after logging in with factory settings.</div><div class="display_word">3.2.2. When logging in to the web GUI When the following login form appears after accessing the web GUI, log in by entering the specified username and password. For factory default settings, log in by entering “admin” as the default administrative username (and  “admin” as the password). Then specify a new password because the login password must be changed after logging in with factory settings.</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands setting the privileged password enable password encrypt password password-encryption set user username show user information show users</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Setting the privileged password enable password Encrypt password password-encryption Set user username Show user information show users</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#管理者パスワードを設定する">5.1. Setting the administrator password</div><div class="search_word">5.1. setting the administrator password specify yamaha_admin as the administrator password. yamaha>enableyamaha#configure terminalenter configuration commands, one per line.  end with cntl/z.yamaha(config)#enable password yamaha_admin</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Setting the administrator password Specify yamaha_admin as the administrator password. Yamaha>enableYamaha#configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line.  End with CNTL/Z.Yamaha(config)#enable password yamaha_admin</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#ユーザーを追加する">5.2. Adding a user</div><div class="search_word">5.2. adding a user grant privilege options to the user yamaha , and assign the password yamaha_pass . yamaha#configure terminalenter configuration commands, one per line.  end with cntl/z.yamaha(config)#username yamaha privilege on password yamaha_passyamaha(config)#exityamaha#exitusername: yamahapassword:swx2210p-10g rev.1.03.13 (fri aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  copyright (c) 2018-2024 yamaha corporation. all rights reserved.yamaha>enableyamaha#</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Adding a user Grant privilege options to the user yamaha , and assign the password yamaha_pass . Yamaha#configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line.  End with CNTL/Z.Yamaha(config)#username yamaha privilege on password yamaha_passYamaha(config)#exitYamaha#exitUsername: yamahaPassword:SWX2210P-10G Rev.1.03.13 (Fri Aug  2 19:08:24 2024)  Copyright (c) 2018-2024 Yamaha Corporation. All Rights Reserved.Yamaha>enableYamaha#</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if no administrative user (user with administrator rights) exists in startup-config when the product is booted, then a default administrative user (with username “admin” and password “admin”) will be added automatically. for example, that would occur in the following case. product is booted with factory default settings configured firmware is updated to a newer version than rev. 1.03.12 after the product was operated using rev. 1.03.12 or older firmware and only unnamed users. if a user with no password is specified in startup-config when the product is booted, then a password with the same character string as the username will be added automatically. for example, that would occur in the following case. firmware is updated to a newer version than rev. 1.03.12 after rev. 1.03.12 or older firmware was used to specify users with no password. setting with rev. 1.03.12 or earlier firmware version username yamaha1username yamaha2 privilege on setting after updating firmware to a newer version than rev. 1.03.12 username yamaha1 password yamaha1username yamaha2 privilege on password yamaha2 if the password (admin) for the default administrative user admin is left unchanged, then the following restrictions are applied. this product cannot be accessed by telnet, http, or https from a network segment other than a vlan where an ipv4 or ipv6 address is set. login by users other than the default administrative user is not permitted. username: yamahapassword:% please login as user "admin".</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If no administrative user (user with administrator rights) exists in startup-config when the product is booted, then a default administrative user (with username “admin” and password “admin”) will be added automatically. For example, that would occur in the following case. Product is booted with factory default settings configured Firmware is updated to a newer version than Rev. 1.03.12 after the product was operated using Rev. 1.03.12 or older firmware and only unnamed users. If a user with no password is specified in startup-config when the product is booted, then a password with the same character string as the username will be added automatically. For example, that would occur in the following case. Firmware is updated to a newer version than Rev. 1.03.12 after Rev. 1.03.12 or older firmware was used to specify users with no password. Setting with Rev. 1.03.12 or earlier firmware version username yamaha1username yamaha2 privilege on Setting after updating firmware to a newer version than Rev. 1.03.12 username yamaha1 password yamaha1username yamaha2 privilege on password yamaha2 If the password (admin) for the default administrative user admin is left unchanged, then the following restrictions are applied. This product cannot be accessed by TELNET, HTTP, or HTTPS from a network segment other than a VLAN where an IPv4 or IPv6 address is set. Login by users other than the default administrative user is not permitted. Username: yamahaPassword:% Please login as user "admin".</div></div><div id="oam_oam_user_account"><div class="search_title" docfname="oam_oam_user_account" doctitle="User" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation remote access control</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation Remote Access Control</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmp-mibリファレンス">SNMP MIB Reference</div><div class="search_word">snmp mib reference</div><div class="display_word">SNMP MIB Reference</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#snmp-mib一覧">1. SNMP MIB List</div><div class="search_word">1. snmp mib list the snmp mibs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div><div class="display_word">1. SNMP MIB List The SNMP MIBs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#mibツリー">1.1. MIB tree</div><div class="search_word">1.1. mib tree the mib tree for mib groups that are supported by this product are shown below. iso(1)   |   +--std(0)   ||   |+--iso8802(8802)   ||   |+--ieee802dot1(1)   ||   |+--ieee802dot1mibs(1)   ||   |+--lldpmib(2)   ||   |+--lldpobjects(1)           (lldp information)   |   +--org(3)      |      +--dod(6)         |         +--internet(1)            |            +--mgmt(2)            ||            |+--mib-2(1)            ||            |+--system(1)           (system information)            ||            |+--interfaces(2)       (interface information)            ||            |+--at(3)               (mapping information for network addresses and physical addresses)            ||            |+--dot1dbridge(17)     (dot1dbridge information)            ||            |+--ifmib(31)           (additional information for interface)            ||            |+--entitymib(47)       (entity information)            ||            |+--powerethernet(105)  (poe information)            |            +--private(4)               |               +--enterprises(1)                  |                  +--yamaha(1182)                     |                     +--yamahasw(3)                  (private mib yamaha switch information)                        |                        +--yamahaswhardware(1)       (hardware information)                        |                        +--yamahaswfirmware(2)       (firmware information)                        |                        +--yamahaswpowerethernet(10) (poe information)                        |                        +--yamahaswloopdetect(11)    (loop detection information)</div><div class="display_word">1.1. MIB tree The MIB tree for MIB groups that are supported by this product are shown below. iso(1)   |   +--std(0)   ||   |+--iso8802(8802)   ||   |+--ieee802dot1(1)   ||   |+--ieee802dot1mibs(1)   ||   |+--lldpMIB(2)   ||   |+--lldpObjects(1)           (LLDP information)   |   +--org(3)      |      +--dod(6)         |         +--internet(1)            |            +--mgmt(2)            ||            |+--mib-2(1)            ||            |+--system(1)           (system information)            ||            |+--interfaces(2)       (interface information)            ||            |+--at(3)               (mapping information for network addresses and physical addresses)            ||            |+--dot1dBridge(17)     (dot1dBridge information)            ||            |+--ifMIB(31)           (additional information for interface)            ||            |+--entityMIB(47)       (entity information)            ||            |+--powerEthernet(105)  (PoE information)            |            +--private(4)               |               +--enterprises(1)                  |                  +--yamaha(1182)                     |                     +--yamahaSW(3)                  (private MIB Yamaha switch information)                        |                        +--yamahaSWHardware(1)       (hardware information)                        |                        +--yamahaSWFirmware(2)       (firmware information)                        |                        +--yamahaSWPowerEthernet(10) (PoE information)                        |                        +--yamahaSWLoopDetect(11)    (Loop detection information)</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#標準mib一覧">1.2. Standard MIB list</div><div class="search_word">1.2. standard mib list the standard mibs that are supported are shown below. mib group summary lldpmib group lldp information system group system information interface group interface information at group mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses dot1dbridge group dot1dbridge information ifmib group additional information for interface entitymib group entity information powerethernetmib group poe information</div><div class="display_word">1.2. Standard MIB list The standard MIBs that are supported are shown below. MIB group Summary lldpMIB group LLDP information system group System information interface group Interface information at group Mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses dot1dBridge group dot1dBridge information ifMIB group Additional information for interface entityMIB group Entity information powerEthernetMIB group PoE information</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmib一覧">1.3. Private MIB list</div><div class="search_word">1.3. private mib list private mibs that are supported are shown below. all of this information is related to yamaha switches. mib group summary yamahaswhardware group hardware information yamahaswfirmware group firmware information yamahaswpowerethernet group poe information yamahaswloopdetect group loop detection information</div><div class="display_word">1.3. Private MIB list Private MIBs that are supported are shown below. All of this information is related to Yamaha switches. MIB group Summary yamahaSWHardware group Hardware information yamahaSWFirmware group Firmware information yamahaSWPowerEthernet group PoE information yamahaSWLoopDetect group Loop detection information</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#標準mibトラップ一覧">1.4. Standard MIB trap list</div><div class="search_word">1.4. standard mib trap list the standard mib traps that are supported are shown below. trap summary coldstart power off/on notification warmstart reload notification linkdown linkdown notification linkup linkup notification authenticationfailure notification of failed authentication pethpseportonoffnotification poe port status change notification pethmainpowerusageonnotification notification that the power consumption has exceeded the threshold value pethmainpowerusageoffnotification notification that the power consumption has fallen below the threshold value</div><div class="display_word">1.4. Standard MIB trap list The standard MIB traps that are supported are shown below. Trap Summary coldStart Power OFF/ON notification warmStart Reload notification linkDown Linkdown notification linkUp Linkup notification authenticationFailure Notification of failed authentication pethPsePortOnOffNotification PoE port status change notification pethMainPowerUsageOnNotification Notification that the power consumption has exceeded the threshold value pethMainPowerUsageOffNotification Notification that the power consumption has fallen below the threshold value</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmibトラップ一覧">1.5. Private MIB trap list</div><div class="search_word">1.5. private mib trap list private mibs traps that are supported are shown below. trap summary yshtemperaturestatusnormaltrap normal temperature status notification yshtemperaturestatuswarningtrap warning temperature status notification yshtemperaturestatuserrortrap error temperature status notification yshfanstoppedtrap fan stopped notification yshfanspeeduptrap increased fan rpm notification yshfanspeeddowntrap decreased fan rpm notification yspesupplyporttrap poe port power supply start notification yspeterminateporttrap poe port power supply stop notification yspeguardbandstatetrap guard band status change notification yspeporterrortrap poe port error detection/removal notification yspeunitfailuretrap poe unit power supply abnormality notification ysldportdetectlooptrap loop detection notification ysldportresolvelooptrap loop detection cancellation notification</div><div class="display_word">1.5. Private MIB trap list Private MIBs traps that are supported are shown below. Trap Summary yshTemperatureStatusNormalTrap Normal temperature status notification yshTemperatureStatusWarningTrap Warning temperature status notification yshTemperatureStatusErrorTrap Error temperature status notification yshFanStoppedTrap Fan stopped notification yshFanSpeedUpTrap Increased fan RPM notification yshFanSpeedDownTrap Decreased fan RPM notification yspeSupplyPortTrap PoE port power supply start notification yspeTerminatePortTrap PoE port power supply stop notification yspeGuardBandStateTrap Guard band status change notification yspePortErrorTrap PoE port error detection/removal notification yspeUnitFailureTrap PoE unit power supply abnormality notification ysldPortDetectLoopTrap Loop detection notification ysldPortResolveLoopTrap Loop detection cancellation notification</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used mib access classification the mib access used in subsequent explanations is described below. mib access classification access name description r/o access to the mib is read-only r/w access to the mib is read-write r/nw although the access to the mib is read-write as per the standards, it is read-only on this product r/c access to the mib is read-create r/nc although the access to the mib is read-create as per the standards, it is read-only on this product n/a the mib cannot be retrieved note: may be used as additional information for traps (variable-bindings)</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used MIB access classification The MIB access used in subsequent explanations is described below. MIB access classification Access name Description R/O Access to the MIB is read-only R/W Access to the MIB is read-write R/NW Although the access to the MIB is read-write as per the standards, it is read-only on this product R/C Access to the MIB is read-create R/NC Although the access to the MIB is read-create as per the standards, it is read-only on this product N/A The MIB cannot be retrieved Note: May be used as additional information for traps (variable-bindings)</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmib入手方法">3. Obtaining a Private MIB</div><div class="search_word">3. obtaining a private mib private mib files may be acquired from here .</div><div class="display_word">3. Obtaining a Private MIB Private MIB files may be acquired from here .</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#標準mib">4. Standard MIBs</div><div class="search_word">4. standard mibs standard mibs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div><div class="display_word">4. Standard MIBs Standard MIBs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#lldpmibグループ">4.1. lldpMIB group</div><div class="search_word">4.1. lldpmib group this mib is related to lldp information. the syntax defined for the lldpmib group is shown below. syntax defined in the lldpmib group syntax definition lldpchassisidsubtype integer * chassiscomponent(1) * interfacealias(2) * portcomponent(3) * macaddress(4) * networkaddress(5) * interfacename(6) * local(7) lldpchassisid octet string (size (1..255)) lldpportidsubtype integer * interfacealias(1) * portcomponent(2) * macaddress(3) * networkaddress(4) * interfacename(5) * agentcircuitid(6) * local(7) lldpportid octet string (size (1..255)) lldpsystemcapabilitiesmap bits * other(0) * repeater(1) * bridge(2) * wlanaccesspoint(3) * router(4) * telephone(5) * docsiscabledevice(6) * stationonly(7) lldpportnumber integer32 (1..4096) lldppowerportclass integer * pclasspse(1) * pclasspd(2) lldpxmeddeviceclass integer * notdefined(0) * endpointclass1(1) * endpointclass2(2) * endpointclass3(3) * networkconnectivity(4) lldpxmedcapabilities integer * capabilities(0) * networkpolicy(1) * location(2) * extendedpse(3) * extendedpd(4) * inventory(5) the lldpmib group is divided into subgroups, such as shown below. lldpobjects(1)     |     +--lldpconfiguration(1)     |     +--lldpstatistics(2)     |     +--lldplocalsystemdata(3)     |     +--lldpremotesystemsdata(4)     |     +--lldpextensions(5)        |        +--lldpxdot3mib(4623)        ||        |+--lldpxdot3objects(1)        ||        |+--lldpxdot3config(1)        ||        |+--lldpxdot3localdata(2)        ||        |+--lldpxdot3remotedata(3)        |        +--lldpxmedmib(4795)           |           +--lldpxmedobjects(1)              |              +--lldpxmedconfig(1)              |              +--lldpxmedlocaldata(2)              |              +--lldpxmedremotedata(3) lldpconfiguration group mib name oid access syntax description lldpportconfigtable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6 n/a table of information for each port lldpportconfigentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1 n/a index * lldpportconfigportnum lldpportconfigadminstatus 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.2 r/w integer * txonly(1) * rxonly(2) * txandrx(3) * disabled(4) lldp transmission/reception status lldpportconfignotificationenable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.3 n/a truthval lldp notification status lldpportconfigtlvstxenable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.4 r/nw bits * portdesc(0) * sysname(1) * sysdesc(2) * syscap(3) basic management tlv transmission item lldpconfigmanaddrtable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7 n/a table of ports on which to transmit management address tlvs lldpconfigmanaddrentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7.1 n/a index * lldplocmanaddrsubtype * lldplocmanaddr lldpconfigmanaddrportstxenable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7.1.1 r/w lldpportlist ports on which to transmit management address tlvs lldpstatistics group mib name oid access syntax description lldpstatsremtableslastchangetime 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.1 r/o timeticks time from system initialization until remote data update lldpstatsremtablesinserts 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.2 r/o integer (0..4294967295) total number of entries added to the remote device management table lldpstatsremtablesdeletes 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.3 r/o integer (0..4294967295) total number of entries deleted from the remote device management table lldpstatsremtablesdrops 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.4 r/o integer (0..4294967295) total number of entries that could not be specified in the remote device management table lldpstatsremtablesageouts 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.5 r/o integer (0..4294967295) total number of entries that exceeded the ttl time (aged out) and were deleted from the remote device management table lldpstatstxporttable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6 n/a table of information for each port lldpstatstxportentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1 n/a index * lldpstatstxportnum lldpstatstxportnum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1.1 n/a lldpportnumber lldpstatstxportframestotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1.2 r/o integer (0..4294967295) total number of lldp frames transmitted lldpstatsrxporttable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7 n/a table of information for each port lldpstatsrxportentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1 n/a index * lldpstatsrxportnum lldpstatsrxportnum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.1 n/a lldpportnumber lldpstatsrxportframesdiscardedtotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.2 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of lldp frames discarded lldpstatsrxportframeserrors 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.3 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of error frames received lldpstatsrxportframestotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.4 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of lldp frames received lldpstatsrxporttlvsdiscardedtotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.5 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of tlvs discarded lldpstatsrxporttlvsunrecognizedtotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.6 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of unrecognized tlvs received lldpstatsrxportageoutstotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.7 r/o integer (0..4294967295) number of entries that aged-out lldplocalsystemdata group mib name oid access syntax description lldplocchassisidsubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.1 r/o lldpchassisidsubtype subtype of chassis id lldplocchassisid 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.2 r/o lldpchassisid chassis id lldplocsysname 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.3 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) system name lldplocsysdesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.4 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) system description lldplocsyscapsupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.5 r/o lldpsystemcapabilitiesmap functions supported by the system lldplocsyscapenabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.6 r/o lldpsystemcapabilitiesmap functions enabled by the system lldplocporttable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7 n/a table of information for each port lldplocportentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1 n/a index * lldplocportnum lldplocportnum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.1 n/a lldpportnumber lldplocportidsubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.2 r/o lldpportidsubtype subtype of port id lldplocportid 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.3 r/o octet string (size (1..255)) port id lldplocportdesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.4 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) port description lldpremotesystemsdata group mib name oid access syntax description lldpremtable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1 n/a table of information for each port lldprementry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1 n/a index * lldpremtimemark * lldpremlocalportnum * lldpremindex lldpremtimemark 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.1 n/a timefilter lldpremlocalportnum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.2 n/a lldpportnumber lldpremindex 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.3 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) lldpremchassisidsubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.4 r/o lldpchassisidsubtype subtype of the remote device chassis id lldpremchassisid 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.5 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) chassis id of remote device lldpremportidsubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6 r/o lldpportidsubtype subtype of the remote device port id lldpremportid 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7 r/o octet string (size (1..255)) port id of remote device lldpremportdesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.8 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) description of remote device port lldpremsysname 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.9 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) system name of remote device lldpremsysdesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.10 r/o snmpadminstring (size (0..255)) system description of remote device lldpremsyscapsupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.11 r/o lldpsystemcapabilitiesmap functionality supported by the remote device system lldpremsyscapenabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.12 r/o lldpsystemcapabilitiesmap functionality enabled in the remote device system lldpxdot3localdata group mib name oid access syntax description lldpxdot3locpowertable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2 n/a table of information for each port lldpxdot3locpowerentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1 n/a index * lldplocportnum lldpxdot3locpowerportclass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.1 r/o lldppowerportclass pse or pd status lldpxdot3locpowermdisupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.2 r/o truthvalue power supply capability support lldpxdot3locpowermdienabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.3 r/o truthvalue enables/disables the power supply capability lldpxdot3locpowerpaircontrolable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.4 r/o truthvalue ability to select the signal line to be used for power supply lldpxdot3locpowerpairs 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.5 r/o integer32 (1|2) * signal(1) * spare(2) signal line to be used for power supply lldpxdot3locpowerclass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.6 r/o integer32 (1|2|3|4|5) * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) port power class lldpxdot3remotedata group mib name oid access syntax description lldpxdot3rempowertable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2 n/a table of information for each port lldpxdot3rempowerentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1 n/a index * lldpremtimemark * lldpremlocalportnum * lldpremindex lldpxdot3rempowerportclass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.1 r/o lldppowerportclass remote device status whether it is pse or pd lldpxdot3rempowermdisupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.2 r/o truthvalue remote device power supply capability support lldpxdot3rempowermdienabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.3 r/o truthvalue enables/disables the remote device power supply capability lldpxdot3rempowerpaircontrolable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.4 r/o truthvalue ability to select the signal line to be used for power supply of remote device lldpxdot3rempowerpairs 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.5 r/o integer32 (1|2) * signal(1) * spare(2) signal line to be used for power supply of remote device lldpxdot3rempowerclass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.6 r/o integer32 (1|2|3|4|5) * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) remote device port power class lldpxmedconfig group mib name oid access syntax description lldpxmedlocdeviceclass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.1.1 r/o lldpxmeddeviceclass local device class lldpxmedportconfigtable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2 n/a table of information for each port lldpxmedportconfigentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1 n/a index * port number lldpxmedportcapsupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1.1 r/o lldpxmedcapabilities tlv transmission items supported by lldp-med lldpxmedportconfigtlvstxenable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1.2 r/nw lldpxmedcapabilities tlv items sent as lldp-med lldpxmedlocaldata group mib name oid access syntax description lldpxmedlocxpoedevicetype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.10 r/o integer * unknown(1) * psedevice(2) * pddevice(3) * none(4) pse or pd status lldpxmedlocxpoepseporttable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11 n/a pse information table for each port lldpxmedlocxpoepseportentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1 n/a index * lldplocportnum lldpxmedlocxpoepseportpowerav 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1.1 r/o gauge32 (0..1023) power supply from the port (in units of 0.1 w) lldpxmedlocxpoepseportpdpriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1.2 r/o integer * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) port power supply priority order lldpxmedlocxpoepsepowersource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.12 r/o integer * unknown(1) * primary(2) * backup(3) own power source lldpxmedlocxpoepdpowerreq 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.13 r/o integer32 (0..1023) power requirement for pse (in units of 0.1 w) lldpxmedlocxpoepdpowersource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.14 r/o integer * unknown(1) * frompse(2) * local * localandpse(4) type of own power source notified to the pse lldpxmedlocxpoepdpowerpriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.15 r/o integer * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) power supply priority requirement of the own device notified to the pse lldpxmedremotedata group mib name oid access syntax description lldpxmedremxpoetable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5 n/a remote device information table lldpxmedremxpoeentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5.1 n/a index * lldpremtimemark * lldpremlocalportnum * lldpremindex lldpxmedremxpoedevicetype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5.1.1 r/o integer * unknown(1) * psedevice(2) * pddevice(3) * none(4) indicates whether the remote device is pse or pd lldpxmedremxpoepsetable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6 n/a pse information table for remote device lldpxmedremxpoepseentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1 n/a index * lldpremtimemark * lldpremlocalportnum * lldpremindex lldpxmedremxpoepsepowerav 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.1 r/o integer(0..1023) power requirement of remote device (in units of 0.1 w) lldpxmedremxpoepsepowersource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.2 r/o integer * unknown(1) * frompse(2) * local(3) * localandpse(4) power supply type of remote device lldpxmedremxpoepdpowerpriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.3 r/o integer * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) power supply priority of remote device lldpxmedremxpoepdtable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7 n/a pse information table for remote device lldpxmedremxpoepdentry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1 n/a index * lldpremtimemark * lldpremlocalportnum * lldpremindex lldpxmedremxpoepdpowerreq 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.1 r/o integer(0..1023) power requirement of remote device (in units of 0.1 w) lldpxmedremxpoepdpowersource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.2 r/o integer * unknown(1) * frompse(2) * local(3) * localandpse(4) power supply type of remote device lldpxmedremxpoepdpowerpriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.3 r/o integer * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) power supply priority of remote device</div><div class="display_word">4.1. lldpMIB group This MIB is related to LLDP information. The syntax defined for the lldpMIB group is shown below. Syntax defined in the lldpMIB group Syntax Definition LldpChassisIdSubtype INTEGER * chassisComponent(1) * interfaceAlias(2) * portComponent(3) * macAddress(4) * networkAddress(5) * interfaceName(6) * local(7) LldpChassisId OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..255)) LldpPortIdSubtype INTEGER * interfaceAlias(1) * portComponent(2) * macAddress(3) * networkAddress(4) * interfaceName(5) * agentCircuitId(6) * local(7) LldpPortId OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..255)) LldpSystemCapabilitiesMap BITS * other(0) * repeater(1) * bridge(2) * wlanAccessPoint(3) * router(4) * telephone(5) * docsisCableDevice(6) * stationOnly(7) LldpPortNumber INTEGER32 (1..4096) LldpPowerPortClass INTEGER * pClassPSE(1) * pClassPD(2) LldpXMedDeviceClass INTEGER * notDefined(0) * endpointClass1(1) * endpointClass2(2) * endpointClass3(3) * networkConnectivity(4) LldpXMedCapabilities INTEGER * capabilities(0) * networkPolicy(1) * location(2) * extendedPSE(3) * extendedPD(4) * inventory(5) The lldpMIB group is divided into subgroups, such as shown below. lldpObjects(1)     |     +--lldpConfiguration(1)     |     +--lldpStatistics(2)     |     +--lldpLocalSystemData(3)     |     +--lldpRemoteSystemsData(4)     |     +--lldpExtensions(5)        |        +--lldpXdot3MIB(4623)        ||        |+--lldpXdot3Objects(1)        ||        |+--lldpXdot3Config(1)        ||        |+--lldpXdot3LocalData(2)        ||        |+--lldpXdot3RemoteData(3)        |        +--lldpXMedMIB(4795)           |           +--lldpXMedObjects(1)              |              +--lldpXMedConfig(1)              |              +--lldpXMedLocalData(2)              |              +--lldpXMedRemoteData(3) lldpConfiguration group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpPortConfigTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6 N/A Table of information for each port lldpPortConfigEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1 N/A INDEX * lldpPortConfigPortNum lldpPortConfigAdminStatus 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.2 R/W INTEGER * txOnly(1) * rxOnly(2) * txAndRx(3) * disabled(4) LLDP transmission/reception status lldpPortConfigNotificationEnable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.3 N/A TruthVal LLDP notification status lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.6.1.4 R/NW BITS * portDesc(0) * sysName(1) * sysDesc(2) * sysCap(3) Basic management TLV transmission item lldpConfigManAddrTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7 N/A Table of ports on which to transmit Management Address TLVs lldpConfigManAddrEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7.1 N/A INDEX * lldpLocManAddrSubtype * lldpLocManAddr lldpConfigManAddrPortsTxEnable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.7.1.1 R/W LldpPortList Ports on which to transmit Management Address TLVs lldpStatistics group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpStatsRemTablesLastChangeTime 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.1 R/O TimeTicks Time from system initialization until remote data update lldpStatsRemTablesInserts 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.2 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Total number of entries added to the remote device management table lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.3 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Total number of entries deleted from the remote device management table lldpStatsRemTablesDrops 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.4 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Total number of entries that could not be specified in the remote device management table lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.5 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Total number of entries that exceeded the TTL time (aged out) and were deleted from the remote device management table lldpStatsTxPortTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6 N/A Table of information for each port lldpStatsTxPortEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1 N/A INDEX * lldpStatsTxPortNum lldpStatsTxPortNum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1.1 N/A LldpPortNumber lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.6.1.2 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Total number of LLDP frames transmitted lldpStatsRxPortTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7 N/A Table of information for each port lldpStatsRxPortEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1 N/A INDEX * lldpStatsRxPortNum lldpStatsRxPortNum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.1 N/A LldpPortNumber lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.2 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of LLDP frames discarded lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.3 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of error frames received lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.4 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of LLDP frames received lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.5 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of TLVs discarded lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.6 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of unrecognized TLVs received lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.7.1.7 R/O INTEGER (0..4294967295) Number of entries that aged-out lldpLocalSystemData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpLocChassisIdSubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.1 R/O LldpChassisIdSubtype Subtype of chassis ID lldpLocChassisId 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.2 R/O LldpChassisId Chassis ID lldpLocSysName 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.3 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) System name lldpLocSysDesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.4 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) System description lldpLocSysCapSupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.5 R/O LldpSystemCapabilitiesMap Functions supported by the system lldpLocSysCapEnabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.6 R/O LldpSystemCapabilitiesMap Functions enabled by the system lldpLocPortTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7 N/A Table of information for each port lldpLocPortEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1 N/A INDEX * lldpLocPortNum lldpLocPortNum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.1 N/A LldpPortNumber lldpLocPortIdSubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.2 R/O LldpPortIdSubtype Subtype of port ID lldpLocPortId 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.3 R/O OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..255)) Port ID lldpLocPortDesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.3.7.1.4 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) Port description lldpRemoteSystemsData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpRemTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1 N/A Table of information for each port lldpRemEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1 N/A INDEX * lldpRemTimeMark * lldpRemLocalPortNum * lldpRemIndex lldpRemTimeMark 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.1 N/A TimeFilter lldpRemLocalPortNum 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.2 N/A LldpPortNumber lldpRemIndex 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.3 N/A INTEGER32 (1..2147483647) lldpRemChassisIdSubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.4 R/O LldpChassisIdSubtype Subtype of the remote device chassis ID lldpRemChassisId 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.5 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) Chassis ID of remote device lldpRemPortIdSubtype 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6 R/O LldpPortIdSubtype Subtype of the remote device port ID lldpRemPortId 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7 R/O OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..255)) Port ID of remote device lldpRemPortDesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.8 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) Description of remote device port lldpRemSysName 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.9 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) System name of remote device lldpRemSysDesc 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.10 R/O SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..255)) System description of remote device lldpRemSysCapSupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.11 R/O LldpSystemCapabilitiesMap Functionality supported by the remote device system lldpRemSysCapEnabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.12 R/O LldpSystemCapabilitiesMap Functionality enabled in the remote device system lldpXdot3LocalData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpXdot3LocPowerTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2 N/A Table of information for each port lldpXdot3LocPowerEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1 N/A INDEX * lldpLocPortNum lldpXdot3LocPowerPortClass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.1 R/O LldpPowerPortClass PSE or PD status lldpXdot3LocPowerMDISupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.2 R/O TruthValue Power supply capability support lldpXdot3LocPowerMDIEnabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.3 R/O TruthValue Enables/disables the power supply capability lldpXdot3LocPowerPairControlable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.4 R/O TruthValue Ability to select the signal line to be used for power supply lldpXdot3LocPowerPairs 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.5 R/O INTEGER32 (1|2) * signal(1) * spare(2) Signal line to be used for power supply lldpXdot3LocPowerClass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.2.2.1.6 R/O INTEGER32 (1|2|3|4|5) * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) Port power class lldpXdot3RemoteData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpXdot3RemPowerTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2 N/A Table of information for each port lldpXdot3RemPowerEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1 N/A INDEX * lldpRemTimeMark * lldpRemLocalPortNum * lldpRemIndex lldpXdot3RemPowerPortClass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.1 R/O LldpPowerPortClass Remote device status whether it is PSE or PD lldpXdot3RemPowerMDISupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.2 R/O TruthValue Remote device power supply capability support lldpXdot3RemPowerMDIEnabled 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.3 R/O TruthValue Enables/disables the remote device power supply capability lldpXdot3RemPowerPairControlable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.4 R/O TruthValue Ability to select the signal line to be used for power supply of remote device lldpXdot3RemPowerPairs 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.5 R/O INTEGER32 (1|2) * signal(1) * spare(2) Signal line to be used for power supply of remote device lldpXdot3RemPowerClass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4623.1.3.2.1.6 R/O INTEGER32 (1|2|3|4|5) * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) Remote device port power class lldpXMedConfig group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpXMedLocDeviceClass 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.1.1 R/O LldpXMedDeviceClass Local device class lldpXMedPortConfigTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2 N/A Table of information for each port lldpXMedPortConfigEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1 N/A INDEX * Port number lldpXMedPortCapSupported 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1.1 R/O LldpXMedCapabilities TLV transmission items supported by LLDP-MED lldpXMedPortConfigTLVsTxEnable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.1.2 R/NW LldpXMedCapabilities TLV items sent as LLDP-MED lldpXMedLocalData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpXMedLocXPoEDeviceType 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.10 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * pseDevice(2) * pdDevice(3) * none(4) PSE or PD status lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPortTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11 N/A PSE information table for each port lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPortEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1 N/A INDEX * lldpLocPortNum lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPortPowerAv 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1.1 R/O Gauge32 (0..1023) Power supply from the port (in units of 0.1 W) lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPortPDPriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.11.1.2 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) Port power supply priority order lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPowerSource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.2.12 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * primary(2) * backup(3) Own power source lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowerReq 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.13 R/O INTEGER32 (0..1023) Power requirement for PSE (in units of 0.1 W) lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowerSource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.14 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * fromPSE(2) * local * localAndPSE(4) Type of own power source notified to the PSE lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowerPriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.1.2.15 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) Power supply priority requirement of the own device notified to the PSE lldpXMedRemoteData group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description lldpXMedRemXPoETable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5 N/A Remote device information table lldpXMedRemXPoEEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5.1 N/A INDEX * lldpRemTimeMark * lldpRemLocalPortNum * lldpRemIndex lldpXMedRemXPoEDeviceType 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.5.1.1 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * pseDevice(2) * pdDevice(3) * none(4) Indicates whether the remote device is PSE or PD lldpXMedRemXPoEPSETable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6 N/A PSE information table for remote device lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1 N/A INDEX * lldpRemTimeMark * lldpRemLocalPortNum * lldpRemIndex lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPowerAv 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.1 R/O Integer(0..1023) Power requirement of remote device (in units of 0.1 W) lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPowerSource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.2 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * fromPSE(2) * local(3) * localAndPSE(4) Power supply type of remote device lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPowerPriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.6.1.3 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) Power supply priority of remote device lldpXMedRemXPoEPDTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7 N/A PSE information table for remote device lldpXMedRemXPoEPDEntry 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1 N/A INDEX * lldpRemTimeMark * lldpRemLocalPortNum * lldpRemIndex lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPowerReq 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.1 R/O Integer(0..1023) Power requirement of remote device (in units of 0.1 W) lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPowerSource 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.2 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * fromPSE(2) * local(3) * localAndPSE(4) Power supply type of remote device lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPowerPriority 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.1.3.7.1.3 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * critical(2) * high(3) * low(4) Power supply priority of remote device</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#systemグループ">4.2. system group</div><div class="search_word">4.2. system group this mib is related to system information. system group mib name oid access syntax description sysdescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1 r/o displaystring (size (0..255)) the description of the device. device name and firmware revision sysobjectid 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2 r/o object identifier device oid that is defined by yamaha’s private mib sysuptimeinstance 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 r/o timeticks elapsed time from boot syscontact 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4 r/w displaystring (size (0..255)) administrator contact information setting value for snmp-server contact command sysname 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5 r/w displaystring (size (0..255)) administrative name setting value for hostname command syslocation 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6 r/w displaystring (size (0..255)) device location setting value for snmp-server location command sysservices 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7 r/o integer (0..127) value that indicates services the device supports</div><div class="display_word">4.2. system group This MIB is related to system information. system group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description sysDescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1 R/O DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) The description of the device. Device name and firmware revision sysObjectID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2 R/O OBJECT IDENTIFIER Device OID that is defined by Yamaha’s private MIB sysUpTimeInstance 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 R/O TimeTicks Elapsed time from boot sysContact 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4 R/W DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Administrator contact information Setting value for snmp-server contact command sysName 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5 R/W DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Administrative name Setting value for hostname command sysLocation 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6 R/W DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Device location Setting value for snmp-server location command sysServices 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7 R/O INTEGER (0..127) Value that indicates services the device supports</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#interfaceグループ">4.3. interface group</div><div class="search_word">4.3. interface group this mib is related to interface information. interface group mib name oid access syntax description ifnumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1 r/o integer32 no. of interfaces iftable 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2 n/a interface information table ifentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1 n/a index * ifindex ifindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1 r/o interfaceindex interface id number ifdescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 r/o displaystring (size (0..255)) description of the interface. interface name if the description command is set for the interface, that value is used iftype 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3 r/o ianaiftype * ethernetcsmacd(6) * l3ipvlan(136), etc. types of interfaces ifmtu 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.4 r/o integer32 maximum frame size that can be transmitted/received ifspeed 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 r/o gauge32 interface speed ifphysaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 r/o physaddress mac address ifadminstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 r/nw integer * up(1) * down(2) desirable interface status ifoperstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 r/o integer * up(1) * down(2) current status of interface iflastchange 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.9 r/o timeticks time when the interface changed to the current status (elapsed time from boot) ifinoctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10 r/o counter32 total no. of octets received ifinucastpkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11 r/o counter32 no. of unicast packets notified to higher protocol ifinnucastpkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12 r/o counter32 number of non-unicast packets notified to higher protocol ifindiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13 r/o counter32 no. of packets that were discarded, despite no errors detected ifinerrors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14 r/o counter32 no. of packets not notified to higher protocol due to errors ifinunknownprotos 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15 r/o counter32 no. of discarded packets, due to an unsupported protocol ifoutoctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16 r/o counter32 total no. of octets transmitted ifoutucastpkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17 r/o counter32 no. of unicast packets requested for transmission by a higher protocol ifoutnucastpkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18 r/o counter32 no. of non-unicast packets requested for transmission by a higher protocol ifoutdiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19 r/o counter32 no. of packets that were discarded for transmission, despite no errors detected ifouterrors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20 r/o counter32 no. of packets not transmitted due to errors ifspecific 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.22 r/o object identifier reference to mib that defines interface media characteristics if no reference exists, this will be 0.0</div><div class="display_word">4.3. interface group This MIB is related to interface information. interface group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description ifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1 R/O Integer32 No. of interfaces ifTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2 N/A Interface information table ifEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1 N/A INDEX * ifIndex ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1 R/O InterfaceIndex Interface ID number ifDescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 R/O DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Description of the interface. Interface name If the description command is set for the interface, that value is used ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3 R/O IANAifType * ethernetCsmacd(6) * l3ipvlan(136), etc. Types of interfaces ifMtu 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.4 R/O Integer32 Maximum frame size that can be transmitted/received ifSpeed 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 R/O Gauge32 Interface speed ifPhysAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 R/O PhysAddress MAC address ifAdminStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 R/NW INTEGER * up(1) * down(2) Desirable interface status ifOperStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 R/O INTEGER * up(1) * down(2) Current status of interface ifLastChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.9 R/O TimeTicks Time when the interface changed to the current status (elapsed time from boot) ifInOctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10 R/O Counter32 Total no. of octets received ifInUcastPkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11 R/O Counter32 No. of unicast packets notified to higher protocol ifInNUcastPkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12 R/O Counter32 Number of non-unicast packets notified to higher protocol ifInDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13 R/O Counter32 No. of packets that were discarded, despite no errors detected ifInErrors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14 R/O Counter32 No. of packets not notified to higher protocol due to errors ifInUnknownProtos 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15 R/O Counter32 No. of discarded packets, due to an unsupported protocol ifOutOctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16 R/O Counter32 Total no. of octets transmitted ifOutUcastPkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17 R/O Counter32 No. of unicast packets requested for transmission by a higher protocol ifOutNUcastPkts 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18 R/O Counter32 No. of non-unicast packets requested for transmission by a higher protocol ifOutDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19 R/O Counter32 No. of packets that were discarded for transmission, despite no errors detected ifOutErrors 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20 R/O Counter32 No. of packets not transmitted due to errors ifSpecific 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.22 R/O OBJECT IDENTIFIER Reference to MIB that defines interface media characteristics If no reference exists, this will be 0.0</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#atグループ">4.4. at group</div><div class="search_word">4.4. at group this mib is related to mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses. at group mib name oid access syntax description attable 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1 n/a table of mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses atentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1 n/a index * atifindex * atnetaddress atifindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.1 r/nw integer ifindex for the corresponding interface atphysaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.2 r/nw physaddress physical address atnetaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.3 r/nw networkaddress ip address corresponding to the physical address</div><div class="display_word">4.4. at group This MIB is related to mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses. at group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description atTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1 N/A Table of mapping information for physical addresses and network addresses atEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1 N/A INDEX * atIfIndex * atNetAddress atIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.1 R/NW INTEGER ifIndex for the corresponding interface atPhysAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.2 R/NW PhysAddress Physical address atNetAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.3.1.1.3 R/NW NetworkAddress IP address corresponding to the physical address</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#dot1dbridgeグループ">4.5. dot1dBridge group</div><div class="search_word">4.5. dot1dbridge group this mib is related to dot1dbridge information. the syntax defined in the dot1dbridge group is shown below. syntax defined in the dot1dbridge group syntax definition bridgeid octet string (size (8)) timeout integer32 portlist octet string vlanindex unsigned32 vlanid integer32 (1..4094) the dot1dbridge group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. dot1dbridge(17)      |      +--dot1dbase(1)      |      +--dot1dtp(4)      |      +--dot1dstatic(5)      |      +--qbridgemib(7)         |         +--qbridgemibobjects(1)            |            +--dot1qbase(1)            |            +--dot1qtp(2) dot1dbase group mib name oid access syntax description dot1dbasebridgeaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.1 r/o macaddress mac address of bridge dot1dbasenumports 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.2 r/o integer32 no. of ports for bridge dot1dbasetype 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.3 r/o integer * unknown(1) * transparent-only(2) * sourceroute-only(3) * srt(4) type of bridging executable by the bridge dot1dbaseporttable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4 n/a table of port information for bridge dot1dbaseportentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1 n/a index * dot1dbaseport dot1dbaseport 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.1 r/o integer32 (1..65535) port number dot1dbaseportifindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.2 r/o interfaceindex instance value for ifindex, defined by the if-mib of the interface corresponding to the port dot1dbaseportcircuit 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.3 r/o object identifier identifier used when the value of dot1dbaseportifindex is the same port in the bridge dot1dbaseportdelayexceededdiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.4 r/o counter32 no. of frames discarded at the port due to a bridge forwarding delay note: this is always “0” on this product dot1dbaseportmtuexceededdiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.5 r/o counter32 no. of frames discarded at the port due to excessive size note: this is always “0” on this product dot1dtp group mib name oid access syntax description dot1dtplearnedentrydiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.1 r/o counter32 amount of forwarding information that was discarded due to having exceeded the upper save limit of the forwarding database dot1dtpagingtime 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.2 r/w integer32 (10..634) timeout duration for aging out forwarding information that was actively acquired dot1dtpfdbtable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3 n/a table of unicast entries that have forwarding or filtering information dot1dtpfdbentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1 n/a index * dot1dtpfdbaddress dot1dtpfdbaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.1 r/o macaddress unicast mac addresses that have forwarding or filtering information dot1dtpfdbport 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.2 r/o integer32 port number of port that transmitted a frame with a source address that is the same as the instance value, corresponding to the dot1dtpfdbaddress dot1dtpfdbstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.3 r/o intege * other(1) * invalid(2) * learned(3) * self(4) * mgmt(5) mac address table status dot1dtpporttable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4 n/a table for all port information that is associated with a transparent bridge. dot1dtpportentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1 n/a index * dot1dtpport dot1dtpport 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.1 r/o integer32 (1..65535) port numbers that include transparent bridge management information dot1dtpportmaxinfo 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.2 r/o integer32 maximum size of information fields transmitted/received by a port dot1dtpportinframes 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.3 r/o counter32 no. of frames received by a port dot1dtpportoutframes 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.4 r/o counter32 no. of frames transmitted by a port dot1dtpportindiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.5 r/o counter32 no. of frames that are valid for reception, which were discarded during forwarding dot1dstatic group mib name oid access syntax description dot1dstatictable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1 n/a table of filtering information that was registered statically dot1dstaticentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1 n/a index * dot1dstaticaddress * dot1dstaticreceiveport dot1dstaticaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.1 r/nc macaddress destination mac address for which filtering information is applied dot1dstaticreceiveport 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.2 r/nc integer32 (0..65535) reception port no. on which filtering information is applied dot1dstaticallowedtogoto 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.3 r/nc octet string (size (0..512)) set of ports on which to transmit frames to which filtering information was applied dot1dstaticstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.4 r/nc integer * other(1) * invalid(2) * permanent(3) * deleteonreset(4) * deleteontimeout(5) application status for filtering information dot1qbase group mib name oid access syntax description dot1qvlanversionnumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.1 r/o integer * version1(1) ieee 802.1q version information dot1qmaxvlanid 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.2 r/o vlanid maximum no. of ieee 802.1q vlan ids dot1qmaxsupportedvlans 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.3 r/o unsigned32 maximum no. of ieee 802.1q vlans dot1qnumvlans 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.4 r/o unsigned32 no. of ieee 802.1q vlans used dot1qtp group mib name oid access syntax description dot1qfdbtable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1 n/a filtering table dot1qfdbentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1 n/a index * dot1qfdbid dot1qfdbid 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1.1 n/a unsigned32 identifier for filtering database dot1qfdbdynamiccount 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1.2 r/o counter32 no. of active entries in filtering database dot1qtpfdbtable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2 n/a table of information for unicast entries that have transparent bridge forwarding or filtering information dot1qtpfdbentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1 n/a index * dot1qfdbid * dot1qtpfdbaddress dot1qtpfdbaddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.1 n/a macaddress unicast mac addresses that have transparent bridge forwarding or filtering information dot1qtpfdbport 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.2 r/o integer32 (0..65535) port number of port that transmitted a frame with a source address that is the same as the instance value, corresponding to the transparent bridge dot1qtpfdbaddress dot1qtpfdbstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.3 r/o integer * other(1) * invalid(2) * learned(3) * self(4) * mgmt(5) transparent bridge mac address table status</div><div class="display_word">4.5. dot1dBridge group This MIB is related to dot1dBridge information. The syntax defined in the dot1dBridge group is shown below. Syntax defined in the dot1dBridge group Syntax Definition BridgeId OCTET STRING (SIZE (8)) Timeout Integer32 PortList OCTET STRING VlanIndex Unsigned32 VlanId Integer32 (1..4094) The dot1dBridge group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. dot1dBridge(17)      |      +--dot1dBase(1)      |      +--dot1dTp(4)      |      +--dot1dStatic(5)      |      +--qBridgeMIB(7)         |         +--qBridgeMIBObjects(1)            |            +--dot1qBase(1)            |            +--dot1qTp(2) dot1dBase group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description dot1dBaseBridgeAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.1 R/O MacAddress MAC address of bridge dot1dBaseNumPorts 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.2 R/O Integer32 No. of ports for bridge dot1dBaseType 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.3 R/O INTEGER * unknown(1) * transparent-only(2) * sourceroute-only(3) * srt(4) Type of bridging executable by the bridge dot1dBasePortTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4 N/A Table of port information for bridge dot1dBasePortEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1 N/A INDEX * dot1dBasePort dot1dBasePort 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.1 R/O Integer32 (1..65535) Port number dot1dBasePortIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.2 R/O InterfaceIndex Instance value for ifIndex, defined by the IF-MIB of the interface corresponding to the port dot1dBasePortCircuit 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.3 R/O OBJECT IDENTIFIER Identifier used when the value of dot1dBasePortIfIndex is the same port in the bridge dot1dBasePortDelayExceededDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.4 R/O Counter32 No. of frames discarded at the port due to a bridge forwarding delay Note: This is always “0” on this product dot1dBasePortMtuExceededDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.1.4.1.5 R/O Counter32 No. of frames discarded at the port due to excessive size Note: This is always “0” on this product dot1dTp group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.1 R/O Counter32 Amount of forwarding information that was discarded due to having exceeded the upper save limit of the forwarding database dot1dTpAgingTime 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.2 R/W Integer32 (10..634) Timeout duration for aging out forwarding information that was actively acquired dot1dTpFdbTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3 N/A Table of unicast entries that have forwarding or filtering information dot1dTpFdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1 N/A INDEX * dot1dTpFdbAddress dot1dTpFdbAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.1 R/O MacAddress Unicast MAC addresses that have forwarding or filtering information dot1dTpFdbPort 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.2 R/O Integer32 Port number of port that transmitted a frame with a source address that is the same as the instance value, corresponding to the dot1dTpFdbAddress dot1dTpFdbStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3.1.3 R/O INTEGE * other(1) * invalid(2) * learned(3) * self(4) * mgmt(5) MAC address table status dot1dTpPortTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4 N/A Table for all port information that is associated with a transparent bridge. dot1dTpPortEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1 N/A INDEX * dot1dTpPort dot1dTpPort 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.1 R/O Integer32 (1..65535) Port numbers that include transparent bridge management information dot1dTpPortMaxInfo 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.2 R/O Integer32 Maximum size of information fields transmitted/received by a port dot1dTpPortInFrames 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.3 R/O Counter32 No. of frames received by a port dot1dTpPortOutFrames 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.4 R/O Counter32 No. of frames transmitted by a port dot1dTpPortInDiscards 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.4.1.5 R/O Counter32 No. of frames that are valid for reception, which were discarded during forwarding dot1dStatic group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description dot1dStaticTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1 N/A Table of filtering information that was registered statically dot1dStaticEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1 N/A INDEX * dot1dStaticAddress * dot1dStaticReceivePort dot1dStaticAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.1 R/NC MacAddress Destination MAC address for which filtering information is applied dot1dStaticReceivePort 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.2 R/NC Integer32 (0..65535) Reception port no. on which filtering information is applied dot1dStaticAllowedToGoTo 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.3 R/NC OCTET STRING (SIZE (0..512)) Set of ports on which to transmit frames to which filtering information was applied dot1dStaticStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.5.1.1.4 R/NC INTEGER * other(1) * invalid(2) * permanent(3) * deleteOnReset(4) * deleteOnTimeout(5) Application status for filtering information dot1qBase group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description dot1qVlanVersionNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.1 R/O INTEGER * version1(1) IEEE 802.1Q version information dot1qMaxVlanId 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.2 R/O VlanId Maximum no. of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN IDs dot1qMaxSupportedVlans 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.3 R/O Unsigned32 Maximum no. of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs dot1qNumVlans 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.1.4 R/O Unsigned32 No. of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs used dot1qTp group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description dot1qFdbTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1 N/A Filtering table dot1qFdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1 N/A INDEX * dot1qFdbId dot1qFdbId 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1.1 N/A Unsigned32 Identifier for filtering database dot1qFdbDynamicCount 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.1.1.2 R/O Counter32 No. of active entries in filtering database dot1qTpFdbTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2 N/A Table of information for unicast entries that have transparent bridge forwarding or filtering information dot1qTpFdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1 N/A INDEX * dot1qFdbId * dot1qTpFdbAddress dot1qTpFdbAddress 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.1 N/A MacAddress Unicast MAC addresses that have transparent bridge forwarding or filtering information dot1qTpFdbPort 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.2 R/O Integer32 (0..65535) Port number of port that transmitted a frame with a source address that is the same as the instance value, corresponding to the transparent bridge dot1qTpFdbAddress dot1qTpFdbStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2.2.1.3 R/O INTEGER * other(1) * invalid(2) * learned(3) * self(4) * mgmt(5) Transparent bridge MAC address table status</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#ifmibグループ">4.6. ifMIB group</div><div class="search_word">4.6. ifmib group this mib is related to additional information for the interface. the ifmib group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. ifmib(31)      |      +--ifmibobjects(1) ifmibobjects group mib name oid access syntax description ifxtable 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1 n/a table of additional information for interface ifxentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1 n/a augments * ifentry ifhcinoctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6 r/o counter64 total number of octets received 64-bit version of ifinoctets ifhcoutoctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.10 r/o counter64 total number of octets sent 64-bit version of ifoutoctets ifhighspeed 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.15 r/o gauge32 the speed of the interface. mbps ifalias 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18 r/w displaystring (size (0..64)) alias name of the interface if the description command is set for the interface, that value will be used. if the description command is not set, an empty character string will be set. if a character string exceeding 64 characters set in the description command, only the first 64 characters are returned.</div><div class="display_word">4.6. ifMIB group This MIB is related to additional information for the interface. The ifMIB group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. ifMIB(31)      |      +--ifMIBObjects(1) ifMIBObjects group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description ifXTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1 N/A Table of additional information for interface ifXEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1 N/A AUGMENTS * ifEntry ifHCInOctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6 R/O Counter64 Total number of octets received 64-bit version of ifInOctets ifHCOutOctets 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.10 R/O Counter64 Total number of octets sent 64-bit version of ifOutOctets ifHighSpeed 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.15 R/O Gauge32 The speed of the interface. Mbps ifAlias 1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.18 R/W DisplayString (SIZE (0..64)) Alias name of the interface If the description command is set for the interface, that value will be used. If the description command is not set, an empty character string will be set. If a character string exceeding 64 characters set in the description command, only the first 64 characters are returned.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#entitymibグループ">4.7. entityMIB group</div><div class="search_word">4.7. entitymib group this mib is related to entity information. the entitymib group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. entitymib(47)      |      +--entitymibobjects(1)         |         +--entityphysical(1) entityphysical group mib name oid access syntax description entphysicaltable 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1 n/a table of entity information entphysicalentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1 n/a index * entphysicalindex entphysicalindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.1 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) index of entities entphysicalserialnum 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.11 r/nw snmpadminstring (size (0..32)) serial number of device</div><div class="display_word">4.7. entityMIB group This MIB is related to entity information. The entityMIB group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. entityMIB(47)      |      +--entityMIBObjects(1)         |         +--entityPhysical(1) entityPhysical group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description entPhysicalTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1 N/A Table of entity information entPhysicalEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1 N/A INDEX * entPhysicalIndex entPhysicalIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.1 N/A Integer32 (1..2147483647) Index of entities entPhysicalSerialNum 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.1.1.1.11 R/NW SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..32)) Serial number of device</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#powerethernetmibグループ">4.8. powerEthernetMIB group</div><div class="search_word">4.8. powerethernetmib group this mib is related to poe information. the powerethernetmib group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. powerethernetmib(105)      |      +--pethobjects(1)         |         +--pethmainpseobjects(3)         |         +--pethnotificationcontrol(4) pethobjects group mib name oid access syntax description pethpseporttable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1 n/a table of port information for poe pethpseportentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1 n/a index * pethpseportgroupindex * pethpseportindex pethpseportgroupindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.1 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) identifier of power supply device group stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. pethpseportindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.2 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) identifier of the port in pethpseportgroupindex port number pethpseportadminenable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.3 r/w truthvalue enables/disables the power supply function pethpseportpowerpairscontrolability 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.4 r/o truthvalue possible/not possible to switch the power supply target pair (fixed to false(2)) pethpseportpowerpairs 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.5 r/nw integer * signal(1) * spare(2) type of power supply target pair (fixed to signal(1)) pethpseportdetectionstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.6 r/o integer * disabled(1) * searching(2) * deliveringpower(3) * fault(4) * test(5) * otherfault(6) power receiving device detection status fault(4) and test(5) are not used pethpseportpowerpriority 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.7 r/w integer * critical(1) * high(2) * low(3) port power supply priority order pethpseporttype 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.9 r/w snmpadminstring (size (0..64)) description about power supply port setting value of the power-inline description command pethpseportpowerclassifications 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.10 r/o integer * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) information on the power supply class of the connected device if no poe device is connected, this value is class 0(1) pethmainpseobjects group mib name oid access syntax description pethmainpsetable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1 n/a table of main power supply unit information for power supply device pethmainpseentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1 n/a index * pethmainpsegroupindex pethmainpsegroupindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.1 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) identifier of power supply device group stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. pethmainpsepower 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.2 r/o gauge32 (1..65535) total power of the power supply device (watts) pethmainpseoperstatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.3 r/o integer * on(1) * off(2) * faulty(3) power supply device control status pethmainpseconsumptionpower 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.4 r/o gauge32 power consumption of the power supply device (watts) pethmainpseusagethreshold 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.5 r/nw integer32 (1..99) power consumption threshold value (percentage) for alarm notification this product calculates this mib value from the guard band value. the relational formula is as follows: pethmainpseusagethreshold = round (100 * (pethmainpsepower - guard band value) / pethmainpsepower) the minimum value that can be specified is calculated using the following formula. minimum = round ((pethmainpsepower - 30) / pethmainpsepower) note: round indicates rounding off to the nearest whole number. if the calculation result is 100, the value of this mib will be regarded as 99. pethnotificationcontrol group mib name oid access syntax description pethnotificationcontroltable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1 n/a table of notification information display/control information for power supply devices pethnotificationcontrolentry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1 n/a index * pethnotificationcontrolgroupindex pethnotificationcontrolgroupindex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1.1 n/a integer32 (1..2147483647) identifier of notification information group stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. pethnotificationcontrolenable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1.2 r/w truthvalue notification function control. true(1): allows notifications. false(2): prohibits notifications. corresponds to the powerethernet parameter of the snmp-server enable trap command</div><div class="display_word">4.8. powerEthernetMIB group This MIB is related to PoE information. The powerEthernetMIB group is divided into subgroups such as those shown below. powerEthernetMIB(105)      |      +--pethObjects(1)         |         +--pethMainPseObjects(3)         |         +--pethNotificationControl(4) pethObjects group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description pethPsePortTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1 N/A Table of port information for PoE pethPsePortEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1 N/A INDEX * pethPsePortGroupIndex * pethPsePortIndex pethPsePortGroupIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.1 N/A Integer32 (1..2147483647) Identifier of power supply device group Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. pethPsePortIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.2 N/A Integer32 (1..2147483647) Identifier of the port in pethPsePortGroupIndex Port number pethPsePortAdminEnable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.3 R/W TruthValue Enables/disables the power supply function pethPsePortPowerPairsControlAbility 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.4 R/O TruthValue Possible/not possible to switch the power supply target pair (fixed to false(2)) pethPsePortPowerPairs 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.5 R/NW INTEGER * signal(1) * spare(2) Type of power supply target pair (fixed to signal(1)) pethPsePortDetectionStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.6 R/O INTEGER * disabled(1) * searching(2) * deliveringPower(3) * fault(4) * test(5) * otherFault(6) Power receiving device detection status fault(4) and test(5) are not used pethPsePortPowerPriority 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.7 R/W INTEGER * critical(1) * high(2) * low(3) Port power supply priority order pethPsePortType 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.9 R/W SnmpAdminString (SIZE (0..64)) Description about power supply port Setting value of the power-inline description command pethPsePortPowerClassifications 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.1.1.10 R/O INTEGER * class0(1) * class1(2) * class2(3) * class3(4) * class4(5) Information on the power supply class of the connected device If no PoE device is connected, this value is class 0(1) pethMainPseObjects group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description pethMainPseTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1 N/A Table of main power supply unit information for power supply device pethMainPseEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1 N/A INDEX * pethMainPseGroupIndex pethMainPseGroupIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.1 N/A Integer32 (1..2147483647) Identifier of power supply device group Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. pethMainPsePower 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.2 R/O Gauge32 (1..65535) Total power of the power supply device (watts) pethMainPseOperStatus 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.3 R/O INTEGER * on(1) * off(2) * faulty(3) Power supply device control status pethMainPseConsumptionPower 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.4 R/O Gauge32 Power consumption of the power supply device (watts) pethMainPseUsageThreshold 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.3.1.1.5 R/NW Integer32 (1..99) Power consumption threshold value (percentage) for alarm notification This product calculates this MIB value from the guard band value. The relational formula is as follows: pethMainPseUsageThreshold = ROUND (100 * (pethMainPsePower - Guard band value) / pethMainPsePower) The minimum value that can be specified is calculated using the following formula. Minimum = ROUND ((pethMainPsePower - 30) / pethMainPsePower) Note: ROUND indicates rounding off to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, the value of this MIB will be regarded as 99. pethNotificationControl group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description pethNotificationControlTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1 N/A Table of notification information display/control information for power supply devices pethNotificationControlEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1 N/A INDEX * pethNotificationControlGroupIndex pethNotificationControlGroupIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1.1 N/A Integer32 (1..2147483647) Identifier of notification information group Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. pethNotificationControlEnable 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.1.4.1.1.2 R/W TruthValue Notification function control. true(1): Allows notifications. false(2): Prohibits notifications. Corresponds to the powerethernet parameter of the snmp-server enable trap command</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmib">5. Private MIBs</div><div class="search_word">5. private mibs the private mibs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div><div class="display_word">5. Private MIBs The private MIBs that are supported by this product are shown below.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswhardwareグループ">5.1. yamahaSWHardware group</div><div class="search_word">5.1. yamahaswhardware group this mib is related to hardware information for yamaha switches. yamahaswhardware group mib name oid access syntax description yshmemorysize 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.2 r/o integer memory size yshflashromsize 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.3 r/o integer flashrom size yshmemoryutil 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.4 r/o gauge (0..100) memory usage ratio yshcpuutil5sec 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.5 r/o gauge (0..100) cpu usage ratio (5-second average) yshcpuutil1min 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.6 r/o gauge (0..100) cpu usage ratio (1-minute average) yshcpuutil5min 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.7 r/o gauge (0..100) cpu usage ratio (5-minute average) yshenabletemperaturetrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.20 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) setting value that determines whether snmp traps based on temperature information are notified yshtemperaturetable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21 n/a temperature information table yshtemperatureentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1 n/a index * yshtemperaturestackid * yshtemperaturedevicetype * yshtemperaturedeviceindex yshtemperaturestackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yshtemperaturedevicetype 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.2 n/a integer * cpu(1) * phy(2) * sfp(3) * thermal-sensor(4) * pse(5) device type yshtemperaturedeviceindex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.3 n/a integer (1..2147483647) index for each device for example, index values are 1 and 2 for devices with two cpus yshtemperaturevalue 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.4 r/o gauge device temperature if the device temperature was not measured, this is “0” yshtemperaturestatustable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22 n/a temperature status table yshtemperaturestatusentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1 n/a index * yshtemperaturestatusstackid * yshtemperaturestatusdevicetype yshtemperaturestatusstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yshtemperaturestatusdevicetype 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.2 n/a integer * cpu(1) * phy(2) * sfp(3) * thermal-sensor(4) * pse(5) device type yshtemperaturestatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.3 r/o integer * normal(1) * warning(2) * error(3) temperature status * “normal” when normal * “warning” indicates temperature over high threshold value * “error” indicates temperature exceeded alarm temperature yshtemperaturestatusnormalthreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.4 n/a gauge threshold value for determining normal status note: only used for trap notifications yshtemperaturestatuswarningthreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.5 n/a gauge threshold value for determining warning status note: only used for trap notifications yshtemperaturestatuserrorthreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.6 n/a gauge threshold value for determining error status note: only used for trap notifications yshenablefantrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.23 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) setting value for determining whether snmp traps based on fan information are notified yshfantable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24 n/a fan information table yshfanentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1 n/a index * yshfanstackid * yshfanindex yshfanstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yshfanindex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.2 n/a integer (1..2147483647) index for each fan for example, index values will be 1 and 2 for devices with two fans yshfanrpm 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.3 r/o gauge fan rpm yshfanstatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.4 r/o integer * normal(1) * stopped(2) fan status yshfanspeedstatustable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25 n/a fan rpm status table yshfanspeedstatusentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1 n/a index * yshfanspeedstatusstackid yshfanspeedstatusstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yshfanspeedstatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1.2 r/o integer * low(1) * middle(2) * high(3) fan rpm status</div><div class="display_word">5.1. yamahaSWHardware group This MIB is related to hardware information for Yamaha switches. yamahaSWHardware group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description yshMemorySize 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.2 R/O INTEGER Memory size yshFlashROMSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.3 R/O INTEGER FlashROM size yshMemoryUtil 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.4 R/O Gauge (0..100) Memory usage ratio yshCpuUtil5sec 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.5 R/O Gauge (0..100) CPU usage ratio (5-second average) yshCpuUtil1min 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.6 R/O Gauge (0..100) CPU usage ratio (1-minute average) yshCpuUtil5min 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.7 R/O Gauge (0..100) CPU usage ratio (5-minute average) yshEnableTemperatureTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.20 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Setting value that determines whether SNMP traps based on temperature information are notified yshTemperatureTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21 N/A Temperature information table yshTemperatureEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1 N/A INDEX * yshTemperatureStackId * yshTemperatureDeviceType * yshTemperatureDeviceIndex yshTemperatureStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yshTemperatureDeviceType 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.2 N/A INTEGER * cpu(1) * phy(2) * sfp(3) * thermal-sensor(4) * pse(5) Device type yshTemperatureDeviceIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.3 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Index for each device For example, index values are 1 and 2 for devices with two CPUs yshTemperatureValue 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.21.1.4 R/O Gauge Device temperature If the device temperature was not measured, this is “0” yshTemperatureStatusTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22 N/A Temperature status table yshTemperatureStatusEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1 N/A INDEX * yshTemperatureStatusStackId * yshTemperatureStatusDeviceType yshTemperatureStatusStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yshTemperatureStatusDeviceType 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.2 N/A INTEGER * cpu(1) * phy(2) * sfp(3) * thermal-sensor(4) * pse(5) Device type yshTemperatureStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.3 R/O INTEGER * normal(1) * warning(2) * error(3) Temperature status * “Normal” when normal * “Warning” indicates temperature over High threshold value * “Error” indicates temperature exceeded alarm temperature yshTemperatureStatusNormalThreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.4 N/A Gauge Threshold value for determining Normal status Note: Only used for trap notifications yshTemperatureStatusWarningThreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.5 N/A Gauge Threshold value for determining Warning status Note: Only used for trap notifications yshTemperatureStatusErrorThreshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.22.1.6 N/A Gauge Threshold value for determining Error status Note: Only used for trap notifications yshEnableFanTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.23 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Setting value for determining whether SNMP traps based on fan information are notified yshFanTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24 N/A Fan information table yshFanEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1 N/A INDEX * yshFanStackId * yshFanIndex yshFanStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yshFanIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.2 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Index for each fan For example, index values will be 1 and 2 for devices with two fans yshFanRpm 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.3 R/O Gauge Fan RPM yshFanStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.24.1.4 R/O INTEGER * normal(1) * stopped(2) Fan status yshFanSpeedStatusTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25 N/A Fan RPM status table yshFanSpeedStatusEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1 N/A INDEX * yshFanSpeedStatusStackId yshFanSpeedStatusStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yshFanSpeedStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.25.1.2 R/O INTEGER * low(1) * middle(2) * high(3) Fan RPM status</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswfirmwareグループ">5.2. yamahaSWFirmware group</div><div class="search_word">5.2. yamahaswfirmware group this mib is related to firmware information for yamaha switches. yamahaswfirmware group mib name oid access syntax description ysfconfigfile 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.2 r/o displaystring (size (0..255)) startup config ysfrevision 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.3 r/o displaystring (size (0..255)) firmware version ysfuptime 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.4 r/o timeticks elapsed time from boot ysfrestart 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.11 r/w integer * nothing(1) * restart(2) the system will reboot when the “restart” value is written</div><div class="display_word">5.2. yamahaSWFirmware group This MIB is related to firmware information for Yamaha switches. yamahaSWFirmware group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description ysfConfigFile 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.2 R/O DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Startup config ysfRevision 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.3 R/O DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) Firmware version ysfUpTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.4 R/O TimeTicks Elapsed time from boot ysfRestart 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.2.11 R/W INTEGER * nothing(1) * restart(2) The system will reboot when the “restart” value is written</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswpowerethernetグループ">5.3. yamahaSWPowerEthernet group</div><div class="search_word">5.3. yamahaswpowerethernet group this mib is related to poe information for yamaha switches. yamahaswpowerethernet group mib name oid access syntax description yspeenabletrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.1 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) setting value for determining whether snmp traps due to poe information are notified yspeunitsupplysetting 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.2 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) enables/disables the power supply function yspeunittable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3 n/a table of device poe information yspeunitentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1 n/a index * yspeunitstackid yspeunitstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yspeunitsupplypower 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.2 r/o gauge32 power supply for the entire device yspeunitpowerfailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.3 r/o integer * normal(1) * failure(2) device power supply error yspeunitguardbandstatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.4 r/o integer * not_operating(1) * operating(2) guard band status not_operating(1): not operating state where the available power supply is greater than the guard band, and the guard band does not limit the power supply operating(2): operating state where the available power supply is smaller than the guard band, and the guard band limits the power supply yspeunitguardbandvalue 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.5 r/w gauge32 (0..30000) guard band value (mw) yspeporttable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4 n/a table of port information for poe yspeportentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1 n/a index * yspeportstackid * yspeportindex yspeportstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. yspeportindex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.2 n/a integer (1..2147483647) port index for power supply port. port numbers are used yspeportdescr 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.3 r/w displaystring (size (0..64)) description about power supply port setting value of the power-inline description command yspeportsupplysetting 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.4 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) enables/disables the power supply function yspeportdetectclass 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.5 r/o integer * na(1) * class0(2) * class1(3) * class2(4) * class3(5) * class4(6) power supply class information for connected devices yspeportsupplystate 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.6 r/o integer * none(1) * supply-class0(2) * supply-class1(3) * supply-class2(4) * supply-class3(5) * supply-class4(6) * terminate(7) * overcurrent(8) * forced-terminate(9) * over-supply(10) * over-temp(11) * fanlock(12) * power-failure(13) * class-failure(14) * over-guardband(15) * pd-failure(16) * guardband-restrict(17) port power supply status if the power supply function of the port is enabled and no poe device is connected, this value is terminate(7) if the power supply function of the port is disabled, this value is none(1) yspeportsupplypower 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.7 r/o gauge32 port power consumption (mw) yspeportpowerpriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.8 r/w integer * critical(1) * high(2) * low(3) port power supply priority order</div><div class="display_word">5.3. yamahaSWPowerEthernet group This MIB is related to PoE information for Yamaha switches. yamahaSWPowerEthernet group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description yspeEnableTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.1 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Setting value for determining whether SNMP traps due to PoE information are notified yspeUnitSupplySetting 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.2 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Enables/disables the power supply function yspeUnitTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3 N/A Table of device PoE information yspeUnitEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1 N/A INDEX * yspeUnitStackId yspeUnitStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yspeUnitSupplyPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.2 R/O Gauge32 Power supply for the entire device yspeUnitPowerFailure 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.3 R/O INTEGER * normal(1) * failure(2) Device power supply error yspeUnitGuardBandStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.4 R/O INTEGER * not_operating(1) * operating(2) Guard band status not_operating(1): Not operating State where the available power supply is greater than the guard band, and the guard band does not limit the power supply operating(2): Operating State where the available power supply is smaller than the guard band, and the guard band limits the power supply yspeUnitGuardBandValue 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.3.1.5 R/W Gauge32 (0..30000) Guard band value (mW) yspePortTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4 N/A Table of port information for PoE yspePortEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1 N/A INDEX * yspePortStackId * yspePortIndex yspePortStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. yspePortIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.2 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Port index for power supply port. Port numbers are used yspePortDescr 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.3 R/W DisplayString (SIZE (0..64)) Description about power supply port Setting value of the power-inline description command yspePortSupplySetting 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.4 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Enables/disables the power supply function yspePortDetectClass 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.5 R/O INTEGER * na(1) * class0(2) * class1(3) * class2(4) * class3(5) * class4(6) Power supply class information for connected devices yspePortSupplyState 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.6 R/O INTEGER * none(1) * supply-class0(2) * supply-class1(3) * supply-class2(4) * supply-class3(5) * supply-class4(6) * terminate(7) * overcurrent(8) * forced-terminate(9) * over-supply(10) * over-temp(11) * fanlock(12) * power-failure(13) * class-failure(14) * over-guardband(15) * pd-failure(16) * guardband-restrict(17) Port power supply status If the power supply function of the port is enabled and no PoE device is connected, this value is terminate(7) If the power supply function of the port is disabled, this value is none(1) yspePortSupplyPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.7 R/O Gauge32 Port power consumption (mW) yspePortPowerPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.4.1.8 R/W INTEGER * critical(1) * high(2) * low(3) Port power supply priority order</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswloopdetectグループ">5.4. yamahaSWLoopDetect group</div><div class="search_word">5.4. yamahaswloopdetect group this mib is related to loop detection information for yamaha switches. yamahaswloopdetect group mib name oid access syntax description ysldenabletrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.1 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) setting value for determining whether snmp traps due to error detection/resolution are notified ysldsystemadmin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.2 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) enables/disables loop detection for the entire system ysldsystemblockingrecoveryinterval 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.6 r/o integer (5) the number of seconds for a blocked port to be automatically restored after resolving a loop ysldporttable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8 n/a table of loop detection information for each port ysldportentry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1 n/a index * ysldportstackid * ysldportindex ysldportstackid 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.1 n/a integer (1..2147483647) stack id this can be obtained with stack id 1 if stack was not configured. ysldportindex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.2 n/a integer (1..2147483647) port number ysldportadmin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.3 r/w integer * enabled(1) * disabled(2) enables/disables loop detection at ports ysldportstatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.4 r/o integer * disabled(1) * normal(2) * detected(3) * blocked(4) * shutdown(5) loop detection status disabled(1): the loop detection function is disabled normal(2): no loop is detected detected(3): a loop is detected blocked(4): a loop is detected and the port is blocked shutdown(5): a loop is detected, so the port is shut down</div><div class="display_word">5.4. yamahaSWLoopDetect group This MIB is related to loop detection information for Yamaha switches. yamahaSWLoopDetect group MIB name OID Access Syntax Description ysldEnableTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.1 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Setting value for determining whether SNMP traps due to error detection/resolution are notified ysldSystemAdmin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.2 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Enables/disables loop detection for the entire system ysldSystemBlockingRecoveryInterval 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.6 R/O INTEGER (5) The number of seconds for a blocked port to be automatically restored after resolving a loop ysldPortTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8 N/A Table of loop detection information for each port ysldPortEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1 N/A INDEX * ysldPortStackId * ysldPortIndex ysldPortStackId 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.1 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Stack ID This can be obtained with stack ID 1 if stack was not configured. ysldPortIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.2 N/A INTEGER (1..2147483647) Port number ysldPortAdmin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.3 R/W INTEGER * enabled(1) * disabled(2) Enables/disables loop detection at ports ysldPortStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.8.1.4 R/O INTEGER * disabled(1) * normal(2) * detected(3) * blocked(4) * shutdown(5) Loop detection status disabled(1): The loop detection function is disabled normal(2): No loop is detected detected(3): A loop is detected blocked(4): A loop is detected and the port is blocked shutdown(5): A loop is detected, so the port is shut down</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#標準mibトラップ">6. Standard MIB Traps</div><div class="search_word">6. standard mib traps standard mib traps that are supported by this product are shown below.</div><div class="display_word">6. Standard MIB Traps Standard MIB traps that are supported by this product are shown below.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#rfc1157で規定されているトラップ">6.1. Traps defined by RFC1157</div><div class="search_word">6.1. traps defined by rfc1157 these are traps defined by rfc1157. list of traps defined by rfc1157 trap name oid additional information for trap (variable-bindings) description coldstart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 none notification on power off/on and during firmware updates warmstart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 none notification while the reload command is being executed linkdown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 ifindex ifadminstatus ifoperstatus notification during linkdown linkup 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 ifindex ifadminstatus ifoperstatus notification during linkup authenticationfailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 none notification when receiving an snmp message that has an incorrect community name</div><div class="display_word">6.1. Traps defined by RFC1157 These are traps defined by RFC1157. List of traps defined by RFC1157 Trap name OID Additional information for trap (variable-bindings) Description coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 None Notification on power OFF/ON and during firmware updates warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 None Notification while the reload command is being executed linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 ifIndex ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus Notification during linkdown linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 ifIndex ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus Notification during linkup authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 None Notification when receiving an SNMP message that has an incorrect community name</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#powerethernetmibグループのトラップ">6.2. powerEthernetMIB group trap</div><div class="search_word">6.2. powerethernetmib group trap this trap is related to poe information. list of powerethernetmib group traps trap name oid additional information for trap (variable-bindings) description pethpseportonoffnotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.1 pethpseportdetectionstatus notification that the poe port status has changed pethmainpowerusageonnotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.2 pethmainpseconsumptionpower notification that the power consumption goes from below the threshold value to on or above the threshold value pethmainpseusagethreshold is used as the threshold value pethmainpowerusageoffnotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.3 pethmainpseconsumptionpower notification that the power consumption goes from on or above the threshold value to below the threshold value pethmainpseusagethreshold is used as the threshold value</div><div class="display_word">6.2. powerEthernetMIB group trap This trap is related to PoE information. List of powerEthernetMIB group traps Trap name OID Additional information for trap (variable-bindings) Description pethPsePortOnOffNotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.1 pethPsePortDetectionStatus Notification that the PoE port status has changed pethMainPowerUsageOnNotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.2 pethMainPseConsumptionPower Notification that the power consumption goes from below the threshold value to on or above the threshold value pethMainPseUsageThreshold is used as the threshold value pethMainPowerUsageOffNotification 1.3.6.1.2.1.105.0.3 pethMainPseConsumptionPower Notification that the power consumption goes from on or above the threshold value to below the threshold value pethMainPseUsageThreshold is used as the threshold value</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#プライベートmibトラップ">7. Private MIB Traps</div><div class="search_word">7. private mib traps the private mib traps that are supported by this product are shown below.</div><div class="display_word">7. Private MIB Traps The private MIB traps that are supported by this product are shown below.</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswhardwareグループのトラップ">7.1. yamahaSWHardware group trap</div><div class="search_word">7.1. yamahaswhardware group trap this trap is related to hardware information for yamaha switches. yamahaswhardware group trap list trap name oid additional information for trap (variable-bindings) description yshtemperaturestatusnormaltrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.5 yshtemperaturestatusstackid yshtemperaturestatusdevicetype yshtemperaturestatus yshtemperaturestatusnormalthreshold yshtemperaturevalue notification when temperature status returns to “normal” yshtemperaturestatuswarningtrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.6 yshtemperaturestatusstackid yshtemperaturestatusdevicetype yshtemperaturestatus yshtemperaturestatuswarningthreshold yshtemperaturevalue notification when temperature status changes to “warning” yshtemperaturestatuserrortrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.7 yshtemperaturestatusstackid yshtemperaturestatusdevicetype yshtemperaturestatus yshtemperaturestatuserrorthreshold yshtemperaturevalue notification when temperature status changes to “error” yshfanstoppedtrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.8 yshfanstackid yshfanindex notification when fan stops yshfanspeeduptrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.9 yshfanspeedstatusstackid yshfanspeedstatus notification when fan rpm increases (when rpm reaches the “high” value) yshfanspeeddowntrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.10 yshfanspeedstatusstackid yshfanspeedstatus notification when fan rpm decreases (when “high” rpm status is canceled)</div><div class="display_word">7.1. yamahaSWHardware group trap This trap is related to hardware information for Yamaha switches. yamahaSWHardware group trap list Trap name OID Additional information for trap (variable-bindings) Description yshTemperatureStatusNormalTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.5 yshTemperatureStatusStackId yshTemperatureStatusDeviceType yshTemperatureStatus yshTemperatureStatusNormalThreshold yshTemperatureValue Notification when temperature status returns to “Normal” yshTemperatureStatusWarningTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.6 yshTemperatureStatusStackId yshTemperatureStatusDeviceType yshTemperatureStatus yshTemperatureStatusWarningThreshold yshTemperatureValue Notification when temperature status changes to “Warning” yshTemperatureStatusErrorTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.7 yshTemperatureStatusStackId yshTemperatureStatusDeviceType yshTemperatureStatus yshTemperatureStatusErrorThreshold yshTemperatureValue Notification when temperature status changes to “Error” yshFanStoppedTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.8 yshFanStackId yshFanIndex Notification when fan stops yshFanSpeedUpTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.9 yshFanSpeedStatusStackId yshFanSpeedStatus Notification when fan RPM increases (when RPM reaches the “High” value) yshFanSpeedDownTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.1.0.10 yshFanSpeedStatusStackId yshFanSpeedStatus Notification when fan RPM decreases (when “High” RPM status is canceled)</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswpowerethernetグループのトラップ">7.2. yamahaSWPowerEthernet group trap</div><div class="search_word">7.2. yamahaswpowerethernet group trap this trap is related to poe information for yamaha switches. list of yamahaswpowerethernet group traps trap name oid additional information for trap (variable-bindings) description yspesupplyporttrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.1 yspeportstackid yspeportindex yspeportdescr yspeportsupplystate notification that the power supply to the poe device has started yspeterminateporttrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.2 yspeportstackid yspeportindex yspeportdescr yspeportsupplystate notification that the power supply to the poe device has stopped yspeguardbandstatetrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.3 yspeunitstackid yspeunitsupplypower yspeunitguardbandstatus yspeunitguardbandvalue notification when the guard band status changes yspeporterrortrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.4 yspeportstackid yspeportindex yspeportdescr yspeportsupplystate notification that a poe port error has been detected or resolved yspeunitfailuretrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.5 yspeunitstackid yspeunitpowerfailure notification that a poe unit power supply abnormality has been detected</div><div class="display_word">7.2. yamahaSWPowerEthernet group trap This trap is related to PoE information for Yamaha switches. List of yamahaSWPowerEthernet group traps Trap name OID Additional information for trap (variable-bindings) Description yspeSupplyPortTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.1 yspePortStackId yspePortIndex yspePortDescr yspePortSupplyState Notification that the power supply to the PoE device has started yspeTerminatePortTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.2 yspePortStackId yspePortIndex yspePortDescr yspePortSupplyState Notification that the power supply to the PoE device has stopped yspeGuardBandStateTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.3 yspeUnitStackId yspeUnitSupplyPower yspeUnitGuardBandStatus yspeUnitGuardBandValue Notification when the guard band status changes yspePortErrorTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.4 yspePortStackId yspePortIndex yspePortDescr yspePortSupplyState Notification that a PoE port error has been detected or resolved yspeUnitFailureTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.10.0.5 yspeUnitStackId yspeUnitPowerFailure Notification that a PoE unit power supply abnormality has been detected</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#yamahaswloopdetectグループのトラップ">7.3. yamahaSWLoopDetect group trap</div><div class="search_word">7.3. yamahaswloopdetect group trap this trap is related to loop detection information for yamaha switches. list of yamahaswloopdetect group traps trap name oid additional information for trap (variable-bindings) description ysldportdetectlooptrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.0.1 ysldportindex ysldportstackid ysldportstatus sends notification when loop is detected ysldportresolvelooptrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.0.2 ysldportindex ysldportstackid ysldportstatus sends notification when loop is resolved</div><div class="display_word">7.3. yamahaSWLoopDetect group trap This trap is related to loop detection information for Yamaha switches. List of yamahaSWLoopDetect group traps Trap name OID Additional information for trap (variable-bindings) Description ysldPortDetectLoopTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.0.1 ysldPortIndex ysldPortStackId ysldPortStatus Sends notification when loop is detected ysldPortResolveLoopTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.1182.3.11.0.2 ysldPortIndex ysldPortStackId ysldPortStatus Sends notification when loop is resolved</div></div><div id="other_other_snmp_mib"><div class="search_title" docfname="other_other_snmp_mib" doctitle="SNMP" link="#注意事項">8. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">8. points of caution the 64-bit counter mibs can be read and written by snmpv2c and snmpv3 requests. those mibs cannot be read or written by snmpv1 requests.</div><div class="display_word">8. Points of Caution The 64-bit counter MIBs can be read and written by SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 requests. Those MIBs cannot be read or written by SNMPv1 requests.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#acl">ACL</div><div class="search_word">acl</div><div class="display_word">ACL</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview the access list (acl) is a conditional statement that determines whether to permit or to deny the frame. if the access list is applied to the interface, the permitted frames and frames not matching the conditions will be transferred, and the denied frames will be discarded. as this allows for only specified frames to be selected for transfer, this feature is primarily used for security purposes. this product supports three access list types, as shown in the table below. access list type access list type deciding criteria access list id purpose of use ipv4 access list source ipv4 address 1–2000 filters access from specific hosts and networks. ipv6 access list source ipv6 address 3001–4000 filters access from specific hosts and networks. mac access list source mac address 2001–3000 filters access from specific devices.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview The access list (ACL) is a conditional statement that determines whether to permit or to deny the frame. If the access list is applied to the interface, the permitted frames and frames not matching the conditions will be transferred, and the denied frames will be discarded. As this allows for only specified frames to be selected for transfer, this feature is primarily used for security purposes. This product supports three access list types, as shown in the table below. Access list type Access list type Deciding criteria Access list ID Purpose of use IPv4 access list Source IPv4 address 1–2000 Filters access from specific hosts and networks. IPv6 access list Source IPv6 address 3001–4000 Filters access from specific hosts and networks. MAC access list Source MAC address 2001–3000 Filters access from specific devices.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used acl abbreviation of “ access control list ”. wildcard mask information that specifies which portion of the specified ipv4 address or mac address is read. this is used when specifying a range of ipv4 addresses or mac addresses as acl conditions. when the wildcard mask bit is “0” : check the corresponding bit when the wildcard mask bit is “1” : do not check the corresponding bit examples of settings using wildcard masks are shown below. (the underlined portion is the wildcard mask.) to specify conditions for subnet 192.168.1.0/24 : 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 (specified in decimal) to specify conditions for vendor code 00-a0-de- - - *: 00a0.de00.0000 0000.00ff.ffff (specified in hexadecimal)</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used ACL Abbreviation of “ Access Control List ”. Wildcard mask Information that specifies which portion of the specified IPv4 address or MAC address is read. This is used when specifying a range of IPv4 addresses or MAC addresses as ACL conditions. When the wildcard mask bit is “0” : check the corresponding bit When the wildcard mask bit is “1” : do not check the corresponding bit Examples of settings using wildcard masks are shown below. (The underlined portion is the wildcard mask.) To specify conditions for subnet 192.168.1.0/24 : 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 (specified in decimal) To specify conditions for vendor code 00-A0-DE- - - *: 00A0.DE00.0000 0000.00FF.FFFF (specified in hexadecimal)</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#アクセスリストの生成">3.1. Generate access list</div><div class="search_word">3.1. generate access list a maximum of 28 access lists can be created for each of the following types: ipv4 access lists, ipv6 access lists, and mac access lists. a maximum of 128 control conditions can be registered per access list. if the registered control conditions are not satisfied, forwarding occurs as usual.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Generate access list A maximum of 28 access lists can be created for each of the following types: IPv4 access lists, IPv6 access lists, and MAC access lists. A maximum of 128 control conditions can be registered per access list. If the registered control conditions are not satisfied, forwarding occurs as usual.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#インターフェースへの適用">3.2. Applying to the interface</div><div class="search_word">3.2. applying to the interface the following table shows how access lists are applied to the interfaces of this product. note that only one access list can be applied to an interface. access list type lan port vlan interface logical interface in out in out in out ipv4 access list yes no no no no no ipv6 access list yes no no no no no mac access list yes no no no no no the number of access lists that can be applied to the interface depends on the number of control parameters that are registered in the access lists. the maximum number of control conditions that can be used in the entire system is 896 for ipv4 and mac combined, and 384 for ipv6 . applying an access list to the interface will use resources “equivalent to the number of control conditions that are registered in the access list” .</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Applying to the interface The following table shows how access lists are applied to the interfaces of this product. Note that only one access list can be applied to an interface. Access list type LAN port VLAN interface Logical interface in out in out in out IPv4 access list Yes No No No No No IPv6 access list Yes No No No No No MAC access list Yes No No No No No The number of access lists that can be applied to the interface depends on the number of control parameters that are registered in the access lists. The maximum number of control conditions that can be used in the entire system is 896 for IPv4 and MAC combined, and 384 for IPv6 . Applying an access list to the interface will use resources “equivalent to the number of control conditions that are registered in the access list” .</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#lanポートに対する設定">3.3. LAN port settings</div><div class="search_word">3.3. lan port settings the steps for applying access lists to lan ports are shown below. decide on the filtering parameters, and generate the access list. add a name if necessary. check the access list. apply the access list to the lan port. check the applied access list. a list of operation commands is given below. access list operation commands access list type generate access list check access list apply access list check applied access list ipv4 access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group ipv6 access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group mac access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group</div><div class="display_word">3.3. LAN port settings The steps for applying access lists to LAN ports are shown below. Decide on the filtering parameters, and generate the access list. Add a name if necessary. Check the access list. Apply the access list to the LAN port. Check the applied access list. A list of operation commands is given below. Access list operation commands Access list type Generate access list Check access list Apply access list Check applied access list IPv4 access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group IPv6 access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group MAC access list access-list show access-list access-group show access-group</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details on the commands, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands generate ipv4 access list access-list add comment to ipv4 access list access-list description apply ipv4 access list access-group generate ipv6 access list access-list add comment to ipv6 access list access-list description apply ipv6 access list access-group generate mac access list access-list add comment to mac access list access-list description apply mac access list access-group show generated access list show access-list show access list applied to interface show access-group</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details on the commands, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Generate IPv4 access list access-list Add comment to IPv4 access list access-list description Apply IPv4 access list access-group Generate IPv6 access list access-list Add comment to IPv6 access list access-list description Apply IPv6 access list access-group Generate MAC access list access-list Add comment to MAC access list access-list description Apply MAC access list access-group Show generated access list show access-list Show access list applied to interface show access-group</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#ipv4アクセスリストの設定">5.1. IPv4 access list settings</div><div class="search_word">5.1. ipv4 access list settings ■ specify host set lan port #1 so that it only allows access from host: 192.168.1.1 . the access list id to be used is #123 , and the access list name ipv4-acl-ex is added. generate and confirm access list #123 . yamaha(config)#access-list 123 permit host 192.168.1.1 (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 123 deny anyyamaha(config)#access-list 123 description ipv4-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-list 123 (3) ipv4 access list 123    10 permit host 192.168.1.1    20 deny anyyamaha# 1 generate access list 2 name access list 3 check access list apply access list #123 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 123 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : ipv4 access group 123 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings ■ specify network set lan port #1 so that it only allows access from network: 192.168.1.0/24 . the access list id to be used is #123 , and the access list name ipv4-acl-ex is added. generate and confirm access list #123 . yamaha(config)#access-list 123 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 123 deny anyyamaha(config)#access-list 123 description ipv4-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#yamaha#show ip access-list (3) ipv4 access list 123    10 permit 192.168.1.0/24    20 deny anyyamaha# 1 generate access list 2 name access list 3 check acl apply access list #123 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 123 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : ipv4 access group 123 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings</div><div class="display_word">5.1. IPv4 access list settings ■ Specify host Set LAN port #1 so that it only allows access from host: 192.168.1.1 . The access list ID to be used is #123 , and the access list name IPV4-ACL-EX is added. Generate and confirm access list #123 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 123 permit host 192.168.1.1 (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 123 deny anyYamaha(config)#access-list 123 description IPV4-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-list 123 (3) IPv4 access list 123    10 permit host 192.168.1.1    20 deny anyYamaha# 1 Generate access list 2 Name access list 3 Check access list Apply access list #123 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 123 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : IPv4 access group 123 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings ■ Specify network Set LAN port #1 so that it only allows access from network: 192.168.1.0/24 . The access list ID to be used is #123 , and the access list name IPV4-ACL-EX is added. Generate and confirm access list #123 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 123 permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 123 deny anyYamaha(config)#access-list 123 description IPV4-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show ip access-list (3) IPv4 access list 123    10 permit 192.168.1.0/24    20 deny anyYamaha# 1 Generate access list 2 Name access list 3 Check ACL Apply access list #123 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 123 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : IPv4 access group 123 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#ipv6アクセスリストの設定">5.2. IPv6 access list settings</div><div class="search_word">5.2. ipv6 access list settings ■ specify host set lan port #1 so that it only allows access from host: 2001:db8::1 . the access list id to be used is #3001 , and the access list name is ipv6-acl-ex . generate and confirm access list #3001 . yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 permit 2001:db8::1/128 (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 deny anyyamaha(config)#access-list 3001 description ipv6-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha# show access-list 3001 (3) ipv6 access list 3001    10 permit 2001:db8::1/128    20 deny any 1 generate access list 2 name access list 3 check access list apply access list #3001 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 3000 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : ipv6 access group 3001 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings ■ specify network set lan port #1 so that it only allows access from network: 2001:db8::/64 . the access list id to be used is #3001 , and the access list name is ipv6-acl-ex . generate and confirm access list #3001 . yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 permit 2001:db8::/64 (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 deny anyyamaha(config)#access-list 3001 description ipv6-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha# show access-list 3001 (3) ipv6 access list 3001    10 permit 2001:db8::/64    20 deny any 1 generate access list 2 name access list 3 check access list apply access list #3001 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 3001 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : ipv6 access group 3001 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings</div><div class="display_word">5.2. IPv6 access list settings ■ Specify host Set LAN port #1 so that it only allows access from host: 2001:db8::1 . The access list ID to be used is #3001 , and the access list name is IPV6-ACL-EX . Generate and confirm access list #3001 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 permit 2001:db8::1/128 (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 deny anyYamaha(config)#access-list 3001 description IPV6-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha# show access-list 3001 (3) IPv6 access list 3001    10 permit 2001:db8::1/128    20 deny any 1 Generate access list 2 Name access list 3 Check access list Apply access list #3001 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 3000 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : IPv6 access group 3001 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings ■ Specify network Set LAN port #1 so that it only allows access from network: 2001:db8::/64 . The access list ID to be used is #3001 , and the access list name is IPV6-ACL-EX . Generate and confirm access list #3001 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 permit 2001:db8::/64 (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 3001 deny anyYamaha(config)#access-list 3001 description IPV6-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha# show access-list 3001 (3) IPv6 access list 3001    10 permit 2001:db8::/64    20 deny any 1 Generate access list 2 Name access list 3 Check access list Apply access list #3001 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 3001 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : IPv6 access group 3001 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#macアクセスリストの設定">5.3. MAC access list settings</div><div class="search_word">5.3. mac access list settings ■ specify host set lan port #1 so that it only denies access from host: 00-a0-de-12-34-56 and allows all others. id #2001 and the access list name mac-acl-ex are added for the access list used. generate and confirm access list #2001 . yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 deny host 00a0.de12.3456 (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 description mac-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-list 2001 (3) mac access list 2001    10 deny host 00a0.de12.3456 1 generate access list 2 set access list name 3 check access list apply access list #2001 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 2001 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : mac access group 2001 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings ■ specify vendor set lan port #1 so that it only denies access from vendor code: 00-a0-de- - - * (00-a0-de-00-00-00 to 00-a0-de-ff-ff-ff) and allows all others. id #2001 and the access list name mac-acl-ex are added for the access list used. generate and confirm access list #2001 . yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 deny 00a0.de00.0000 0000.00ff.ffff (1) yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 description mac-acl-ex (2) yamaha(config)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-list 2001 (3) mac access list 2001    10 deny 00a0.de00.0000 0000.00ff.ffff 1 generate access list 2 set access list name 3 check access list apply access list #2001 to lan port #1 . yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#access-group 2001 in (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show access-group (2) interface port1.1 : mac access group 2001 in 1 apply access list 2 check access list settings</div><div class="display_word">5.3. MAC access list settings ■ Specify host Set LAN port #1 so that it only denies access from host: 00-A0-DE-12-34-56 and allows all others. ID #2001 and the access list name MAC-ACL-EX are added for the access list used. Generate and confirm access list #2001 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 deny host 00a0.de12.3456 (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 description MAC-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-list 2001 (3) MAC access list 2001    10 deny host 00A0.DE12.3456 1 Generate access list 2 Set access list name 3 Check access list Apply access list #2001 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 2001 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : MAC access group 2001 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings ■ Specify vendor Set LAN port #1 so that it only denies access from vendor code: 00-A0-DE- - - * (00-A0-DE-00-00-00 to 00-A0-DE-FF-FF-FF) and allows all others. ID #2001 and the access list name MAC-ACL-EX are added for the access list used. Generate and confirm access list #2001 . Yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 deny 00a0.de00.0000 0000.00ff.ffff (1) Yamaha(config)#access-list 2001 description MAC-ACL-EX (2) Yamaha(config)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-list 2001 (3) MAC access list 2001    10 deny 00A0.DE00.0000 0000.00FF.FFFF 1 Generate access list 2 Set access list name 3 Check access list Apply access list #2001 to LAN port #1 . Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#access-group 2001 in (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show access-group (2) Interface port1.1 : MAC access group 2001 in 1 Apply access list 2 Check access list settings</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if access lists are applied to lan ports belonging to a logical interface, the settings applied to the port with the lowest port number of the logical interface will also be applied to the other ports belonging to that logical interface.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If access lists are applied to LAN ports belonging to a logical interface, the settings applied to the port with the lowest port number of the logical interface will also be applied to the other ports belonging to that logical interface.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_acl"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_acl" doctitle="ACL" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation l2 switching functions: vlan</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation L2 switching functions: VLAN</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#フロー制御">Flow Control</div><div class="search_word">flow control</div><div class="display_word">Flow Control</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview a switching hub initially stores received frames in memory and then performs relay processing. when many frames are sent at the same time and relay processing cannot keep up (a congested state), exceeding the available memory capacity for storage, the frames to be relayed are discarded. this product includes the following two functions to help mitigate such congestion. when ports are operating at full duplex: ieee 802.3x flow control can be enabled. when ports are operating at half duplex: the back pressure function will always be enabled.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview A switching hub initially stores received frames in memory and then performs relay processing. When many frames are sent at the same time and relay processing cannot keep up (a congested state), exceeding the available memory capacity for storage, the frames to be relayed are discarded. This product includes the following two functions to help mitigate such congestion. When ports are operating at full duplex: IEEE 802.3x flow control can be enabled. When ports are operating at half duplex: the back pressure function will always be enabled.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used bit time on a 10base network, the speed is 10mbps , so 1 bit time = 100 nsec. in the same way, the bit time on 100base is 10 nsec, and on 1000base is 1 nsec. jam signal in half-duplex communications, where data cannot be transmitted and received at the same time, there is a possibility of data collision. the transmitting device monitors the possibility of data collision during transmission. when possible data collision is detected, the device stops transmitting and sends a jam signal. after the jam signal is sent, the device waits for a random interval before resuming transmission. although undefined in ieee, jam signals that use a 32-digit alternating “1” and “0” bit sequence (such as “10101010101010101010101010101010”) are often used.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Bit Time On a 10BASE network, the speed is 10Mbps , so 1 bit time = 100 nsec. In the same way, the bit time on 100BASE is 10 nsec, and on 1000BASE is 1 nsec. Jam Signal In half-duplex communications, where data cannot be transmitted and received at the same time, there is a possibility of data collision. The transmitting device monitors the possibility of data collision during transmission. When possible data collision is detected, the device stops transmitting and sends a jam signal. After the jam signal is sent, the device waits for a random interval before resuming transmission. Although undefined in IEEE, jam signals that use a 32-digit alternating “1” and “0” bit sequence (such as “10101010101010101010101010101010”) are often used.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#ieee-8023x-フロー制御">3.1. IEEE 802.3x flow control</div><div class="search_word">3.1. ieee 802.3x flow control for full duplex communication, the mac control protocol with ieee802.3x option can be used. the mac control frame in the diagram below is used for flow control. the following flow control operations are performed, based on the restriction start threshold and the restriction cancel threshold. flow control: processing flow this product can be used for either transmitting or receiving mac control frames. the operations for each are shown below. mac control frame transmission processing frames are stored in the packet buffer. when the number of frames exceeds the restriction start threshold, a pause frame with a pause time of 65535 is sent. when the overflow in the packet buffer is resolved, and the number of frames falls below the restriction cancel threshold, a pause frame with a pause time of 0 is sent. mac control frame reception processing when a pause frame with a pause time of 1–65535 is received, the transmission processing will be stopped if the corresponding bit time has elapsed, or if the a pause frame with a pause time of 0 has been received. use the flowcontrol command to enable or disable the flow control (when transmitting/receiving mac control frames). this setting can be made for the system and for each transmitting/receiving lan port, and is set to “disable” by factory default. in order to enable flow control for an individual port, flow control must be enabled for the system. the tail drop function is disabled when flow control is enabled in the system. packet buffers are shared among ports, and the restriction start threshold and the restriction cancel threshold change dynamically according to packet buffer usage. (this behavior cannot be changed.)</div><div class="display_word">3.1. IEEE 802.3x flow control For full duplex communication, the MAC control protocol with IEEE802.3x option can be used. The MAC control frame in the diagram below is used for flow control. The following flow control operations are performed, based on the restriction start threshold and the restriction cancel threshold. Flow control: processing flow This product can be used for either transmitting or receiving MAC control frames. The operations for each are shown below. MAC control frame transmission processing Frames are stored in the packet buffer. When the number of frames exceeds the restriction start threshold, a PAUSE frame with a pause time of 65535 is sent. When the overflow in the packet buffer is resolved, and the number of frames falls below the restriction cancel threshold, a PAUSE frame with a pause time of 0 is sent. MAC control frame reception processing When a PAUSE frame with a pause time of 1–65535 is received, the transmission processing will be stopped if the corresponding bit time has elapsed, or if the a PAUSE frame with a pause time of 0 has been received. Use the flowcontrol command to enable or disable the flow control (when transmitting/receiving MAC control frames). This setting can be made for the system and for each transmitting/receiving LAN port, and is set to “disable” by factory default. In order to enable flow control for an individual port, flow control must be enabled for the system. The tail drop function is disabled when flow control is enabled in the system. Packet buffers are shared among ports, and the restriction start threshold and the restriction cancel threshold change dynamically according to packet buffer usage. (This behavior cannot be changed.)</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#バックプレッシャー">3.2. Back pressure</div><div class="search_word">3.2. back pressure this product sends a jam signal whenever the receiving buffer of a lan port is about to overflow. with this, the sender waits for a random amount of time as per the csma/cd, and then sends the frames. when the lan port is operating at half duplex , the back pressure function will always be enabled . back pressure processing flow</div><div class="display_word">3.2. Back pressure This product sends a jam signal whenever the receiving buffer of a LAN port is about to overflow. With this, the sender waits for a random amount of time as per the CSMA/CD, and then sends the frames. When the LAN port is operating at half duplex , the back pressure function will always be enabled . Back pressure processing flow</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set (system) flow control (ieee 802.3x pause send/receive) flowcontrol set (interface) flow control (ieee 802.3x pause send/receive) flowcontrol show flow control operating status show flowcontrol</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Set (system) flow control (IEEE 802.3x PAUSE send/receive) flowcontrol Set (interface) flow control (IEEE 802.3x PAUSE send/receive) flowcontrol Show flow control operating status show flowcontrol</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution enable flow control on lan port #1. after the function is enabled, check the flow control operating status. yamaha(config)#flowcontrol enableyamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#flowcontrol bothyamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#show flowcontrol port1.1port        flowcontrol       rxpause txpause---------   -----------       ------- -------port1.1     both                    0      64</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution Enable flow control on LAN port #1. After the function is enabled, check the flow control operating status. Yamaha(config)#flowcontrol enableYamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#flowcontrol bothYamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#show flowcontrol port1.1Port        FlowControl       RxPause TxPause---------   -----------       ------- -------port1.1     Both                    0      64</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_flow_control"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_flow_control" doctitle="Flow" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos">QoS</div><div class="search_word">qos</div><div class="display_word">QoS</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview qos (quality of service) is a technology for reserving a specified bandwidth for communications over a network, guaranteeing a fixed speed of communication. application data is classified and grouped, and then forwarded by group priority level, referring to the dscp in the ip header or the cos in the ieee802.1q tag.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview QoS (Quality of Service) is a technology for reserving a specified bandwidth for communications over a network, guaranteeing a fixed speed of communication. Application data is classified and grouped, and then forwarded by group priority level, referring to the DSCP in the IP header or the CoS in the IEEE802.1Q tag.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used cos (ieee 802.1p class of service) this expresses priority as a 3-bit field in the vlan tag header, with a value from 0–7. also called 802.1p user priority. ip precedence this expresses priority as a 3-bit field in the tos field of the ip header, with a value from 0–7. used to indicate the traffic class of the frame in question, for the device that receives the frame. dscp (diffserv code point) this expresses priority as a 6-bit field in the tos field of the ip header, with a value from 0–63. since dscp uses the same tos field as ip precedence, it is compatible with ip-precedence. used to indicate the traffic class of the frame in question, for the device that receives the frame. default cos this is the cos value that is assigned to an untagged frame for the purpose of internal processing. transmission queue this product has eight transmission queues per port. the transmission queues are numbered from id 0–7, with larger id numbers being given higher priority. trust mode this indicates what will be the basis for deciding (trusting) the transmission queue id. this product can use the cos value or dscp value of the received frame to allocate the transmission queues. the setting can be configured on a per-lan/sfp port basis, and the default status (when qos is enabled) is set to cos. transmission queue id conversion table this is a conversion table used when deciding on the transmission queue id from either the cos value or the dscp value. there are two kinds of transmission queue id conversion tables, the cos-transmission queue id conversion table and the dscp-transmission queue id conversion table. each kind is used with its own trust mode. mapping can be freely changed by the user. port priority this is the priority order assigned for each reception port. if the trust mode is “port priority,” frames received at that port are placed in the transmission queue according to the port’s priority setting.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used CoS (IEEE 802.1p Class of Service) This expresses priority as a 3-bit field in the VLAN tag header, with a value from 0–7. Also called 802.1p user priority. IP Precedence This expresses priority as a 3-bit field in the TOS field of the IP header, with a value from 0–7. Used to indicate the traffic class of the frame in question, for the device that receives the frame. DSCP (Diffserv Code Point) This expresses priority as a 6-bit field in the TOS field of the IP header, with a value from 0–63. Since DSCP uses the same TOS field as IP precedence, it is compatible with IP-Precedence. Used to indicate the traffic class of the frame in question, for the device that receives the frame. Default CoS This is the CoS value that is assigned to an untagged frame for the purpose of internal processing. Transmission queue This product has eight transmission queues per port. The transmission queues are numbered from ID 0–7, with larger ID numbers being given higher priority. Trust mode This indicates what will be the basis for deciding (trusting) the transmission queue ID. This product can use the CoS value or DSCP value of the received frame to allocate the transmission queues. The setting can be configured on a per-LAN/SFP port basis, and the default status (when QoS is enabled) is set to CoS. Transmission queue ID conversion table This is a conversion table used when deciding on the transmission queue ID from either the CoS value or the DSCP value. There are two kinds of transmission queue ID conversion tables, the CoS-transmission queue ID conversion table and the DSCP-transmission queue ID conversion table. Each kind is used with its own trust mode. Mapping can be freely changed by the user. Port priority This is the priority order assigned for each reception port. If the trust mode is “port priority,” frames received at that port are placed in the transmission queue according to the port’s priority setting.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos-の有効無効制御">3.1. Enabling or disabling QoS control</div><div class="search_word">3.1. enabling or disabling qos control when shipped from the factory, the qos control of this product is set to disable . to enable qos control, use the qos enable command. to disable this, use the no qos command. most qos control commands cannot be executed if qos is not enabled. the qos function status can be checked using the show qos command.</div><div class="display_word">3.1. Enabling or disabling QoS control When shipped from the factory, the QoS control of this product is set to disable . To enable QoS control, use the qos enable command. To disable this, use the no qos command. Most QoS control commands cannot be executed if QoS is not enabled. The QoS function status can be checked using the show qos command.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#qos-処理フロー">3.2. QoS processing flow</div><div class="search_word">3.2. qos processing flow the qos processing flow is shown below.</div><div class="display_word">3.2. QoS processing flow The QoS processing flow is shown below.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#送信キューの割り当て">3.3. Transmission queue assignments</div><div class="search_word">3.3. transmission queue assignments when this product receives a frame, it determines the initial value of the transmission queue id according to the cos value or dscp value within the frame and the port priority of the reception port. of the factors such as the frame’s cos value and dscp value, the port’s trust mode determines which factor will be the basis for determining the transmission queue. the trust mode can be changed by the qos trust command. the default value (when qos is enabled) is set to cos . the transmission queue is assigned per trust mode , using the following rules. when trust mode is “cos” when the received frame is a frame with a vlan tag, the cos value within the tag is used to determine the transmission queue id. when the received frame is a frame without a vlan tag, the default cos that is managed by this product is used to determine the transmission queue id. the default setting (when qos is enabled) and the default cos are set to “ 0 ”. the setting can be changed using the qos cos command. conversion from the cos value to the transmission queue id is performed by the cos-transmission queue id conversion table. one such table is maintained by the system, and with the default settings (when qos is enabled), the settings are as follows. the setting can be changed using the qos cos-queue command. cos value transmission queue id traffic type 0 2 best effort 1 0 background 2 1 standard(spare) 3 3 excellent effort(business critical) 4 4 controlled load(streaming multimedia) 5 5 video(interactive media) less than 100 msec latency and jitter 6 6 voice(interactive media) less than 10 msec latency and jitter 7 7 network control(reserved traffic) when trust mode is “dscp” the dscp value in the ip header is used to determine the transmission queue id. conversion from the dscp value to the transmission queue id is performed by the dscp-transmission queue id conversion table. one such table is maintained by the system, and with the default settings (when qos is enabled), the settings are as follows. the setting can be changed using the qos dscp-queue command. dscp value transmission queue id traffic type 0 - 7 2 best effort 8 –15 0 background 16 - 23 1 standard(spare) 24 - 31 3 excellent effort(business critical) 32 - 39 4 controlled load(streaming multimedia) 40 - 47 5 video(interactive media) less than 100 msec latency and jitter 48 - 55 6 voice(interactive media) less than 10 msec latency and jitter 56 - 63 7 network control(reserved traffic) when trust mode is “port priority” the transmission queue id is determined by the port priority . by default (when qos is enabled), port priority is set to 2 . the setting can be changed using the qos port-priority-queue command.</div><div class="display_word">3.3. Transmission queue assignments When this product receives a frame, it determines the initial value of the transmission queue ID according to the CoS value or DSCP value within the frame and the port priority of the reception port. Of the factors such as the frame’s CoS value and DSCP value, the port’s trust mode determines which factor will be the basis for determining the transmission queue. The trust mode can be changed by the qos trust command. The default value (when QoS is enabled) is set to CoS . The transmission queue is assigned per trust mode , using the following rules. When trust mode is “CoS” When the received frame is a frame with a VLAN tag, the CoS value within the tag is used to determine the transmission queue ID. When the received frame is a frame without a VLAN tag, the default CoS that is managed by this product is used to determine the transmission queue ID. The default setting (when QoS is enabled) and the default CoS are set to “ 0 ”. The setting can be changed using the qos cos command. Conversion from the CoS value to the transmission queue ID is performed by the CoS-transmission queue ID conversion table. One such table is maintained by the system, and with the default settings (when QoS is enabled), the settings are as follows. The setting can be changed using the qos cos-queue command. CoS value Transmission queue ID Traffic Type 0 2 Best Effort 1 0 Background 2 1 Standard(spare) 3 3 Excellent Effort(Business Critical) 4 4 Controlled Load(Streaming Multimedia) 5 5 Video(Interactive Media) less than 100 msec latency and jitter 6 6 Voice(Interactive Media) less than 10 msec latency and jitter 7 7 Network Control(Reserved Traffic) When trust mode is “DSCP” The DSCP value in the IP header is used to determine the transmission queue ID. Conversion from the DSCP value to the transmission queue ID is performed by the DSCP-transmission queue ID conversion table. One such table is maintained by the system, and with the default settings (when QoS is enabled), the settings are as follows. The setting can be changed using the qos dscp-queue command. DSCP value Transmission queue ID Traffic Type 0 - 7 2 Best Effort 8 –15 0 Background 16 - 23 1 Standard(spare) 24 - 31 3 Excellent Effort(Business Critical) 32 - 39 4 Controlled Load(Streaming Multimedia) 40 - 47 5 Video(Interactive Media) less than 100 msec latency and jitter 48 - 55 6 Voice(Interactive Media) less than 10 msec latency and jitter 56 - 63 7 Network Control(Reserved Traffic) When trust mode is “port priority” The transmission queue ID is determined by the port priority . By default (when QoS is enabled), port priority is set to 2 . The setting can be changed using the qos port-priority-queue command.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#リマーキング">3.4. Remark</div><div class="search_word">3.4. remark the cos value or dscp value of the received frame is rewritten on a per-port basis. use this function to control the priority of frames received on a specific port. since remarking is performed before the transmission queue is reassigned, the cos value or dscp value after remarking is also used for priority control of this product. if the trust mode is “port priority,” the transmission queue id cannot be changed by the remarking.</div><div class="display_word">3.4. Remark The CoS value or DSCP value of the received frame is rewritten on a per-port basis. Use this function to control the priority of frames received on a specific port. Since remarking is performed before the transmission queue is reassigned, the CoS value or DSCP value after remarking is also used for priority control of this product. If the trust mode is “port priority,” the transmission queue ID cannot be changed by the remarking.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#送信キューへの格納">3.5. Storing in the transmission queue</div><div class="search_word">3.5. storing in the transmission queue frames are stored in the transmission queue that is finally determined through a series of qos processing. in order to resolve transmission queue congestion, this product provides a system to select and discard frames. this product uses the tail drop method to resolve overflow in the transmission queue. frames discarded by tail drop are counted by the frame counter. it is not possible to change the threshold value for tail drop. each port shares the packet buffer, and the proportion of the packet buffer that can be used by the transmission queue on each port fluctuates depending on the usage status of the packet buffer. you can use the show qos queue-counters command to check how much packet buffer is used by each transmission queue. the usage of the transmission queue can be checked using the show qos queue-counters command. the number of packets discarded by tail drop can be checked using the show interface, show frame-counter command.</div><div class="display_word">3.5. Storing in the transmission queue Frames are stored in the transmission queue that is finally determined through a series of QoS processing. In order to resolve transmission queue congestion, this product provides a system to select and discard frames. This product uses the tail drop method to resolve overflow in the transmission queue. Frames discarded by tail drop are counted by the frame counter. It is not possible to change the threshold value for tail drop. Each port shares the packet buffer, and the proportion of the packet buffer that can be used by the transmission queue on each port fluctuates depending on the usage status of the packet buffer. You can use the show qos queue-counters command to check how much packet buffer is used by each transmission queue. The usage of the transmission queue can be checked using the show qos queue-counters command. The number of packets discarded by tail drop can be checked using the show interface, show frame-counter command.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#スケジューリング">3.6. Scheduling</div><div class="search_word">3.6. scheduling scheduling is used to determine what rules are used to send out the frames that are stored in the transmission queue. appropriate control of the scheduling along with the system to control congestion will help ensure qos. (inappropriate scheduling will result in degradation of qos.) this product supports two types of scheduling for the transmission queue, the strict priority system (sp) and the weighted round-robin (wrr) system. strict priority system (sp: strict priority) the higher the queue priority, the higher the transmission priority. when a frame is stored in a high-priority queue, it can never be transmitted from a lower-priority queue. weighted round-robin system (wrr: weighted round robin) each queue is assigned a weight and transmits frames accordingly. frames can also be transmitted from a lower-priority queue, within a specified percentage. weights are determined according to the table below. weight of each transmission queue transmission queue id weight ratio 7 (highest priority) 4 20% 6 4 20% 5 3 15% 4 3 15% 3 2 10% 2 2 10% 1 1 5% 0 (lowest priority) 1 5% the transmission queue settings are made for the entire system, not for each interface. to configure the scheduling setting, use the qos scheduling command. by default (when qos is enabled), the scheduling setting is “ wrr .”</div><div class="display_word">3.6. Scheduling Scheduling is used to determine what rules are used to send out the frames that are stored in the transmission queue. Appropriate control of the scheduling along with the system to control congestion will help ensure QoS. (Inappropriate scheduling will result in degradation of QoS.) This product supports two types of scheduling for the transmission queue, the strict priority system (SP) and the weighted round-robin (WRR) system. Strict priority system (SP: Strict Priority) The higher the queue priority, the higher the transmission priority. When a frame is stored in a high-priority queue, it can never be transmitted from a lower-priority queue. Weighted round-robin system (WRR: Weighted Round Robin) Each queue is assigned a weight and transmits frames accordingly. Frames can also be transmitted from a lower-priority queue, within a specified percentage. Weights are determined according to the table below. Weight of each transmission queue Transmission queue ID Weight Ratio 7 (highest priority) 4 20% 6 4 20% 5 3 15% 4 3 15% 3 2 10% 2 2 10% 1 1 5% 0 (lowest priority) 1 5% The transmission queue settings are made for the entire system, not for each interface. To configure the scheduling setting, use the qos scheduling command. By default (when QoS is enabled), the scheduling setting is “ WRR .”</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#web会議アプリケーション向け最適設定">3.7. Optimizing web conference application settings</div><div class="search_word">3.7. optimizing web conference application settings qos settings for web conference application software can be configured easily via the web gui. by merely using simple operations to select the web conference application to use, communication can be prioritized for that web conference application, such as zoom meetings or microsoft teams. page for optimizing web conference application settings optimizing web conference application settings involves configuring the following settings. enable qos. set the trust mode for all ports to dscp. assign the dscp value for the web conference application to be optimized to a high-priority sending queue. the dscp values used for web conference applications are indicated below. to use the web conference application settings to change the dscp value used by the web conference application to a non-default value, use the qos dscp-queue command to change the link between the dscp value and sending queue. zoom meetings 56 (audio) 40 (video/screen sharing) microsoft teams 46 (audio) 34 (video) 18 (application/screen sharing) assign the dscp value not used by the web conference application being optimized to the lowest-priority sending queue. change the scheduling mode for all sending queues to the absolute priority method. this web conference application setting optimization function includes functionality for configuring qos settings for individual switches. to fully maximize the benefits of qos settings, they must be configured for the entire network, including the router, at the same time. if the dscp value for the web conference application was changed to a non-default value, also change the dscp sending queue assignment settings separately.</div><div class="display_word">3.7. Optimizing web conference application settings QoS settings for web conference application software can be configured easily via the Web GUI. By merely using simple operations to select the web conference application to use, communication can be prioritized for that web conference application, such as Zoom Meetings or Microsoft Teams. Page for optimizing web conference application settings Optimizing web conference application settings involves configuring the following settings. Enable QoS. Set the trust mode for all ports to DSCP. Assign the DSCP value for the web conference application to be optimized to a high-priority sending queue. The DSCP values used for web conference applications are indicated below. To use the web conference application settings to change the DSCP value used by the web conference application to a non-default value, use the qos dscp-queue command to change the link between the DSCP value and sending queue. Zoom Meetings 56 (Audio) 40 (Video/Screen sharing) Microsoft Teams 46 (Audio) 34 (Video) 18 (Application/Screen sharing) Assign the DSCP value not used by the web conference application being optimized to the lowest-priority sending queue. Change the scheduling mode for all sending queues to the absolute priority method. This web conference application setting optimization function includes functionality for configuring QoS settings for individual switches. To fully maximize the benefits of QoS settings, they must be configured for the entire network, including the router, at the same time. If the DSCP value for the web conference application was changed to a non-default value, also change the DSCP sending queue assignment settings separately.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#別表1-標準-phb-rfc-推奨値">3.8. Separate table 1: Standard PHB (RFC recommended value)</div><div class="search_word">3.8. separate table 1: standard phb (rfc recommended value) phb dscp value rfc default 0 rfc2474 cs (class selector) cs0 0 rfc2474 cs1 8 cs2 16 cs3 24 cs4 32 cs5 40 cs6 48 cs7 56 af (assured forwarding) af11 10 rfc2597 af12 12 af13 14 af21 18 af22 20 af23 22 af31 26 af32 28 af33 30 af41 34 af42 36 af43 38 ef (expedited forwarding) 46 rfc2598</div><div class="display_word">3.8. Separate table 1: Standard PHB (RFC recommended value) PHB DSCP value RFC Default 0 RFC2474 CS (Class Selector) CS0 0 RFC2474 CS1 8 CS2 16 CS3 24 CS4 32 CS5 40 CS6 48 CS7 56 AF (Assured Forwarding) AF11 10 RFC2597 AF12 12 AF13 14 AF21 18 AF22 20 AF23 22 AF31 26 AF32 28 AF33 30 AF41 34 AF42 36 AF43 38 EF (Expedited Forwarding) 46 RFC2598</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands enabling or disabling qos control qos enable set default cos qos cos change trust mode qos trust set cos-transmission queue id conversion table qos cos-queue set dscp-transmission queue id conversion table qos dscp-queue set port priority order qos port-priority-queue set scheduling method qos scheduling show status of qos function setting show qos show qos information for lan/sfp port show qos interface show egress queue usage ratio show qos queue-counters set remarking remark</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For details, refer to the Command Reference. Operations Operating commands Enabling or disabling QoS control qos enable Set default CoS qos cos Change trust mode qos trust Set CoS-transmission queue ID conversion table qos cos-queue Set DSCP-transmission queue ID conversion table qos dscp-queue Set port priority order qos port-priority-queue Set scheduling method qos scheduling Show status of QoS function setting show qos Show QoS information for LAN/SFP port show qos interface Show egress queue usage ratio show qos queue-counters Set remarking remark</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#dscp-値を使用した優先制御sp">5.1. Priority control (SP) using DSCP values</div><div class="search_word">5.1. priority control (sp) using dscp values this example allocates the transmission queue based on the dscp value of the frame, for priority control (sp). the sp priority control gives priority on the processing of frames with large dscp values from lan port #3. dscp priority control: setting example enable qos and set the trust mode for the reception ports (lan ports #1 and #2). yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (3) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (4) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (5) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 enable qos 2 setting for lan port #1 3 change the trust mode to dscp 4 setting for lan port #2 5 change the trust mode to dscp set the scheduling method. yamaha(config)# qos scheduling sp</div><div class="display_word">5.1. Priority control (SP) using DSCP values This example allocates the transmission queue based on the DSCP value of the frame, for priority control (SP). The SP priority control gives priority on the processing of frames with large DSCP values from LAN port #3. DSCP priority control: setting example Enable QoS and set the trust mode for the reception ports (LAN ports #1 and #2). Yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (3) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (5) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Enable QoS 2 Setting for LAN port #1 3 Change the trust mode to DSCP 4 Setting for LAN port #2 5 Change the trust mode to DSCP Set the scheduling method. Yamaha(config)# qos scheduling sp</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#cos-値を使用した優先制御wrr">5.2. Priority control (WRR) using CoS values</div><div class="search_word">5.2. priority control (wrr) using cos values this example allocates the transmission queue based on the cos value of the frame, for priority control (wrr). priority control using cos values: setting example enable qos and set the trust mode for the reception ports (lan ports #1 and #2). yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust cos (3) yamaha(config-if)#qos cos 2 (4) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust cos (6) yamaha(config-if)#qos cos 2 (7) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 enable qos 2 setting for lan port #1 3 change the trust mode to cos 4 treat untagged frames as if they were received with a cos value of 2 5 setting for lan port #2 6 change the trust mode to cos 7 treat untagged frames as if they were received with a cos value of 2 set the scheduling method. yamaha(config)# qos scheduling wrr</div><div class="display_word">5.2. Priority control (WRR) using CoS values This example allocates the transmission queue based on the CoS value of the frame, for priority control (WRR). Priority control using CoS values: setting example Enable QoS and set the trust mode for the reception ports (LAN ports #1 and #2). Yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust cos (3) Yamaha(config-if)#qos cos 2 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust cos (6) Yamaha(config-if)#qos cos 2 (7) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Enable QoS 2 Setting for LAN port #1 3 Change the trust mode to CoS 4 Treat untagged frames as if they were received with a CoS value of 2 5 Setting for LAN port #2 6 Change the trust mode to CoS 7 Treat untagged frames as if they were received with a CoS value of 2 Set the scheduling method. Yamaha(config)# qos scheduling wrr</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#受信ポート毎に付与したdscp値に基づく優先制御">5.3. Priority control based on DSCP value assigned to each reception port</div><div class="search_word">5.3. priority control based on dscp value assigned to each reception port a dscp value is assigned to each reception port, and the transmission queues are reassigned based on the dscp values. in the following example, frames received on lan port #1 are stored in the highest-priority transmission queue (id: 7, weight of 20%), frames received on lan port #2 are stored in the second highest-priority transmission queue (id: 5, weight of 15%), and frames received on lan port #3 are stored in the transmission queue (id: 2, weight 10%) whose priority is the lowest among the three lan ports. priority control based on dscp value assigned to each reception port: setting example remarking settings for individual reception ports set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #1 (port1.1) to 56 . set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #2 (port1.2) to 36 . set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #3 (port1.3) to 0 . enable qos and set the trust mode and remarking for the reception ports (lan ports #1, #2, and #3). yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (3) yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 56 (4) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (6) yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 36 (7) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.3 … (8) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (9) yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 0 (10) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 enable qos 2 setting for lan port #1 3 change the trust mode to “dscp” 4 set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #1 to 56 5 setting for lan port #2 6 change the trust mode to “dscp” 7 set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #1 to 36 8 setting for lan port #3 9 change the trust mode to “dscp” 10 set the dscp value for frames received on lan port #1 to 0</div><div class="display_word">5.3. Priority control based on DSCP value assigned to each reception port A DSCP value is assigned to each reception port, and the transmission queues are reassigned based on the DSCP values. In the following example, frames received on LAN port #1 are stored in the highest-priority transmission queue (ID: 7, weight of 20%), frames received on LAN port #2 are stored in the second highest-priority transmission queue (ID: 5, weight of 15%), and frames received on LAN port #3 are stored in the transmission queue (ID: 2, weight 10%) whose priority is the lowest among the three LAN ports. Priority control based on DSCP value assigned to each reception port: setting example Remarking settings for individual reception ports Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #1 (port1.1) to 56 . Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #2 (port1.2) to 36 . Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #3 (port1.3) to 0 . Enable QoS and set the trust mode and remarking for the reception ports (LAN ports #1, #2, and #3). Yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (3) Yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 56 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (6) Yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 36 (7) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.3 … (8) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust dscp (9) Yamaha(config-if)#remark dscp 0 (10) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Enable QoS 2 Setting for LAN port #1 3 Change the trust mode to “DSCP” 4 Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #1 to 56 5 Setting for LAN port #2 6 Change the trust mode to “DSCP” 7 Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #1 to 36 8 Setting for LAN port #3 9 Change the trust mode to “DSCP” 10 Set the DSCP value for frames received on LAN port #1 to 0</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#ポート優先トラストモードを使用した優先制御">5.4. Priority control using port priority trust mode</div><div class="search_word">5.4. priority control using port priority trust mode the transmission queue is determined according to the port priority order that is specified for each reception port. priority control using port priority: setting example set priority for each reception port set lan port #1 (port1.1) to priority order 6 . set lan port #2 (port1.2) to priority order 4 . set lan port #3 (port1.3) to priority order 2 . enable qos and set the trust mode for the reception ports (lan ports #1, #2, and #3). yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (3) yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 6 (4) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (6) yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 4 (7) yamaha(config-if)#exityamaha(config)#interface port1.3 (8) yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (9) yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 2 (10) yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 enable qos 2 setting for lan port #1 3 change the trust mode to “port priority” 4 set the port priority to 6 5 setting for lan port #2 6 change the trust mode to “port priority” 7 set the port priority to 4 8 setting for lan port #3 9 change the trust mode to “port priority” 10 set the port priority to 2</div><div class="display_word">5.4. Priority control using port priority trust mode The transmission queue is determined according to the port priority order that is specified for each reception port. Priority control using port priority: setting example Set priority for each reception port Set LAN port #1 (port1.1) to priority order 6 . Set LAN port #2 (port1.2) to priority order 4 . Set LAN port #3 (port1.3) to priority order 2 . Enable QoS and set the trust mode for the reception ports (LAN ports #1, #2, and #3). Yamaha(config)#qos enable (1) Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1 (2) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (3) Yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 6 (4) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.2 (5) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (6) Yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 4 (7) Yamaha(config-if)#exitYamaha(config)#interface port1.3 (8) Yamaha(config-if)#qos trust port-priority (9) Yamaha(config-if)#qos port-priority-queue 2 (10) Yamaha(config-if)#exit 1 Enable QoS 2 Setting for LAN port #1 3 Change the trust mode to “port priority” 4 Set the port priority to 6 5 Setting for LAN port #2 6 Change the trust mode to “port priority” 7 Set the port priority to 4 8 Setting for LAN port #3 9 Change the trust mode to “port priority” 10 Set the port priority to 2</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution if qos settings are applied to lan/sfp ports belonging to a logical interface, the settings applied to the port with the lowest port number of the logical interface will also be applied to the other ports belonging to that logical interface.</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution If QoS settings are applied to LAN/SFP ports belonging to a logical interface, the settings applied to the port with the lowest port number of the logical interface will also be applied to the other ports belonging to that logical interface.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation none</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation None</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_qos"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_qos" doctitle="QoS" link="#商標名称について">8. Trademarks and Trade Names</div><div class="search_word">8. trademarks and trade names zoom is a trademark or registered trademark of zoom video communications, inc. in the united states and other countries. microsoft teams is a trademark or registered trademark of microsoft corporation in the united states and other countries.</div><div class="display_word">8. Trademarks and Trade Names Zoom is a trademark or registered trademark of Zoom Video Communications, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Microsoft Teams is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#ストーム制御">Storm Control</div><div class="search_word">storm control</div><div class="display_word">Storm Control</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#機能概要">1. Function Overview</div><div class="search_word">1. function overview this product provides a storm control function as a countermeasure against l2 loops and dos attacks. broadcasts, multicasts, and unicast (dlf) frames that are addressed to an unknown host are monitored for each lan port, and frames that exceed a preset threshold value are discarded. this prevents such frames from taking up bandwidth on the lan port.</div><div class="display_word">1. Function Overview This product provides a storm control function as a countermeasure against L2 loops and DoS attacks. Broadcasts, multicasts, and unicast (dlf) frames that are addressed to an unknown host are monitored for each LAN port, and frames that exceed a preset threshold value are discarded. This prevents such frames from taking up bandwidth on the LAN port.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#用語の定義">2. Definition of Terms Used</div><div class="search_word">2. definition of terms used broadcast storm/multicast storm this means a situation where frames addressed for broadcast or multicast are continuously forwarded. in this situation, the switch floods all ports except for the reception port with the broadcast or multicast. when this is received by another switch, all ports except for the reception port are flooded in the same way. when this continues, it can lead to the following symptoms. bandwidth is taken up by the broadcast frames/multicast frames the switch’s cpu load increases, making normal operations difficult devices connected to the switch become unable to communicate unicast storm this means a situation where frames addressed to an unknown unicast destination (dlf: destination lookup failure) are continuously forwarded. when the mac address of the receiving device has not been registered in the arp table, all ports on the switch except for the reception port are flooded. this leads to the same symptoms occurring as with a broadcast storm or multicast storm.</div><div class="display_word">2. Definition of Terms Used Broadcast Storm/Multicast Storm This means a situation where frames addressed for broadcast or multicast are continuously forwarded. In this situation, the switch floods all ports except for the reception port with the broadcast or multicast. When this is received by another switch, all ports except for the reception port are flooded in the same way. When this continues, it can lead to the following symptoms. Bandwidth is taken up by the broadcast frames/multicast frames The switch’s CPU load increases, making normal operations difficult Devices connected to the switch become unable to communicate Unicast Storm This means a situation where frames addressed to an unknown unicast destination (dlf: Destination Lookup Failure) are continuously forwarded. When the MAC address of the receiving device has not been registered in the ARP table, all ports on the switch except for the reception port are flooded. This leads to the same symptoms occurring as with a broadcast storm or multicast storm.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#機能詳細">3. Function Details</div><div class="search_word">3. function details the operating specifications for storm control are shown below. the storm control function can be enabled for lan ports. the setting is disabled for all ports by default. storm control on this product can be specified as a tolerance percentage for the bandwidth of the lan ports that receive broadcast frames, multicast frames, and frames addressed to an unknown unicast destination. (control can be made in two decimal points. specifying 100% is the same as disabling the storm function.) the bandwidth tolerance is common for all frames, and the user can select the applicable frames. this setting is made using the storm-control command. when frames exceeding the permitted bandwidth are received, the excessive frames are discarded. use the show storm-control command to check the storm control information set for the lan port.</div><div class="display_word">3. Function Details The operating specifications for storm control are shown below. The storm control function can be enabled for LAN ports. The setting is disabled for all ports by default. Storm control on this product can be specified as a tolerance percentage for the bandwidth of the LAN ports that receive broadcast frames, multicast frames, and frames addressed to an unknown unicast destination. (Control can be made in two decimal points. Specifying 100% is the same as disabling the storm function.) The bandwidth tolerance is common for all frames, and the user can select the applicable frames. This setting is made using the storm-control command. When frames exceeding the permitted bandwidth are received, the excessive frames are discarded. Use the show storm-control command to check the storm control information set for the LAN port.</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#関連コマンド">4. Related Commands</div><div class="search_word">4. related commands related commands are indicated below. for command details, refer to the command reference. operations operating commands set storm control storm-control show storm control reception upper limit show storm-control</div><div class="display_word">4. Related Commands Related commands are indicated below. For command details, refer to the command reference. Operations Operating commands Set storm control storm-control Show storm control reception upper limit show storm-control</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#コマンド実行例">5. Examples of Command Execution</div><div class="search_word">5. examples of command execution in this example, the receivable l2 broadcast packets for lan port 1 are restricted to a port bandwidth of 30%. yamaha(config)#interface port1.1yamaha(config-if)#storm-control broadcast level 30 (1) yamaha(config-if)#endyamaha#yamaha#show storm-controlport        bcastlevel    mcastlevel    ucastlevelport1.1       30.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.2      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.3      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.4      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.5      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.6      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.7      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.8      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.9      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.10     100.00%       100.00%       100.00% 1 limit broadcast to 30% of bandwidth</div><div class="display_word">5. Examples of Command Execution In this example, the receivable L2 broadcast packets for LAN port 1 are restricted to a port bandwidth of 30%. Yamaha(config)#interface port1.1Yamaha(config-if)#storm-control broadcast level 30 (1) Yamaha(config-if)#endYamaha#Yamaha#show storm-controlPort        BcastLevel    McastLevel    UcastLevelport1.1       30.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.2      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.3      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.4      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.5      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.6      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.7      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.8      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.9      100.00%       100.00%       100.00%port1.10     100.00%       100.00%       100.00% 1 Limit broadcast to 30% of bandwidth</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#注意事項">6. Points of Caution</div><div class="search_word">6. points of caution none</div><div class="display_word">6. Points of Caution None</div></div><div id="traffic_traffic_storm"><div class="search_title" docfname="traffic_traffic_storm" doctitle="Storm" link="#関連文書">7. Related Documentation</div><div class="search_word">7. related documentation layer 2 function: proprietary loop detection</div><div class="display_word">7. Related Documentation Layer 2 Function: Proprietary Loop Detection</div></div>